First Steps in Latin - Forgotten Books

FIRST STEPS IN LATIN

C OMPLETE C OURSE IN LA TIN FOR

ONE YEA R,

BASED ON

MA TERIAL DRA WN FROM CZESAR’S COMMEN TARIES ,

WI TH EXERCISES F OR SI GHT—READIN G, AND A

COURSE OF ELEMEN TARYLA TIN READIN G.

R . F . EEIGHTON , PH .D .

AUTHOR or CRIT ICAL H I STORY OF C ICERO’S EP ISTULAE AD FAMILIARES , H I STORY

OF 3013, LATIN LESSONS , GREEK LESSON S , ETC .

BOSTON

PUBLISHED BY GINN 8: COMPANY.

18 8 6 .

iv PREFA CE.

or of etymology, but simply as urging that the time often given to

parsing and memoriz ing and repeating formulas , which my experi

ence has taught me help but little in the mastery of the language,

can be much more profitably employed in the oral work just men

tioned. The aim, of course, is to teach the pupil to read and write

Latin ; but.may not this be accomplished more expeditiously and

pleasantly by making the language alive,— by teaching pupils to

speak, write, and read Latin as they are taught to speak, write, and

read a modern language A German university student, if the

classics be his specialty, learns not only to read and write Latin ,

but even to speak it. If Latin is to maintain its present high

place in our courses of study, it must offer something better than

mere mental training or grammatical drill ; it must introduce the

student to the priceless treasures of art and literature which

the Romans gathered from the ancient world, and which, trans

fusing with their own genius, they transmitted to coming ages .

This work can be done in no way better than by teaching Latin

as a living language. Is it not time that some one of our colleges

or universities should offer opportunities for students to acquire

a speaking knowledge of the Latin language

For those who prefer the English method of pronunciation , a

few simple rules have been given . The so-called Roman method,

which is a very near approach to the ancient pronunciation ,is now

adopted by many of our leading colleges and high schools . Great

pains have been taken in these lessons to teach the euphonic

changes that occur in verbs in the formation of the perfect and

participial stems. A thorough knowledge of the phonetic value ofthe letters of the Roman alphabet will help the student through most

of these difficulties . This is quite aside from the question of pro

nunciation , which must, after all,be governed by the prevailing

usage . The quantity of syllables, except final syllables that are

short, and the final a of the first person present indicative of verbs,

has been carefully marked, in order to secure accuracy of pronun

ciation ; and, if a serious attempt is made to pronounce according

to the Roman method , the pupil’

s ear should be trained to it from

the start.

In enumerating the principal parts of verbs, I have ventured to

deviate so far from common usage as to substitute in place of the

so-called supine the neuter of the perfect particip le. The supine in

PREFA CE. V

-um, called by many grammarians one of the principal parts of the

verb, belongs, in fact, to only about 250Latin verbs ; then , again,

those verbs that are invariably intransitive have the perfect parti

ciple in the neuter gender only . This part, then, called in the

dictionaries the supine in-um, must, in most cases, be the neuter of

the perfect participle ; and I have ventured, i nthe enumeration of

the principal parts of the verb, to give it this name, and also to

substitute, as Vanicek and other grammarians have done, in place

of sup ine stem, themore correct term particip ial stem. The retention

of the neuter of the perfect participle, in enumerating the principal

parts of the verb, instead of the masculine, is of importance from

the fact just mentioned in regard to intransitive verbs, and also

because it can be made to conform easily to the present usage of

our dictionaries.

The words in the short vocabularies at the beginning of the

lessons, as well as the examples to illustrate the rules of syntax,

are mostly drawn from the first five chapters of Carsar’

s Gallic

War . These vocabularies should be thoroughly committed to

memory. The practice of selecting examples from authors of

different periods and modes of expression tends, as it seems to me,

rather to perplex young pupils than to give them definite ideas of

the structure and formation of a Latin sentence. No effort is

made in these vocabularies to teach the derivation ofwords ; but, in

the general vocabulary at the close of the book, the prefixes, stems,

and endings of the words have been carefully indicated. In the

chapter on the formation of words, attention is mainly confined to

the formation of those words that the pupil can easily under

stand, and that can be made of service to him while studying these

lessons.

Exercises for sight-reading have been introduced early in the

course. The lesson read at sight can be assigned as the regular

lesson of the next day, and made to serve as the basis for addi

tional drill in syntax and etymology. On the third day, the pupil

should be required to translate the same lesson , as a review exer

cise, into clear and accurate English , absolutely disregarding the

literal construction of the words and sentences. These exercises

will also afford ample means for practice in pronouncing Latin ,

which is best acquired in reading connected sentences, as is the

case in a modern language. But in order to read Latin easily and

vi PREF A CE.

well, the oral practice, which I have mentioned, will be found a

valuable and almost indispensable aid.

My aim has been to introduce the pupil, by the aid of easyexamples, to the correct use of words and to the chief principles of

syntax. When these examples have been studied, and the rules to

be derived from them are thoroughly understood, the exercises

that follow, both Latin and English, w ill be found sufficient to fix

these principles in the memory. It is important, in fact indispen

sable to thoroughness, for the pupil to keep up the work of com

position . If the exercises to be turned into Latin are too numerous,

then a part of them can be omitted until the review ; but some

writing in Latin should be done every day.

The book may seem to some teachers to be too large for begin

ners. But I have endeavored to keep in view the needs of young

pupils, and have thought it better to give too much explanation

rather than not enough. Then , again , the numerous examples ; the

explanatory notes ; the frequent illustration of Latin idioms byreference to English ; the manner in which the paradigms are dis

played ; and the adjustment of the type, by which the pupil can

learn not only the leading topics of the page, but also the relative

importance of the various rules, remarks, and observations, have

all necessarily added to the size of the book, but they will all, it

is hoped, be found helpful to the pupil.

My acknowledgments are due to several of our best teachers ,

who have generously aided me by their counsel in the plan and in

the numerous details of the book. The entire work, while going

through the press, has received, in addition , the valuable revision

and oversight of GEORGE \V. COLLORD , Professor of Latin in the

COLLEG IA TE AND POLYTEC IIN IC INST ITUTE, Brooklyn ; of CA BKIE

HA RR ISON ,sometime Professor of A ncient Languages in the

UN IVERSITY on THE SOUTH ,now one of the Principals of the

BROOKLYN LATIN SCHOOL, to whom I am especially indebted for

many valuable suggestions in the revision of the chapters on syntax ;

D . A . KENNEDY,DEA nnonN-MORGA N SC HOOL, Orange, N . J . ;

and of Miss C . T. DAVIS, Professor of Latin in the PA CKER

COLLEG IA TE INST ITUTE.

R . F . L.

BROOKLYN , N .Y. ,

September , 1885 .

CONTENTS .

LESSONS .

Review of English Grammar

Synopsis for Review

Origin of Latin Language .

I . A lphabet ; C lassification of Letters

II . Pronunciation ; Sy llabication Quantity ; A ccent

VII —VII I . Latin Verb and ConjugationFirst Conjugation

XI . Latin Nouns and Declension

XII . First Declension

XII I . Subject and Predicate ; Agreement ofVerbs and SubjectNominative

XIV. Subject and Object ; Direct ObjectXV.—XVII . Second Declension A ppositive and Genitive with Nouns ;

Dative with Transitive VerbsXVII I . Prepositions

A djectives ; First and Second Declension ; A greement of

A djectives 66-71

XXL-XXII . First Conjugation ; A ctiveVoice ; ImperativeMode ;

Questions ; Vocative 71-76

XXIII .—XXXI . Third Declension ; Rules of Position ; Rules of

Gender

XXXI . A blative of Cause, Manner, Means, and Instrument 97-99

XXXII . Subject and Copula ; Predicate Noun ; Predicate Adjective

XXXII I . Indicative of sum ; Predicate Genitive 102-104

XXXIV.-XXXV. Adjectives of the Third Declension 105-110

XXXVI .—XXXVIII . Comparison of Adjectives ; Ablative with Com

paratives Genitive and Dative with A djectives ;Irregular and Defective Comparison 110-118

XXXIX. Uses of A dverbs ; First Conjugation ; Voices ofVerbs . 119-122

XL. Formation, C lassification, and Comparison of A dverbs, 122-125

XLI . First Conjugation, continued 126-129

viii

LESSONS.

XLII .

CONTENTS.

Second Conjugation ; A blative of A gent

XLIII .-XLV. Second Conjugation, continued ; Stems

XLVI .

XLVI I .

Fourth Declension

Fifth Declension

XLVI II .-LI . Third Conjugation ; Laws of Euphony ; A blative of

LII .-LV.

LVI .

LVII .

LVIII .

LIX.

LXI .

LXII .

LXIII .

A ccompaniment ; Two A ccusatives

Fourth Conjugation ; Two A ccusatives of the Same

Person and Thing ; Subjective, Possessive, and Objective Genitive ; Dative with Intransitive Verbs ;A ccusative and A blative of Time .

Verbs in -io

Uses of the Dative : Dative of A dvantage and Bisad

vantage, Dative of Possessor, Dative of A pparent

A gent, Dative of Reference, and Dative of Purpose

or End

Prepositions ; Dative with Compounds

C lasses of ConjunctionsGenitives in -ius ; Imperative Mode, A ctive VoiceNumerals ; A ccusative of Time and Space ; A blative

of Difference 180-185

Imperative Passive of the Four Conjugations ; P laceWhere 186-189

C lassification of Sentences ; Analysis of Simple Sen

tenoes

LXIV.-LXIX. Pronouns : Personal, Reflexive, Possessive, Demon

LXX.

LXXI .

LXXII .

LXXIII .

LXXIV.

LXXV.

LXXVI .

strative ; Partitive Genitive ; Determinatives ; Rela

tives ; Agreement of Relatives,Interrogatives, and

Indefinites 192-209

Uses of the Ablative : A blative Proper ; Instrumental

Ablative ; Locative ; Separation , Cause, etc . Perfect

Participles denoting parentage, etc.

Reading Latin at Sight

Infinitive Mode ; Exercises for Sight-Reading

Infin itive and Subject-A ccusative ; Complementary Infinitive ; Exercises for Sight-Reading . 216-219

Participles ; Ablative A bsolute ; Exercises for Sight

Reading . 219-225

Gerund and Gerundive ; Exercises for Sight-Reading . . 225—230Inflection and Syntax of Supines ; Exercises for Sight

Reading 231-233

CONTENTS. ix

LESSON S . PAGES .

LXXVII . Locative Names of P laces ; Place from which ; Place

in which, etc. 234-239

LXXVI I I .—LXXXIII. Subjunctive Mode ; Subjunctive of sum ;

Dative of Possessor ; Subjunctive of imo 239-250

LXXXII . Subjunctive in Independent Sentences : Optative, Hortatory Deliberative, Potential, Concessive 248-250

LXXXIII .-LXXXIV. Deponent Verbs of First C onjugation ;

A blative with Deponents . 250-255

LXXXIV. Deponent Verbs of the Four Conjugations ; SemiDeponents .

LXXXV. Periphrastic Conjugations ; Dative of Agent

LXXXVI . Table of the Four C onjugationsLXXXVII . Genitive and Ablative of Quality ; Exercises for Sight

Reading 268-270

LXXXVIII .-XC III . I rregular Verbs : possum , prbsum ; v610 ,

11610 , mal o ; féro ; A blative of Specification ; A bla

tive of Difference ; eo ; éd o ; A blative and Genitive

of Price ; 6 0 270-285

XC II I . DefectiveVerbs ; Instrumental A blative ; A blative of

Measure ; A blative of Distance ; A blative of Ma

terial ; Opus and fi sus ; praed l tus ; A blative of

Manner ; A blative of A ccompaniment ; A blative of

Characteristic ; Tabular View of the Uses of the

Ablative

XC IV. ImpersonalVerbs ; Genitive with VerbsXCV. C lassification of Dependent C lauses ; Exercises for

Sight-Reading 296-299

XCVI . Tenses in Dependent C lauses, Primary and Secondary ;

Sequence in Consecutive C lauses (32 2 . Obs . ) after

Perfect Infinitive (350. 2 )XCVII . Subjunctive in Dependent C lauses

1. Final C lauses ; Object C lauses ; Verbs of H inder ingVerbs Of F ear ing, etc.

2 . Consecutive C lauses and their Uses ; Exception in the

Sequence of Tenses ( see32 2 .Obs . ) Relative C lauses

of Result . 309-314

3. Conditional Sentences and their C lassification ; Rulesfor Sequence of Tenses not A pplicable (319.

Uses of dum, mbao , and dummbd o in Condi tional

C lauses ; Disguised Conditions 314-320

X CONTENTS.

LESSONS PAGES .

Comparative C lauses with Indicative and Subjunctive, 320-321Concessive C lauses 321-323

Causal C lauses 323-325

Temporal C lauses : ContemporaneousA ction with dum,

dénec, quoad ; Subsequent A ction with antéquam

and priusquam ; Construction of cum : (1) cuminversum, (2 ) Iterative use of cum, (3) cum His

torical, (4) Causal and Concessive cum .

Substantive C lauses and their C lassification

Interrogative C lauses : Rhetorical Questions, Direct

Questions, Double Questions, Indirect Questions, De

pendent Double Questions, Questions and A nswers, 337—341XCVIII . Indirect Discourse ; Infinitive in Indirect Discourse ;

Tenses in Indirect Discourse ; Sequence of Tenses

after other Modes ; Sequence of Tenses after an

Infinitive or a Participle ; Reflexive Pronouns ; Pro

nouns in Indirect Discourse ; Conditional Sentences

in Indirect Discourse ; Interrogative Sentences in

Indirect Discourse ; Imperative Sentences in Indirect

Discourse 342-355

XC IX. Relative C lauses : Simple Relative C lauses ; Relative

C lauses introducing purpose, result, condition, cause,

concession ; Indefinite Relative ; Relative C lauses in

Indirect Discourse 355-358

Intermediate (or Parenthetic ) C lauses ; A ttfaction of

Partial Indirect Discourse

MISCELLANEOUS ExERcrss s 363—369SUMMARY OF RULES or SYNTAX 370—381FABLEs 382-383

LIFE or CESAR . 383-388

THE HELVETIAN WAR , FROM Woonronn’s EPITOME or CE SA R , 388—397

NOTES 398—418SKETCH OE CE SAR

’

S LIFE 402-406

419—431

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARYENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY

INTRODUCTION.

LESSON I .

PARTS OF SPEECH IN ENGLISH.

NOUNS. PRONOUNS.—ADJECT IVES.

OBSERVA TION . In the study of English grammar, one of the

first things the pupil has to do is to classify and name the variouswords that he meets in his exercises . He does this in the samemanner that one might pick out, sort, and group objects of anykind : viz ., by noting the points in which they resemble one an

other. For example, we may, from certain resemblances in formand structure, select all trees of a certain kind, and call themma les from other resemblances, we Should get another class,c ed oaks ; and still another class, called beeches . Then we maystudy each class, as the oak, and learn all that is perhaps necessaryto know of the numerous individuals that compose the class. In

the same manner, we may study and classif words . Noticing thevarious ways the different words are use in sentences, we sort

them out, or roup them, into eight classes, which are called PA RTSor SPEECH . hose words that name objects are called NOUNS, fromthe Latin word nomen

, which means a name. But we soon learnthat we cannot talk or say an hing about the noun w ithout usinganother kind of word, calle VERB , from the Latin v erbum , a

word. When a noun and a verb are combined so as to express a

thought, i.e. so as to make sense, then a sentence (Lat. s ententia)is formed ; as,

Trees grow. Boys run . Timefl ies .

PRONOUNS

Charles went to Rome with his mother , and he came back withouther . In this sentence we make use of three little words, calledPRONOUNS. They are his , he, and her . Without these words, weshould be compelled to repeat the nouns , and to say : Charles wentto Rome with Charles

’

s mother, and Charles came back without

5

1. A Noun is the name of anything, as, a person, place, or

thing ; as, boy, hou se, m an , tree, city .

2 . A Pronoun is a word used for a noun ; as,

Can you tell me who w rote the line 2

OBS. We have stated that the words of our language may bedivided into eight classes, or parts, of speech. When we examinethese parts of speech, we shall soon find it necessary to divide someof the classes into other classes. For example, the word city maymean any city, i .e. it is a name common to the whole class ; while

the word Boston is a p roper, or particular, name of an individual ofthis class. We may, therefore, subdivide nouns into common and

p rop er . If we notice the use of nouns further, we shall see thatthey undergo certain changes in form, meaning, and use ; for ex

ample, the tree grows, and the trees grow . Here we notice the wordtree changes its form by assuming 3 ; this change, or modification ,

in the form and meaning of the noun , tree, is called NUMBER . Theword tree, denoting one, is in the singular number ; and the word

trees, denotin more than one, is in the p lural number . Let us now

examine the ollowing word

1. The lion is strong. 5. We praise the author .

2 . The lioness is strong. 6 . I, the author, have written .

3. The author writes . 7 . A uthor , hear thou .

4. The author’s book is read. 8 . We call the author .

OBS In Ex.1the pupil w ill notice that the word lion denotes amale , In Ex. 2 this word has been changed, or modified

, in form,

and now denotes a female. This modification of the noun to

denote sea: is called GENDER . There are three genders,—masculine,femin ine, andThe changes that we have noted so far, affect the meaning of the

noun ; there are two other changes of nouns seen in Exs . 3- 8,

which affect the uses and relations of the words . In Ex . 3 theauthor is represented as doing an act, viz .

, writing; in Ex . 4, as

possessing a book ; and in Ex. 5, as receiving an action . These uses

of nouns are called CA SES. The use of the noun in Ex . 3, as sub

ject, is called the NOM IN A T IVF. C A SE ; its use in Ex . 4, to denote

possession, is called POSSESSIVE CA SE ; its use in Exs . 5 and 8 , as

object, is called OBJECTIVEC A SE'

. The possessive is the only case

of the noun that is indicated by a change in form .

In Exs. 6-8 the word author has three different uses. In Ex. 6

it denotes the speaker, in Ex. 7 the person spoken to, and in Exs .

5 and 8 the person spoken of: This change in the use of nouns is

called PERSON . There are three persons,—the fi rst p erson, as in

PARTS OF SPEECH . 8

Ex. 6 ; the second person , denoting the,one spoken to, as in Ex. 7 ;

and the third p erson, denoting the one spoken of, as in Ex. 8 .

MODIFICATION .

These changes in the form, meaning, and use of words, are called

MODIF I CA TIONS.

N oun s .

3. A Noun, or Substantive, is the name of anything, as, a per

son, place, or thing ; as, man , book , Boston .

1. A Proper Noun is the particular name of a person or

place ; as , Brooklyn , C icero .

2 . A Common Noun is a name common to all members ofa class of objects ; as , city, r iver .

OBs . There are two clas ses of common nouns, collective and

abstract, that it may be well for the pupil to note

1. A collective noun is the name of a multitude of objects takenas a whole ; as, army, crowd, mob, legion, j ury, multitude.

2 . An abstract noun is the name of a quality considered as taken

away, or abstracted, from the object to which it belongs ; as, beauty,virtue, p rudence, mildness.

4. Nouns aremodified to express Number, Gender, Person, and

Case.

NUMBER .

1. There are two Numbers : the singular , which denotes

one thing ; as , man , boy .

2 . The p lural, which denotes more than one ; as , men ,

boys .

GENDER .

3. There are three Genders : the masculine, which denotes

the male sex ; as , lion , man .

4. The feminine, which denotes the female sex

lioness , woman .

5 . The neuter , which denotes neither male nor female ; as ,

book.

PERSON .

6 . There are three Persons

(1) The first p erson , which denotes the one speaking ; as ,

We Americans hurrv too much.

4 INTRODUCTION .

( 2 ) The secondperson , which denotes the one spoken to ; as ,

John, bring me the book .

(3) The third person , which denotes the one spoken of ; as ,

The boy has gone to school .

CASE.

7 . Case is the modification of a noun or pronoun to Show

its relation to other words . There are four cases

(1) The Nominative, which usually denotes the subject.and answers the question who? or whuti’ ; as ,

John speaks .

( 2) The Possessive, which denotes possession , and an

swers the question whoset ; as ,

John’

s book. Boys’

slates.

(3) The Objective, which denotes the relation of the directobject, or of a preposition ; as ,

The man strikes the boy.

His wealth was gained by industry .

(4) The Independent, or Case Absolute, which denotes

that the noun or pronoun has no dependence on any other

word . Its most common uses are

a . A s the case of address ; as ,

The fault, dear Brutus, is not in our stars, but in

ourselves .

b. With a participle, forming a contracted clause ; as ,

The sun having risen, we departed on our journey ;i.e. when the sun had risen, etc.

o. By pleonasm, as when a noun introduces the subjectof a remark , and then is left independent of the rest of the

sentence ; as ,

The Pilgrim fathers, where are they

6 INTRODUCTION .

syllables ; as , beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful. (3)Irregularly ; as , good , better , best.

OBS. The adjectives a, an, and the are usually called A rticles.

EXERC ISES.

Mention the parts of speech and the cases of the nouns.

and pronouns in the following sentences z

1. Birds fly . 2 . The lion was caged . 3. The industrious

boy was praised . 4. These industrious boys are praised .

5 . The river flows rapidly . 6 . The boy’

s slate is on the

desk . 7 . The boys are in school . 8 . She plays very nicely .

9. He writes more rapidly than I do . 10. The gate of the

palace opens . 11. The house that you saw is sold . 12 . Tell

me what you did . 13. This is the man who called on you.

14. There is no terror , Cassius , in your threats . 15 . The

treaty being concluded , the council was dissolved .

NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.

Write a common noun . Write the plural of this noun. Write the

possessive singular and plural . Write the Singular of six nouns ; the

plural of the same. Make a rule for forming the plural of nouns .

Write the possessive case of each noun . Make a rule for forming the

possessive case. Write the possessive plural. Write a pronoun . Whatis a pronoun

? Show how pronouns are used. Write all the personal

pronouns . Write a noun and prefix an adjective ; compare this adjective . In how many ways may adjectives be compared ? What classof adjectives are usually compared by more and most

LESSON II .

PARTS OF SPEECH IN ENGLI SH.

vases AND THEIR MODIFICATIONS.

OBS . If we say the boy str ikes , the word strikes expresses the

act done by the boy,—or is, as it is called, aVERB . Some other

word, however, is necessary in order to complete the meaning ;adding the word book, we have the boy strikes the book, the book

being the object that receives the action, which passes over from

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

8 INTRODUCTION .

M od ifi ca tion s of Ver bs .

MODE.

OBS . 1. When I say' the man str ikes, I assert striking as a fact.

The man may strike ; in this sentence I do not assert the action as

a fact, but as possible. Again , if the man str ike, he will be sorry ;I now assert the action, not as an actual fact, but as a condition of

the man’

s being sorry . I can also say, man, strike ! but I do not

assert that the man does actually strike, but simply command him

to strike . The action expressed b the verb str ike has been asserted

in four different ways, or modes . he first is called the INDICA TIVEMODE ; the second, the POTENTI A L MODE the third, the SUB

JUNC TIVE MODE ; the fourth, the IMPERA TIVE MODE. There is

another form of the verb, which expresses action , but cannot assert

it of a subject ; as, he wishes to str ike. To str ike expresses the action

in a general way, w ithout confining or limiting it to a subject ; it is,therefore, called the INF IN ITIVEMODE, i .e . without limit, unlimited .

VOICE

OBS. 2 . The man struck the boy . In this sentence the verb struck

shows that the subject, man, is the actor ; if we change the sen

tence, still expressing the same idea, to the boy was struck by theman,then the verb, was struck, shows that the subject is no longer the

actor , but is acted u on , or receives the action . This change in

the form of the ver is called VOICE. The first form is called

A C TIVEVO ICE ; and the second, the PA SSIVEVOICE.

13. Verbs are modified to express voice , mode, tense,number , and person .

1. Voice is that modification of a transitive verb which

shows whether the subject acts or is acted upon . There are

two voices

a . The A ctive Voice , which shows that the subject doesthe action ; as ,

The man str ikes .

b. The Pass iveVoice, which shows that the subject sufiersthe action ; as ,

The man is struck.

2 . Mode (Lat. modus, manner ) denotes the manner

asserting the action or being . There are five modes

a . The Indicative , which asserts the action ( or being)a fact, or inquires after a fact ; as ,

He came. Did he come

PA RTS or SPEECH . 9

b. The Potential , which as serts power , possibility , or

necessity of the action or being ; as ,

He may come. He must come.

0. The Subjunctive, which asserts the action or being as a

more condition , supposition , uncertainty , or wish ; as ,

If you had come, this would not have happened .

OBS . The Subjunctive mode has but few forms now in common use, in which it differs from the forms of the Indicative and

Potential ; as,

If I were in your place . If he be loved. If he love.

d . The Imperative , which asserts the action or being as a

command or entreaty as ,

Come thou.

e. The Infinitive ( infinitivns, unlimited ) , which expresses

the action or being in a general way , without asserting it of

any person or thing ; as ,

He w ishes to go.

That is, it is unlimited (hence its name) as to number and per

son . The verb in the other modes is called fin ite, that is, limitedin number and person . He wishes to go. To go does duty here as

a verb, expressing action, and as a verbal noun, the object of wishes .

TENSE

OBS . In the sentences I strike, I struck, I shall strike, the mode,or manner , of asserting the action is the same, but the time is different . I str ike expresses the action as present ; I struck, as past ;and I shall strike, as future . The first form is called PRESENT

TIME, or PRESENT TENSE, as tense means time ; the second, the

PA ST TENSE ; the third, the FUTURE TENSE. There are also three

other forms of the verb, asserting the action as completed in the

present, the past, or the future : (1) I have struck ; ( 2) I had struck ;

(3) I shall have struck. The first, have struck, represents the action

as completed at the present time, and is called the PERFEC T TENSE,or the PRESENT PERFEC T ; the second, had struck, represents the

action as completed in past time, and is called the I’LUPERFEC T

TENSE, or PA ST PERFECT ; the third, shall have struck, represents

the action as to be completed before some other future action , and

is called the FUTURE PERFECT TENSE.

10 INTRODUCTION .

3. Tense expresses the time of the action or being ; the

time may bep resent, p ast, orfuture. There are s ix tenses

a . The Present expresses action or being as present ; as .

He runs .

b. The Imperfect expresses action or being as going on

in past time ; as ,He was running.

6 . The Future expresses action or being as yet to come as ,

He will run .

d . The Perfect expresses action or being as completed in

present time ; as ,He has run .

e. The Past Tense ( aorist, or historical perfect) expressesaction or being as ended in past time ; as ,

He ran .

f . The Pluperfect expresses action as ended before someother past action or being ; as ,

He had run .

g. The Future Perfect expresses action or being to be com

pleted before some other future action ; as ,

He shall have run .

PERSON .

If we change the subject in the first sentence to thou. or to he,we must then change the verb str ike to str ikest, or to str ikes . These

changes are made for the sake of agreement between the subjectand the verb,—the verb ending in

-est agrees w ith thou in the

second person , and the verb ending in-s agrees with he in the third

person . Both of these subjects are Singular number ; if the sub

ject is plural , the verb must be plural as, the men strike. Hence,verbs agree with their subjects in number and person .

4. Number and Person of a verb are those modificationswhich Show its agreement with the number and person of

the subject ; as ,The boy runs . The boys run .

PA RTS OF SPEECH . 11

PARTIC IPLES

OBS . In the sentence the sun ris ing causes the day, the wording, while not directly asserting the action of rising of the sun ,

still assumes such an action ; causes directly asserts the action .

We may also say, the r is ing sun causes the day , but here r is ing has

become an adjective, modifying sun . Hence, the participle may bedefined as that form of the verb which partakes of the nature of an

adj ective, and exp resses the action as assumed.

14. The Participle is a form of the verb that partakes of

the nature of the verb and adjective . There are three

participles

1. The Present, which represents the action or being as

going on at the time denoted by the verb ; as ,

The river,flowing from the mountains, waters the plain .

2 . The Past , which represents the action or being as com

pleted at the time denoted by the verb ; as ,

The soldier , covered w ith wounds, fell .

3. The Perfect, which represents the action or being as

completed previous to the time denoted by the verb ; as ,

Having climbed to the top of the hill, we saw the beautiful

landscape.

EXERC ISES.

Name the mode, tense, and voice, of each of the followingverbs

1. They sing. 13. They are chosen .

2 . They have sung. 14. They were ruled .

3. I do fight. 15 . He has been struck .

4. I have sung. 16 . We are blamed .

5 . They were calling. 17 . You were being praised.

6 . They w ill call. 18 . You w ill be blamed .

They had called . 19. The boy is called .

8 . They called . 20. The girl has been called .

9. They have called . 21. The king was wounded.

10. They are calling . 22 . They w ill be punished .

11. They had fought. 23. They had been pun ished .

12 . They will have fought. 24. He has been praised .

INTRODUCTION .


What is a verb ? Write a sentence containing a transitive verb.

How are verbs classified ? Mention the modifications of verbs. Write

a verb in the indicative mode. What is a participle Define the word.

How many modes are there? How many tenses ? Define tense.

LESSON III .

PARTS OF SPEECH IN ENGLISH.

ADVERBS. PREPOSIT IONS. CONJUNCT IONS. INTERJEC

T IONS.

A dver bS.

OBS. A noun and a verb are both necessary in order to form a

sentence. We have learned that modifying words are often added

to nouns to explain or to express the idea more clearly . Words are

often added to the verb for the same purpose. If we say, the boyreads, we express the fact in a general way ; but, if we wish to

speak Of the manner Of reading, then we say, the boy reach badly ,

adding the word badly ; if, of the time, we add the word now : the

boy reads now ; of the p lace, we add the word here : the boy read

here. We may join words to these modifiers, and say, the boy reads

very badly, that is, very modifies badly ; we may join a word to an

adjective, as, that book is very good. These words that we joinwith verbs, adj ectives , or adverbs, to modify their meaning, are called

A DVERBS (Lat. ad . to, and verbum , a word, or verb) .

15 . An Adverb is a word used to modify verbs, adjectives, oradverbs ; as, he speaks p la in ly ; i t is rem a rkably cold

wea ther ; he str ikes very hard .

COMPAR ISON .

1 A dverbs are compared in the same way as adjectives ; as ,

PA RTS OF SPEECH . 13

CLASSIFICATION OF ADVERBS.

2 . A dverbs may express time, p lace, manner , cause, or

degree.

a . A dverbs Of Time answer the question , when ? ; as , lately,

yesterday .

b. A dverbs ofPlace answer the question,where? as

,there,

here.

0. A dverbs Of Manner answer the question, in what way ? ;as , excellently , well.

d . A dverbs Of Cause answer the question, why? ; as , why.

e. A dverbs OfDegree answer the question , in what degree

as , too, very .

OBS. A dverbs modify verbs, as, the horse stands there ; but wema wish to express the idea With more distinctness than is pos

é

sib e even w ith the use of an adverb, as, the horse stands in h is s ta ll .

These words, in his stall, standing for the adverb there, are called a

phrase, and the word in, that shows the relation between stands

and stall, is called a PREPOSIT ION .

16 . A Preposifion (Lat. prac, before, and pono, p lace) showsthe relation between a noun or pronoun and some other word ; as,

he came to town ; to d ie f_

o_

r on e’

s coun try .

OBS. In the sentence John and James read, the two words, John

and James, are united by the word and . In the sentence a brave

and prudent man acts discretely ; here the two adjectives are con

nected by and. Again, in the sentence the man works in summerand in winter ; here the two phrases, in summer and in winter, areconnected by and. The earth is round, and no one doubts it, is com

d of two sentences, or clauses, connected by and. The words

that connect other words or sentences are called CONJUNC TIONS

(Lat . con. together, and jungo, j oin) .

17 . A Conjunction is a word used to connect words, phrases, or

Conjunctions area . CO-ordinate , when they connect words , phrases , 91

°

clauses Of the same rank ; as , and , but, or , nor .

14 INTRODUCTION .

b. Subordinate, when they connect C lauses of different

rank ; as , if, because, when .

I n terj ection s .

18 . An Interjection is a. word used to express sudden emotion or

feeling ; as, ala s ! 0h !

EXERC ISES.

Mention the parts of speech in the following sentences

1. ThlS book was given to me . 2 . These birds fly veryswiftly. 3. The Child likes to play . 4. The brave soldiers

fell in battle . 5 . We saw a beautiful landscape . 6 . The

gallant soldier fell, covered with wounds . 7 . I saw the sun

sinking behind the hills . 8 . The Delta Of the Mississippiwas once at St . Louis . 9. They made Victo ria queen .

10. A las ! how many changes have occurred . 11. Mary and

Eliz abeth lived and reigned in England . 12 . Give me the

book . 13. I f he give me the book , I Shall rejoice . 14. I f

I were in your place, I would go .


What is a preposition ? What is a phrase Write a sentence con

taining an adverb ; expand this into a phrase. Write two nouns con

nected by and by but. In the sentence,the earth is round

,and no one

doubts it, and is a co-ordinate conjunction ; but in the sentence, the

sea,when it had spent its fury, became calm

, w hen is a subordinate

conjunction.

LESSON IV.

FORMS OF THE ENGLISH VERB.

19. The conjugation Of the English verb in Latin form,

t.e. the names Of the tenses are those used in conjugating a

Latin verb, is as follows

THE SENTENCE. 17

PLUPERFECT TENSE.

Sing. 1. I had been loved.

2 . Thou hadst been loved .

3. He, she, or it has been

loved .

P lur . 1. We had been loved.

2 . Ye or you had been

3. They had been loved.

PRESENT TENSE.

2 . Be (you or thou) loved. 2 . Be (ye or you) loved.

I nfi n itive III od e .

P a r ticip les .

PRESENT, Being loved . PA ST, Been loved .

PA ST PERFECT, Having been loved.

1. Conjugation is the regular arrangement Of all the forms

of a verb .

NOTE . Conjugate in the same manner the verbs hear, teach, rule,choose, run, see.

LESSON V.

THE SENTENCE.

20. A Sentence is the expression of a thought in words ; as,

iron m elts .

21. Every sentence has two parts

1. The Subject,1or that about which something is said ; as ,

Birds fly.

FUTURE PERFEC T TENSE.

Sing . 1. I shall have been loved .

2 . Thouw ilthavebeen loved .

3. He, she, or it will have

been loved.

P lur . 1. Weshall havebeen loved .

2 . Ye or youwill have been

loved.

3. Theyw ill havebeen loved .

18 INTRODUCTION .

2 . The Predicate, or that which is said about the subjectThe leaves tremble.

Sub jec t .

3. The Subject is always a noun , or some word used as a

noun . The subject is sometimes modified by a word , or

group Of words , and the combination is then called the

modified , or logical subj ect ; as ,

The cold w ind blows .

4. The Predicate is always a verb, or contains a verb.

The predicate may be modified by other words , and the com

bination is then called the modified , or logical p redicate ; as ,

The leaves fall quietly.

5 . The verb may be intransitive, and then the subjectand verb make complete sense , and the predicate contains

nothing but the verb ; as ,

Timefl ies .

6 . The verb may be transitive , and then an Object is

required to complete the sentence , and the verb and Objecttogether make up the predicate as ,

The man str ikes the table.

7 . The verb may be cop ulative,2and then a comp lement is

required to complete the sentence . The verb and comple

ment together make up the predicate ; as ,

The man is old.

8 . The analysis Of a sentence is the separation Of it into

its parts .

EXA MP LE . Time flies .

OBS . This is a sentence, because it expresses a thought . Timeis the subject, because it is that about which something is said ;

fl ies is the predicate, because it says something of the subject.

THE SENTENCE. 19

The following method Of analysis will be found useful for you n

pupils . The subject is marked S. ; the predicate is marks

(1) v .I ., i.e.Verb Intransitive ; ( 2) v .T . and O ., i.e. Verb Transitiveand Object ; (3) v .C . and C .

,i.e. Verb Copulative and Comple

ment

EXERC ISES.

A nalyz e the following sentences

1. The enemy crossed the river . 2 . Columbus discovered

America. 3. The flowers bloom . 4. The flowers are beauti

ful . 5 . Gold is yellow . 6 . A Shepherd watches sheep.

7 . Study pays . 8 . The boy learns his lesson . 9. The sun

Shines bright. 10. The lady is tall. 11. Ripe fruit is

healthful .

NOTES AND QUEST IONS.

1. The subject of a sentence may be found by asking who ? or what?

with the verb as, birds fly. Who or what fiy? A NS. birds . The

predicate may be found by asking what ? about the subject ; as , birdsfly. What about birds ? A NS. Theyfly, fly is the predicate.

2 . Copulative means the same as C opula, a link, coupler . It joins , orlinks, the subject with the complement ; as, snow is white,—snow is the

subject, is is the copula, and white the complement. There are several

o ther copulative verbs besides to be ; as, become, seem

,appear . The

adjective standing in the predicate is called the predicate adj ective, andthe noun is called the predicate noun.

Define simple sentence. Of what is a sentence composed? Define

subject. What must the subject be What is meant by copula

C lassify verbs according to their meaning . Define Object. What is atransitive verb ?

The N oun

Verb

A d jective

A dverb

INTRODUCTION .

SYNOPSIS FOR REVIEW.

C lasses

Mod2.fications

C lasses

Al odiflcations

fUses

C lasses

Modifications

bi odification

C lasses .

Modifications

C lasses

SubjectObject.

Complement.

Principal Word in a Phrase.

Common .

Proper .

N umber Singular ; Plural .

Gender : Masculine ; FeIn . ; Neuter .

P erson : First ; Second ; Third .

Case Nominative ; Possessive ;Objective.

Same as those of Nouns.

Personal .

Relative.

Interrogative .

Adjective .

Same as those of Nouns .

Predicate.

Form Regular ; Irregular .

ilI eaning Transitive ; Intransitive .

Voice A ctive ; Passive.

llI ode Indicative (Potential) ; Subjunctive ; Infinitive.

Tense Present ; Imperfect ; Future ;Perfect ; A orist ; Pluper

fect ; Future Perfect.

P erson : Fir st ; Second ; Third .

N umber Singular ; Plural .

Modifier ; Complement .

Positive Degree.

C omparison Comparative Degree.

Superlative Degree .

Time ; Place ; Manner ; Degree ; Cause.

Positive Degree.

Comparative Degree.

LSuperlative Degree.

Co ordinate .

Subordinate.

SIMPLE SENTENCE.

Declarative.

Interrogative .

Imperative.

Exclamatory.

M eaning

LATIN LANGUAGE .

Or ig in of La tin .—The Latin language was spoken at

Rome and in the adjo ining district, the plain Of Latium, from

which latte r it derives its name. It is closely related to the

tongues spoken by the Samnites , Sabincs . and other kindred

races , to which the general name Of Sabellian has been

given . These Sabellian tribes , on first entering I taly , settled

along the mountain ridges , from which they descended to the

plains like streams that flood and fertiliz e the valleys . The

Latins , who settled near the Tiber , belonged to the Oldest

Of these success ive migrations ; then came the Sabines , the

A equians , Hernicans , and Volscians , who at first pressed

hard on the Latins , and hemmed them into the narrow plain

between the Tiber and the A lhan hills , but in course Of time

coalesced with them and formed one nation .

H ow R ela ted . The Latin , as well as the Greek , San

skrit , Teutonic , Celtic , and Z end , are all Sister languages ,

and together help to form the IndO-European family . The

original language from which these sprang was spoken bythe progenitors Of all these peoples , who once lived together

somewhere in Central A s ia , and by successive migrations

peopled India and Europe, whence the name Indo-European .

The name A ryan ( pronounced dr-yan ) is Often applied to

this parent language , and to the groups that have descended

from it.

Wher e Sp ok en .—The conquests Of the Romans caused

the Latin language to spread , not onlv over Italy and Sicily ,

but over the greater part of France and Spain .

F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .

C LASSIFICAT ION OF LETTERS.

‘

1. Vow els .

7 . Vowels are produced when the vocal organs are Open ,

SO as to allow an uninterrupted flow of vocal sound ; when

the vocal sound is interrupted , consonants are produced , but

no Sharp line separates the least Open vowels from the mostOpen consonants .

8 . The vowels may be divided according to their qualityinto

1. Open .

2 . M edial

3. C lose

9. The Open vowel is pronounced like a in father , themouth being fully open . Starting with this sound , and by

gradually contracting the vocal organs , the medial vowels , theclose vowels , and the more Open consonants ( like i or j y ,v w ) are produced ; and at last the closure Of the vocal

organs becomes complete when the mutes are uttered .

10. e is a medial vowel between open a and close i ; o

is medial between Open a and close u ; y occurs in Greek

words only .

OBSERVA TION 1. The vowel i and the consonant i (Often writtenwere not disting uished in form by the Romans . But i, com

Ined w ith a vowel in the same syllable, was a consonant, and was

sounded like y ; as, majo r (may or ) . It is now usually written j .

OBS. 2 . The vowel u and the consonant u v, are Often inter

changed ; as : mbn-ui , I have admonished ; ama-v i , I have loved ;the ending

-ui in mOnui becomes -vi in amav i.

II . C on son an ts .

11. Consonants are divided , according to the organs

speech by which they are chiefly uttered , into

Lab ials ( or lip-letters) p , b , m, f, v .

2 . Dentals ( or teeth-letters) t, d , n , s .

3. Linguals ( or tongue-letters ) r , l .

4. P alatals ( or palate-letters) i , or i y .

5. Gutturals (or throat-letters) C k q, 3, n , h .

PRONUNC IATION . 27

NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS.

1. The pupil should om it the study of the classification of the

letters for the present ; the explanation will be found convenient for

reference, and when the verb is taken up the attention of the pupil

will be called to this subject as explaining most of the vowel and

consonant changes.

2 . The distinction between a surd and a sonant is the same as tha t

between p and b as heard in pad and bad .

3. Before a guttural, as in ink.

4. See p. 183. 5. 102 . 3. c.

Write the alphabet. How many letters has the Latin alphabet?

How many vowels are there ? Write the long vowels . Write the

diphthongs. What diphthongs are seldom used ?

LESSON II.

PRONUNCIATION.

22 . The pronunciation Of Latin is different in different

countries . In the United States general usage favors one

Of two ways , which may be called the Roman ( or Phonetic)and the English . Whatever method of pronunciation maybe adopted , the pupil should be made thoroughly familiar

w ith the leading features Of the Roman method , which is a

near approximation to the ancient pronunciation .

ROMAN METHOD.

23. By the Roman method every letter has always the

same sound . Each simple vowel is either long or Short ; a

short vowel has the same sound as the corresponding longvowel, but occupies Only half as much time in utterance .

I . Soun d s of the Vow els .

a as in ah , like a in father . a as in ah , like a in id ea.

6 as in p rey . 6 as in met .

I as in machine . I as in s it .

6 as in ho ly . 6 as in obey .

11as oo in moon . if as in full .

y has a sound between that Of i and u , like the French 11,

or German ii .

28 F IRST STEP S I N LA TIN .

I I . Soun d s of th e D ip h th on gs .1

as like ay (yes) , or ai in ai s le . eu like aw in few .

oe like oi in co in . ai like ei in eigh t.

an like ow in how . ui like w e in w e .

III . Soun d s of the C on son an ts .

c is always hard, like 0 in come .

g is always hard, like g in gun .

j is like y in y et .

8 is always sharp, like a in s ea.

t is always like t in time .

It is like w in w e.

qu is like qu in quart .

24. The double consonants are : a; cs (ks) , z dz The

letters not mentioned have the same sound as in English .

EXERC ISES.

Pronounce the following words

1. a'-la,

2wing ; rid-pa, turnip ; fé

'-mes , hunger ; ré'-mex ,

rower a-rel-na, sand fré’-na, bridle. 2 . ta-bel’-la, tablet ;

i-ter , j ourney ; mi-ni'ster , servant ; dO

'-lOr , pa‘

in hfI '-me-riis ,

shoulder ; a'-n I

'

I-liis , finger r ing sua'-dé O, I advise.

3. prae-Si'-di-iim, guard ; nau

'-ta, sailor ; pod-nay p un ish

ment sae'-pé, often . 4. lae-ti’-t

‘

i-a‘

, j oy pré'-t

‘

i-f’

im, pr ice ;

pé-ti-en

'-ti-a, patience coe'-lfim , heaven Cid-put , head

6 '-ci’

1-lfis , eye I; jfi’-dex, j udge ; vir

'-gO , maid ; ma

"-chi-na,

machine pul'-chér , beautiful.

N O TES A ND QUEST I ONS.

1. Diphthongs occupy twice as much time in utterance as the Short

vowels .

2 . The words will be accented and syllabicated until the subjects ofaccentuation and sy llabication have been explained.

ch has the sound of k .

th is like th in th in .

ph is like f.

be and b i: are like ps , p t .

gu and an , when making a

syllablewith the follow ing

vowel, like gw , sw .

SYLLA BICA TION . 29

How is Latin generally pronounced in this country How is long a

pronounced? Why is a knowledge of the Roman method important

?

When does n have the sound Of ng? What consonants have the same

sound as in English? A re any letters s ilent

LESSON I l l .

SYLLABI CATION.

25. A Latin word is divided into as many syllables

as it has vowels or diphthongs .

OBS. The English words mile, accurate, separate, abate, would,as Latin words, he syllabicated as follows : mI-le, ao-cu-r tV-te ,se-pa

-ra'-te, a-ba

’-te.

26 . A Single consonant between two vowels is joined

to the second vowel .

EXAM PLES .

I . fti’-b er. artisan . 3. ré-gi

’-na, queen .

2 . lau’—d o , I p raise. 4. (16 '

-mI-nus , lord.

27 . When the consonant is doubled, the first belongs

to the first syllable, and the second to the second

syllable .

EXAMPLES.

I . ah'-nus , year . 3. pen

'-na , feather .

2 . b el'-lum , war . 4. mit ’-to , I send .

28 . Two or more consonants not doubled between two

vowels belong to the follow ing vowel, but I, m, n , r , in

connection w ith another consonant, are joined to the

preceding vowel .

EXAMP LES.

1. lI’-brI, books . 5. am '-b o , both.

2 . fau'-s tus , lucky. 6 . lin ’-

gua . tongue .

3. fra’-trés , brothers . 7 . an

’-g

'

ui s , snake.

4. hb'i pés , guest. 8 . ma’-gnus , great.

30 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .

29. The parts Of compounds are treated as separate

w ords .

EXA MP LES.

1. ab’-est ( ab , away, e s t, he is) , he is away.

2 . in-u’-ti-li s ( in , not, uti lis , useful) , useless .

3. ob-‘

i'-t e ( Ob and ire) , to go .

30. The last syllable Of a word is called the ultimate,

or ultima ; the next to the last, the p enultimate, or

penult ; and the one before the penult, the antep enul

timate, or antepenult .

ExA M P LES.

l . an-ten’-na, sail-yard . 4. ln-fa

'-mi-a, infamy .

9. fé-ne

’e tr i , window. 5 . m id-15, app les .

3. im-pé

-d i-men fita, baggage. 6 . dI-s cl’-pfi

-lfi s , p up il.

OBS. In the foregoing words point out the ultimate, the p enult,and the antepenult.

EXERCISES.

Syllabicate and pronounce the following words

1. scri'ba , clerk ; in'siila , island ; Sal , salt; ra

'na, frog ;

ara'tra, p lough . 2 . ma'

ppit, napkin disci’

piilfis , scholar ;

ar'ma, arms ; al

'téra, another ; pes , foot ; habe

'na , thong ;

bel'lum , war ; Sani

'tas , health ; pa

'riés , a. wall dO

'lOr , p ain ;

miigi'ster , master . 3. vul

’nI

'

IS , wound ; consuetfi'db, custom ;

sua'vis , sweet ; hae

'dfis , kid ; pre'tium , p r ice ; cica

'trix , scar ;

laeti'tiii , j oy ; re

'

gnfim,

l kingdom pl’

i'er , boy in

’

I'ria, ia

j ury ; d‘

i ’xit,2 he said ; ma

'

gnus , great ; a'mnis ,

3river ; ad

'eO,‘

I go to ; l'

i’ttera, letter .

NOTES A ND QUESTION S.

The combination ya can begin a syllable .

x is treated in syllabication as a single consonant.

The combination ma can begin a sy llable .

Compounded of ad ,to

,and 96 ,

I go.NB

C/O

N

I

34 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .


1. The accent, as affected by an enclitic, will be explained later .

2 . Notice that the penult is short.

What is accent ? Write a word with the accent on the penult. How

do you accent Latin words of two sy llables? Of three syllables

? Is

the last syllable of a Latin word ever accented ? Does the quantity of

the syllable or of the vowel determine the place of accent ( A ns . The

quantity of the syllable ; the vowel may be short, but the syllable long.)When can a short penult take the accent ?

LESSON VI .

THE ENGLISH METHOD.

39. For those who prefer to retain the English pronuncia

tion , the following rules are given . The pupil should notice

that the long or Short vowel-Sounds indicated in these rules

are wholly independent of the real quantity Of the vowel .

1. In monosyllables the vowel has

a . The long sound, if it ends the syllable ; as, 81, me , ape .

b. The short sound, if followed by a consonant ; as, 5b , cum ,

hbc , h i s . Exce t pos t , monosyllables in es, and ( in plural cases)as, where it has t e long sound ; as, rés , h6 8 . be.

2 . A n accented penult has

a. The long vowel-sound before a single consonant ( or a muteth 1or r ) , or before a vowel or diphthong ; as, pa

'ter , lib-er-a

’lis ,

dé’us , sa’cra , pa

'tris .

b. The short vowel-sound before two consonants ( except a mutefollowed by l or r) or x ; as, reg

’num, rex

’l .

3. A n accented antepeuult has

a. The long vowel-sound before a vowel ; as, E’adem, h i

’

e-m is .

fii’e-rat .

b. The short vowel-sound before a consonant ; as, in’su-la,

i-tin’e-ris .

EXCEPTIONS. ( a) it before a single consonant (or a mute withl or r ) has the long sound : jfi

'v e-n is , lfl

’ri-dus , pu

’tri-dus ; but

before bl the Short sound, as in res -pub’li-ca.


It is ver common, in English pronunciation , to slur or suppress

the more iflicult consonant-sounds, particularly in such cases as

on, gn, ps, p t, tm, or as, at the beginning of a. word, as in C nidus ,

gnotus , ps eudOpteris , Tmolus , xy lon . But in an accurate

pronunciation of these as Latin or Greek words, the full consonant

sound will be retained.

Finally, there can be no correct rule to authorize the Sli shod

and slovenly habit of enunciation which is frequently allowe Tocultivate a clear and vigorous utterance of unfamiliar words is one Of

the incidental benefits of careful instruction in a foreign tongue.

LESSON VII .

LATIN VERBS.

40. Verbs in Latin , as in English , assert action , being, or

state of being.

41. Verbs are also class ified . according to their meaning,into

1. Transitive verbs, which require an object ; as ,He beats the slave.

2 . Intransitive verbs, which do not require an Object ; as,The man runs .

42 . Verbs have also voice, mode, tense, number , and person .

43. Verbs have two voices

1. The active voice, which Shows that the subject does the action ;The father loves his son .

2 . The passive voice, which Shows that the subject sufiers the

t'

ac Ion as ,The son is loved by his father.

44. There are four modes : the indicative, subj unctive,imperative, and infinitive. The indicative, imperative , andinfinitive have, in general the same use in Latin as in English . The use of the subjunctive can be learned best in

connection with the syntax Of the verb.

LATIN VERBS. 37

45 . Verbs have six tenses ‘: three for incomplete action

and three for completed action .

1. Ten ses for I ncomp lete A ction .

1. PRESENT I write, I am wr iting.

2 . IMPERFEC T I was writing, I wrote.

3. FUTURE I shall write, I will wr ite.

11. Tenses for C omp leted A ction .

1. PERFEC T I have wr itten, I wrote.

2 . PLUPERFECT I had tv’

f'itten .

3. FUTURE PERFECT I shall have written .

OBS . The indicative mood has all six tenses ; the subj unctive hasthe present, im ierfect, perfect, and mluperfect ; the im rative has

the present andfuture only ; and re infinitive has $23present,perfect, future, and future perfect.

46 . Tenses are also distinguished as ,

1. P r incip a l , or P r imary Ten ses .

l . PRESENT I write .

2 . PERFECT DEP IN ITE I have wr itten .

3. FUTURE I shall write.

l l . H is tor ica l , or Seconda ry Ten ses .

l . IMPERFECT I was writing.

2 . AORIST, or HISTORICA L PERFECT I wrote .

3. PLUPERFECT I had written.

47 . The present, future , pluperfect, and future perfect"

tenses have, in general , the same use in Latin as in English .

48 . The imperfect tense expresses an action as going on

in past time , i .e. a continued , repeated , or customary pastaction ; as ,

I was writing. I used to wr ite.

49. The perfect tense has two uses , distinguished as

(per

feet definite and aorist, or historical perfect, correspon ingto the perfectand past tenses in English ; as ,

I have written ( definite) .

I wrote (aorist, or historical perfect) .

38 F I RST STEPS IN LA TIN .

50. Verbs , like nouns , have two numbers , Singular and

plural ; and three p ersons , first, second , and third .

51. The voice , mode, tense , number , and person of a

Latin verb is indicated by the endings ; as ,

amat, he loves . amabat. he was loving.

52. The various verbal forms that have voice , mood , tense ,number , and person , make up thefin ite

3verb . Besides these,

there are three other forms derived from verbs , and partakingof their signification . These are

1. The p articiple, which gives the meaning of the verb in theform of an adjective. A Latin verb has four participles : two in

the active, the present and the future ; and two in the passive, the

perfect and the gerundive ; as,

A ctive .

im i n s , loving.

imatfi rus , about to love.

P a ss ive .

amatus , loved .

iman dus , deserving to be loved .

2 . The gerund, which gives the meaning o f the verb in the form

of a verbal noun of the second declension . I t corresponds to the

English verbal noun in -ing as,

5mandI, of loving.

3. The sup ine, which gives the meaning of the verb in the form

of a verbal noun of the fourth declension . It has two forms, onein -um, the other in -u ; as,

imi tam , to love . imatfi , to be loved.

53. The principal parts of a verb are , the p resent indica

tive, the p resent infin itive, the perfect indicative, and the p er

feet particip le. These are called the p r incipal parts , because

all the other parts of the verb are formed from them.

OBS . The supine in-um, called by man grammarians one of

the pr incipal parts of the verb, belongs , in act, to only about two

hundred Latin verbs ; then , again , those verbs that are invariablyintransitive have the perfect participle in the neuter gender only .

This part, then, called in the dictionaries the supine in-um, must,


OBS. The pupil will notice that the infinitive in Latin is formednot as in English, by placing the preposition to before the simpleform of the verb, but b adding

-re. Each of these verbs has, also ,a characteristic vowel efore the infinitive ending, which inis a , in mOneo is -e in régo is -é

’

and in audio is -i

55 . A ccordingly, Latin verbs are divided into four

classes, called Conj ugations, distinguished from one an

other by the characteristic vowel before the ending-re

of the present infinitive active, as follow s

1. The vowel before -re is called the stem-characteri stic ;thus , the stem of verbs of the first conjugation ends in a,

the second in e, the third in e, the fourth in i .

2 . Besides the present stem, there is Often a Simpler form

that forms the bas is of the entire conjugation , called the

verb-stem . In the first, second , and fourth conjugationsthe verb-stem is generally the same as the present stem ; in

the third conjugation reg is the verb-stem, and régé the

present stem ; as ,

C o n j . I . C on j . I I . C on j . I I I . C onj . IV.

mené rég mi nn

mbne-re, reg-ere, to rule.

to advise . minn-ére, to lessen .

3. The verb-stems of the first, second , and fourth conju

gations end in the vowels a, e, i ; the verb-stem of the third

conjugation ends in a consonant or in u ; hence the distinc

tion of vowel and consonant conjugations .

F IRST CONJUGA TION . 41

Tell to which conjugation each of the following verbs

belongs :

PRESENT IND ICATtvE. INFIN ITWE.

1. laud o , I p raise1 laudAre , to praise.

2 . déleo , I destroy ; 6 616119, to destroy.

3. tego , I cover ; tégere, to cover .

4. mfinio , I fortify ; infinit e, tofortify.

5 . aud io , I hear audi t s . to hear .

6 . habeo , I have ; habare. to have.

7 . haurio , I drain ; haurlre, to drain .

8 . niiméro , I count ; nfimérar e. to count.

9. ffigio , I fl ee ffigtre, toflee.

10. on e , I wonder ; sn ar e , to wander.

11. mbveo , I move ; mbvére, tomove.

NOTES A ND QUESTIONS

1. Notice that the pronoun I is supplied in translating.

How many conjugations are there ? How is each distinguished ?

What is meant by the conjugation of a verb ? How does the Latin

verb express tense?person number ?

LESSON IX.

FIRST CONJUGATION.

PRESENT INDICAT IVE ACTIVE.

56 . A ll verbs whose characteristic vowel before the

ending-re in the Present Infinitive is -d belong to the

first conjugation .

P r esen t Ten se.

57 . The Present Tense is formed by adding personal

Endings\ to the Present Stem.

1

F IRST CONJUGA TION . 43


1. The endings were originally personal pronouns : laudas means

not love,but thou Iovest. The pronoun, when used as the subject of the

verb,need not

,therefore, be expressed. Note, fur ther , that the endings

show the number and person of the subject, but not the gender.

OBS. This is true, in general, only when the verb is of the fi rst or

second person . With the third person , a definite subject should be ex

pressed, unless implied in what precedes or follows.

2 . Note that the Present Indicative present stem personal end

ings, and that m o imo ; also, that it has lost the m (which

appears in sum, inquam ) . The 0 stands for m and the preceding

vowel ; as , Ema ima-o-m.

3. Read, I pra ise, etc .

4. The stem is lauda, and by adding the personal ending we get

lauda-O,which is contracted into laudo.

5. Remember that the present tense in English has three forms

1. laudo , I praise, I am praising, I do praise.

2 . laud i s , thou pra isest, thou art praising, thou dost praise.

3. laudi t, he praises, he is praising, he does pr

6 . Observe that no separate Latin word is required for the pronouns

I, thou, he, we, they, etc . thus , pfign imua, we fight, contains the pro

noun we, and is a complete sentence in one word,i.e. contains a subject

and predicate as,

pugna-mus

fight-we

pt'

igna signifying fight, is the stem, and m us , signifying we, the

personal ending.

How is the first conjugation distinguished ? What is meant by thecharacteristic vowel ? How is the stem found ? What are the personalendings What do these endings Show ? Does the present tense denote

completed or incomplete action A NS . The present stem,and the tenses

formed from it, present, imperfect, and future,—denote incompleteaction .


LESSON X .

FIRST CONJUGATION (con tinued ) .

Imp erfect an d F utur e Ten ses .

58 . The Imperfect and Future Tenses are formed,

like the Present, by adding the endings to the Present

StemPA R TI A L P A R A D IGM .

1. A nalysis of the Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative A ctive

1. Present ind. Pres. stem Personal endings .

2 . Imperf. ind . Pres. stem Tense-sign-ba Personal endings .

3. Future ind . Pres . stem Tense-sign-bi Personal endings .

FI RST CONJUGATION . 45

OBS. The future, like the present, has lost the m in the first

person singular : imabo amabom as the present amo amom

( of. sum) .

VOCA BULARY.

PRESENT. PRESENT Su n.

1. rOgo. ask.

2 . plough.

3. para.p repare.

4. narro. narrate.

EXERC ISES.

A nalyz e ; translate into English

rOgat . 6 . pfign l bl tfs .

7. dbnablmus .

rOgl bts .‘ 8 . parabtt.

portabant .2 9. arabunt .

laudab lmus . 10. vbcabts .

NOTES AND QUESTIONS.

1. In translating the second person singular, as well as the second

person plural, you is commonly used ; as , Emu , you love, and m ans.

you love but ima is used of one person, and amas of more

than one.

2 . Observe that, in the conjugation of the imperfect and future, the

stem and personal endings are the same as in the present ; that between

these there is a tense-sign,-ba in the imperfect and -b1 in the future.

The elements of the verb then, in the imperfect and future tenses, are

l et. The Stem ; 2d. The Tense-sign ; 3d . The Personal Endings ; as ,

lauda-ba-mus

pra ising-were-we

lauda being the stem ; -ba were, the tense-sign ; and omus , we, the

personal ending.

What is tense ? How many divisions of time ? What is mode ?

How many modes ? How is the present tense formed ? How the future ?

Write the inflection in the imperfect ; in the future.


LESSON XI .

LATIN NOUNS.

INFLECTION.

59. The meaning of Latin nouns is altered by In

flection ; that is, by changing the form of the word,

generally the endings, to denote some modification of

its meaning, or to Show its relation to other words.

The Inflection of nouns, of pronouns, and of adjectives,is called Declension . The Inflection of verbs is called

Conj ugation .

Stem an d Sum .

60. The body of the word , to which the suffix is attached ,is called the stem ; as ,

mili tia : milit is the stem, and -is the termination .

-When the stem ends in a vowel and the suffix begins w ith

a vowel, contraction takes place, and the final vowel of the

stem sometimes disappears ; as ,

mensae : the stem is mensaa, and the suffix -i-s, which unite

to form mensas , the 3being dropped .

1. Each case-form, therefore , contains two distinct parts

the stem, which gives the general mean ing of the word ; and

the case-suffix, which Shows the relation of that meaning to

some other word ; as , in

mili tia, of a soldier the general idea, soldier, is expressed bythe stem mul t the relation of; by the suffix -is .

OBS. It may be found convenient to divide inflected words notonly into stem and termination , but into base and termination, thebase 1being the part of the word that remains unchanged by inflection ; as, s ervus ( which stands for s erv o s ) , a slave, gen . sex

-vi , of

a slave. s ervO is the stem,-'

I'

is the termination , or case-suffix ;the O is dropped before i to form s erv i , of a slave ; but s erv to

which the case-endings are added, remains unchanged by inflection ,

and may be called the base.

48 FIRST STEPS I N LA TIN .

1. The Nominative, the case of the subject of the sentence .

It answers the question who? or what? ; as ,

The boy reads . Who reads ? The boy.

Th e fi re burns . What burns ? Thefire.

Boy andfire are , therefore, in the nominative case.

2 . The Genitive, usually translated into English by the

possessive case. or by the prepos ition of . It answers the

question whose of whom i of what as ,

The man's coat. Whose coat? The man

’

s.

The heat of the fire. Of what‘t Of thefire.

Man’

s and of thefire are genitives .

3. The Dative , usually translated by the prepositions to

or for . It answers the question to or for whom or what? ; as ,

The teacher gives a book to the boy . TO whom ? To

the boy.

To the boy is , therefore, in the dative.

4. The A ccusative, the object of a transitive verb, and of

many Latin prepositions . I t names the object, whom i or

what i ; as ,

The man strikes the boy . Strikes whom? The boy .

The child fears the fire . Fears what? Thefi re.

Boy and fire are accusative.

5 . TheVocative, or the case used in addressing a person

or thing ; as ,

0 boy ! 0 fire !

The fault, dear Brutus , is not in our stars .

Boy ,fire, and Brutus are in the vocative case .

6 . The A blative, usually translated by from , with, by, in ,

or at ; as ,

The boy str ikes the ball w ith the bat . With what ?—Withthe bat.

Then with the bat is the ablative.

OBS. 1. The Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Ablative are

called the oblique cases .

OBS. 2 . A seventh case, the Locative, denoting the place when ,

is found In a few words .

LA TIN NOUNS . 49

GENER A L VI EW OF THE CA SES A ND THEI R ENGLI SH

EQUIVA LENTS.

R e l ation to C o r re spon d ing A n sw e r s w h a t

O th e r W o rd s . C as e in Eng l ish . Que s tion .

Nominative. who or what it

0 0 Q

Gemti ve. Possessi ve, or of.Possession, or of whose ? of whom .

with objective. of what i’

Objective, w ith To or forDative. Indi rect Obj ect.

to or for . whom i or what?

A ccusative. Direct Object. Objective. whom or what

Vocative. Case ofA ddress . Independent .

Used in addressingperson or thing .

Objective, with With, in, from, by ,

Ablative. A dverbial. with, in, from, at

whom i? or what

DEC LENSION.

66 . Latin nouns have five Declensions, which are

distinguished by the final letters of the stem, or by the

terminations of the genitive Singular as,

OBS. The method of distinguishing the declension by the end

ing of the genitive singular had better be adopted at first, because

it is used in dictionaries and vocabularies to designate the deelen

50 F IRST STEPS IN LA T IN .

sion, and because the use of the stem is confusing to young pu ils.

The plan of cutting off -rum or -um from the genitive plura in

order to find the stem, and so determine the declension, presupposesthat the pupil is already able to decline the word.

General Rules of Declension

Neuter nouns of all declensions have the nominative, accu

sative, and vocative singular alike ; the nominative,

accusative, and vocative plural are also alike, and always

end in d .

The nominative, accusative, and vocative plural are alike in

all nouns of the third, fourth, and fifth declensions .

The nominative and vocative are alike, except in the singular

of nouns in -as of the second declension .

The dative and ablative plural are always alike.

The genitive plural always ends in-um.

EXERC ISES.

A nalyz e the following sentences . State the Latin case to

be used to represent each noun

1. The sailor has a cottage. 2 . The cottage of the sailor

has a table. 3. Galba sees the gates of Rome . 4. Titus

wounded the man w ith an arrow . 5 . Titus gave the book

to his friend . 6 . The sailors of Galba wound the sailors of

Titus with arrows . 7 . The soldiers of Caesar defend the

towers w ith stones . 8 . Caesar sees the walls of Rome.

9. The leaders of the people give peace to the city .

NOTES A ND QUESTI ON S.

1. The base is the same as the stem with the final vowel removed ;

the endings , therefore, contain the final vowel of the stem and the

suflixes, both being obscured by contraction . If the stem ends in a

consonant, then the stem and base are the same, and the endings are

the simple case-endings ; as, reg-is . Reg is both the stem and the base

to which the case-endings may be attached unchanged.

2 . Note that gender in English denotes sex,—masculine nouns

denoting males, feminine nouns females , and neuter nouns neither ma le

norfemale. In Latin, this natural distinction of gender is applied only


EXERC ISES.

Decline the following words like mensa . Give the mean

ing ,

8the case, the stem, the gender, the number , and the

case-endings of each

1. insulae .

2 . agricOlae.

3.

68 . T follow reek nouns is in

serted for convenience of reference ; they should be omitted

for the present :

SYN . P orta is the gate of a city ; janua , the door ( street-door)of a house ; valvae,folding-doors in a temple and fine buildings .

NOTES A ND QUEST I ONS.

1. Nouns in -E, «is, and i s are Greek words, mostly proper names.

2 . A ll nouns in a are feminine unless they denote males ; as , nauta,

a sailor, is masculine by signification. (See

3. The base of mensa is mens and to this the case-endings are

added to form the cases . The stem of mensa is mensé the final -ii of

the stem disappears in the dative and ablative plural.

SUBJECT A ND PRED ICA TE. 53

4. A s there is no article in Latin, mem e may mean table, a table, or

the table, according to the sense required.

5 . The pupil should learn the vocabularies so well that he can give

at once the English when the Latin is pronounced, or the Latin when

the English is pronounced.

6 . The ending -ae is the case-ending of the genitive. (See

7 . In the vocabularies, i t . indicates the masculine gender ; F ., the

feminine ; and N ., the neuter .

8 . In translating the exercises, give all possible meanings of each

form . For example, insfilae may be genitive or dative singular, or

nominative or vocative plural : of an island, to or for an island, ye

islands, or O islands .

How do you distinguish nouns of the first declension ? How the

gender? How do you find the stem ? (This can be found by taking

away the case-ending of the genitive plural,

-rum. ) How do you accent

agrloblae? What is the quantity of the penult of puella

? How

many numbers have Latin nouns ? How many cases Name them.

How many genders ?

LESSON XIII .

SUBJECT AND PBBDIOATB.

EXAMP LES.

l . agri cola vbcat, thefarmer calls .

2 . agricblae vboant, thefi zrmers call .

3. puellae laudant. the girls p raise.

OBS. In the sentence the farmer cal ls , farmer is the subject,and is in the nominative case ; calls is the predicate. Study the

other examples, and note (1 if the subject is singular, the verb is

singular ; ( 2) if the subject is plural, the verb must also be plural ;and (3) that the subject and the predicate agree in person as well

as in number. Hence the following rules

SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE

m. RULE I .- 'l‘h e subject of a fin ite verb is put

in the nominative case.


AGREEMENT OF THE VERB .

70. RULE II . A fi n ite verb agrees w ith its sub

j cet-nom inative in n umber an d person .

71. Model for parsing nouns

agricbla vbcat. the farmer calls agricbla is a masculine noun ,

masculine by signification first declension, because it has -ae

in the gen itive singular ; stem, agrtcb’

l‘

declined, sing. agricb’

la,

agricb’

lae, agricb’

lae, agricb’

lam, agricb’

la, agricb’

ld, plural agricb'

lae,

agricb’

la'

rum, agricb'

lis, agrico’

las , agricb’

lae, agricb'

lis. It is nomina

tive singular, and is the subject of vbcat , according to Rule I

The subj ect of afinite verb is in the nominative case.

72 . Model for parsing verbs

agri cOla vbcat, the farmer calls : vbcat is a transitive verb of

the first conjugation ,indicative mode, present tense, third person

singular , to agree with the subject agricOla, according to Rule IIA finite verb agrees with the subj ect-nominative in number and person .

VOC A BULA RY.

régina.-ae, F . , queen . pugno , i re,fight.

scri'

ba, -as , M . , clerk. cOn-firmo , a re , establish.

délecto .2 -5re, delight. porto , fi re. carry.

occupo r h e.take possession of; seize . d éno, «i re.give.

EXERC ISES.

A nalyz e the following sentences ; parse each word ; trans

late into English

1. rég'

ina laudat.3 4. Laudas .

4

2 . scribae portant. 5 . Laudamus .

3. puellae laudant. 6 . Reg‘

inae dOnant.

Translate into Latin

1. We fight, they fight, he fights . 2 . The5 sailor calls .

3. The queen praises . 4. The queens praise. 5 . We praise.

6 . They establish.


74. Model for pars ing the object

agri cbla nautas vbcat, the farmer calls the sailors : nautas is a

masculine noun of the first declension , masculine by signification ,

and first declension because it has -ae in the genitive singular

stem,nautd declined, sing. nauta, nautae, nautae, nautam, nauta,

nauta, plural nautae, nautarum, nautis, nautc'

ts , nautae, nautis. It is

in the accusative plural, the object of v6 cat, according to Rule IIIThe direct obj ect of a transitive verb is p ut in the accusative.

VOC A BULA RY.

fi'

lia,1-ae , F .

, daughter . paro ,2p repare.

péci'

ini a,-ae. F .

, money . arc .p lough.

imic i tia ,-s e. F .

, friendship . give.

Ep is tii la ,-ae , F .

, letter . ex specto. expect.

EXERC ISES.

A nalyz e the following sentences ; parse each word ; trans

late into English

1. A gricblae“nautam vbcant. 2 . Vbcamus . 3. Regina

filiam 5 amat. 4. Regina amicitiam cbnfirmat. 5 . Laudamus .

6 . Puella épistiilam exspectabat.


1. The queen calls . 2 . The queen calls her 6 daughter .

3. They establish friendship . 4. They praise , they call,

they prepare. 5 . The queen praises . 6 . We praise .

7 . The girls are expecting7 letters .


1. A few words of the first declension have the dative and ablative

plural in-5bus ; as, fi lia, a daughter ; d ea, a goddess .

2 . Write the infinitive.

3. The infinitive of do is d i re ; short a before -re.

4. See 63.

5 . Render her daughter . The pronouns hi s her,their , are seldom

expressed in Latin ,when no confusion could arise from their omission.

In translating, they are to be supplied from the context.

NOUNS. SECOND DECLENSION . 57

6 . Not to be translated.

7 . Remember that the indicative has three forms in English .

Which cases of the first declension are alike in the singular? Which

in the plural? Write the ablative singular of fi lia. How many ways

can you translate v6 cant ? Name the stem of vbcant. Is vbcant a

complete sentence why? What is a sentence What is the case of

the direct Object in Latin ? What tenses express incomplete action ?

Where does the direct object usually stand

LESSON XV.

NOUNS. SECOND. DECLENSION.

75 . Nouns of the Second Declension end in -er ,-ir,

-us, and -os, masculine ; mm and -on , neuter .

a . Those in -os or -ou are Greek words, chiefly proper nouns .

1. Nouns in -us are declined as follows

P A R A D IGM.

2 . The stem of nouns of the second declension ends in -6

thus the stem Of dOmInus is dOmIn6

3. The characteristic -0 becomes -u in the nominative Of

nouns in -us or -um ; it disappears in the end ings-i and -is

( for -o-i and -o-is ) . The nominative Singular of deminus

was originally Gammon.


LESSON XVI I .

NOUNS. SECOND DECLENSION.

79. Nouns in «um are declined as follows

P A R A D IGM .

C a se s . Singular .

bellum,war .

belli, ofbellO, to orfor war .

bellum,war .

bellum, 0 war .

bellO, with,f rom or by war . wars .

1. Like bellum , decline

1. templum , temple. 3. exemplum, examp le.

2 . dOnum, gift. 4. oppid um, town.

D a tive C a se after Tr an s itive Ver bs .

EXAMP LES.

1. Librum puért‘

) dat , he gives the book to the boy.

2 . Galba Belgis insid ias p i rat, Galba p repares snares for theBelgians .

OBS. In the sentence, he gives the book to the boy, or he gives the

boy the book, note that the verb gives is transitive, and that i t isfo llowed by the direct object, book, in the accusative, and an ind irect object, boy, in the dative. Hence the following rule

IND IRECT OBJECT.

80. RULE VI . Th e in d ir ect obj ect of an action

is put in th e dative .

1. A fter many transitive verbs the dative of the indirect

object is used , together w ith the accusative of the direct.

bella, wars .

bellOrnm, of wars .

bellis, to orfor wars.

bella, wars .

bella, 0 wars .

bellis , with,f rom, or by

64 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .

2 . Note the order of the words'

: the indirect object usually precedesthe direct.

What nouns of the second declension are neuter ? What is thedifference in the manner of declining magis ter and puer

? Whatcases are alike in neuter nouns ?

LESSON XVI I I .

PREPOSITIONS.

81. Latin Prepositions are used either with the A c

cusative or w ith the A blative.

EXA M PLES.

in Galliam , into Gaul .

in Gallifi, in Gaul .

cum v iris , with ( in company with) the men .

ex ( or 6 ) prbvincia,from ( out of ) thep rovince.

5. per Oppi da, through the towns .

p

oo

re

r-a

OBS. Note that the preposition in , w ith the accusative, meansinto ; with the ablative, it means in . per means through, and is

followed by the accusative ; cum is followed by the ablative, and

means with ( in company with) .

VOC A BULA RY.

cum , prep . w . abl., with.

6 6 , prep . W . abl . , from, concern

ing, for .

ex , prep. w . abl . ,from, out qf.

ab , prep . w . abl . , from, away

ad , prep . w . acc., to, towards .

frumentum , J, N ., grain .

bra,-ao, F ., coast, shore.

pr6v incia,-ae, F .

, p rovince.

s ine, prep . w . abl., without.

Gal l ia, -ae, F ., Gaul.

in , prep . w . acc., into ; w . abl.,

in or on .

amb ti lo , walk.

hab i to , dwell in .

porto , carry.

comporto , collect.

PREPOSITIONS. 65

EXERC ISES.

A nalyz e the following sentences parse each word ; trans

late into English

1. Frfimentum in prbvinciam2

portant. 2 . In oppide

habitabat. 3. Magister cum puéris in agrO ambillat. 4. Virab insiilae Ora ambfilat. 5 . Cum Belgie amic

‘

itiam cOnfir

mant. 6 . Fr iimenta ex agris comportant. 7 . A uxilium a

viris implOrant. 8 . Reman’

i agrbs vastabunt.


1. They dwell in the town . 2 . In the province . 3. Into

the province . 4. He conveys grain from the fields . 5 . In

the town . 6 . Into the town . 7 . He conveys the grain into

the town . 8 . He walks in the field with ( his )3son . 9. They

walk away from the shore. 10. With the Gauls . 11. He

establishes friendship with the Romans .

NOTES A ND QUEST I ON S.

1. a and 6 are used only before words beginning with a consonant ;

ab and ex before either a vowel or a consonant.

2 . A preposition with its noun is a phrase ; when the phrase limits a

verb,as it does in this case, it is called an adverbial phrase ; when it

limits a noun , it is an adj ective phrase. No special model is necessary

for parsing nouns with prepositions .

OBS. Observe the distinction between the prepositions in and ex , and

ad and ab . in (w ith the accusative ) and ex denote motion to andfromthe inside of a place ; ad and ab ( or a ) denote motion to and f rom the

outs ide of a place. Thus , véni t in I ti liam , when one comes into I ta ly ;ex I téli i , when one comes out of I taly ; but ad I taliam , to I taly ,

when

there is no notion of entering into Italy conveyed ; just so ab I tali fi,away from I taly, when it is simply expressed that he came away fromItaly .

3. Words in parenthesis are not to be translated .

Which cases do prepositions govern ? Mention a preposition that

governs the accusative. What kind of a phrase is a preposition and

its noun ?

66 FIRST STEPS IN LAT IN .

LESSON XIX.

ADJECTIVES.

— I‘IBST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.

82 . A djectives are words used to describe nouns ; and

as nouns are of different genders, adjectives are declined

to agree w ith the genders of the noun .

1. A djectives of the first and second declens ions have

one form for the masculine gender , another for the feminine,and a third for the neuter . Thus

The masculine is declined like dOmInus .

The feminine is declined like mens a.

The neuter is declined like bellum.

EXA M PLES.

1. v i r bdnus . a good man . 3. v iri bOnI. good men .

2 . régina bbna, a good queen . 4. v lrds bOnbs , good men.

5 . templum magnum, a great temple.

OBS. In these examples, note that the adjectives are all in thesame gender , number , and case as the nouns . Hence the followingrule

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.

83. RULEVII — A d jectives agree w ith th eir n oun s

in gender , n um ber , an d case.

1. Declension of adjectives of the first and second deelen

s ions ( stems ending in-6 or -d is as follows

P A R A D IGM . bbnus , good .

ADJECTIVES. 67

2 . Decline together mfirus altus , a high wall .

C ases . Singular . P lural .

miiras altus , a high wall. n dri'

alti, high walls .

mfir i’

alti , of a high wall. miirbrum altbrum, qfhighwalls .

miir'

c'

) to orfor a high wall. miiris altis , to orfor high walls.

mfirum altum,a high wall. miirbs alt-Os, high walls .

mfire alte, 0 high wall.

{mfirb altO, with, f i

'

om, or by miiris altis, with, from, or by

a high wall. high walls .

3. A djectives usually stand after their nouns , but an em

phatic adjective may stand before the noun .

4. A djectives are often used as nouns , especially in the

plural masculine or neuter : as , bbnt. good men ; multa ( neut.

plur . ) many things ; omnia. all things .

84. Model for parsing an adjective

réglnam bbnam laudo , I praise the good queen : bbnam is an

adjective of the first and second declensions ; stems. bone? and

bond ; declined, singular bb’

nus, bb’

na, bb’

num, etc . ; plural bc‘

in i,

bb’

nae, bb’

nc‘

i, etc . It is in the accusative feminine singular, and

agrees with rég‘

inam , according to RuleVII . A dj ectives agree withtheir nouns in gender, number, and case.

VOCA BULA RY.

multus , -a, -um , many . di scipii lus ,-i

'

, M ., pup il.

nbvus , -a, -um. new. miirus , -i , M ., wall .

c i rus , -a, -um , dear . lacrima.-ae , F ., tear .

altus , -a,-um , high or deep . R hénus , -i , M .

, Rhine ( r iver) .

magnus , -a,-um , large. ripa,

-ae , F ., bank.

fl iiv ius , -i , M ., r iver . l i tus , -a,-um , broad .

r i pIdus ,-a,

-um , swifl . v érus , -a,-um , true.

SYN . M fi rus denotes any wall ; paries (gen .-5tis ) , wall of a

house ; moenia (gen .—6 rum ) , wall of a city to protect from the

enemy.


85 . Decline together the following, making the adjectiveagree with the noun in gender , number , and case.

1. oppi dum mfinitum , a fortified town .

2 . puer bbnus , a good child.

EXERC ISES.

Translate into English

1. Multis cum lacrim'

is i 2 . In 1 prOvinciam mag nam .

3. Per multOs agrOs . 4. Cum servis bOnis . 5 . Trans 2

Rhénum pfignat. 6 . Importamus friimentum in Galliam .

7 . Magister bOnus dat librum n6vum carO discipfiléfi 8 . A d

ripam Rhéni'

.

Translate Into Latin

1. Of the high walls . 2 . A cross the broad river . 3. The

master gives the book to the good boy . 4. With many men .

5 . With good Slaves . 6 . A cross the broad rivers . 7 . The

good girl loves the queen .

SYN . Magis ter (magis , greater ) is a master of a school, of a

feast, etc. dbminus , master of a family, or of slaves .

NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.

1. Note the meaning of in , followed by the accusative.

2 . The preposition trans is followed by the accusative, and means

across .

3. The pupil is expected to analyz e the sentences, to point out the

modifiers of the subject and of the predicate, and to parse each word.

What is an adjective Of what declensions are adjectives ? The

rule for the agreement of adjectives ?

LESSON XX.

ADJECTIVES.

—PIBST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.

86 . Besides adjectives in -as,-a, mm, there are others

of three terminations in -er ,-a,

-um. They are declined

as follows

A DJECTIVES. 69

PA R A D IGM . ni ger. black.

Singul ar . P lu ra l .

Masc. Neuter . Masc . Fem. Neuter .

niger nigra nigrum nigri nigrae nigra

GEN . nigri nigrae nigri nigrbrum nigr i rnm nigrbrum

DA T . nigrae nigrb nigris nigris nigris

A C C . nigrum nigrum nigrum nigrbs nigr i s nigra

VOC . niger nigra nigrum nigri nigrae nigra

A BL . nigrb nigra nigri”

) nigris

tdner , tender .

1. n iger is declined in the masculine like magister. anddrops the e ; téner is declined in the masculine like puer,

and keeps the e. Both are declined in the feminine likemensa, and in the neuter like bellum .

2 . Most adjectives in -er drop the e in inflection ; i .e. , are

declined like n i ger . The following retain the e, and are de

clined like tener

l . mi ser, wretched . 4. li cer , torn .

2 . asper , rough. 5. li ber , free.

3. téner , tender . 6 . pro sper , fortunate.

A nd the compounds of -ger and

-fer .

87 . Decline together , making the A djective agree with

the Noun in gender , number , and case :

1. puer aeger , a sick boy. 2 . v i r liber , a free man.

3. puella pulchra, a beautiful girl.


VOCA BULA RY.

aeger ,-gra, g rum, sick. pdp ifl us , -i , M . , peop le.

mi ser , -6ra. -6rum, wretched. meus ,-a,

-um (voc. M . mi ) , my .

nos ter , -tra, -trum, our . périctilum,-i , N .

, danger .

asper , é ra,-6rum, rough. ltScus ,2 -i , M ., place.

R fimanus ,l -a,

-um , Roman . cas tra, -6 rum N ., camp .

t ai nus , -i , M . ,Rhone ( river) . matriménium,-i , N .

, marriage.

occiipo, seiz e. lfi dus , -i , M ., school.

SYN . M i ser (opp. beatus ,fortunate) , said of one who feels himself unfortunate ; infeliz ( opp . félix ) , of one for whom nothinggoes according to his wish .

EXERC ISES.

Pronounce ; translate ; decline each noun , and give its

stem ; parse the verbs :

1. MagnO cum3péricfile. 2 . Ex Gallia. 3. In Galliam .

4. In Gallia. 5 . Trans t danum in Galliam. 6 . In esper’

ie

loc'

is castra lata conlOcat. 7 . Reman‘

i libéra Gallbrum “op

pida occupant. 8 . Puellae bOnae rég’

inam pulchram amant.


1. In great danger . 2 . With great danger . 3. In com

pany with the beautiful girl . 4. The beautiful girl loves

the queen . 5 . Out of Gaul into Italy . 6 . Into the free

town . 7 . The Roman people seiz e the towns .


1. In the Latin expression for Roman people the adjective Rbmanusalways follows the noun .

2 . lOcus is masculine in the singular , but is both masculine and

neuter in the plural, and is thus declined : nom. 160i , passages in books ,

and Rica, places ; gen. lc rum ; dat. lbc‘

i s ; acc. 1606 5 and lbca ;

voc . lbci and lbca ; abl. lbci s .

3. cum stands between the adjective and the noun .

4. The genitive of the possessor (190) usually stands between the

noun and the adjective limiting the noun .

With what cases are Latin prepositions used ? When is in used

with the accusative ? What is the gender of nouns of the second de

clension How does vi r'

i aegr'

i differ in meaning from aegfi v IrI ?


PLUPER FECT TEN SE .

P er so n . F o rm ation . Exam p le . Engl ish .

Sing. 1 Perf. stem ram ami veram I had loved.

r i s ami vérds Thou hadst loved.

rat i mi vérat He had loved .

P lur . 1 rfimus amévér imus IVe had loved.

r i tis ami vérétis You had loved .

rant amévérant They had loved .

F UTUR E PER F ECT TENSE .

Sing. 1 Perf. stem ro

r is

rit

P lar . 1 rimus

r itis

r int

OBS. The characteristic vowel of the stem is shortened in the

first person plural of the perfect, and in the third person plural it

is changed to e in the pluperfect and future perfect it is

changed to 5. Final consonants are usually less distinctly pronounced, and for this reason are oftener dropped . In this wayfimfiv érun t is shortened to fimfivére ,— in this form v is never

dropped .

1. A nalysis of the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect

A ctive Of all Conjugations

1. Perfect Perf . stem Personal endings .

9 Pluperfect Tense Sign-ra Personal endings .

3. Put. perfect Tense Sign-ri Personal endings .

2 . In the tenses formed from the perfect stem , v between

two vowels is often suppressed . and the second vowel is

merged in the first ( except te) ; as ,

EXA M PLES.

PLUPERFECT amaveram amaeram emi ram

FUTURE PERFEC T amévéro amaero ami ro

PERFECT , 3d per . plur . amavérunt amaerunt ami runt

PERFECT, 2d per . plur . amavisti amaisti amasti

I shall have loved.

Thou wilt have loved .

He will have loved.

We shall have loved.

You will have loved .

They will have loved .



1. d o is irregular ; it has a short before -re,and the perfect is déd i .

2 . Translate the perfect both ways ; as , he has la id waste, and he la id

waste.

3. The preposition circum means around, and is followed by the s e

cusative, as are also trans , across , inter, between, among, and propter ,

on account of :

4. Note the two objects of dédit.OBS. Note that the pluperfect and future perfect have, in addition

to the personal endings, a tense Sign ,-ra

,-r i as,

amfivé-ra-nt, loved-had-they,

the perfect stem being amav‘

i the pluperfect tense sign-ra, had , the

personal ending-nt, they.

What kind of time does the perfect denote? What are the divi

sions of time ? How is the present stem found ? The perfect stem?

Decline filia .

LESSON XXII .

PIBST CONJUGATION.—ACTI

'VE VOICE.

IMPERAT IVE MODE. QUEST IONS.

90. Simple sentences are, in Latin as in English

1. DECLA RA T IVE ; as, puer laudat , the boy p raises.

2 . INTERROGA TIVE ; as, puernel laud at , does the boy p raise ?

3. IMPERA T IVE ; as, laudate, p raise ye .

4. ExcLAMA TORY ; as, quam forti ter pfi gnat, how bravely he

fights l

91. In Latin , questions are asked by means of Inter

rogative Pronouns , A dverbs , or Particles, and are not

distinguished by the order of the words, as they are in

English.

1. In s imple questions , expecting the answer yes or no.

an Interrogative Particle is used , indicating what answer is

expected .

F IRST CONJUGA TION .—A CTIVE VOICE. 75

a . Questions with the syllable-ne appended ( enclitic) ask

for information , w ithout indicating what answer is expected .

b. Questions with nonne expect the answer yes .

0. Questions w ith num expect the answer no .

2 . For questions w ith Interrogative Pronouns , see 245 .

92. The Imperative Mode is used in commands, ex

hortations, and entreaties .

PRESENT .

F o rm a tio n . Exam p le . Eng l i sh .

Pres . stem Love, or love thou.

Pres . stem te ami te Love, or love ye.

F UTURE .

Pres . stem to Thou sha lt love.

to Il e shall love.

Pres . stein tOteu u

ntO

VOC ATIVE.

93. RULEVIII .— Th e vocative is u sed , eith er w ith

or w ith out an in ter j ection , in add r essin g a p er son or

th ing .

VOC A BULA R Y .

arma ,-6 rum N .

, arms . rOs a ,-ae , F . ,

rose .

proelium ,-I, N . , battle . narro , tell, narrate.

Galb a,-as , M . , Galba . COp ia ,

-ae , F ., abundance .

porta,-as , F ., gate. cop ias F .

, forces .

aed lfi c ium ,-‘

i , N ., building . Ti tus , -

‘

i , M ., Titus .

vi r , v i ri , M .,man . natura ,

-ae , F ., nature .

ins i diae ,-5 rum F ., snares . négé tium ,-i , N ., business .

F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .

SYN . Vir , a man , a distinguished man , a husband ; homo ,-In.is ,

a man , a human being, includes both sexes ( opposed to v ir a

fellow) .

EXERC ISES.


stem ; parse the verbs

1. Vastate provinciam . 2 . Vita, Tite, proelium. 3. V605.puéros . 4. Matronane1puellam vocat ? vocat. 5 . Nonne

Galba insidias parat? 6 . Num poeta regi’

nae2rosam dat ?

7 . Matfirate , viri'

.

3 8 . Matiira, Cassi .4 9. Date , viri , R6

man'

is arma .

I


1. Call . 2 . Call (ye) . 3. Call the men . 4. Does the

sailor call ? Yes . 5 . Does the farmer plough ? 6 . Tell the

story . 7 . Call the men , C assius . 8 . Hasten , men . 9. Haste

(ye) . 10. Call the men from 5the fields . 11. Praise (ye) .

12 . Praise the pupils .


1.-na is an enclitic, i .e. it seems to lean on the word before it. The

most common enclitics are -que ( and) , -ve, and 416 , used in asking

questions, and also cum , with, when used with pronouns ; as,

puéri puellaeque ad sunt, the boys, and girls too, are here.

-que is the enclitic in English ,

too is the enclitic. The -ne appended

to mi tréna in Ex. 4 throws the accent on the penult ; as,ma-tré-na’ne.

2 . Dative case.

3. See RuleVIII .

4. See 7 5 . 5 .

5 . Use the preposition .

From what stem is the imperative formed ? Does the imperative

denote completed action ? Give the personal endings of the impera

tive. Note that the imperative has no first person . How many tenses

has the imperative?

NOUNS.-THIRD DECLENSION . 77

LESSON XXIII .

NOUNS. THIRD DEOLBNBION.

94. Nouns whose genitive singular ends in-is belong

to the Third Declension .

a . The nominative endings are various : a, e, i, o, y, c, l, n , r ,

s, t, and x ; and nouns of three genders belong to this

declension .

95 . Nouns of the Third Declension may be divided

into two classes

1. Nouns Whose stem ends in a consonant.

2 . Nouns whose stem ends in the vowel i .

96 . Nouns whose stem ends in a consonant increase in

the genitive ; that is , the genitive has more syllables than

the nominative as , index , ind ie-is .

97 . Nouns whose stem ends in a vowel do not increase in

the genitive as , tarris , tun-is . See 110 and 113.

98 . Consonant stems are divided , like the consonants ,

into

1. Lab ial stems

2 . Dfi

ental ate-

ma

3. Lingual stems

4. Gufffi far s tems

99. The Sign Of the Nominative Singular is s , which ,however , is dropped after I, n , r , s , or combines with c or gof the stem to form so : 0 or g s ; t or d disappears before

3 ; as , st. mult (w ith change of vowel)mfl es . The nominative of neuter nouns is the same as the

stem (with sometimes changed vowel , see 100.


LESSON XXIV.

NOUNS. THIRD DECLENSION.

102 . Stems ending in Dentals : t, d, s, n .

1. Stems in t, d .

PA R A D IGMS.

2 . Stems in s ( r ) .

PA R AD IGM .


c . Note that s of the stem becomes r between two vowels ; as ,

fl 6 s , fl 6 ris ( for flfis is ) ; hbnos , later form hbnor , hbnfiris ( for

hon6 s is ) .

d . In the nominative and vocative singular, the case-ending s is

Sometimes dropped ; as , fulgur , régié , Virgo , nomen . Nomina

tives in 0 have also lost the final n of the stem ; the stem of régio

is région

VOCA BULA RY.

caput, capi ti s , N ., head. causa,

-as , F ., cause, reason.

numen , flfimlnis , N . , r iver . legatié , légi ti énis , F . , embassy.

Jara, -s e, M ., the Jura . v irtfi s , virtfi tis , F .

, valor .

ob , prep.w . acc., on account of longus ,

-a,-um, long.

SYN . Pepiilus ( originally the patricians) came to include thewhole peop le ; pleb s , the plebeians, a part of the co le without

olitical rights, until political equality was esta lis ed by theicinian law , B .C . 367 ; Quiri tes , the Roman p eop le in their civil

capacity .

103. Decline together the follow ing

1. caput magnum , a large head .

2 . miles bbnus , a good soldier .

3. mi les floor , a sp ir ited soldier .

EXERC ISES.



1. Milites laudant. 2 . Regina virtfitem militum laudat.

3. Virginés carmen longum cantant. 4. A d flfimen t da

num. 5 . Milites ob ciipid‘

itatem glOriae piignant. 6 . Prin

ceps mOrés viris l dabat.

NOTES A ND QUEST ION S.

1. Note that the ending-is is long in plural cases of the second

declension .

How is the stem of nouns of the third declension found'

.

l Whatcases are alike in neuter nouns ? The stems of Latin words often

appear in English words derived from the Latin ; as, princip-a l ( princip

stem of princeps ) .


VOCA BULA RY.

consul , c6ns iilis , M . consul . soror, s6 r6 ris , F ., sister .

agger, aggéris , M . , mound . imperator, -t6 ris , M ., commander .

fr i ter, fratris , M ., brother . Stator, 6 r i t6 ris , M ., orator .

C aesar , C aesaria, M ., Caesar . v ictor , v ictbris , M .

, victor .

105 . Decline together the following

1. cénsul des ignfitus , consul elect.

2 . timor magnus , greatfear .

EXERC ISES.

Pronounce ; translate ; decline each noun , and give the


1. Consul OratOrem laudat. 2 . Consul Oratoris élbquentiam

laudavit. 3. Frater sbrdrem amat. 4. Fratrem libéravit .

5 . Caesar sOrOrem in matrimonium dédit (gave) . 6 . Caesar

consul censfilem Titum accfisavérat.


1. They have praised the orator . 2 . They praise the

orator’

s eloquence . 3. The brothers love ( their ) sisters .

4. They have liberated the consul . 5 . To Caesar , the

consul. 6 . They accuse Caesar , the consul . 7 . The

judge praises the king. 8 . I praise the justice of the

king.

NOTES AN D QUESTIONS.

How is the nominative singular of most nouns formed (Ans. The

nominative is formed by adding s to the stem .) What exceptions ?

(A ns . Neuters, and nouns whose stem ends in a lingual.) pater,mater,frater (gen . patris , matris , fratria) , seem not to increase in the geni

tive. The stems are really péter mater , h ater , and they are con

tracted to paw , mat h fratr i.e., patris stands for pateria, etc.

NOUNS.— TH IRD DECLENSION . 85

LESSON XXVI .

NOUNS. THIRD DECLENSION.

Stems ending in a Guttural : c, g.

PA RA D I GMS.

1. Note that the stems are judIc reg radtc d iic and

leg jud ic has a variable vowel .

2 . The case-endings are the same as those given in 100.

3. The s of the nominative and vocative Singular unites

with c or g of the stem to form as ; as, regs : tax. See 32 . 2 .

NOUNS.— TH IRD DECLENSION . 89

5 . Milites pro libertate pfignant. 6 . Inter fines GaIlOrum.

7 . In hostium niiméro. 8 . Canes pfignant. 9. Caesar

turrim oppiignabat.


1. cm forms the genitive plural in-um

,as ci num ; so also

p i nk ,bread ; and jfivénis, a youth.

DO nouns having i-stems increase in the genitive

? What is meantby increasing in the genitive How do such nouns form the nomina

tive from the stem ? What vowel change is common ? In what does

the genitive plural usually end

LESSON XXVIII .

NGUNS. THIRD DECLENSION.

110. Neuters ending in -e,-al, -ar are declined as

follow s :

P A RA D IGMS.


1. The stem of mare ends in -i which is changed in the

nominative to e. The stem of an imal ends in -ali the i

being dropped , and the a Shortened in the nominative singu

lar ; as , stem an imali nominative animal . an imal stands

for an imale , the final e being lost, and does not, therefore .

increase in the genitive .

111. Rules for Position :

1. A djectives and genitives generally follow their nouns .

2 . A dverbs and Oblique cases, w ith or w ithout prepositions,

generally immediately precede the verb.

3. The indirect object generally precedes the direct object.

4. When a noun with an adjective is limited by a noun in the

genitive, the adjective stands first, and the genitive between it and

its noun ; as, magnum reginae pécfi lum , the large cup of the

queen or , the queen’

s large cup .

5. The rules may be reversed for the sake of emphasis ; then

the emphatic place for the verb is at the beginning ;

for the obj ect, at the end of a sentence ;

for the genitive, before the noun it limits ;

for the adj ective, before the noun ;

for the adverb, at a distance from the verb ;

for the indirect obj ect, after the direct.

VOCA BULA RY.

bear , tempus , tempbris , N . , time.

endure. jfi s , jfi ri s , N ., r ight, law .

an imal , an imalis , N .

, animal. co llis , collis , M ., hill .

cremo ,-are, -av i , burn . v ecti gal , v ect

‘

igali s , N .,tax,

cus té s , custéd is , M .

, guard . revenue.

frigus , frigbris , N ., cold, frost. n6men , n6minis , N .

,name.

Decline together the following

1. nav i s longa ( lit., a long ship ) , a ship of war .

2 . v ect'

i gal magnum , a large revenue.

3. m i re magnum , a great sea .

NOUNS. TH IRD DECLENSION . 93


1. sinis tra pars , the left side.

2 . riipés s inistra, a rock on the left.3. bpm comp létnm, afinished work.

OBS. Note that, in nouns of the third declension, the stem is

the same as the nominative ; as, cbnsul, enitive cbnsul -is , or

becomes the same after the vowel is modifie as , nomen, genitivenam in-is ; or that s is added to the stem to form the nominative ;as, hostis.genitive hosti

-s .

EXERC ISES.


l . Partem urbis occupant. 2 . COnsul in urbe habitabat.

3. ROmfI lus nOmen nOvae urbi dat . 4. Fratres in litore

miiris cum sOrOribus stant. 5 . A nte liicem. 6 . De monte

in flfimen . 7 . In monte . 8 . In pace paramus bellum.

9. Milites arcem servabant.

SYN . Oppidum is a fortified town, a fortress a small city or

town ; nrb s , a large city (w ith reference to its buildings ; es

cially to Rome) ; civi tas , a state, (1) a community living under t e

same laws ; (2) right of citizenship ; res pub lica, a commonwealth.


What is the genitive plural of mons , urb s , pars? A re these words

declined in the singular like consonant stems ? What three classes ofnouns of the third declension (Ans . l st. Consonant stems ; 2d.Vowelstems ; 3d . Mixed stems . ) What nouns have -i as the regular ending

in the ablative singular? What nouns have -e or -i In what does

the nominative plural of masculine and feminine nouns end ? (A ns . i s . )In what, the nominative plural of neuter nouns

? (A ns . In -a , and those

whose ablative singular ends in-i only , or in -e and -i

,have -ia. ) What

nouns have -ium in the genitive plural? How is the nominative formed

from the stem ? What is the regular ending of the accusative singular

What nouns have -im in the accusative

A BLA TIVE. 97

EXERC ISES.

Determine by the foregoing rules the gender of the fol

lowing nouns

1. consul , -fi118 , consul . 14. civi tas , -atis , state.

2. sermb, -6nis , discourse. 15. légfitib. -6ni s , embassy.

3. Oratié ,-6nis , speech. 16 . 16x . legis , law .

4. dux , diicis , leader . 17. v irtiis , 41th , virtue.

5. multi tiido ,-Inis , multitude. 18 . frigus ,

-6 ris , cold .

6. impér i tor , -6 ri.s , commander . 19. 6nus , -6ris , load .

7 . légio ,-6nis , legion . 20. vulnus , é ris , wound .

8 . obses , -id.is , hostage. 21. crfi s , crfi ris , leg.

9. p6 testds , i tis , power .

"2 cus tos , -Od is , guard .

10. i nimal, animal . 23. ri dlx ,-Icis , root.

11. tut t is , 48 , tower . 24. princeps , -ip is, chief .

12 . contentib, -6n:ls , contention . 25. sémen ,-inis , seed .

13. crimen ,-inis , charge. litus , -6 ris , shore.


1. A n abstract noun is the name of a quality ; as , valor, virtue.

2 . A collective noun denotes in the singular number, a collection of

individuals ; as, army, legion.

How many ways of determining the gender Of nouns ? What are

they What nouns are masculine by signification What, by ter

mination ? What nouns in common use are exceptions Give the

rules for feminine nouns. What are the terminations of neuter nouns

LESSON XXXI .

ABLATIVE.

CAUSE, MANNER, MEANS, AND INSTRUMENT .

EXA M P LES.

pal lidus Ira fuit , he was pale with anger .

magné new auxi lium a C aesare pétunt, with afl ood of tearsthey seek aid from C tesar .

3. Divi tiacus Gal lérum anim 6 s v erb is confi rmat , D ivitiacus

encourages the minds of the Gauls by (or , bymeans of ) words .


4. ferré dim i cant fratrés , the brothers fight with the sword for

their country.

5. mfl i tés l i p i d ibus pfignant, the soldiersfight with stones .

OBS. In the foregoing examples the nouns that denote the cause

( ira) , the manner (fl étfi ) , the means the instrument ( ferr6 ,

lap id ibus ) , by which the action of the verb is performed, are inthe ablative w ithout a preposition, and are modifiers of the predi

cate. This usage is expressed by the following rule

ABLATIVE CA SE.

122 . RULE IX.-Th e cause, m ann er , m ean s , an d

in str um en t ar e d en oted by th e ab lative w ith out a

p r eposition .

123. Rule for position

Expressions of manner , means, and instrument are placed after

the direct Object ; those of cause usually precede it ; all precede

the predicate.

VOCA BULA RY.

pbdes , ped i tis , M .,foot-soldier . timi dus , -a ,-um , timid, afraid.

lap is , lap i d is , M .,stone. pas ser , pasaéria, M .

, sparrow .

Sagitta,-as , F .

, an arrow. mus ca ,-ae, F .

,fly.

v es ter , -tra, -trum , your . d évbro , A re ,-av i , devour .

SYN . C ons i lium , advice, counsel ; conci lium , an assembly, a

meetin (of part of the people) lex , a law passed in a c6mi tia, an

assemgly of the whole people, and regularly approved ; sci tuma law passed in a conc i lium .

EXERC ISES.


1. Caesar urbem crémat. 2 . Pater tuns urbés Gallias

igne crémat. 3. Regnum cOpiis conciliabat. 4. Ve S igne

crémant. 5 . Hostium Sagittae regem vestrum vulnérant.

6 . Amate , puéri , sOrOrés . 7 . Consulés oppidis nOmina dant.

8 . Milites consiilis laudant. 9. Virginem timidam vbcant.

10. Passer magnO cum gaudi51muscam dévOrabat. 11. Marci

filius Gallis signum tiiba dat.


4. Tullia fi lia réginae es t , Tullia is the daughter of the queen .

5. puella amAta es t , the girl is loved.

OBS. In the foregoing examples, note that in Ex. 1the adjectivesimply modifies the noun, without the intervention of a verb ; in

Ex. 2 the adjective is connected with the noun by means of the

verb est. The first adjective is called an attr ibutive adj ective , the

second is a p redicate adj ective, and is called the comp lement. In

Ex . 3note that the descriptive noun filia stands in the same part

of the sentence as the subject which it modifies ; it is called an

appos itive. In Ex . 4 the descriptive noun is used to form the

predicate, and is called a p redicate noun, or comp lement. Note that

the predicate adjective agrees with its noun in gender, number, andcase , the predicate noun agrees with the subject in case. Note

the position of the predicate adjective ; it may, however, precedethe verb for the sake of emphasis. In Ex. 5 the verb sum helps

to form the perfect tense of the verbs-and is therefore called an

auxiliary verb hence,

124. The verb sum is either an auxiliary or a copulative

verb. It is an auxiliary verb when it helps to form some Ofthe tenses of other verbs ; it is copulative when it joins thesubject to some other word which is used to describe the

subject. The word thus used to describe the subject may be

a noun or an adjective , and is called the comp lement. If the

descriptive word is a noun , it is called a p redicate noun ; if

it is an adjective, then it is called a p redicate adj ective.

PRED ICATE NOUN

125 . RULE X.— A n oun in th e p r ed icate, d en oting

th e sam e p er son or th in g a s th e subj ect, agrees w ith

it in case .

OBS. Note that a noun used to describe another noun or pro

noun , and denoting the same person or thing, is put in the samecase . When the descriptive noun is in the same part of the sen

tence, it is called an A PPOSIT IVE ; and when it stands in the predicate,usually after intransitive verbs of to be, to become, to remain , etc.

,

and w ith passive verbs of naming, calling, choosing, appointing, etc.,

it is called a PREDICA TE NOM INA TIVE.

PREDICATE ADJECTIVE.

126. RULE XI .—A p r ed icate ad j ective agrees w ith

its subj ect in gen d er , number , an d case.

SUBJECT A ND COPULA‘

.

12 7 . Partial Paradigm of sum , I am.

”v

OBS. The verb sum , 1am,belongs to none of the four conjuga

tions ; it is both irregular and defective, i .e.,it wants certain parts.

It is used in Latin, as in English, to help conjugate the passivevoice of regular verbs.

PR IN C I PA L PA RTS.

PRESENT STEM, as PERFECT STEM , fuI

PRESENT. INF IN ITIVE. PERFECT . FUTURE PART .

sum esse fut fiitilrus

IND I CA TIVE PRESENT .

VOCA BULA RY.5

testis , testis , M . a. F ., witness . b ell icfisus , -a,-um , ad j., warlike.

A rar , A taris , ace. A rarim, M ., pulcher , -chra.

-chrum , adj.,the A rar ( now the Saone) . beautiful .

c6mes ,-i ti s , M . a F .

, a compan ion . m iilier , mulieris , F ., woman .

cas e, -as , F .,cottage. éguas , -i , M ., horse .


1. réli quae cbp iae the remaining forces .

2 . puella pul chra , a beautiful gir l.

3. Opp i dum magnum , a large town .

SYN . Pestino , hasten impatiently, hurry ; prbpéro , hasten

energy, but without hurry or impatience .

EXERC ISES.

Translate into English8 V.C . C S. V.C . C

1. Puella est pulchra . 2 . Equus est animal . 3. Oppidum

est magnum . 4. POpI‘

ilus ROmanuS est testis . 5 . Flumen

est A rar .

l 6 . Amici SI'

ImuS (we are) . 7 . Caesar est impé

rater . 8 . A riovistus est réx . 9. Virti'Is est cOmes Sapien

tiae . 10. Puella est nautae fi lia . 11. Est ( it is) casa

agricdlae . 12 . Est 2 ( there is) parva insiila . 13. Multa

animalia pulchra sunt.

"FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .

1. We are, they are, you are. 2 . The fields are large.

3. The islands are small . 4. She is the daughter of the

sailor . 5 . We are Romans . 6 . The cities are large .

7 . There is a large town . 8 . We are friends . 9. It is a

large town . 10. The town is large.


1. What is the rule for the gender of A rar 7

2 . In English, when the subject is indefinite, we use the word there

with some form of the verb to be ; as, ins ifla es t parva may mean

the island is small, an island is small, ( there) is a small island

, ( it) is a

small island, or the island is a small ( one) .

What is the present tense of sum ? Why is sum called a copula?

What is the noun or adjective after it called ? Why ? Note that the

complement, if a noun , agrees with the subject in case ; if an adjective,in gender, number, and case. Note that the verb sum in all the fore

going examples is copulative.

LESSON XXXIII .

INDIGATIVE OP SUM . PREDICATE GENITIVE.

129. The verb sum is conjugated in the Indicative

Mode as follows

P A RTI AL P A R AD IGM .

104 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .

1. The predicate genitive occurs most frequently with

sum and fac io , and the passives of puto , habeo , and exis timo .

2 . The genitive of Personal Pronouns is never used in this

construction the neuter of the corresponding Possess ive

Pronoun is used ; as ,

EXAMP LE .

est tuum ( not tui ) v i dére , it is your duty to see.

VOC A BULA RY.

multi tt'

id o ,-‘

inis , F ., multitude. tempus , tempbris , N ., time.

-6nis , F ., speech, oration. mercator , -6 ris , M ., merchant.

m i ser , -éra,—érum .adj ., wretched. mo rs , mortis , F ., death .

supp licium ,-'

i , N ., punishment. creber , crebra, crébrum , fre

impérium ,-'

i , N ., power , sway . quent, numerous .

SYN . P r6 v6co , (1) to call forth, summon ; ( 2 ) to appeal to the

people . A ppello , ( l ) to address w ith the appropriate title ; ( 2) toappeal to one magistrate from the decision of another .

EXERC ISES.


1. Regina érat pulchra . 2 . Viri in proelio fuérant .

3. A riovistus fuit réx GermanOrum . 4. Eri'

mus l beati .

5 . Eritis miséri . 6 . Puellae fuérunt pulchrae . 7 . Erantne

puellae in Silva? 8 . Num Caesar consul érit ? 9. COpiae

Belgarum in prOvincia sunt. 10. Shmus in Gallia.


1. The pronoun is contained in the verb .

Give the rule for the gender of nouns in-do. For nouns in -io. What

are the principal parts of sum ? Give a synopsis of sum in the indica

tive. What is the rule for a noun in the genitive? The position

?

What is meant by a predicate genitive On what does the predicate

genitive depend?

A DJECTIVES. TH IRD DECLENSION . 105

LESSON XXXIV.

ADJECTIVES. THIRD DECLENSION.

132 . Adjectives of the Third Declension are declined

l ike nouns, and may have

1. A different form for each gender in the nominative singular .

2 . Two forms,—one for the masculine and feminine, and an

other for the neuter .

3. The same forms for all three genders .

133. A djectives of the Third Declension in -er have three

endings in the nominative, and are declined like acer, sharp .

The stem ends in -i

PA R AD IGM .

Decline like Acer the following

1. céler , céléris , célére. swift.2 . équester , éques tri s , Equestre, equestrian .

3. alacer , fil écri s , al écre, lively, eager .

1. Celer is the only adjective of this class that keeps the

e before the r in the Oblique eases . C éler , when used as an

adjective , has the genitive plural in-ium ; but as a noun ,

denoting military rank , it has celerum in genitive plural , and

célére in ablative Singular .

OBS . Note that adjectives ending in-er have -i in the ablative

singular of all genders .


135 . A djectives of two endings have-is or -or in the nom

inative masculine and feminine , and -e or -as in the neuter .

They are declined like mi ti s , m ild , and mi ti or , milder .

P A R AD IGMS.

Singular . P lu ra l .

C ases .

Masc. and Fem. Neuter. Masc. and Fem. Neuter .

mitium

mitem

mitior , milder ( comparative degree) .

mi'

tior mitius mitibres

OBS . Adjectives ending in -is are also i-stems, and have -i in the

ablative of all genders . Note that comparatives have two endings

in the nominative ; and that the ablative singular ends in -e or -i,

and the nominative plural in-es and -a, not -ia.

1. M itis is declined like acris , acre ; all comparatives of

adjectives are declined like mitior, except p lus , more, which

is declined as follows

C ases . Singular . P lura l .

Masc. and Fem.

plfirium

plfiribus

A DJECTIVES. TH IRD DECLENSION . 109

P A R A D IGM S.

C ases . vétu s , old . len s , going . par , equa l .

M. St F . M. St F .

vétus

vétér is

vétéri

véterem vétus iéns

vétus

vétére -i ) eunte ,-i

vétérés vétéra

vétérum

vétéribus

vétérés , -is vétéra

vétérés vétéra

vétéribus

R ules for the Obl ique C ases of A dj ectives of th e Th ir d

D eclen s ion .

ABLATIVE SINGULAR .

137 . Most adjectives of the third declens ion have -i in the

ablative s ingular , but consonant stems have-i when used as

adjectives , -e when used as nouns . Participles in-a s , when

used as such , or as nouns , regularly have-e ; but as adjec

tives , -'

i .

GEN ITIVE AND NEUTER PLURAL .

138 . The genitive plural commonly has-ium . Consonant

stems have -ium when the stem-characteristic is preceded bya long vowel or by a consonant ; -um , when the stem-charac

teristic is preceded by a short vowel ; as , audax , gen . plur .

audacium ; d ives , gen . Sing . div i tis , gen . plur . d iv i tum ; so

vetus (vétéris ) , vétérum ; fiber (uberis ) , fibérum ; caelebs ,

unmarried , caeli bum. The neuter plural has-ia ; only vetus

has vétéra.

Participles have-ium ; as , aman s , aman tium .

139. Decline together the follow ing

l . puella félix , a happy girl . 3. d 6num ingén s , a large gift.

2 . mare ingéns , a vast sea. 4. servus audax , a bold servant.

euntés euntia parés par ia

cantium parium

euntibus paribus

euntés euntia parés paria

euntés euntia pi rés par ia

euntibus paribus


VOC A BUL A R Y.

félix , gen . fél'

icis , happy . récéns , gen . récentis , recent.

audax , gen . audacia, bold, auda brién s , gen . bri entis , r ising.

cions . mfi lier , mfi l iéris , F ., woman .

divés , gen . d iv l tis , r ich. fl én s , gen . flentis , weeping.

par , gen . pfiris , equal. vétus , gen . vétéri s , old, ancient.

pbténs , gen . pbten tis , powerful. grex , gen . grégis , M .

,flock.

EXERC ISES.


1. Milités sunt audacés . 2 . Régés sunt pOtentés .

3. Viri divités sunt. 4. Muliérés félicés érant. 5 . Belgae

spectant inl Orientem sOlem . 6 . Consilium diicis audax est.

7 . Muliérés fientés Caesarem implorant.


1. The soldier is brave . 2 . The leaders are hold . 3. The

men are rich . 4. The weeping woman implores the consul .

5 . The town is Old . 6 . The women are not happy .


1. Towards .

What adjectives have but one ending? A re they vowel or con

sonant stems ? DO they increase in the genitive? In what does the

ablative singular end? In what does the genitive plural end

? Does

the ablative always end in-i Does the genitive plural always have

-ium ? Explain when they have -i in the ablative, and when -e.

LESSON XXXVI .

COMPARISON OF ADJBOTIVBS.

A BLA T IVE W IT H C O M PA RA T IVES.

140. A djectives are compared, in Latin as in English,

in three ways : l st. Regularly, i .e., by adding peculiar

terminations ; 2d. By prefixing the adverbs magi: and

max ime , more and most ; and 3d. Irregularly .


142 . The Construction w ith Comparatives .

EXA MP LES.

l . servus est félicior rége, the slave is happ ier than the Icing.

2 . servus es t félicior quamlréx , the s lave is happ ier than the king.

OBS . In the first example, note that the comparative is followedby the ablative ; in the second example, quam, than, is used withthe comparative, and the following word is in the same case as thenoun preceding the adjective. The idiom is expressed in thefollowing rule

ABLATIVE WITH COMPARATIVES.

143. RULE XIII .— Th e comparative d egree is fol

low ed by th e ab lative w h en quam , th an , is om itted .

Comparatives with quam are followed (by the nomina

or) by the case of the corresponding noun before them.

EXA MPLES.

l . fortibrem vid i néminem quam Mariam, I have seen no

braver man than Mar ius or

2 . H i bernia minor quam Br itannia existimatur , I reland is

considered smaller than Br itain .

144. Model for pars ing comparatives and superlatives

s ervus es t félicior rége, the servant is happ ier than the king

félicior is an adjective in the comparative degree, from the posi

tive felix ; stemfella , comp . felicior, super . felicissimus . P élicior

is an adjective of the third declension , and is declined like mélior ,mélius , etc. It is nominative Singular masculine, and agrees w ith

servus . RuleVIII . : A dj ectives agree with their nouns in gender ,

number, and case.

VOCA BULA RY.

ri pax ,-acis , ravenous . Aer , aéris , M .

, the air .

C i céré , C i cérbnis , M ., C icero . cla ns ,-a ,

-um ,c lear , famous.d octus , -a, -um , learned . vélfix , gen . v élécis , swift.

grfiv is , -e , heavy, severe . mendax ,-acis , lying.

SYN . Vulnéro, to wound by a cut or thrust ; saucio , to woundany way.

COMP A RISON OF A DJECTIVES. 113

EXERC ISES.


l . Vir félix erat . 2 . Vir felicior érat . 3. Judex siipiéns

est. 4. Jiidéx Sapientio r érat quam réx . 5 . Siimus 2

pOtentés . 6 . Estis pdtentidrés . 7 . Régés sunt pOtentissimi .

8 . C icérO érat vir doctiss imus . 9. Liix est vélOcior quam

sdnitus . 10. ROma clarissima 8 urbs érat. l l . GallOrum

omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae . 12 . Jfira est mons altis

SImus .


l . The men are happy . 2 . We are happier . 3. The

soldiers are brave . 4. The brave soldiers are powerful .

5 . The soldiers are more powerful . 6 . The journev was

difficult. 7 . Gold is heavier than Silver . 8 . The servants

are very happy . 9. The Romans were braver than the

Gauls . 10. C icero was a very renowned orator . 11. The

soldiers are braver than the general.


1. Quam is a conjunction , and is not inflected ; it means than.

2 . The subject is included in the verb .

3. The superlative is not always translated by most ; it is sometimes

best rendered by very . SO the comparative may be translated in vari

ous ways ; as, audacior , bolder , ra ther bolder ( i .e. bo lder than usual ) ,too bold .

In how many ways are adjectives compared ? Decline the compara

tive Of poten s , altus . To what declension of adjectives do superla

tives belong? What is the rule for the agreement of adjectives ?

By what case is the comparative degree followed


LESSON XXXVII .

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

GENITIVE AND DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.

II . C omp a r ison by A dver bs .

145 . A djectives ending in-as preceded by a vowel

( except those in -quus) commonly form their compara

tive and superlative by means of the adverbs magis ,

more, and max ime, most.

EXA III P LES.

P o s itive . C om p a r ative . Sup e r lative .

idbneus ,fi t. mi xime idbneus

dfibius, doubtful. mi ximé diibius

nbxius, hurtful. maximé nbxius

1. A djectives in -quus form their comparatives and super

latives regularly ; as ,

antiquus , ancient, an tiquior , an tiquis s imus .

146 . Dative with A djectives.

EXAM PLES.

1. vict6 ria Germanarum pbpulb R bmané periciilasa est, the

victory of the Germans is dangerous to the Roman people.

2 . puella érat matri s imi lis , the girl was like her mother .

3. cas trie Idaneus lbcus es t, thep lace is suitablefor a camp .

OBS. In the foregoing examples, note the adjectives periculésa,s imi lis , and idbneus , and that each is construed w ith the dative.

The idiom is expressed in the follow ing rule

DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.

147 . RULE XIV. Th e d ative is used after man y

ad jectives to den ote th e ob j ect to w h ich th e qual ity

is d ir ected .

l . The adjectives that take the dative are chiefly those

signifying useful, p leasant, friendly, fit, like, inclined , ready,


LESSON XXXVIII .

COMPARISON OI‘ADJECTIVES.

I II . I r r egu la r an d D efective C omp a r ison .

149. A djectives in -er form their comparative regu

larly , but their superlative is formed by adding-r imus

to the nominative.

EXAMPLES.

1. A lso vetus , old (gen . veteris ) has the super . véterr imus .

2 . The following Six adjectives in -ilis , declined like

mII'

tis ,l form their superlative by adding

-limus to the stem,

after dropping the final vowel :

P o s itive . C om p ar a tive .

simi lis , similar .

dissimi lis, unlike.

gracilis , slender .

hiimi lis , low.

3. Compound adjectives ending in-dicus , -f icus , -v5lus ,

form their comparatives l l] -entior , and their superlatives in-enti ssz.mus ( as If from positives ending in

-ens )1 as ,

NOTE . These comparatives and superlatives are formed as from

the participles d icéns , saying, féciéns , doing, vbléns , wishing.

COMPA RISON OF A DJECTIVES. 117

4. The follow ing adjectives , in common use , are compared

irregularly

P o sitive . C om p a rat ive . Supe r lative .

150. Defective C omparison .

1. Seven adjectives have no positive ; they are

cl térior , cl tlmus , hither, hithermost.

deterior , d éterrlmus , worse .

interior , intlmus , inner, inner most.

6 cior , Ocis s imus , swifler.

prior , primus ,former , first.

prbpior , proxlmus , nearer , next.

ultérior , ultlmus ,farther , far/best.

2 . The follow ing are irregular in the superlativel

fl

mmfi

www

3. The following adjectives are irregular

jiivénis .l young. <313312; nfitfisénior

major natfi

mlnImus n i tu

sénex , old . i max imus natfi

151. Compare the following

1. céler , swift. 4. mi ser , wretched . 8 . latus , broad .

2 . audax , bold. 5 . émana, loving. 9. dfl lgens , diligent.

3. fortis , brave. 6 . s i p iens , wise. 10. bbnus , good.

7. altus, high.

mélior , better .

péjor , worse.

major , grea ter .

minor , less .

pli s (neut. more.

divitior ,

di tior ,

optimus , best.

pessimus , worst.

mi ximns , grea test.

minimus, least.

plfirimus, most.

divitissimus ,

ditisslmus ,

118 F IRST STEPS IN IJATIN .

OBS.1. The comparative may be translated in various ways ; as,audacior , bolder , rather bold, too bold .

OBS. 2 . The superlative audacis s lmus may mean boldest or

very bold .

OBS. 3. The superlative w ith quam denotes the highest degree

possible ; as, quam plfi rimi , as many as possible quam max imum ,

as large as possible.

OBS. 4. P er in composition with adjectives has the force of very ;as, perm i gnus , very great.

VOCA BULA RY.

primus ,-a,

-um ,first. sfipér ior , sfipérius , higher , upp er .

8 61, s é lis , M ., sun. HOr i tius , J.M .

, Horace.

terra, -ae, F ., earth. Li biénus , 4, M .

, Labienus .

lfina, -ae , F ., moon . Vergl lius , 4. M .

, Vergil .prOpior, prbp ius , nearer . H bmérus , -I, M .

, Homer .

cltérior , cl térius , hither . scientia, -ae, F ., knowledge, skill.

EXERC ISES.


1. Nostrae filiae pulcherrimae sunt. 2 . Iter per provin

ciam est facilius . 3. I tinera erant diffi cillima. 4. Sol

major est quam terra. 5 . Luna minor est quam terra .

6 . Régés cum proximis civitatibus pacem confirmant.

7 . Oppidum est in citeriore Gallia. 8 . Labienus summum

montem2occupavit. 9. Horatius erat bOnus poeta, Vergi

lius melior , HOméruS Optimus .


1. These words are added for convenience of reference ; they can

be omitted for the present.

2 . The summit of the mountain .

How do adjectives ending in-er form their comparativ es

? How

may superlatives be translatedit What adjectives form their superla

tives like faci lis What is meant by comparison of adjectives 11 How

many degrees of comparison are there ? How is each formed ? How

declined‘2



1. We are blamed . 2 . They are praised . 3. You were

being praised . 4. They will be praised . 5 . The girls are

called . 6 . The boy is calling. 7 . The men fight bravely .

8 . They will be carried. 9. We were being called . 10. They

w ill be called . 11. He is (being) praised . 12 . He was

being praised . 13. They blame the Romans severely .

14. They are blamed severely by the Romans .


What is meant by voice in grammar? How many voices ? Give

the meaning of the present passive in Latin . What verbs only can bein the passive voice

LESSON XL.

ADVERBS.

FORMAT ION, cuxsswmn non, AND COMPARISON.

I . F orma tion of A dver bs .

EXAMP LES.

OBS. In the foregoing examples, note that the ad

jpctives are all

of the first and second declensions ; that the adver s are formedby changing

-o the characteristic vowel of the stem,into -e

Hence the rule

157 . A dverbs are formed from adjectives of the Firstand Second Declensions by changing the characteristic

vowel of the stem to -é‘


II . C la ss ifi ca tio n of A d ver bs .

161. The adverbs enumerated in the foregoing examplesdenote, for the most part, the manner of the action , and are

therefore called adverbs of manner . A dverbs may also

denote the time, the p lace, the degree, or the cause of the

action expressed by the verb.

III . C omp a r is on of A dver bs .

162 . The comparative of adverbs that are regularly com

pared is the same as the neuter accusative singular of the

comparative of adjectives , and consequently ends in -ius .

l . The superlative of the adverb is formed from the super

lative of the adjective by changing the final vowel of the

stem to -é.

EXA M PLES.

2 . I f the adjectives are irregular in their comparison , the

adverbs have the same irregularity .

EXA M P LES.

A DVERBS. 125

3. A few adverbs not derived from adjectives are com

pared.

EXAMPLES.

P o s itive . C om par ative . Supe r lative .

diii ,for a long time.

saepe, qflen.

4. Form from each of the following adjectives an adverb,

and compare it

l . s lmfl i s , -e, like.

2 . fortis , -e, brave.

céler , i ris , i re, quick.

gram ,-e , heavy .

li ber , b ra, 4mm ,free.

amicus , -a ,-um, fr iendly.c

a

m-h

o:

163. Model for pars ing adverbs :

mfl ltés fortl ter piignan t , the soldiers fight bravely : fortl ter isan adverb of manner derived from the adjectivefortiscompared, fortiter, fortins, fortissime of the positive degree,

and modifies pfignant , according to Rule XVI . : A dverbs mod ifyverbs, adj ectives, and other adverbs .


What is an adverb ? What is the usual position of an adverb in a

sentence ? (A ns. It stands immediately before the word it limits . )How are adverbs classified How are adverbs formed from adjectivesof the second declension ? How from adjectives of the third deelen

sion ? How are adverbs compared? How are English adverbs formed ?

Form an adverb from brave ; compare it. Write a sentence in English

containing an adverb of place ; of manner ; of degree.

aeger, g ra, g ram, sick.

5mm , gen . 41th , loving.

61655119, gen.-n tis , elegant.

altus . -a., mm, high, deep .

ctipl dus , -a, -um , greedy.

ferbx , gen. é cis ,fierce.


OBS. 1. The perfect participle has three endings for the three

genders, and is declined like bbnus ; as , dmatus,-a,

-um. It mustagree, like an adjective, in gender, number, and case, with thesubject.

EXA MP LES.

puer im i tus es t , the boy was loved.

Virgo ami ta eat, the virgin was loved.

nbmen dmi tum es t, the name was loved .

puéri amati sunt, the boys were loved.

v irginés im i tae aunt, the virgins were loved.

nbm ina imi ta aun t, the names were loved .

OBS. 2 . In the foregoing examples, note that the participle

agrees w ith the subject like an adjective .

VOCA BULA RY.

PRES. IND . A CT . PERF . PART . PASS.

dn o , love. im i tum

laudo , p rais e. laudfitum

porto , carry . porté'

itum

vbco , call . vbcatum

énun tio , report.1 énun tifitum

occul to , conceal. occult i tum

comporto , collect. comport i tum

SYN . Infan s ( in , not, fari , to speak) , an infant ; puer , a boy, fromabout seven to sixteen ; { dwescen s ( adblesco , to grow) , a youth,from about sixteen to twenty

-four ; jfivénis , a youngman or woman,from about twenty

-four to forty-five .

EXERC ISES.


1. Laudati'

estis . 2 . Onus portatum est. 3. Régés

culpati sunt. 4. Vulnératus sum. 5 . Vulnerati’

sfimus .

6 . Nostra consilia host'

ibus 2 énuntiata sunt. 7 . In tant'

a

multitfidine équitum nostra fiiga occultata est. 8 . Mag na

cOpia frfiment’

i comportata erat.

SECOND CONJUGATION . 129


1. You were called . 2 . You were praised . 3. You have

been praised . 4. You shall have been praised . 5 . The

corn has been collected . 6 . A n abundance of corn has been

collected . 7 . They Shall have been praised . 8 . We had

been called . 9. They were loved .

a 10. They were (being)loved .

‘ 11. They were loving.

5 12 . The work was praised .

13. The girl has been called .


1. Written also enuncio.

2 . Dative case .

3. The aorist (perf . ) passive.

4. Imperfect passive.

5. Imperfect active.

From what stem is the perfect passive formed ? What are the

principal parts of a verb ? Mention the three stems . What verbs canhave a passive voice Can they take an object in the passive voice

LESSON XLII .

SECOND OONJUGATION.

PRESENT , IMPERFECT , AND FUTURE ACT IVE.—ABLATIVE

OF AGENT .

166 . A ll verbs whose characteristic vowel before

ending-re in the Present Infinitive is é

‘

, belong to

Second Conjugation . Thus

PRESENT.

mbus o

hab so


1. The Present, Imperfect, and Future A ctive are formedby adding the verbal endings to the present stem .

PA R T I A L P A R A D IGM .

[The personal endings are the same as in the first conjugation ; the“connective vowel,

”

or the final vowel of the stem,is 5 instead of d,

and is retained in the present tense.]

PRESENT.

P erson . F orm ation . Exam p le . Engli sh .

Sing. 1 Pres . stem o

P lur . l

IMPERFECT .

Pres . stem bam

bi s

bat

bimus

bant mbnébant

FUTURE.

Pres . stem bo

bis

bit

Plur . 1 bimus

bitis

bunt

a . The verbal endings are the same as in the first con

jugation . See 58 . 1.

167 . Ablative of Agent.

EXA MPLES.

1. vulnérfitus es t Sagitti s , he was wounded with arrows .

2 . vulnéri tus es t 5 mi'

ll te, he was wounded by a soldier .

mbnébo

mbnébis

m6nébit

mbnébimus

mbnébitis

m6nébunt

I was advising.

Thou wast advisingHe was advising.

We were advising.

You were advising.

They were advising.

I shall or will advise.

Thou wilt advise.

He will advise.

We shall or will advise.

You will advise

They will advise.


by the master . 12 . The girl is crowned by ( her ) mother .

13. He was wounded by a spear . 14. He was wounded by

a soldier . 15 . C rassus is called by (his ) friend . 16 . The

towns will be seiz ed by the Belgians .


What is the characteristic vowel of the second conjugation In

what does the present stem end A nalyz e the imperfect ; i.e., mention

the stem, the tense sign, the personal endings.

LESSON XLIII .

SECOND CONJUGATI ON.

PERFECT, PLUPERFECT , AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICAT IVEACT IVE.

169. The Perfect Stem of a regular verb of the

Second Conjugation may be formed,

1. By adding vi‘to the present stem. (This rule is

applicable to but few verbs . )2 . By dropping e of the present stem and adding at.

This is the more common way of forming the perfect stemof the second conjugation .

EXAMP LES.

PR INC IP A L PA RTS.

SECOND CONJUGATION . 133

170. The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Tenses

are inflected as follows

PA R TI A L PAR A D IGM .

[The personal endings are the same as in the first conjugation ; thecharacteristic vowel of the stem changes from i to Ein the third per

son plural Of the perfect, to t in the first person plural, and to e'

in the

pluperfect and future perfect ]


VOCA B ULA RY.

PRESENT . PRES . STEM. PRES. INF .

d éleo , destroy . délé d élére

comp leo ,fi ll . comp lé comp let e

mbneo , advise. mbné mbnére

taceo , be silent. tacé tact-Ere

d ébeo , owe. débé d ébére

hi b eo , have. habé h i bére

dbceo , teach. dbcé dbcére

téneo , hold . téné ténére

man eo , remain . man ( 6 manére

augeo , increase. aug( é augére

jfib eo , command . jiib ( é jfib ére

EXERC ISES.


1. Délévit, délévérant, délévérint. 2 . DOcuéras , dOcuér it.

3. MOnuistiS . 4. Habuérit, mOnuérunt, dOcuérunt. 5 . DO

cuist‘

i puellam. 6 . Régi'

na mOnuérit. 7 . Ténuimus Sagittas .

8 . Rég‘

ina timet. 9. Puellae timuérunt. IO. Mbnébit,mOnuérit, mOnuérant . l l . Dbcuéras , dOcuérint, dbcébunt,

dOcent. 12 . Mansit, auxit, jussit.


1. We have destroyed , they had destroyed . 2 . We have

taught, he has taught. 3. Thev were teaching, he had

taught. 4. They taught, they are s ilent, they were advis ing.

5 . You fear , you were fearing , you w ill fear , you have

feared , you had feared . 6 . They command , they will

command , they have commanded , they had commanded .

7 . They have increased .

NOTES A N D QUEST I ON S.

1. The -vi of the perfect stands for fui , perfect of sum ; as, ima

( st. of m e ) fuI perf . amatui'

ami ui amavi so délé (st.

of déleo ) inf déléfui déléuI délév i ; m6n (é~ ) int

monfuI m6nuI ( the final vowel of the stem being dropped ) ; also ,dOO Ie-I fuI d ocfui aboni . Sometimes the final vowel of the


OBS. Formula for the conversion of sentences to the passive

vorce z

172 . The subject of the active voice becomes , in the

passive voice , the A blative of A gent (with a prepos ition ) ,or Instrument (Without a preposition ) . The object in the

active voice becomes the subject in the passive.

EXA IIIPLES.

v . T . o .

1. magister laudat puérum

v . P.v . Ab. of Agent.

puer laudatur amagis trb

s. v .T . o .

2 . Sagitta vulnérat mfl i tem

v . P.v . A b. of Inst.

miles vulnératur Sagitta

EXERC ISES.


1. Délétur , timentur , timébantur , timébuntur . 2 . Dbcétur,

dbcébatur , ddcébitur . 3. Ténébantur , ténébat. 4. Hébéris ,

habébaris , habébéris . 5 . Onéra gravia a servis timébantur .

6 . Summus mons 1 a TitO LabiénO ténébatur . 7 . Disciphl‘

i

a magistrb dOcentur 8 . MOnébimin‘

i , mOnébatur, mOné

batis . 9. A ugentur , j ubétur , jiibébitur .

SECOND CONJUGA TION . 137


1. They are ( being) taught, they were (being) taught,they will be taught. 2 . The master teaches the pupils .

3. The pupils are taught by the master . 4. He is feared ,

he was feared , he will be feared . 5 . We are advised , we

were advised , we shall be advised . 6 . The boys were being

taught by the master . 7 . The soldiers are wounded by the

arrows .


1. The top of the mounta in ; lit .,the highest mountain.

Define voice in grammar . From what stem are the tenses of in

complete action formed ? Give the rule for changing a sentence from

the active to the passive voice .

LESSON XLV.

SECOND CONJUGATION.

PERFECT, PLUPERFECT , AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICAT IVEPASSIVE.

173. The Part icipial Stem of verbs of the Second Conju

gation is formed by adding-to ( or -so) , nom .

-tus ( or -sus ) ,to the verb-stem. Some verbs change final 6 of the present

s tem to Short i in the participial stem others drop the stem

vowel altogether . Many verbs of this conjugation have no

participial stem .

P re s . I n d icat ive . P r e sen t Stem . P e r fect Stem . P art . Stem .

déleo, destroy. déléto

mOneO, advise.

dOceO, teach.

maneo, rema in .

haereo, stick

Sileo, be silent.

timeo,fear .

1. The tenses of the indicative mode , formed from the

participial stem , are inflected as follows


PA R TIA L P A R A D IGM .

[The analysis of the tenses formed from the participial stem in the

second conjugation is the same as in the first conjugation ]

P e r son . F o rm ation .

tus éro

tus éris

tus érit

ti érimus

ti ér‘

itis

ti ét ant

PERFECT A ND A ORIST.

Exam ple .

Engl ish .

Perfect. A orist.

PLUPERFECT.

I had been advised.

Thou hadst been advised.

He had been advised .

We had been advised.

You had been advised .

They had been advised .

FUTURE PERFECT.

mbni tus éro

mbnitus eris

mbnitus et it

mbniti er‘

imas

mbnitl en tis

mOniti érunt

I sha ll have been advised .

Thou will have been advised.

He will have been advised .

We shall have been advised .

You will have been advised .

They will have been advised .

VOC A BULA R Y.

flétum ,1weep .

p laci tum ,2p lease .

nOcItum , hurt.

con tentumfi hem in .

cénsum ,3 think.

haesum ,‘stick .

rIsumf’ laugh .


LESSON XLVI .

FOURTH DECLENSION.

Nouns of the Fourth Declension end in -as mas

and at neuter . They are declined a OIIOws :

P A RA D I GMS.

FOURTH DECLENSION . 141

1. The stem of nouns of the fourth declension ends in -u which

is usuallv changed to i before-bus . Masculine and feminine nouns

form the nominative by adding 3 ; neuters, which are very few,

have for the nominative the Simple stem lengthened to u.

2 . The dative and ablative plural of the following words ends

in -ilbas artus , j oint, partus , child-birth, portus , harbor, tr ib us ,tribe, véru ; and also of words of two syllables in

-cus, as lacus .

3. A few nouns of the fourth declension are femin ine ; as, dOmus ,

house, { dds (pl) , Ides, manna, hand, i cus , needle, and some others .

4. Carefully distinguish the fourth from the second de

clension

(1) A noun with nominative in -as and genitive in-t is of the

second declension .

( 2) A noun w ith nominative in -as and gen itive in is of the

fourth declension .

‘VOC A BULA R Y.

exercl tus , dis , M ., army . currus , a s . M ., a char iot.

(16mm , F ., house . mfinus , dds . F .

, a hand .

ifisus , M ., p laying, sport. Sénatus , 418 , M ., senate.

equi tatus , 41s , M ., cavalry . con spectus , -fi s , M., sight, view .

Sons , 413, F ., a needle. sus tIneo , sus tinére, sus tlnui ,

ar cus , 413, M ., a bow . sus ten tum , sustain .

EXERC ISES.


l . Sénatus exercitum laudat. 2 . A gricbla taurum corni

bus ténet . 3. Pater dOmi‘

Is aedificat. 4. Currfis hostium

ab omnibus militibus visi’

érunt. 5 . Galba dbmi‘l fuit.

6 . In conspectfi exercitiis . 7 . In conspectfi exercitiis nostr‘

i

agri vastantur . 8 . Equitatus sustinébat hostium impétum.


1. The locative form dOmi means at home ; it has the same form as

the genitive of the second declension.

How many declensions in Latin How is each distinguished Of

what gender are most nouns of the fourth declension ? Mention a

feminine noun of this declension.


LESSON XLVII .

FIFTH DECLENSION.

175 . Nouns of the Fifth Declension end

are feminine. They are declined as follow s

P A R A D I GMS.

1. Only two nouns of the fifth declension are mascul ine : di és ,

a day, méridi és , midday ; though d ies is sometimes feminine in

the singular, especially when it means afixed time.

2 . Only two nouns of this declension are declined throughout

the plural ; they are 6163 and res . In some words, only the nomi

native, accusative, and vocative plural are used ; others want the

plural entirely .


LESSON XLVIII .

THIRD CONJUGATION.

PRESENT, IMPERFECT , AND FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE.

176 . Verbs of the third conjugation are distinguished byhaving e short before -re in the present infinitive . The verb

stem, obtained by dropping this characteristic é, ends in a

consonant or in u .

EXAMPLES.

PRINC IP AL PAR TS.

1. The Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative A ctive

are inflected as follows

PA RTI AL P A R A D I GM .

[The characteristic vowel of the present stem changes to i, u, etc., in

the inflection of the verb. The personal endings and tense Signs are

the same as in the first conjugation, except those of the future, where

the characteristic vowel changes to d or 6 before the personal endings .]

TH IRD CONJUGA TION 145

IMPERFECT.

P e r son . F orm atio n . Exam p le . Engl ish .

Sing. 1 Pres . stem bamu has

bat

P lur . l bi mus

batis

bant

FUTURE.

Sing. 1 Pres . stem m

P lur . 1

C BS. In the formation of the tenses, note that the future of the

first and second conjugations always has the tense Sign-bi the

i disappears before 0 ( as, imabib imab o ) , and becomes u in

the third person plural . The future of the third conjugation con

sists of the present stem ( the characteristic vowel being lengthened)and the rsonal endings ; i becomes e in the second and third

Dersons Singular, and in the plural.

VOCA BULA RY.

scrfbére s crip si , write.

légbre 1631, collect, read.

ins truére in s truxl , erect, arrange.

contendére contendi, hasten.

d imittére dimis i , dismiss .

gérére gess i , carry, carry on.

mittére mist, send.

cingére cin z l , surround .

EXERC ISES.


S. 0 . V. T .

1. Puer librum scribébat .

légébat. 4. Hostés urbem cingunt.

T . S. 0 .

2 . Mittitis servOs . 3. Frater

5 . D isciphli littéras

I was ruling.

Thou wast ruling.

He was ruling.

We were ruling.

You were ruling.

They were ruling.

I sha ll or will rule.

Thou will rule.

He will rule.

We shall or will rule.

You will rule.

They will rule.


scribent. 6 . Caesar aciem instruébat. 7 . Puer dOna mittet .

8 . Caesar célériter l concilium dimittit. 9. Caesar in I taliam

mag ais itinéribus 2 contendit. 10. Belgae cum Germanis

continenter bellum gérunt. 11. Helvétii légiitbs ad Caesa

rem mittunt.


1. We write, we were writing, we Shall write. 2 . He

reads , he was reading, he will read . 3. We send , we were

sending, we shall send . 4. The queen writes a book .

5 . Friends will send books . 6 . The boys were writing.

7 . They had called a Slave . 8 . Caesar hastens into Gaul.

9. The Romans are carrying on war with the Gauls . 10. We

read , they write. 11. We draw up the line of battle, we

were drawing up the line of battle .


1. For words not given in the special vocabularies, look in the

general vocabulary at the end of the book .

2 . By long marches.

Define sentence. What are the essential parts Of a sentence ? Men

tion the personal endings of the present, of the imperfect, of the future

indicative.

LESSON XLIX .

THIRD CONJUGATION.

P ERFECT , PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICAT IVEACT IVE.

177 . The Perfect Stem of verbs of the third conjugationis regularly formed by adding

-si to the verb-stem.

EXA MP LES.

TH IRD CONJUGA TION . 149

179. Laws of Euphony ;

b is changed to p before 8 .

EXA M PLES.

scn'

bo , wr ite, perf. ( scrib s i ) soripal .

nfibo , marry ( of woman) , perf. (nubs i ) nupsl .

2 . t and d are dropped before 3, or become with 3, ss .

EXAM PLES.

mitto , send, perf . (mittal ) mil l .

0laudo , shut, ( C lauds l ) C lausl .

laedo , inj ure, ( laeds l ) laesl .

cédo , yield, ( ceds i ) 00831.

3. c, g, qu , h , w ith 3, become x.

EXA M PLES.

d ico , say, perf . ( di cs i ) dixl .

jungo , j oin , ( jungs i ) jua .

0oquo , cook, ( coquai )tréh o , draw, ( traks i ) trfixf.

4. Verbs whose stems end in l , m , n , or r , and a few

others , form their perfects in-ui ; those whose stems end in

a vowel form their perfects in-vi -t

‘

tvi ,-évi , -ivi ) .

EXA MPLES.

0610 0616re 061ui , cultivate.

£10 Slére Slut, nourish.

sEro sérére SEruI, connect.

frémo frémére frémui , rage.

pbno pbnére pbsui , p lace.

pas co (v. st. pa pas cére pavi , feed.

cerno cernére crév i (17 8 . decide.

clipio C fipére clip ivl , desire.

VOCA BULARY.

regbre réxI, rule.

oarpére carpal , p luck.

d iicére atiz i , lead.

pingére pinxi , paint.

nectére néxI, or néxui , tie.

nfibére 11111381.marry ( said of a woman) .

as cendére ascendl , ascend.


EXERC ISES.

Form the perfect of the following verbs , and account for

the euphonic changes

1 d imitto , dismiss . dico , say, tell.

2 . 0ontendo ,

‘hasten . vinoo , conquer .

3. Oingo , surround . (161130, select.

4. d ilco , lead. tr i ho , draw.

5 . tégo , cover . d efendo , defend.

6 . lud o , p lay. C laudo , shut.

7 . tango ,2 touch. frango ,

3 break.


1. Régina nuntiOs nbn misérat. 2 . Puéri épistfilas scrip

Sérunt. 3. Caesar aciem instrl‘

ixérat. 4. Impérator urbem

miiris‘cinxit. 5 . Belgae cum Germanis continenter bellum

gessérunt. 6 . Még ister filium et puellam5 dOcuit. 7 . Rég

‘

ina

et réx épistiilas scribent.

6


1. The boys have written letters . 2 . We have written ,

we had written , we shall have written . 3. He has conquered ,

he had conquered , he Shall have conquered . 4. They have

sent, they sent , they had sent, they Shall have sent. 5 . The

boys and the girls wrote“ letters . 6 . The slaves have led

the boys and girls .

“ 7 . They have defended. 8 . We are

playing. 9. He hastened into Gaul.


1. Stems ending in -nd form the perfect by adding -i, not S i .

2 . tango : verb-stem tag present stem tang present tango, infini

tive tangé'

re, perfect te'

ligi .

3. The verb-stem is frag the present stemfrong perfectfrigi .4. Why ablative

5 . When the object consists of two or more nouns joined by st, and,

both must be in the accusative.

6 . When the subject consists of more than one noun joined byat, and, the verb must be plural .

How is the perfect stem of the third conjugation regularly formed?

How are stems of the third conjugation classified ?


1. Note the change in the present of Short e to i , and in

the third person plural to n . In the imperfect the character

istic is long e in the future a , which changes to 5.

ABLATIVE OF A CCOMPA NIMENT .

181. RULE XVIII —’1‘h e ablat ive is used to d enote

accom pan im en t, usually w ith th e p r eposition cum .

1. Note that w ith , when it means together w ith or in com

pany with , is translated by cum w ith the ablative .

EXA MP LES.

1. m itto servum cum puérb, I send a slave WITH A BOY.

2 . nos tri équi tés cum fund i tfiribus Sagittarilsque fl iimen

tr an sgres si aunt , our cavalry crossed the r iver WITH THE

SLINGERS A N D A RCHERS.

2 . Carefully distinguish this construction from the instru

mental ablative , which Shows with what or by what an action

is done .

EXA M PLE .

puer vulnératus es t Sagitti'

s , the boy was wounded with (by) arrows.

VOCA BULA RY.

PRESENT . PRES. INF . PERFECT.

0ingo cingére

frango frangere

OC C Ido occid ére

d iv l d o d iv l dére

d i ligo d i ligére

d éligo d éllgére

d éfend o d éfend ére

vinco v in cére

v ivo vivére

lasao laedére

flecto flectére

mergo mergére

OBS. Form the perfect of each verb,

phonic changes .

PARTIC IPLE.

0in0tum, surround.

fractum , break.

occisum, kill.

d ivisum , divide.

dfl ectum, love.

d éle0tum , select.

d éfen sum , defend.

v i0tum, conquer .

v ictum , live.

laesum , hurt.

fléxum , bend .

mersum , dip .

and account for the eu

TH IRD CONJUGA TION . 153

EXERC ISES.


1. Déligitur . 2 . C ingitur . 3. Puer ab omnibus diligé

batur . 4. Urbs miirb l cingitur. 5 . Urbs a? civibus defen

ditur . 6 . Omnés vincentur . 7 . Téli'

s occidéris . 8 . A

Caesare dficébamur . 9. a dficébamini . 10. Bella géré

bantur . 11. Cum Germfinis pfignant. 12 . Cum décima

legibne vénit. 13. Titus cum equitibus mittitur.


They are ( being) selected . 2 . We are conquered , we

were conquered , we shall be conquered . 3. The city will be

surrounded by a wall. 4. The soldiers will be conquered by

the enemy . 5 . The soldiers will be killed with the weapons .


1. Why ablative ?

2 . Why is the preposition expressed?

What are the personal endings of the present passive voice ? Whatare the future endings of this conjugation ? What verbs have a passivevoice What is meant by voice in grammar

LESSON LI .

THIRD CONJUGATI ON.

PERFECT, PLUPERFECT , AND FUTURE PERFECT

PASSIVE —TWO ACC USAT IVES W‘ITH ONE

182 . The Participial Stem Of verbs of the third conjugation is formed by adding

-to nom.-tus ( or -so nom.

-sus) ,to the verb-stem.


1. The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative

Pass ive are inflected as follows

P A R TI A L P A R A D IGM .

[The personal endings, tense signs, and formation, are the same as

in the first and second conjugations .]

PERFECT A ND A ORIST .

P e r son . F o rm ation . Examp le .

Perfect. A orist.

I was ruled.

P lur . 1

PLUPERFEC T .

P er son . F o rm ation . Exam p le . Eng l ish .

Sing. 1 Verb-st. tus Cram rectus éram I had been ruled .

tus érés rectus ér i s Thou hadst been ruled .

tus brat rectus érat He had been ruled .

P lur . l ti éri mus recti éramus We had been ruled .

ti éri tis recti ér i tis You had been ruled .

ti érant recti érant They had been ruled .

FUTURE PERFECT.

P ll l l' . 1

183. Euphonic changes :

I . g, qu , h become 0 before t.

EXA MP LES.

régo , rule, part. stem ( regtus )c uo , cook, ( coqutus )tr i be , draw, ( trfihtus )

I shall have been ruled .

Thouwilthavebeen ruled .

He will have been ruled .

We shall have been ruled .

Youwill have been ruled .

They will huve been ruled .

156 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN.

Learn the principal parts of the following verbs , and

account for the euphonic changes

v ivo v ivére v ixi victum. live.

d iioo d iicere dfixI dactum , lead.

div i de div i ders d iv is i divlsum. divide.

lilao lfi dére lfi s i lfisum, p lay.

cano canére céclni sing.

légo légére lég‘

i lectum , read.

184. Two A ccusatives w ith oneVerb.

EXA MP LES.

1. C as sarem sententiam rbgi vit, he asked (”

cesar (his) opinion .

2 . C aesar A edufis frumentum fl i gl tavit, Caesar demanded corn

of the fEdui.

3. Titus régem s erménem célav it, Titus concealed the conversa

tionfromthe Icing.

4. C aesar ssntentiam a cons ifl e rbgatus est, Cwsar was asked

his opinion by the consul.

5. pacem ab R émani'

s peti t , he seeks peacefrom the Romans.

OBS. Note that in Exs . 1, 2 , and 3 the verbs of asking, demand

ing, concealing, are in the active voice, and are followed by two

accusatives , one of the person , the other of the thing. In Ex. 4 the

verb of asking is in the passive voice, and the accusative of the

person in the active becomes the subject in the passive . In EX . 5

the person after a verb of asking (petit ) is ut in the ablative with

a preposition . The idiom is expressed in t e following rule

TWO ACCUSATIVES. PERSON AND THING .

185. RULE XIX. Verbs of a sk ing , d eman d in g ,

teach in g , and con cea l in g tak e tw o accusatives, one of

th e person an d the oth er o f th e th ing .

1. The accusative of the thing may remain with the passive

voice of verbs of teaching, and also w ith rbgo .

2 . P éto and postino generally take the accusative of the thingand the ablative of the person w ith a or ab ; quaero . the accusative

of the thing and the ablative of the person with 6 , ex , 5 , ab , or de.

SYN . P éto , to beg, rbgo , to aslc, are general terms for either a

request or a demand ; pos tino , to demand as a r ight flagl to , to de

mand with earnestness ; posco , to ask as a right, as a pr ice, or salary.

FOURTH CONJ UGA TION . 157

EXERC ISES.


1. Ducti érant, missus est, ciucti sunt. 2 . Victi sunt.

3. Puet i ii magistro mOniti érant. 4. Castra vallO cincta l

sunt. 5 . Exercitas ROmanuS ab Helvétiis sub jfigum missus

est. 6 . Nuntii ad exercitum nostrum missi sunt. 7 . Réx ct

régina omnibus 2 ce‘

iri 3 fuérunt. 8 . Caesar omnia consilia

A eduOs eelat. 9. Consul Cas sarem sententiam rOgabat.


1. They have been led , they have been sent. 2 . He has

been sent, we have been sent, he had been sent. 3. You

Shall have been sent. 4. The city has been surrounded by

a wall . 5 . The Helvetians have been sent. 6 . We have

been conquered , we had been conquered , we Shall have been

conquered . 7 . He was sent, he will be sent, he has been

sent, he had been sent. 8 . We shall not be conquered bv

the enemy . 9. They asked Titus his Opinion . 10. Caesar

concealed his plans from the Helvetians . 11. The Helvetians

seek peace from Caesar .


1. Neuter plural .

2 . Dative after cm .

3. Masculine by preference.

LESSON LII .

FOURTH CONJUGATION.

PRESENT, IMPERFECT , AND FUTURE INDICAT IVE ACTIVE.

ACC USAT IVE OF THE SAME PERSON.

186 . The Fourth Conjugation includes all verbs that have

i long before-re in the present infinitive. The present stem

is found by dropping-re of the present infinitive .

EXAM PLE .

PRES. IND . PRES. INF .

aud io , hear . audIre


1. The Present, Imperfect, and Future Tenses , Indicative

A ctive , are formed by adding the verbal endings to the

present stem .

P A R T I A L P A R AD I GM .

[The personal endings and the tense signs are the same as in the

fi rst and second conjugations, except in the future, where the charac

teristic vowel of the stem becomes a or E. The third person plural

indicative is audiunt, not audi-uh ]

PRESENT.

P e r so n . F o rm ation . Examp le . Eng l ish .

Sing. l Pr es . stem o

P lur . 1 audimus

andiunt They hear .

IMPERFECT .

Pres . stem bam

bi s

bat

P lur . 1 bamus

batis

bant

FUTURE.

Sing. 1 Pres . stem m I shall or will hear .

Thou wilt hear .

He will hear .

P lur . 1 We shall or will hear .

You will hear .

18 7 . Two A ccusatives of the Same Person .

EXAMP LES.

C aesarem con sfilem cre i v érun t , they elected Cazsar consul.

con sfi lés creantur C aesar et Serv ilius , Cwsar and Servilius

are elected consuls .

ROmfi lus urb em R amam vacav it , Romulus called the city Rome.

urbs R éma a R émfi lo v bcata es t.

I was hearing.

Thouwast hear ing.

He was hearing.

We were hearing.

You were hearing.

They were hearing.



1. When suns refers to a noun in the plural, as is the case in th is

sentence, render it their ; when it refers to a noun in the singular ,

render it his , her , or its .

2 . By means of, etc. Why ablative ?

3. Their can be omitted in translating.

What are the personal endings of the present ? What is the presen tstem of audi o ? What is a predicate accusative ? How many con

jugations ? How do you distinguish each ? What is the present sternof each ? How found ?

LESSON LIII .

FOURTH CONJUGATION.

PERFECT , PLUPERFECT , AND FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE.

THE SUBJECT IVE AND THE OBJECT IVE GENIT IVE.

189. The Perfect Stem of a regular verb of the fourth

conjugation is formed by adding-vi to the present stem .

EXA MP LE .

PRESENT. PRES. STEx . PERF . STEM .

audi o , hear. aud i


A ctive are inflected as follows

PA R T I A L P A R A D IGM .

[The personal endings, the tense signs, the formation, and the changes

of the characteristic vowel of the stem are the same as in the first,second, and thi rd conjugations .)

PERFECT A ND A ORIST .

Eng l ish .

Perfect. A orist.P e r son . F o rm ation . Exam p le .

Perf. stem

sti

t

P lar . 1 mus

stis

runt

or re

I have heard . I heard .

Thou hastheard . Thou didst hear .

He has heard. He heard .

We have heard . We heard .

You have heard . You heard.

They have heard . They heard.

FOURTH CONJUGATION . 161

PLUPERFECT.

Sing. l Perf. stem ram andivéram I had heard.

P lur . l rimus audivbriimus We had heard.

ri tis audi'

vbri tis You had heard .

rant andivérant They had heard.

FUTURE PERFECT.

Sing. 1 Perf. stem bro audivéro I shall have heard.

brie audivér is Thouwilt have heard.

brit andi'

vérit He will have heard.

P lur . 1 brimus audivérlmus We will have heard.

2 . Synopsis of Rules for Forming the Perfect Stem

1. MostVowel Stems ( 55 .3) form the perfect stem by addingan -ui) to the characteristic vowel of the present stem : as, fin e ,

imav i daeo , délév l ; mbnee , mbnui ; audio, audlvl .

2 . Most Consonant Stems form the perfect stem by adding-st

to the verb-stem : as, dfice , dfixi ; tége , text.

3. Many Labial and Lingual Stems, and a few others, form the

perfect stem by addingout to the verb-stem : as, dbme , dbmui

510, 51111; wneo, ténui.

4. A few Consonant Stems form the perfect stern simply byadding 4 to the verb

-stem ( this is the case when the stem vowel is

long by nature or by position) as, accendo , accend i ; verte ,

verti ; prE-no do, prE-hendi .

5. The PerPect Stem is sometimes formed by reduplication and

by adding 4 to the verb-stem ( the stem vowel a is generally weak

ened to i, but before r to e) as , 056 0, cécldi ; tondee , tbtendl ;

ci ne , céclnl ; pat io , pl péri .

6. Some verbs lengthen the stem vowel and add -t to form the

perfect ( that is, the reduplication disappears and the vowel is

lengthened) : as, 1650 ( lb-Hg! lé-ig-i 165i ) , légi ; fi cie ( fé-fic-ifé-lo-I feet ; ci ple , cépi ; age , 631.

OBs . The v is often dropped and the syllable contracted ; as ,imi lvfl rat lmi rat, audi (v )6rat audiérat.


190. Subjective, Possessive, and Objective Genitives .

EXAMP LES.

1. oppidum R émdrum, a town of belonging to) the Remi .2 . Div ltlaci studium, the zeal of Divitiacus the zeal that

D ivitiacus manifests) .

3. imer glériae, love of glory a desire to obtain glory) .

4. timer hostium crescit, fear of the enemy fear towardsthe enemy, not fear exper ienced by the enemy) increases.

OBS. In the first example, note that the genitive designates the

assessor it is called the possessive genitive. In Ex. 2 the genitive

esignates the subj ect or agent of the action or feelin it is called

the subj ective genitive. In Exs . 3and 4 the genitive esignates the

obj ect towards which the action or feeling is directed ; it is called

the obj ective genitive. Hence the qualifying genitive may be

1. A POSSESSIVE GEN ITIVE, denoting the author or thepossessor ;as , C aeséris prdv incia. Casar

’s province.

2 . A SUBJECT IVE GEN ITIVE, denoting the subj ect or agent of theaction or feeling ; as, amer Dei , the love of God the

love which He feels ) .3. A N OBJECTIVE GEN ITIVE, denoting the obj ect of the action

or feeling ; as, amor D el , love to towards) God.

EXERC ISES.


1. Pfinivit, pfinivérat, punivérit. 2 . A udivéram, audi

véro . 3. Milites castra mfinivérant. 4. Pfinivimus puérum.

5 . Erfidivi , ériidivit, érfidivisti , ériidivéram . 6 . Puéri 1

librum ténés . 7 . Légatus consilia GallOrum énuntiat.


1. We have heard, we heard, we had heard,‘We shall have

heard . 2 . They have punished , they had punished , they

will have punished . 3. He has slept . 4. We fortify, we

have fortified, we had fortified , we shall have fortified.


1. Why genitive ?

What is meant by the possessive genitive ? Give the rule for the

geni tive after nouns . What is the objective genitive ? How is the

perfect stem of verbs of the fourth conjugation formed ?


182 . Dative with Intransitive Verbs .

EXAMPLES.

1. haec sententia puéré placet, illa disp licet, this opinion

p leases the boy, that disp leases (him) .2 . mili tia es t duci parere , it is the duty of a soldier to obey the

leader .

3. fertfina fi vet fortibus ,fortunefavors the brave.

OBS. We have already learned that the dative is the case of theindirect object, and is used to express the person or thing to or

for whom or which anything is done. In the sentence, I send the

book to the boy, boy in Latin must be in the dative, as mitte librum

puérd ; but in the sentence Caesar comes to the city, city in Latin is notdative, a preposition must be used, as C aesar ad urbem vénit.

In the foregoing examples, note that the verbs are intransitive ;that they signify to favor , to lease, to obe etc. ; that the are fol

lowed by the dative general y without t e Sign to or or . The

idiom is expressed in the following rule

DATIVE WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS.

193. RULE XXI . Th e dative Of th e indir ect

Object may be used w ith most intran sitive verbs

sign ifying to favor , p lease, trust, a ss is t, and th e ir

con traries ; also , to believe , p er suade, comm and , obey ,

ser ve, r es ist, thr ea ten , sp a r e, p a r don , be an gr y .

I . Some verbs which , from their signification , might be

included in the foregoing lists are transitive, and take the

accusative ; as , juvo , ad juvo, to help , laedo, to inj ure, delecto,to delight, offendo , to oj

‘

ead , and jubeo, to command .

2 . Verbs compounded with sans , bane, male, take the

dative.

EXA MPLE.

illis s i tis fécére, to satisfy them, lit. to do enoughfor them.

EXERC ISES.


1. Miiniébantur , pfiniéris , piiniuntur . 2 A uditur , audié

bantur , audiétur . 3. Castra a Labienb l mfiniébantur

4. Bellum a Caesare finiébatur . 5 . Milités castra2 miime

bant. 6 . Mali puéri'

a magistrO piinientur . 7 . Imprbbi' 3 a

mégistriitibus piinientur . 8 . Caesar bellum finit. 9. Bellum

FOURTH CONJUGA TION . 165

ii Caesi re finitur . 10. Parce puéro. l l . Prbbus a invidet

ném‘

ini .‘ 12 . Mi lédicimus miilis .

3


1. He will be heard , they will be heard , they were (being)heard , they are ( being) heard. 2 . The soldiers fortify the

camp . 3. The camp is fortified by the soldiers . 4. The

war is (being) finished , the war w ill be finished , the wars

were (being) finished . 5 . The boys are (being) punished ,the boys will be punished , the boys were (being) punishedby the mas ter . 6 . The soldiers obey the leader .


1. See 17 2 . 2 . See 80. 2 . 3. Used as a noun ; see 83. 4.

4. The genitive and ablative of nullus are used instead of néminis

and némine.

What is the passive voice ? In what case is the agent after a verb

in the passive voice ? What are the principal parts of a verb in the

passive voice ?

LESSON LV.

FOURTH cosmeArIos .

PERFECT , PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT PASSIVE.

194. The Participial Stem of the fourth conjugation is

formed by adding-to, nom.

-tus (or -so , nom.-sus ) , to the

present stem.

EXA M P LE .

PRES. Su n . PERF . Su n . PAB’N C . STEII .

eudi aud iv i eudite

PR IN C I PA L PA R TS.

A CTIVE VOICE.

PRES. INF PERFECT.

audire aud iv i

PA SSIVE VOICE.

PRES. INF . PERFECT .

audiri aud itus , -a, -um sum



Passive are all formed by adding to the perfect participle

the present, imperfect, and future tenses of the verb sum.

P A R T I A L P A R A D IGM.

[The personal endings, tense signs , the changes of the characteristic

vowel of the stem,and the formation

, are the same as in the other

conjugations ]

2 . The Participial Stem of verbs of all four conjugationsis generally formed by adding

-to ( euphonically -so) nom.

-tus (or -sus) , to the present stem.


LESSON LVI .

THIRD CONJUGATION.—VERBS IN -to .

197 . A few verbs of the third conjugation ending in-io,

ior ( passive) , are inflected in the tenses formed from the

present stem like the fourth conjugation wherever the fourthhas i followed by a vowel .

P A R T I A L P A RA D IGM .

IMPEBFECT.

ci pbrem l ci piébar

FUTURE.

capiéris (re)

PLUP . cépéram captus éram

IMP . ci pe capére

INF . capére

PART . ci piéns captiirus

capbrer

capiémur

capiémini

captus essem

capimini

chpiendus

GER. chpiendi , -db, -dum SUP . captam, captii

TH IRD CONJUGATION . 169

eiipére eiip itum, desire.

factum , make, do .

fossum, dig.

jaotum, throw, hurl.

partnm, bring forth.

qum um, shake.

raptum , seize.

taste.

EXERC ISES.

Translate into English :

l . Fiigiunt, fiigiébant, fiigient, fi'

Igiant. 2 . Jiicit, jacié

bat, ji ciet, jiiciat. 3. Citpimur , ciipiébamur , capiémur ,

ci piiimur . 4. Milités arma ciipiunt. 5 . A rms 5 militibus

ci piuntur . 6 . Vir fossam d it . 7 . Fossa ii virO d itur .

8 . Milités li pidés ac téla ct'

miciébant .

l 9. Li pidés ac téla a

militibus conjects érant. 10. Ffigite , milités , in urbem.

NOTES AND QUESTI ONS.

1. Written also eonjicfl bant.

When does a verb in -ia keep the i ? What is the verb-stem of

cl pie Ans . The verb-stem of cl pie is cap-3 the present stem is

formed by adding -i j o £0) to the verb-s tem. Inflect the present

of ci ple ; of jl cie . The compounds of jl cie are written and pro

nounced as follows : (ex jficie ) bieie , pronounced as if written

O-yieie ; so also ah iolo ab jfioie ) abyioie, etc.

LESSON LVII .

USES OF TEE DATIVE.

DATIVE or lNTEREST.—DAT IVE or PURPOSE.

OBS. We have learned that the dative may be used with transitive or intransitive verbs ; the datives with these verbs are essentialto the completion of the sense, and are usually so closely connected

with their verbs that they could not be omitted . The dative is

VOCA BULA RY.

eiipivi

feel

ibdi

“ is!

jéci

Pi pi fl

( no Perfrl pui

“ piv i


often merely added to a sentence, which would make com lete

sense without it, for the pur Se of designatingthe person or t ing

interested in the action of t e verb, or aiiecte by it . This use of

the dative, called dative of interest, may be stated as follows

198 . Dative of Interest.

1. The dative of advantage and disadvantage.

2 . The dative of possessor .

3. The dative of apparent agent with perfect participles and

gerundives ( this dative designates the person interested in doing

the action, and not merely the agent) .

4. The dative of reference ( this dative depends not on a single

word, but is loosely connected with the whole predicate, and merelydesignates the person or thing with reference to whom or which the

action is done) .

5 . The dative used where the English idiom would lead us to

expect the genitive.

6 . The dative of purpose or end, denoting the object or end forwhich something is or is done.

DATIVE OF PURPOSE OR END .

199. RULE XXIII .— Th e dative is used w ith em

an d a few oth er verbs to denote th e purpose or end ,

usually w ith anoth er dative of th e per son or th ing

affected or in terested .

EXAMP LES.

1. dbmus dbminls aed ificata es t, nan muxihua, a house is

builtfor its owners, not for themice. (See 198 .

2 . mihi es t amicus , I have a friend, lit . there is a friend to me

( emphasizes the fact of possession ; see 198 .

3. virtue nbbis celenda est, we have virtue to cultivate. (198 .

tbgimenta galeis mili tés iaeére jiibet, he orders the soldiersto make coverings for their helmets . Galois depends on tégi

menta fficére rather than on ( Sabre alone . (See 198 .

5. légfiti C aesar! ad pédés prbieiunt, the ambassadors threw

themselves at Caesar’

s feet, lit . to Caesar at his feet. (198 .

6. sh av it mihi fi lium, he cured my son, out of regard to me ;sanav it ti lium meum , he cured my son, not caring Whose

son . ( See 198 .

172

9.

10.

11.

12 .

FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .

extri , outside, beyond.

infri , below, under .

inter , between, among.

intri , within.

13. juxta, next to.

14.

15 .

16 .

17.

18 .

2 .

3.

ob,for, on account of.

pénes, in the power of.

per, through, by the aid of .

pane, behind .

post, behind, after, since.

19. praeter , past, besides.

20. prbpe, near .

21. propter , on account of.

22 . sécnndum, following, afl er,ac

cording to.

23. supr i , above.

24. trans, across, on the other side.

25. ultra, beyond.

26 . versus, towards (placed after

noun ) .

Ten prepositions are followed by the ablative :

5 , ab, abs, from,after , by.

absque, but, for , without (rarein classic authors ) .

cOram,in presence of.

cum, with.

dé, downf rom,from,concerning.

6 . 6, ex, out of; from.

7. prae, before, in compar ison with.

8 . prb, bqfore, for, instead of.9. sins , without.

10. ténus , up to,as far as ( some

times with genitive ) .

The following four prepositions are followed by the

accusative when motion to a p lace IS implied ; by the ablative

when rest in a p lace 1s implied

in, denoting motion to a place, INTO with accusative ; rest in a

place, IN with ablative.

ub , denoting motion to a place, UNDER with accusative ; rest in a.

place, UNDER with ablative.

uper , denoting motion to a place, A BOVE w ith accusative ; rest

in a place, A BOVE with ablative.

supter ( sub ter ) , denoting motion to a place, UNDER with accusa

tive , rest in a place, UNDER w ith ablative .

OBS.1. Ténus (with abl. like versus (w ith ace. Is placed after

its case ; and cum is annexed to the ablative of the personal and

relative pronouns .

OBS. 2 . A and 6 are used before consonants ; ab and ex before

vowels and consonants .

201. The Use of Prepos itions .

We have learned ( 81. N . 2 ) that a preposition with its object is a

prepositional phrase (or adj unct) . Such a phrase enables us to ex

PREPOSITIONS. 173

press an idea more distinctly : as, C cesar came there ; if we substi

tute into Gaul for there, the sentence reads Caesar came into Gaul,

expressing the thoughtwith greater precision than with the adverb

alone. The preposition w ith its object, into Gaul, or in Galliam.

is a phrase modifying the verb.

The pupil should gradually commit the lists of prepositions

to memory .

202 . Dative withVerbs Compounded with a Preposition .

1. dux suis mili tibus l dérat, the leader was assisting his soldiers.

2 . C aesar Gal liae praeiuit, Casar ruled over Gaul .

3. C aesar interfuit p ilgus e, C aesar was p resent in the battle.

OBS. Verbs compounded with certain prepositions govern the

dative, when they ac uire a meaning from t e preposition which

calls for the dative. hen the simple verb is transitive, the com

pound may take both the dative and the accusative : as, jungl re,to j oin, takes the accusative ; but adjungére, to j oin to, takes the

dative also ; when the verb is intransitive, it takes the dative only.

Hence the following rule

DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS.

203. RULE XXIV. Th e dative of th e ind ir ect

Obj ect is u sed w i th man y verbs compounded w i th

ad , ante, can , in , in ter , ob, p ost, p r a e, p r o , sub, and

sup er , and sometimes cir cum .

VOCA BULA RY.

A qui tania, F ., A quitania, a province in Southern Gaul.

Pyrenaei , -6 rum, M . PL., the Pyrenees .

pertinee , pertinere , pertinui , stretch.

speoto , spectat e, speetl vi, Spectamm , look at.

septentribnés , -6num , M ., the north.

divide , dividére, d iv is i , d iv isum , separate, divide.

dives , -itis , rich.

incOle , c hlére ,-etilui,2 inhabit, dwell .

centendo , centendére , oentend l , cententum, contend, hasten .

pervénie , pervénire , pervéni , perventum , arrive at.

174 FIRST s'rnp s IN LATIN .

EXERC ISES.


1 A quitania a Garumna fliimi'

ne8ad Pyrénaeos pertinet.

2 . A pud Helvetios nobilissimus ct ditissimus fuit Orgétérix .

3. Gallos ab A quitan‘

is Garumna fliimen dividit. 4. Ger

mani'

trans Rhé’

num incolunt. 5 . Spectat inter occasum

solis et septentriones A quitania.

‘ 6 . Caesar hiberni'

s Labi

enum praepésuit. 7 . Belgae ad inferiorem partem fliimi'

nis

Bheni pertinent. 8 . Caesar in Italiam magnie itinéribus"

contenait. 9. A pud‘Cicérénem légimus . 10. Milites

omnes in oppidum irrumpunt.’

NOTES AN D QUEST IONS.

1. Commit to memory the prepositions that always require the

ablative.

2 . No participial stem.

3. How is flfimlne parsed

4. Subject of spectat.5 . Why ablative ?

6 . A pud is used with names of authors ( instead of in , with the name

of the work ) . Translate, we read in C icero.

7. Most of the prepositions enumerated above are often used as pre

fixes in composition with verbs, and modify their meaning : as, pane“ .

to place ; post-pa dre, to place after . A few prepositions are never

used alone, but always occur in composition

amb round, about ; as, ambh'

e, to walk around.

con together ; as, conjungére, to j oin together .

dI 6153 asunder ; as, disoédére, to depart.

ln with adjectives and verbs, means not, nu as indoctus ,

unlearned ; I-gnosco not to know.

or red back, again ; as, rEfl cBre, to make again, refi t.

36 3 aside ; as sédfioére, to lead astray.

v5 , not (serves to negative the positive idea in the word with

which it is compounded, or intensifies it) ; végrandis , not large.

When do in and sub require the accusative ? How does the use of

a difier from ab When is to the sign of the dative When must itbe translated by ad ?


5. Causal Conjunctions, denoting cause as, nam, namque ,

Enim, éténim, for .

EXAMP LE .

Hisfr iends will abandon him,for his father has done so.

11. Subor d inate C onj un ction s .

OBS. A subordinate clause is so united to another clause (orclauses) as to be dependent on it ; as, the messenger departed w henhe w as sent. Here the messenger departed is the princi al, or olead

ing clause ; when he was sent modifies departed, and is t e subordi

nate clause. Dependent clauses perform the office of a noun,

adjective, or an adverb, and hence are called noun, adjective, oradverb clauses they are often named from the subordinate con

junctions by which they are introduced. (See

206 . The Subordinate Conjunctions comprise

Temporal, denoting time ; as, cum, when .

Comparative, denoting comparison ; as, quam, v51ut, as, j us t as.

Conditional, denoting condition ; as, at, if.Concessive, denoting concession ; as, licet, although.

Final, denoting purpose or end ; as, ut, ne, that, that not.

Consecutive, denoting consequence or result ; as, quin , so that

not ; ut, so that.

7 . Causal, denoting cause ; as, quid , quod , qubniam, because.

8 . Interrogative, used in askingquestions : as,-ne ( enclitic) , nbnne.

mun , whether ; an, or ; annbn , or not.

One. 1. Of the three words meaning and

a. et connects independent words and clauses, as in Exs. 1, 2.

b.—que ( enclitic) connects words or clauses that are to be con

sidered together, or as a whole, as in Ex . 3.

c . atque ( ad , in addition to, and qne, and) , and also, indicate s

that the second word is more important than the first,as in Ex. 4.

OBS . 2 . Most of the causal conjunctions are subordinate .

G

u

h

w

w

i—i

207 . Model for Parsing a Conjunction :

In Ex. 1et is a coordinate conjunction , and connects the com

pound subject ltina and stella. Hence the following rule

208 . RULE XXV. C on jun ction s conn ect w ords ,

p h r ases, clauses, and sen ten ces .

GENITIVEs IN -I US. 177

EXERC ISES.

Parse the conjunctions in the following sentences

1. Neque pater néque filius virum laudat. 2 . Hostés

Italiam longé latéqne vastavérant. 3. Liberi erant non

ma‘

igai , sed b6n‘

i pulchrique . 4. Hémines sunt aut fel‘

ices

aut infel‘

ices .

LESSON LX.

GENITIVES IN -ius .

IMPERAT IVE MODE, ACTIVE VOICE.

209. Nine A djectives of the First and Second Declensionshave their genitive singular in

-ius , and dative in -i , in all

genders . These adjectives are

l lius , other . tbtus , whole. alter, other (of two) .nfillus , none. nuns .any. neuter. neither .

sblus , alone. anus , one. titer, which (of two) .

1. The plural of these adjectives is declined like the pluralof bonus . The singular is thus declined


210. The Imperative Mode has two tenses , the Present

and the Future .

1. The Present Imperative has only the second person .

2 . The Future Imperative has the second and third persons .

3. The first person of the Imper . is supplied by the Subjunctive .

4. The Negative of the Imperative is né.

211. The Present and Future Imperative A ctive of the

Four Conjugations is inflected as follows


EXERC ISES.


1. Lauda, exercé, scribe , bhed‘

i . 2 . Laudate , exercéte ,

scribite , 6béd‘

ite. 3. Disce , puer . 4. Ti céte , puér‘

i . l 5 . Mili

tés in hnum 16cum véniunto . 6 . Miles ex altéra parte urbis

vén‘

ito . 7 . Spes téta Rémanos désérit.


1. Praise thou, exercise thou, write thou, obey thou.

2 . Praise ye, exercise ye, wr ite ye, obey ye . 3. Call the

boy . 4. Learn , boys .

1 5 . Call ye , punish ye , advise ye,

rule ye . 6 . The soldiers of both armies are brave . 7 . They

come to one place . 8 . Which (of the two) does he praise ?


1. Case and rule.

How many modes Define each . Does the use of the Latin impera

tive differ from the same mode in English? How many persons has

the imperative How is the first person supplied

LESSON LX I .

NUMERALS.

AC CUSAT IVE OF T IME AND SPACE—ABLAT IVE OF

DIFFERENCE.

212 . Numeral adjectives express number ; they are

divided into three principal classes

1. CA RD IN ALS, which answer the question how many : as, fi rm s ,

one ; trés , three.

2 . ORD INA LS, which express rank or order ; they answer the ques

tion which in order, or one of ho wmany : as, p rlmus , first.

3. DISTRIBUTIVES, which answer the question how many to each,

or how many at a time : as, b lni , two each, or two by two ;

b is b ina mal a , twice two app les .

4. Numeral adverbs answer the question how ofl en as , b is , tw ice.

NUMERA LS. 181

213. The Cardinal Numbers are indeclinable, except

tim e, one, duo , two, trees, three, and the hundreds be

ginning with ducenti, two hundred. The hundreds are

declined like the plural of bonus ; and the first three

cardinals are declined as follows :

1. In the plural, anus often has the meaning of same, only. It

is also used in its ordinary sense w ith a plural noun of a singular

meaning ; as, fine cas tra, one camp .

2 . Mi lls is either an Adjective or a Noun

a. As an Adjective it is indeclinable, and limits the noun ; as,

EXA MPLES.

1. mi lk 1161111116 8 , (1thousand men .

2 . cum bis ml lle hbmln ibus , with two thousand men .

b. A s a noun it is indeclinable in the singular ; in the plural it

is declined like the plural of mi re (110) mnia, mnium , mnlbus ,mfl ia, mnibus . It is followed by the genitive, unless a declined

numeral comes between, as in Ex . 3; as,

EXA MPLES.

1. mme hbmlnum , a thousand men ( lit. , of men) .

2 . tr ia mfl ia hbmlnum , three thousand men ( lit., of men) .

3. tria mfl ia “ Goentl mIlItés , three thousand three hundred soldiers .


OBS . 1. The numbers between 20and 100are expressed either

by the larger numeral first w ithout at , or by the smaller numeralfirst w ith et ; as, v igin tl iinus , twenty

—one, or fi rm s et v igintl , one

and twenty . The numbers above 100always have the larger numberfirst ; as, centum et sexaginta sex , or centum sex i gin ta sex ,

one hundred and sixty-six.

OBS. 2 . The numerals 18 , 19, 28 , 29, 38 , 39 have the smaller

numeral first, w ith the preposition d é to indicate subtraction ; as ,

duéd év igin tl , find év igintl , dubdétr igin ta, etc.

3. Distributive numerals are sometimes used to Show a plural

signification in those nouns, the plural forms of which have other

wise a singular meaning ; as, bina cas tr a, two camps ; binae

aed és , two houses binae littérae , two ep istles . Duo cas tr a would

mean twoforts duaa aedés , two temp les ; duae littérae, two letters

(of the alphabet) .

OBS . 3. The year is expressed by annus with the ordinal

numerals ; as, annus mfl l és lmus octingentésimus octbgés lmus

quintus , the year 1885.

OBS . 4. P rior is used instead of primus when only two things

are Spoken of ; al ter is often used for sécundus .

214. A ccusative of Time and Space.

EXA MPLES.

l . R émfilus septem et tr lginta régn i v it annbs , Romulus

reigned thirty-seven YEA RS.

2 . fossa pedes trécentbs longa es t , sex pEdes alta, the ditch

is three hundred FEET long, six FEET deep .

3. castra ab urbe mnia passuum octo ab sunt, the camp is

eight MILES distantfrom the city.

OBS. Note that annbs , in Ex . 1, expresses duration of time that

pedés and mfl i a , in Exs. 2 and 3, denote the extent of space, and

are also in the accusative. The idiom is expressed in the followingrule

A CCUSATIVE OF TIME AND SPACE.

215 . RULE XXVI . D uration of time and exten t

of Space ar e exp r essed by th e accusative .

1. Distance is sometimes expressed by the ablative . (SeeA blative of Difference ,

EXA MPLE.

mi'

llbus pas suum sex a C aesaris cas tris cons édi t, he eu

camped A T THE DISTA NCE of Six M ILESfrom Caesar’

s camp .


LESSON LXII .

IMPERATIVE PASSIVE OF THE POUR CONJUGATIONS.

THE PLACE TO WHIC H.

216 . The Imperative Passive of the Four Conjugations isinflected as follows

188 F I RST STEPS I N LATIN .

OBS . In the foregoing examples, note that in l , 2, 3, the namesof the places to which the motion is directed are not the names of

towns ; in each case the preposition is expressed. In Exs . 4, 5, the

nouns denoting the place to which the motion is directed are names

t

o] towns the accusative is used w ithout a preposition . Note,urther, that dbmum , dbmbs , and rits , like names of towns, have

no preposition . The idiom is expressed in the following rule

THE NAME OF THE PLA CE TO WH ICH .

218 . RULE XXVII .—Th e name Of th e p lace

w h ither , or to w h ich , regu lar ly requ ires th e p reposi

tion in or ad .

1. But w ith names of towns and small islands , and with

dbmum, domos , and rfis , the preposition is omitted .

VOCA BULA RY.

édfioo , A re,-fiv1, A tum , educate.

s trénué briskly, vigorously.

Bri tan nia, -ae, F ., Britain .

attingo ,-tingere, -tl gl , tactum , touch, reach.

inatl tfi tum,-I, N . custom ; PL . institutions .

géro , gérere, ges sI, gestum , bear , carry on .

vergo , vergére, turn, lie toward .

persuddeo, a nadere, q uas i , -su5.sum , convince, persuade.

fi clle, facilius , faomss ime , easily.

EXERC ISES.


1. Puer, béne édiicare . 2 . Puer , strenué exercére.

3. Puer , prObé ec lére . 4. Puer , diligenter ériidire .

5 . Puer , béne édficato r , strenué exercétor , prObé ec litor ,

diligenter érfiditor . 6 . In fines VécontiOrum die septimo

pcrvénit. 7 . Hera quarta Britanniam attigit. 8 . Nocte ad

Caesarem pervenérunt. 9. In Gallia ulteriore maltOs l annOs

manébimus . 10. ProximO die Caesar é castris cOpias

suas édfixit. 11. COnsul A thenas prOfectus est. 12 . Caesar

Miletum prOpéravit. 13. Multi'

ex urbe rfis migrabant.

14. SérO dOmum venisti .

CLASSI FICATION OF SENTENCES. 189


T he quantity of long final syllables has hitherto been marked ; the

pupil should be taught to account for the quantity of all final sy llables .

Define the imperative . How many tenses has the imperative? A re

the personal endings the same for all four conjugations ? A fter verbs

of motion, how is the place to which expressed With names of towns,

how is the place to which expressed ? What other words omit the

preposition

LESSON LXIII .

CLASSIFICATION OF SENTENCES.—ANALYSIS OP SIMPLE

SENTENCES.

219. Sentences may be classified, with respect to

their mean ing, as

1. Simp le. 2 . C omplex . 3. C ompound .

220. A Simple Sentence contains but one subject and

one predicate, either of which may be compound.

EXA MP LES.

1. Messengers come.

2 . The swiftmessengers come quickly .

3. The boys and girls laugh and p lay.

OBS. Messenger is the subject of the first sentence, and come is

the predicate . In Ex . 2 the and swiftmodify messengers, and are

called the Modifiers of the Subject . The swift messengers is themodified, or logical subject ; come quickly is the modified, or logical

predicate . The third sentence has a compound subject, boys andgirls, connected by the coo

’

rdinate copulative conjunction and, and

a compound predicate .

221. A Complex Sentence is composed of one inde

pendent clause in combination w ith one or more de

pendent clauses .

EXA MP LES.

1. The general, who is cautious, will succeed .

0 IVhen the rain descended, thefloods came.

OBS. The first sentence contains two parts : the general will

succeed, and who is cautious. Each part contains a subject and

predicate, and is called a clause ; hence the definition :


222 . A clause is a part of a sentence containing a

subject and predicate.

OBS. The clause, who is cautious, really performs the office of an

adjective, as we may use in place of it Simply the word cautious,and say the cautious general will succeed. The adjective clause,who is cautious, performing the office of a Single word, is called a

DEPENDENT CLA USE ; the other clause, the general will succeed, not

performing the oflice of a single word, is called an INDEPENDENT

CLA USE. The two clauses, connected by who, are so combined thatone modifies the other ; they form in combination a COMPLEXSENTENCE. In the second sentence, thefloods came is the independent clause, modified by the clause when the rain descended, i .e. bya clause telling when the floods came ; and as this clause performsthe office of a sin le word, an adverb, the two clauses in combination form a Comp ex Sentence .

223. A Compound Sentence is composed of two or

more independent clauses .

EXAM P LE .

The rain descended, and thefl oods came.

OBS . This sentence consists of two parts, the rain descended and

the floods came, each of which is independent, and makes completesense b itself . The sentence is COMPOUND, because it consists oftwo in ependent clauses .

SIMPLE SENTENCES C LASSIFIED.

224. Simple sentences may be Declarative Interrogative ,Imperative, or Exclamatory .

EXA M PLES.

1. C aesar was stabbed. 3. Love j ustice, and hate evil .

2 . W'

as Casar stabbed by Brutus ? 4. What a cruel deed he has done !

M od ifi er s .

225 . The Subject or the Predicate may be modified

(1) a word , ( 2 ) a phrase, (3) a clause.

EXAMPLES.

mfl i tés fortés , brave soldiers .

Oppida s ine praes i d ib, towns without garr isons .

réx A lb i nérum , the king of the A lbans .

puer , qui'

legit , the boy, who reads.fi

OO

t

—t


sources , and abundant streams of revenue gushed forth .

14. There “ is a pleasure in the pathless woods . 15 . The

soldiers were brave.

3


1. Expand this sentence into a compound sentence.

2 . There is used as,

an introductory word, to fill out the sentence,

and is, therefore, called an erpletive (Lat. exp lére, to fill out) .3. IS this adjective attributive or predicate

What is a sentence ? C lassify sentences . Write a simple sentence.

Expand it to a complex, then to a compound sentence. Of what is a

complex sentence composed? What is a clause ? What is a depen

dent clause ? (A ns . A dependent clause is one used as a noun , an

adjective, or an adverb .) Mention the modifiers of the subject ; of thepredicate.

LESSON LXIV.

PRONOUNS.

OBS. Charles went to Rome with his mother , and he came backwithout her . In this sentence we use three little words called

PRONOUNS ; they are his, he, and her . If we had not these words, we

would be compelled to say :“ Charles went to Rome with Charles

’

s

mother, and Charles came back without Charles’

s mother.

"The

pronouns take the place of the nouns , and hence the definition

228 . A Pronoun is a word used for a noun. Pronouns

are divided into eight classes :

Personal Pronouns : Ego , I ; 116 8 , we, etc.

Reflexive Pronouns : suI, of himselfiPossessive Pronouns : meus , my, etc.

Demonstrative Pronouns : 1110, this, etc.

Determinative Pronouns : is , he, that ; ipse, self; etc.

Relative Pronouns : qul , who, and its compounds.

Interrogative Pronouns : quis , who ? and its compounds.

Indefinite Pronouns : i llquis , some one, etc.mfl

o

cn

hh

wwt-s


REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.

230. The Reflexive Pronouns refer to the subject of

the sentence, and do not, therefore, require a nomina

tive case. The reflexive pronouns of the first and

second persons are the same as the first and second per

sonal pronouns ; the reflexive of the third person is

thus declined :

Singula r and P lura l .

NOM . (Wanting )GEN . sui, of himself; herself; itself, or themselves.DA T. Bi b i,for himself; herself; itself, or themselves .

A CC . s é, himself, herself, itself; or themselves.

VOC .

ABL . 8 6 , by himself, herself; itself; or themselves .

1. The use of the Personal and Reflexive Pronouns can be under

stood from the following conjugation of laud o , with subject and

object expressed :

630 me laudo , I p raise myself ; nds nOs laudamus , we p raise

ourselves ; tfi te laudas , you praise yourself ; v6 s vbs laudatis ,

you p raise yourselves ; is ( ea) 36 laudat , he ( she) praises himself(herself) ii ( eae) Se laudan t, they p raise themselves ; also, C icero

sé ( i .e . C i cérbnem ) laudat, C icero p raises himself ; C i cero eum

( i .e . C as sarem) laudat , C icero p raises him.

2 . The reduplicated forms, sese, tété, meme, for as, ta, me,

often occur .

3. Cum, when used with the ablative of the personal pronoun ,

is appended to it : as, mecum , with me ; vdbis cum, with you.

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

231. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from

personal pronouns, and denote possession . They are

meus , mea , meum , my or mine.

tuus , tua , tuum , thy or thine.

suus , sua, suum, his, hers, its, or their.

Easter , n6 s tra, Ddstrum, our .

vester , vestra, v estrum, your.


Rule for Position

1. The Personal Pronoun s, when connected by conjunctions toother words, stand first. Ego always precedes ( see Ex .

2 . Contrasted words are put as near together, or as far apart, as

possible ( see Ex.

EXERC ISES.


1. Ego vOco , tu vOcas , amicus vOcat. 2 . Tu es tristis .

3. NOS siimus pOtentés , séd vOS pOtentiOréS estis . 4. In me

st in té et in nObis omnibus est animus immortalis . 5 . Ego

et frater ambiilamus . 6 . Ego a té laudabor , sed tl‘

I a me

pfiniéris . 7 . Mi frater , audi . 8 . Ego sum mains , sed tfi es

bOnus . 9. Caesar suOs milites in Galliam mittet, sed in

prOvinciam nostrOs . 10. Caesar Divitiacum ad sé vOcat.


1. I call, thou callest, the friend calls . 2 . I praise you,

you praise me , we praise you . 3. He comes in company

with you . 4. I give ( to) you the book . 5 . I am sad , but

you are joyful . 6 . I am a Roman , but you are a Gaul .

7 . I am praised by you. 8 . My brother and I are praising

you. 9. You are reading, but I am writing. 10. They

differ from one another .


Why are reflexive pronouns so called ? Name the personal pro

nouns . How is the lack of a third personal pronoun supplied? Give

the rule for the use of possessive pronouns. (Ans . Same as for adjec

tives : A dj ectives, adj ective pronouns, etc.,agree. See RuleVIII . ) HOW

can you tell after a transitive verb whether sué s mi lités means his,her , its, or their soldiers The reflexive BS is often written 5 636 ; as,

puer 3636 laudat, the boy pra ises himself:

DEMONSTRA TIVE PRONOUNS. 197

LESSON LXV.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. PARTITIVE GENITIVE.

234. Demonstrative Pronouns are so called because

they point out what object is meant. They are

1. B io, this , this near me.

2 . Iste, that, that near you.

NOM . istud

isti

istum istam istad

istO isti istO

3. me , that, that near him .

235 . Decline together

1. haec 2 d ies , this day. 4. ma d bun s , that burden.

2 . is ta tua sOror, that sister 5 . ista d tempus , that time.

of thine. 6 . hbmo is te, that (worthless )3. M ac 16316 , this legion. man .

OBS. 1. B io , used for what is near the speaker , is called the

demonstrative of the firstperson ; is te, used of what is near the per


son addressed, is called the demonstrative of the second person ille,

used of what is remote from both, is called the demonstrative of thethird person .

OBS. 2. The demonstratives are often used in the oblique cases

as personal pronouns ( him, her , it, them) of the third person .

EXAM P LE .

cm at tratt en Gina v id eo , I see him and his brother .

236 . Partitive Genitive.

EXAMPLES.

pars mfl ltum, part of the soldiers .

alter cons iilum , one of the ( two) consuls.finus mi ll tum , one of the soldiers .

nlhfl v ini , ( nothing of wine) no wine.

multum aes tatis , a largepart of the summer .

magna es t corpbris pars aperta, a great part of the body isexposed.

ca

m-b

es

to

w

OBS. In each of the foregoing exam les, note that the genitiveexpresses the whole, and that the wor which the genitive limitsdesignates a part. This use of the genitive is called the partitive

genitive. The idiom is expressed in the following rule

PARTITIVE GENITIVE

237 . RULE XXVIII . W ord s d en oting a par t ar e

fol low ed by th e gen itive den ot in g th e w h ole .

NOTE. Instead of the partitive genitive w ith numerals, theablative with ex, out of ; as, from,

is regularly used with cardinals .

EXA MP LES.

1. ilnus ex mili tibus , one of the soldiers .

2 . quin que ex mili tibus , five ( of ) soldiers .

3. th us db multIs , one of the many.

EXERC ISES.


1. 11113virum laudant. 2 . H60‘bellum est saevissimum .

3. Hfijus discipfili diligentiam laudo . 4. Hic puer diligens

est, ille iners . 5 . HOrum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae .

6 . Laudabo illins " filium. 7 . Pzi ter filiam suam et filiam


LESSON LXVI .

DETERMINATIVE (DEMONSTRATIVE) PRONOUNS.

238 . The Determinative Pronouns are is , ea, id , this

( and he, she) , that ; its compound Idem , ead em , l d em , the

same ; and ipse, ip s a , ip sum , he, self, very same. They

refer to some person or thing determined by the con

text

1. Is , this , and he, she, it.

C a se s . Sin gu lar .

Fem. Neuter . Fem. Neuter .

eOrum

2 . Idem,

2the same.

eadem idem eaedem cadem

earundem ebrnndem

eidem eisdem or iisdem

eundem eandem idem eOsdem easdem eadem

eOdem cadem eOdem eisdem or iisdem

3. Ipse , self, he.

OBS. 1. Ip s e is often called an intensive p ronoun ; it Shoul d not

be confounded with 8 6 ; as, vir ip se rel audat, the man himselfp raises himself:

DETERMINA TIVE PRONOUNS. 201

OBS. 2. Idem often means also ; as, C ICGrO Grat Orator { dem

que phnbsbphus , C icero was an orator, and also a philosopher ( lit.,the same was a philosopher ) .

OBS. 3. Is , that, is often used as a personal pronoun (he, she, it,they, them, etc.) of the same gender with the noun for which it

stands : as, 010e mul tbs lib rbs scrips it ; eos ( i.e. lib rOs )lib enter légo , C icero has written many books ; I read them ( i.s . the

books) with pleasure.

Decline together :

1. ip sa hOmo , the man himself.2 . id oppi dum , that town .

the cause itself.the very same cause.

4. 1160 ipsum tempus , this very time.

5. Idem prtnoeps , the same chief:

6 . i dem bellum , the same war .

3. ipsa causa, l

EXERC ISES.


1. Is Ori bat pOpil lum. 2 . Ipse tfi me'

laudabas . 3. Ipse

mégister me laudiibit. 4. Ipsi in eOrum finibus bellum gé

runt. 5 . Caesar eOdem itinere ad eOS contendit. 6 . Caesar

Divitiiicum ad Sé vOcavit. 7 . Psi ter filiam suam et filium

éjuS ad sé vOcat.


1. Idem, compounded of is and -dem, is declined like is , but it

shortens isdem to Idem, and iddem to Idem, and changes m to n

before the ending-dem.

Why are demonstrative pronouns so called ? (A ns . Because they

point out the noun. ) Mention the demonstrative of the first person .

When must his or her be expressed by Gina When by suns Whatare determinative pronouns Why so called ? Mention them . Ips e

is often called an intens ive pronoun, because it makes the word to which

it is added more emphatic.


LESSON LXVII .

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

240. Relative Pronouns are so called because they

relate to some preceding noun or pronoun , called the

antecedent ; they are gut and its compounds . Qut is

declined as follows :

1. Quicumque ( quiounque) and quisqfi is , whoever, are called,

from their signification, general relatives. Quicumque is declined

like qui . The only forms of quisquis in use are quinquis , the

neuter qui dquid , and the ablative quoquo.

241. Agreement of Relative Pronouns

EXAMP LES.

1. puer qut magistmm amat bonus est, the boy who loves the

master is good.

2 . puer quem magis ter amat bonus eat , the boy whom the

master loves is good .

3. Ego , qui té laudav l, réx Sum , I , who havep raised you, am Icing.

OBS. In Ex. 1, qui stands for puer. and connects the second

statement or clause, loves the master, with the boy is ood. The word

quI is said to relate to puer ; it is, therefore, cal ed a RELA TIVEPRONOUN ; it also binds the two clauses together like a conjunction , and this is the real peculiarity of relatives, as all pronouns

have antecedents . The word puer , which the clause (10! magistrum amat modifies, is called the ANTECEDENT . The sentence in

which the relative stands is called the relative clause ; the other, the

p r incipal clause .

NOTE (1) that qui is masculine gender, to agree with its ante

cedent, puer ; ( 2) . that it is Singular number and third person, to


the subject of amat ; Rule XXIX . The three words, qui magis

trum amat, are called a clause ; it is a relative clause, because

introduced by a relative pronoun ; it performs the ofiice of an

adjective, i .e., it describes puer , and is therefore called an adj ective

clause. Since it is subjoined to the leading clause (puer b bnuses t) , as modifying it, it is called a subordinate clause. A sentence

consisting of two clauses, one of which is subordinate, is called a

comp lex sentence. (See

EXERC ISES.


1. Puer , qui stiidet, discit . 2 . Felix est is rex , quem

omnes civés amant. 3. A llobrOgés , qui trans RhOdanum

vicOS posseSSiOnésque habébant, ad Caesarem véniunt.

4. Multi hOminés aedificavérunt dOmOS, in quibus nOn habi

tavérunt. 5 . Caesar v60at Casticum , cfijus1pater regnum

multOS anuOS2obt

’

inuérat. 6 . A h Océlo, quod est citériOris

prOvinciae oppidum extrémum . 7 . Proximi'

sunt Germanis ,

qui trans Rhénum incOlunt.


1. The boy , whom you have blamed , is my brother .

2 . The man has built a house , in which he has not lived .

3. He summons Casticus , whose father held the sovereignty

in Gaul for many years . 4. The boy who studies will learn .

5 . The Germans , who dwell across the Rhine , came into

Gaul . 6 . Caesar will hasten into the province with the three

legions which he had levied in Gaul . 7 . Caesar led from

winter quarters the three legions which were wintering in

Gaul .


1. C hina, whose.

2 . Why accusative

Give the rule for the use of relative pronouns . What is a pronoun ?

How many classes What is a clause A relative clause ? What isthe antecedent ? Define sentence. To what is a relative equivalent

?

(Ans . A personal pronoun a connective ; as, the boy who studies, etc.

,

the boy and he studies . )

INTERROGA TIVE PRONOUNS. 205

LESSON LXVIII .

INTERROGATIVE PBONGUNS.

245. The Interrogative Pronouns, quis and qui , with

their compounds, are used in asking questions. They

are declined as follows

1. 01115 , who, which, what?

2 . 0111, who, which, what1’ is declined like the relative quI.

3. Quiz is used both as a noun and as an adjective ; quid isalways used as a noun ; quI and quod are used as adjectives.

EXA IVIP LES.

l . quid commls it, what has he done ? (Noun .)2 . quod fi clnue commis it, what deed has he done ? (Adj3. quiz vbcat, who calls (Noun .)4. qui (or quis ) h6m o vbcat. whatman calls (Adj.)

4. Qui z and qui are often strengthened by the addition of nam

in emphatic interrogation ; as , qui snam, or qui dnam, who then

what then 1?

5 . Wh en the question refers to one of two, titer , iitra, iitrum,

which of two, is used.

6 . Recollect that the interrogative particles are-na, used when

asking for information Simply ; n 6nne, when the answer yes is

expected ; and num , when the answer no is expected . If an inter

rogative pronoun or adverb is used, then -no, nbnne, or num is

not required . There is no single word in Latin equivalent to our

yes and no, in answer to questions. The answer may be expressed


by repeating the verb with a negative adverb, if no is the answer ;

and with or w ithout an adverb, if yes is the answer .

EXAMPLES.

1. veni tne , has he come ? veni t , or veni t véro , yes (he hascome) .

2 . matt bnane puellam vboat , does the mother call the girl ?

vbcat , yes ( she calls) .

3. n6nne bbnus puer eat, is not the boy good

7. N e is annexed to the word to which it especially refers .

EXA MPLES.

1. tfine pubrum dboés , do YOU teach the boy2 . dbcésne puérum, do you TEA CH the boy ?

3. puérumne (16063, do you teach the BOY?

8 . Questions in Latin, as in English, may be Single or double .

I s the soldier brave is a single question . I s the soldier brave or

cowardly is a double question . In asking a double question in

Latin , the first clause usually has utrum or -ne, and the second an.

EXA MPLES.

1. utrum vir legit an s crib it , does the man read or write

2 . utrum patriam amat , annOn , does he love his country or not?

EXERC ISES.


1. Quis mé v60at? 2 . Quis scribit has littéras ? 3. Quodcarmen légis ? 4. Quis tibi hunc librum dédit? 5 . Quaeest mulier quae vénit? 6 . Uter consulum amicus vester est?

7 . Quisnam té vécavit, Tulli ? 8 . Qui cOnsul est CicérOne

prfidentior


1. Who is that man ? 2 . Who are those soldiers ?

3. What soldiers are these ? 4. “ Tho has called us ?

5 . Which book have you ? 6 . Who gave you that book ?

7 . Who has come into the city ? 8 . Who was walking with

you in the garden ? 9. Which boy wounded you with a

stone?


adjectives ; the masculines and feminines are used either as nouns

or adjectives

quldam , quaedam, quoddam or quiddam , a certain one.

qui spiam , quaep iam, quodpiam or quidp iam, some one.

quiv is , quaev is , quodv i s or qui dv is, any one

quilib et, quaelib et, quodli‘

bet or quid llb eaI(youp lease) .quisque , quaeque, quodque or quidque, every one.

unusqui sque, finaquaeque, nnumquodque, each.

EXA DI PLES.

quivl s hOmo , any man.

al iquis hbmo , a man, any man ( it matters not who) .

quid am hbmo , a certain man (whose name I could men

tion , or whom I could identify, if I chose) .al iquem ad m6 mi ttent, they will send somebody to me.

ali quod bbnum, some good thing.

{ li quid bbn’l (part. something good .

247 . Decline together

1. pater meus , myfather . 6. t6 tus ille diés , thatwholeday.

2 . is con sul , that consul. 7. v ir quidam ROmAnus , a

3. Id em v ir , the same man . certain Roman.

4. eadem navis , the same ship . 8 . is te alter , that other fellow .

5. quiv is h6mo , any man . 9. quis nauta, what sailor ?

10. C l cérb ipse, C lariss imus Stator, C icero himself ; the most

famous orator.

EXERC ISES.


1 A l‘

iquOs2ad eum misérunt. 2 . Narravit quidam cOram

mé istam fabulam . 3. Narrabit aliquis cOram me illam

tabulam . 4. A liquem locum occupavit. 5 . Cum aliquibus

militum3ve

'

nit. 6 . Quidam eX militibus 8 décimae légiénis

véniébat. 7 . T itus quendam Gallum ad Caesarem misit.


1. In company with those soldiers . 2 . In company with

these soldiers . 3. Some one praises the king. 4. A cer

USES OF THE A BLA TIVE. 209

tain one is praising the king. 5 . Who praises the king?

6 . Some soldiers are brave . 7 . A soldier came to Owsar .

8 . Some one will tell this story . 9. The generals will come

in company with some of the chiefs . 10. IS the soldier

brave? Is the soldier brave or not? 12 . Caesar sent a

Gaul to C icero .

NOTES AND QUESTI ONS.

1. Used only after at, né, nlsl , num, and relatives ; as,at quis , né

quis ; but of course i llu qui dam, etc., may be used after the same

particles : as, 81quis , if any BI q iS, if some.

2 . Is i llqubs used as a noun or adjective ?3. See 237 .

LESSON LXX.

USES OF THE ABLATIVE.

SEPARATION, SOURCE, CAUSE, MATERIAL, AGENT .

OBS. We have learned that the ablative is used to denote the

relations expressed in English by the prepositionsfrom ; with or by ;at or in . In expressing all these relations , the ablative performs

the ofiices of three cases that in some languages were kept distinct.These uses of the ablative may be classified as follows :

1. THE ABLA TIVE PROPER , expressing the relation from, or

WHENCE.

EXAMPLE

virum culpa ltbérat, he frees the man from blame.

2 . THE INSTRUMENTAL, expressing the relation with, by, or

WHER‘EWVITH .

EXAMP LE .

h ostium fines ferrO et igni vastant, they lay waste the

enemy’s territory with sword and fire.

3. THE LOCA TIVE, expressing the relation in, at, or WHERE.

EXA MP LES.

1. Rbmae v iv it, he lives at Rome.

2. castris 8 5 ténuit, he kep t himself in camp.


The general rule for the Ablative Proper may be stated as

follows

ABLATIVE PROPER .

248 . RULE XXX . Separation , cause, source, an d

or igin are den oted by th e ablative w ith or w ith out

a pr eposition .

EXA MP LE .

m6 tlmc‘

n'

e IIbEras , youfree mefromfear ( separation) .

OBS. The prepositions are omitted chiefly w ith verbs signify ingto abstain, relieve, remove, exclude, dep rive, cease, and want, and w ithadjectives of kindred meanings ; but, if a person is specified, the

preposition must be used ; as, té ab 1116 imprbbfi li'

bbravi'

, I haver id you of that scoundrel.

1. Compounds with a, ab , (16 , 6 , ex, denoting separation from a

person or place, take the ablative when used figuratively ; but, in

a local and literal sense, they usually require a preposition with the

EXAM PLES.

1. Iter ab A ri re H elvetii avertéran t, the Helvetians had

turned their marchfrom the A rar.

2. H elvétii‘

h6 c obnatfi dés istunt, the Helvetians desist

from this attemp t.

2 . The Ablative of Cause is used without a preposition with in

transitive and passive verbs of emotion, and with adjectives thatare passive in meaning.

EXAMP LE.

Helvetii sua v icto'

ria insblenter glérifibantur , the Helve

tians boasted insolently because of their victory ( cause) .

OBS 1. When the moving cause is a person, the preposition a

or ab Is used with the ablative ; or ob , per , or propter, with the

OBS. 2 . The ablatives causa and gratia,for the sake of, are usedwith a genitive preceding, or w ith a possessive pronoun in agree

ment .

OBS. 3. Expressions of trust and distrust ( fi do, cfinfi do, diffi d o ) ,and many adjectives and participles expressing emotion, and frétus

and contentus , are used with the ablative.

3. Perfect Participles denoting parentage or birth, gén ltus ,

natus , ortus , etc., generally take the ablative without a prep

osition .

EXA MP LE .

P isa amp lisslmb génére natus , P iso, born of a very illus

trious family.

212 FIR ST STEPS IN LA TIN .

5 . If the sentence is complex, translate, first, the p rincipal clause,

and then the subordin ate clauses in the order of their importance.

It is always easier for the pupil to translate the principal clause

first than it is to pick out words here and there w ith the hope of

being able finally of putting them together into a sentence. Whenthe meaning of the principal clause has been obtained, then take

the subordinate clauses.

6 . Consult the dictionary or vocabularies only as a last resort.

The pupil must, however, remember that only the nominative singu

lar of nouns, adjectives, and pronouns, and the first person singular

present indicative active of verbs, are given there ; i.e., the dictionary

gives the meaning of words w ithout reference to their grammatical

relations . The case, person, number, mode, tense, or voice, must be

determined by the grammar . It is, therefore, essential that the

declension of nouns and the inflection of the regular verbs . be

thoroughly memorized, so that the pupil can distingui sh by the end

ings the different parts of Speech, and determine at once the force

and relation of the words .

Sigh t-R ea d ing .

FA BLE.

In pratO erant trés bOvés in maxima concordia. Sedmeadow oxen greatest harmony

dissidiO inter eOs ortO, Singfil'

i a fér'

is petiti et laniati sunt.

discord arising one-by-one wild-beasts attack tear


The pupil can discover by the forms of the words that bbvés is in

the nominative plural, and is the subject of the verb érant ; pr i to ,

after the preposition ,is in the ablative singular , and its nominative

is pratum, for which form the pupil must look in the dictionary .

C oncord ia is also in the ablative, and is modified by the adjectivemaxima.

Note the mode, tense, and voice of pétItI and li ni flti aunt, and

translate them.

What is the subject of the first sentence The predicate Has

the subject any modifiers Has the predicate? In what case is trés

In what case is s ingiili?

INF IN IT IVE MODE. 213

LESSON LXXII .

INFINITIVE MODE, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE.

EXERC ISE FOR SIGHT -READING.

OBS In the sentence I wish to see you, the verb, to see, namesthe actlon in an indefiniteway, w ithout limiting it to any particularsubject ; and hence, a verb that expresses an action in this un

limited manner is said to be in the Infin itive Mode (Lat. infin ftus ,without limit) . The infinitive expresses simply the action or state

implied in the verb in an abstract manner, w ithout specifyingeither person, number, or time, and thus merely indicates whetheran action is in progress or corn leted. The infinitive may be used,like a noun, as the subject or 0 ject of a v rb, but it differs from a

noun in several important particulars : (1 It may be modified byadverbs, but not by adj ectives, as I wish To SEE you IMMEDIA TELY ;2) it governs a noun or pronoun in the ob

’

ective like a verb. Inatin, the infinitive has voice and tense like a verb, but, like a

noun , admits of two cases : the nominative when it is the sub'

eet

of a verb, and the accusative when it is the object of a verb . heinfin itive is also used in Latin to represent the tenses of the indicative mode in Indirect Discourse. (For this use, see Hencethe uses of the infinitive may be stated as follows

250. Uses of the Infinitive .

1. The infinitive is used as an indeclinable abstract noun

in the nominative and accusative .

2 . The infinitive is used in Indirect D iscourse to represent

the tenses of the indicative . (See

OBS . The infinitive has voice and tense, and takes adverbial

modifiers like any verb ; it governs the case of its verb.

251. In Latin there are Four Infinitives in each voice ,the Present, Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect. They are

formed from the stems as follows

A CTIVE VOICE.

Present infinitive present stem re .

Perfect infinitive perfect stem see .

Future infinitive future participle and esse .

Fut. perf. infin . future participle and fui s s e .


PA SSIVE VOICE.

Present infinitive present stem rI for l st, 2d, 4th conjugations .

verb-stem i for 3d conjugation .

Perfect infinitive perfect passive participle and esse.

Future infin itive supine and h i ( the word Iri is the present ihfinitive pas sive of s o , I go, and amatum Iri has the idea of

going to be loved) .Fut. perf. infin . Perfect passive participle and fbre .

P A R T I A L P A R A D I GM .



What is the subject of the leading clause ? the predicate? The

modifiers of the predicate? The subject of the subordinate clause ?

What kind of a clause is it ? In what case is GallI ? Why is Germi nIs dative ? How is qua translated

? Define the word infinitive.

Give the uses of the infinitive. How is the present infinitive formed ?

Form the present infinitive of régo ,vbco , timeo , mflnio, pflnio .

How is the perfect infinitive formed? How the future infinitive

With what does the participle, of which the future infinitive is com

posed, agree Write all the active and passive infinitives of the

following words : dbno ,to give nfimlno , to name ; h i beo ,

to have

débeo ,to owe ; dfi co ,

to lead di co ,to say ; fi nio ,

to fi nish ; mflnio ,

to fortify. Write a sentence in English with an infinitive .as subject ;as object.

LESSON LXXIII .

INFINITIVB AND SUBJECT-ACOUSATIVE. COMPLEMEN

TARY INFINITI'VE.

EXERC ISE FOR SIGHT READING.

252 . Infinitive and Subject-A ccusative.

OBS. 1. Sometimes the subject or object of a verb is a whole

clause, beginning with the word that.

EXAMPLES.

Predicate.

1. That Cazsar conquered Gaul is certain.

Sub. Pwd . Object.

2 . He says that Caesar conquered Gaul.

In the first sentence, that Caesar conquered Gaul is the subject of

the verb, and is called a subj ect-clause ; in the second sentence, the

same words become the object of the verb say, and are called an

object-clause. Such clauses are expressed in Latin by the accusative

With the infinitive.

8 hi

EXAMPLES.

Obj11 00h. 003.can “ “ t.

1. C as aér em ( acc.) v icis se ( Infin .) Gallbs or d icit.

2 . pfitat m6 scribére, he thinks I am writing.

3. DIvIcO réspondi t Ita H elvétibs ins tltfi tbs esse, Divico

replied that the Helvetians had been so educated.

INFINITIVE AND SUBJECT-A CCUSA TIVE. 217

4. C aesar Dumnbrlgem dés ignfiri sentiébat, Cwsar perceived

that Dumnorix was meant.

5. d icit montem ab hostlbus ténéri , he says that the hill is held

6 . rfimor érat C i ti ltnam servas armasse, there was a report

that Catiline had armed the slaves.

OBS. 2 . Note the translation of the foregoing sentences . The

subject-accusative is translated as if it were a nominative precededb the word that. The infinitive is translated like any finIte verb .

t e, further, that dicit is a verb of so ing p ittat, a verb of think

ing ; réspondi t, a verb of tellin an sentiébat, a verb of per

ceiving. Hence the following ru es

SUBJECT OF THE INFINITIVE.

253. RULE XXXI . Th e subject of th e infi ni tive

is put‘

in th e accusative.

SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE.

254. RULE XXXII . Verbs of say ing , th in k ing ,

know in g , p er ceiving , h ea r in g , and th e l ik e , are fo l

low ed by th e accusative w ith th e infin itive .

1. Various Impersonal Phrases, such as oertum es t, it is certain ,

nhoesse est, it is necessary, jus tum est, it is j ust, etc., are followed

by the accusative with the infinitive.

INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT .

255 . The Infinitive, w ith or w ithout a subject-accusative, may be used as the Subject of aVerb.

EXAMP LES.

1. dul oe prb patriambri est, to diefor one’s country is sweet.

2 . C aesar! nuntifitum est équl tés accédbre, itwas announced

to Ccesar that the cavalry was approaching.

OBS. The predicate adjective, agreeing with the infinitive, is

neuter.

COMPLEMENTARY INF INITIVE.

256 . RULE XXXIII . Th e infi n itive w ith out a

subject-accusative is used w ith many verbs to com

p lete th eir mean ing .


EXAMP LES.

l . C aesar p rbfi c isc‘

i m i tfirat, Caesar hastens to set out.

2 . p i rat bellum gérére, hep repares to wage war.

3. mi li tes pfignare pos sun t, the soldiers are able tofight.

OBS. The Complementary Infinitive is used with certain verbs

to complete their meaning ; it is generally either the direct objectof a transitive verb, or an accusative of limitation, as in Ex. 3

, the

soldiers are able as to fighting. The verbs that the complementaryinfinitive is used after usually denote ability, obligation, intention ,or endeavor ; after verbs SignIfying to abstain, to begin, to cease, to

continue, to dare, to fear, to hesitate, to be wont, and after the passive

voice of verbs of saying, believing, reckoning.

Note the translation of the following sentences ; parse

each infinitive , and give the rule :

1. gratum es t técum amb ifl fire, it is p leasant to walk with you.

2 . p i rat bellum gérére, heprepares to wage war .

3. aqua frigida es t , water is cold .

sentio { quam fr igidem esse, I perceive that water is cold .

5 . audib imicum aegrétum es se , I hear that (my) fr iend is sick.

6 . C aesar in Gal lia h iémar e cons ti tuit , Cazsar deter mined to

winter in Gaul .

7 . mfl ltés urb em cus tbdire débent, the soldiers ought to guard

the city.

8 . libér'

i e6 rum in serv l tfitem abd i ci n 6n debent, their chil

dren ought not to be led into servitude.

9. cans tl tuérun t jfimentbrum quam max imum nitmérum

co'

e'

mere , they determined to buy up as great a number ofbeasts of burden as possible.

Sigh t-R ead in g .

STORY OF HORATIUS.

TullO régnante, bellum inter A lbfinés et ROmfinOS exor

Tullus reigning nom.

tum est. Forte in duObus exercitibus ét ant trigemin'

i frfitrés ,by chance three born at one birth

nec aetate nec viribus dispares , apud ROmanOS Horatii ,neither nor unlike

apud A lbfinés Cum his Eigunt reges , ut pro 805.arrange

quisque patria dimicent ferro. A rma igitur capiunt, st infight accordingly they take


2 . Like a verb, the Participle has difierent voices and tenses ;

like an adjective, it has declension and gender ; and like both, it

has two numbers.

3. Transitive verbs have usually Four Participles : two in the

active voice (present and future) , as iman s , HmAtfi rus ; and two

in the passive voice (perfect and the gerundive, or futur e) , as

imatus , imandus .

4. Intransitive verbs have usually on ly the participles of the

active voice.

5. Participles govern the same cas es as their verbs.

6. Participles agree with nouns like adjectives.

F ORMA TION OF P A R TI C IP LES.

[The present participle is formed by adding-nt

,nom . ms, to the

present stem ; the future, by adding-tiiro, nom . t hrus , to the modified

present stem, or verb-stem ; the perfect, by adding-to

,nom .

-tus -so,

nom .-sus ) , to the verb-stem ; the gerundive, by adding

-ndo,nom.

-ndus,

to the present stem.]

PA RTIC IPLES, A CTIVE A ND PA SSIVE. 221

7 . The present stem of verbs of the fourth conjugation ends in'

-ie ( as audie in the present participle and gerundive.

8 . The Present Participle is declined like imans or prudens ;

note that the vowel is long before-ns, but short before -nt. The

Perfect and Future Participles are declined like b 6nus .

Form and translate the Present and Future A ctive

Participles , the Perfect Passive , and the Gerundive of the

following verbs :

17500 , A re, -RVI, 4mm , call. d éleo ,-6 re , -6vI, -6 tum, destroy.

pfigno , «i re , 43nd , 4mm ,fight. fleo ,-6 re, 4 171, -6 tum , weep .

hab s o ,-6 re ,

-ui , -Itum , have. taceo ,-6 re, -uI, -Itum , silent.

dfi co ,-6re, duxi , ductum , lead . v ivo , é re , v i , v ictum, live.

régo ,-6re , réxi , rectum, rule. dico ,

-6re, d ixi , dictum, say.

muni o ,-Ire, -Iv i , -i tum ,for tify. fini o ,

-Ire, -iv i , -Itum,finish.

D is tin ction s of Time.

EXAMP LES.

1. case omnes hontes C aesar ! ad pédés prbjéoarnnt, they all,weep ing, threw themselves at Ca sar

’

s feet.2 . Gal lia in trés partés est divisa, Gaul is divided into threeparts .

3. Div lti i cus flans , a C aesar s haeo pétébat, Divitiacus , weeping, begged these things from Caesar .

4. Bi b ianna, monte occupatb, nostrbs expectAbat, Labienus,

having takenpossession of themountain,was waitingfor our men.

5. mi les pfignans Cad it, the soldier fallsfighting.

6. hos tlbus ffigatis C aesar subs révbcAVit, when the enemywere put to fl ight, Caesar recalled his men .

OBS. The Present Participle has usual] the same meaning and

use in Latin as in English It denotes t e action as oing on at

the time denoted by the principal verb. The Perfect articiple is

used, in Ex . 2 , like a predicate adjective, but the idea is conveyed of

the action being completed before the time denoted by the principalverb. Note the translation of Exs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 .

TIME OF THE PARTICIPLE.

258 . RULE XXXIV. Th e par t icip le r ep r esen ts

th e time as p r esen t, p a st, or futur e, relatively to

th at of th e p r in cipal verb .


ABLAT IVE ABSOLUTE.

259. In Latin there is no Perfect Participle in the active

voice . Its place is often supplied (1) by the A blative

A bsolute the noun and the participle are both in the

ablative , a construction Similar to our independent case) ,or ( 2 ) by a Clause with a Conjunction .

EXA M P LES.

1. urbe capta (abl . abs.) Gives ffi gérun t. the city having been

taken, or being taken, or after the city had been taken, the

citizensfl ed.

2 . urbe a C aesars capta, cIvés fI‘

igérun t, when the city had been

taken by Caesar, the citizensfl ed .

OBS. Note thatwhen the noun and participle are both in the ahlative, and used independently of the rest of the sentence, the con

struction is called ablative absolute, i .e. absolute meanin freedfromdependence. ( A word is said to depend on another w en its

gender, number, mode, tense, or person is determined by that

word. In English, the Independent Case is used in the same waywith articiples ; as,

EXA MP LES.

l . Noun participle ; as, the city having been taken, the citiz ens

fl ed.

2 . Noun being adjective ; as, the soldiers beingbrave, the enemywas conquered.

3. Noun being noun ; as, he came toRome, Caesar being consul.

Note (1) that the noun in the Ablative Absolute denotes a

different person or thing from that denoted by any other word in

the sentence ; note ( 2) that the words in the‘

Ablative Absolute

express the time or circumstance of the action in the lead ing clause ;note (3) that words like a C as efire , modifying the Ablative A bsolute, stand between the noun and the participle. Hence the

following rule

ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE.

260. RULE XXXV. A n oun or p ronoun , w ith a

par ticip le or an ad jective, or tw o n oun s , m ay be pu t

in th e ab lative, to Oxp ress th e T ime or C ir cum stan ce

of an action .


EXERC ISES.


1. SOle Oriente,l fi

’

Igiunt tenebrae. 2 . Bellum Gallicum ,

Caesare impérfitOre , gestum est. 3. Puer , me invito, abiit.

4. Civés cum hostibus urbem oppI'

Ignantibus acriter dimica

bant. 5 . Hostés , victOriam adepti , in castra Sé récépérunt.

6 . Milités , pilis conject'

is , phalangem hostium perfrégérunt.

7 . Caesar , urbe captti ,2 discessit. 8 . Exercitus rédiit, bell

‘

I’

oasum de intégrO tentatiirus . 9. Quis est, qui mé unquam

vidérit légentcm? 10. Hosté'

s amnem transgressi castra

miinivérunt. 11. EX amissis civibus dOlor fuit. 12 . Caesar

cum 8615. décima légiOne prOfectiirus est. 13. Solem Orien

tem8cum maxima vbluptate spectamus .


1. When this was known , Caesar departed . 2 . When this

rep ly had been given , the men departed . 3. Caesar , when he

went to Gaul , took three legions . 4. Caesar , afl er he had

subdued Gaul,‘set out for Rome. 5 . He assists others with

out robbing himself .

5 6 . Under Caesar as commander , the

soldiers fought bravely. 7 . Many things go on without your

perceiving it.e 8 . After I had spoken , you went away .

9. Because their leader was killed , the soldiers fied. 10. The

soldiers , by throwing their weap ons , repulsed the line of the

enemy . 11. I come to assist you. 12 . When the leader

ordered , the soldiers assaulted the town . 13. This happened

one hundred years before the founding of the city. 14. Did

you hear me when I said that 15 . I saw my friend sitting

in the garden yesterday . 16 . Owsar is going to set out from

the camp with five legions . 17 Caesar lost his father when

he was" Sixteen years ( old) .


1. When the sun rises,temporal clause .

2 . Remember that there is no perfect active participle ; its place is

supplied by the ablative absolute, or by a clause with cum ; as, urbe

capta cum urbem cépis set.

GERUND A ND GERUNDIVE. 225

3. The present indicative follows the third conjugation . See 176 .

4. Observe that the ablative absolute can be used only when the

subject of the subordinate clause is different from that of the principal

clause (except in such phrases as ea invi tb , aga inst his w ill, used in

indirect discourse, and a few others not to be imitated .

5. Lit. not robbing himself; sé n6 n spblians .

6 . Lit. you not perceiving it, té n6 n sentiente.

7. Use agens , present participle .

Note that verbs of the second conjugation often weaken the char

acteristic vowel of the stem to i as,mbn i-tus . Sometimes this vowel

disappears ; as, dbceo , doc-tus .

How many participles may a transitive verb have ? What is a

participle? Give the meaning of the word. Show how the participle

is used as a verb,and as an adjective. What time do participles de

note ? How are they generally best translated? What is the meaning

of absolute ? Of ablative absolute ? Have we a similar construction in

English? Explain the English construction . Give the rule for the abla

tive absolute in Latin . When is one word said to depend on another ?

What active participle is found in English , but not in Latin ? (Ans .

The perfect ; as, having loved .) Give the stem and ending of the present

participle of imo.

LESSON LXXV.

GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.

EXERC ISE FOR SIGHT—READlNG .

262 . The Gerund is a verbal noun of the Second

Declension , used on ly in the Genitive, Dative, A ccusa

tive, and A blative Singular . It corresponds to the

English verbal noun in -ing.

EXAMP LES.

1. imd causa,for the sake of loving.

2 . fi tllis b ibondb , usefulfor drinking.

3. ad agrum Aran dum ,for ploughing thefield.

4. dbcendb dis cimus , we learn by teaching.

1. The Nominative of the Gerund is supplied by the Present

InfinitiveEXA M P LE .

sori'

bl re es t fl tIle , wr iting ( to write) is useful.


2 . The Gerund and Gerundive are formed by adding-ndi

and -udas , respectively , to the present stem .

P A RA D I GM .

3. Declens ion of the Gerund .

C as es . Exam p le . Engl ish .

amdre

amandi'

émandb to or for loving.

j i mdre, or w ith a pre lovin1 position Amandum

y.

i mandb with,from,

or by loving.

EXA M P LES.

NOM . s crfbére es t fi tfl e , ( to wr ite) wr iting is useful .GEN . ars s cri bendi es t uti lis , the ar t of writing is usef ul .DA T . ch arta s cri bend é es t fi ti l is , paper is useful for writing .

A C C . {s crfbére d isco , I learn to write ; or ,

inter sori'

ben dum d is co , I learn dur ing wr iting.

A BL . s cri'

ben d 6 d is c imus , we learn by wr iting .

OBS . Note that the accusative case of the gerund is found onlyafter prepositions, and cannot be used as the direct object of a

transitive verb.


EXAM P LES.

l . i gr icbla h5min és m is it. ad agrum Eran dum (gerundive) ,thefarmer sent men (for p lowing) top low thefield .

2 . ad eds res conficien d ds (gerundive) Orgétbrix déll gi tur ,

Orgetor ix is chosen ( for executing) to execute these p lans

ad eas rés conficiendum (gerund) , etc.

3. are puérbs édiicandi diffic i lis es t, the art of training boys

is difiicult.

OBS. 2 . In the dative, and in the ablative w ith a p reposition , the

gerund with a direct object is rarely used . Generally after prepositions the gerundive construction should be used ; as, ad cdp iendamurbem, not ad cdp iendum urb em ,for taking the city.

OBS. 3. The gerundive construction can be used only after verbs

that take the accusative, so also after iitor , truor , fungor , pbtior ,and ves co r , which in early Latin were followed by the accusative .

If the verb is intransitive, or governs any other case than the accusative, the gerundive is used impersonally with es t in the nominativesingular neuter.

EXAM PLE .

1. vfilétud lnl paroendum es t , the health must be spared ( lit.,there must be sparing of the health) .

OBS. 4. The gerundive construction cannot be used when the

object is a neuter pronoun or an adjective, as it would be impossibleto distinguish the gender .

1. s tfidium i gendi i l i quid , desire of doing something.

2 . oiipi d l tas pliira b i b and i , greedfor having more.

264. Gerund and Gerundive Constructions .

1. The genitive of the geru nd and gerundive is used after nouns

and adjectives as an objective genitive.

a . The genitive of the gerund and gerundive is common w ith

causa, for the sake of , to express p urp ose.

2 . The dative of the gerund and gerundive is used after adjec

tives ( rarely after nouns) that are followed by the dative of nouns .

3. The accusative of the gerund and geru ndive is used after the

preposition ad , to denote p urp ose, and sometimes after inter, circa ,

ob ; also after verbs Signifying to give, to deliver, to agree for, tohave, to receive, to undertake, to demand .


libr‘

is tuis legend'

is hOS tres dies cum multa véluptate exégi .

5 . A rs civitatis gfibernandae est difi icillima . 6 . PrOficiS

cendum 2 mihi erat i116 ipsOdie. 7 . Hostes in spem vénérant

pOtiendOrum cas rum . 8 . Caesar q uendi finem fécit.

9. A sinus idOneuS est Onera portandO. 10. A sinae idOneus

est Onéribus portand‘

is . 11. Catilina bellum suscépit rei

publicae délendae causa. 12 . A ger cOlendus est.

Sigh t-R ead in g .

STORY OF HORATIUS ( continued) .

Jam singuli Siipérérant, sed nec spe nee viribus pares .

one on each side survive

A lterlus érat intactum ferrO corpus , et geminata victOria'

.

untouched double

ferOx animus . A lter fessum vulnere fessum cursu trahébatweary running drag

corpus . Nec illud proelium fuit. ROmiinus exsultans A lbaexult

num male sustinentem arma conficit, jacentemque spOliat.holding up kill lying prostrate strip


1. The stem of audio is here audie

2 . The gerundive used impersonally .

What is a gerund ? How is the gerund declined What is used as

the nominative of the gerund? How is the gerund formed

? I s the

gerund ever used in the plural? What is generally used instead of

the gerund with its ObjectNote that the gerundive has three uses : (1) The predicate use with

the verb sum ,to form the passive periphrastic conjugation as

,

urb s délenda est, the city must be destroyed, see 2 8 8 . (2 ) The imper

sonal use (2 63. Obs . 3) in the neuter gender, w ith the verb eat, wi th

the same force as above ; as, pfignatum est mlhi, I must fight ( lit.,

fighting must be done by me) . (3) The gerundive use,which is alway s

active in meaning, being equivalent to the gerund ( see Withtransitive verbs the personal construction is regularly used ; as ,

epis tifl a mlhi est scribenda, I must write a letter ( lit., a letter must bewritten by me) .


OBS. Note, in the first two of the ioregoin examples, that the

supines rbgétum and peti tum are construe w ith mittunt and

v énérant , both verbs of motion ; these supines express the purp oseof the motion . In Ex. 3 the supine is used With the adjectivefaci le, and answers the question in what respect? ( 298 ) Note,further, that rbgAtum and péti tum are each followed by the

accusative, the same case that the verbs rOgo and peto require .

The idioms are expressed in the following rules

FORMER SUP INE

266 . RULE XXXVII . Th e sup in e in -um is used

after verbs of motion , to exp r ess th e purpose of the

motion .

1. The supine in-um governs the same case as its verb .

LATTER SUPINE

267 . RULE XXXVIII .- Th e sup in e in mil is used

to l im it th e mean in g O f ad ject ives sign i fying w onder

ful , ag r eea ble, ea sy or d iflicult, w or thy o r unw or thy ,

hono r able or bas e, and th e noun s fd s , n éfds , and

op us .

1. The supine in 41takes no object.

OBs . 1. The future infinitive passive imi tum iri is made up ofthe present infinitive passive of s o , I o, and the supine in

-um of

m o , and is, literally translated, it is einq gone (by somebody) tolove ; so that the apparent (or logical) subject is really the grammatical object .

OBS. 2 . The supine in mm is not very common ; only about twohundred and fifty verbs, chiefly of the first and third con

'

ugations,have a supine ; the supine in 41 is still less common. ence the

prpipriety of calling the third stem the particip ial stem, asVanicek

an other noted grammarians have done.

EXERC ISES.


1. Legat‘

i tét'

ins féré Galliae ad Caesz‘

irem gratiilatum

convénérunt. 2 . Orator dignuS est auditfi . 3. D ivitiacus

ROmam ad sénatum venit auxilium postulatum. 4. Id facile

dictuest. 5 . A eda‘

i legatbs ad Caesarem mittunt régatum


LESSON LXXVII .

LOCATIVE.

PLACE WHITHER? WHENCE? WHERE?

268 . The name of the place whither , whence, and

where, regularly requires a preposition .

1. The name Of the place whither, or to which, regularly requires

ad or in with the accusative.

EXA M PLES.

l . in Galliam , into Gaul.

2 . in urb em, into the city.

3. ad a rh em , towards ( the vicinity of ) the city.

4. ad R 6mam , towards ( the vicinity of ) Rome.

OBS. Note that A T, meaning near , not in , is, w ith all names Of

places, to be translated by ad or apud , w ith the accusative.

2 . The name of the place whence, or from which, regularlyrequires an, ab , d é , 6 , or ex, w ith the ablative.

EXA M PLES.

ab urb e , awayfrom the city .

ex A frc from ( out of ) Africa.

ex Oppid 6 , from the town .

5 R bma,from about ( the vicinity of ) Rome.fi

Cfl

lO

l—i

3. The name of the place where, or in which, regularly requires

in with the ablative .

EXA M PLES.

1. in Gal lia, inGaul. 3. in A frica, in Afi ica .

2 . in portfi , in the harbor 4. in cas trie , in the camp .

Nam es of P laces .

269. RULE XXXIX. R elation s of p lace are ex

p r essed by a n oun w ith a p repos ition ; but w ith

n am es of tow n s and sm al l island s , and a lso w ith

donu ts , r u s , an d a few o th er w or d s , th e p repo sition

is om itted , an d

PLACE TO WHICH .

1. The name of the place whither , or to which, is put in the

Accusative.


tris sé ténuit. 8 . Vir multOs anuos dOm‘

i vixit. 9. Miles

hiimi jacébat. 10. A tticus , C icérOniS amicus , multbs anuOs

A thén‘

is vixit 11. Karthagini reges creabantur . 12 . Magnas res Pompejus dbm

‘

i militiaeque , terramérique gessit.


1. Caesar came to the camp. 2 . Caesar came into Gaul .

3. Caesar came from Gaul. 4. The consul lived at Rome .

5 . The consul came from Rome to A thens . 6 . Caesar came

into Italy . 7 . The boy set out for home. 8 . In the summer

my friends and I Shall depart from Rome. 9. I shall set out

for M iletus , they will set out for A thens . 10. In the first

watch , the soldiers departed from the camp with a great

tumult. 11. Caesar set out for Rome. 12 . Caesar set out

from Rome . 13. Caesar wished to be first at Rome . 14. I

w ill depart into the country at the beginning of summer .

15 . My friend lived many years at A thens . 16 . Your friend

lived many years at my house . 17 . Many apples lay on the

ground .

Supplementary Exercises

1. I w ill dwell at A thens , but you at Rome . 2 . Many

great generals were born at Rome . 3. He died at Corinth .

4. The soldiers lie on the ground in summer . 5 . Caesar ,

(when he was ) made quaestor , hastened from I taly to Spain .

6 . He came into I taly . 7 . They were with me both in peace

and in war . 8 . He returned from the city to the countrv.

9. I have lived at A thens , at Rome , and at Carthage .

10. When the speech had been delivered , Caesar departed .

11. He came to Rome in the consulship Of C icero . 12 . In

Caesar’

s consulship , the Germans crossed the Rhine .

NOTES A N D QUESTIONS.

1. If urb s or oppi dum is added in apposition, the preposition in

must be used.

How is the place to which expressed? The p lace from which ? The

p lace at which, or where ? With names Of towns, how is the place to

which, the place from which,and the place at which expressed With


are happy . Ex. 2 expresses a command indirectly, i.e. commandingan act in which the first or third person is to be the actor ; the

imperative is used to express a direct command . The question inEx . 3 implies doubt, or uncertainty, and hence the subjunctive isused. The indicative is used in asking questions that do not

imply doubt .

OBS. 3. The

pupil Should note that may, can, must, might, could,

would, should, w en denoting emphasis or contrast, or meaning per

mission or duty, are not the Signs of the subjunctive, but require

separate verbs ; as, the soldiers can fight, meaning the soldiers are

able tofight m ili tés piign i re pos aunt . hIay andmight are usuallyrendered by the proper tenses of l icet ; can and could, by pos sum ;

must and should, by Oportet, néces s e cat, or the gerundive .

OBS. 4. The translations of the subjunctive mode given below

in connection with the conjugation of the verb are the most

common meanings when used in independent sentences . The

meanings in dependent sentences will be illustrated in the exercises

further on .

SUBJUN CTIVE MODE .

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 241

OBS. 5 . The subjunctive is sometimes translated by the EnglishIndicative ; sometimes by the Potential, with the auxiliaries may,might, would, should ; sometimes b the Sub

'

unctive ; sometimes bythe Infinitive ; and it is often used

,

for the mperative, especially in

prohibitions .

EXAMP LES.

1. cum aim , since I am. 5 . ad sum ut v ideam , I am here

2 . s im , may I be. to see ( that I may see) .

3. st es sem , if I were. 6 . s imus , let us be, may we be.

4. né fuéris , be thou not. 7 . s i fuérit , if he should have been.

OBS . 6 . The Present Imperative has no first or third person .

If It 13 required, in an imperative sentence, to use the first or third

person, the subjunctive is to be used ; as,

272 . Instead of the regular forms Of the Imperfect Sub

junctive , and the Future Infinitive Of sum , the follow ing);

are frequently used


2 . Translation of the Subjunctive

1. m et, let him love.

amémus , let us love.

cum v 6nis s et, when he had come, or having come.

s i C aes ar pfign et , if Caesar ( should) fight.s i C aesar es set dux , if Caesar were leader .

amAVErit, suppose he ( has) loved.

cum am5v érit , since he loved.

civés mei s in t beati , may myfellow-citiz ens be happy .

nel audiat, let him not hear .

41

00

0

co

oo

q

cz

cn

VOCA BULAR Y.

trans-grédi or ,-gr6d i ,

-gres sus sum , dep.

,cross .

extra, prep. and adv., outside of; beyond.

in créd ib ilis , -e , incredible.

jungo , jungére , junx i , junctum , j oin, unite.

sagittar ius , -i‘

i , M ., archer .

excelsus , -a, -um , lofly.

consanguineus , -a, -um , related by blood, kindred.

ln-fluo ,-fluére , -flux i , -fluxum,flow into,

‘

empty.

impéditus , -a, -um , part., hindered.

EXERC ISES.

Tell the mode , tense , number , and person of the following

1. Amaret , amémus , amet. 2 . Amavissem , iimavér int ,

amarent . 3. Laudaret, laudavissent, laudavérit. 4. VOcet ,vOcarent, vécavissent. 5 . Vulneres , vulnéret, vulnérent .

6 . Exspectémus , exspectarémus , exspectavissémus . 7 . R6

gem ,rogaverlm, rogav1ssem.

NOTES A ND QUEST I ONS.

1. N emay be an adverb,as né lmet, let him not love ; né may be a

conjunction,as né commeah

'

i prbh ibérétur, cas trie i ddneum

lOcum délégit, he chose a suitable place for a camp , that he might not be

cut of f rom supplies ( i.e . lest he should be cut of , no is an inter

rogative particle (always an enclitic ) , as audivitne, does he hear

I low many tenses has the subjunctive ? How is the imperfect

formed

SUBJUNCTIVE OF THE F OUR CONJUG A TIONS. 245

LESSON LXXX.

SUBJUNOTIVE OF THE POUR OONJUGATIONS.

AC TIVE VO IC E.

276 . The inflection of the Subjunctive A ctive Of the

conjugations is as follows

P A R T IA L P A R A D IGM .

PRESENT .

audiamus

audiant

Iu PERFEC T .

audi rem

audir et

PERFEC T .

PLUPERFEOT .

ami vissem

amiivmses°

amavisset

amavissémus

amavissétis

ami vissentP

w

fi

ifi

fi’

t‘


VOC A BULA R Y.

r i ti s , -is , F ., rafl . lénItAS, F ., sofl ness, smoothness .

atatao , s tatuére , s tatui , s ta im-pédi o ,

-ire ,-ivi or -ii , -itum ,

tfi tum , p lace at. hinder .

statfi ra, -ae , F .

, size, statue . fund i tor , -6 fis , M ., slinger .

n ih i l ( indecl. neut. noun ) , linter , -tris , F ., boat.

nothing . calvus , -a, -um , bald .

EXERC ISES.

Tell the mode , tense , number , and person Of the follow ing

1. MOneat, mOnérémus , mOnérent. 2 . MOnuérim, mOnu

issem , mOnuissent . 3. Habeam , habeant, habérent. 4. De

leret, délévérim , délévissem . 5 . DOceat, dOcéret , dOcuérit.

6 . Régat, régéret, réxérit . 7 . Régamus , régérémus , rexé

rimus . 8 . Mittamus , mittérent, misissent . 9. Contendas ,

contenderes , contendéris . 10. Dficant, dficérent, diixérint,

dfixissent. 11. Vincat, vicérit, vicisset. 12 . A udiat ,

audiret, audivérit. 13. A udivisset, audirémus , audiant.

14. Miiniiis , mfinirés , mfin’

ivéris . 15 . Véniatis , vénirétis ,

vénéritis .

LESSON LXXXI .

VERBS.—SUBJUNOTIVE PASSIVE.

277 . The inflection Of the Subjunctive Pass ive Of the four

conjugations is as follows

P A R TI A L P A R A D IGM .

PRESENT .


LESSON LXXXII .

SUBJUNOTIVE IN INDEPENDENT SENTENOES.

IMPERAT IVE.

278 . The Latin Subjunctive has two principal uses

I . It is used in INDEPENDENT SENTENOES to eXpress

1. A Wish ( Optative Subj unctive) ; negative is né.

3.

4.

5.

An Exhortation or a Mild Command, chiefly in Prohibitions

(Hortatory Subj unctive) negative is né.

A Question Of Doubt or of Deliberation (Dubitative or Deliber

ative Subj unctive) negative is né.

An A ction as Possible, not as Real (P otential Subj unctive) ;negative is nén .

A Concession ( C oncessive Subj unctive) negative is n é .

I I . It is used in DEPENDENT C LAUSES to express

a .

Condition ( Conditional C lause, seeComparison ( Comparative C lause, seeConcession ( Concessive C lause, see

Purpose (F inal C lause, see

Result ( C onsecutive C lause, seeCharacteristic (Relative C lause, see

Cause ( C ausal C lause, seeTime ( Temporal C lause, seeIndirect Question ( I nterrogative C lause, see

CD

NI

CD

OI

FB

OG

M

H

co

The Subjunctive is also used in relative clauses ( seein intermediate clauses ( see and in subordinate clauses in

Indirect Discourse ( see

fl

Oz

Ol

fli

ww

EXAMP LES.

(fi tinam ) mfl i tés fortibrés fuis sen t, would that the soldiers

had been brave.

pfign émus , let us fight.

pfignet , let himfight.

né pfi gnémus , let us not fight.

quid fi cérem , what was I to do ?

Ego cens eam , I am inclined to think, or I should think .

s it clarus S cip ib , granted that Scip io be renowned .

SUBJUNOTIVE IN INDEPENDENT SENTENOES. 249

OBS. Ex . 1expresses a wish, and the verb is therefore in the Optative Subjunctive ; uth am , would that, 0 that, frequently precedes

the optative subjunctive ; the negative particle is h e. Note, further,that the present and perfect imply that the w ish ma be fulfilled ;the imperfect and pluperfect , that the w ish is not ulfilled,—the

imperfect representing an unfulfilled w ish in present time, the

pluperfect in past time . Exs . 2 and 3 ex ress a mild command,commanding an act in which the first or thi rd person is the actor ;the verbs are in the Hortatory Subjunctive ; the negative particle ish e, not n6n . Ex. 4 expresses a Prohibition . Ex . 5 asks a delibera

tive or doubtful question ; the verb is in the Dubitative or Delibera

tive Subjunctive. Ex. 6 makes a cautious, polite, or modest statement,and the verb is in the Potential Subjunctive. Ex . 7 expresses a

concession, and the Concessive Subjunctive is used .

EXERC ISES.


1. Scribamus . 2 . Ne scribamus . 3. Laudémus nOmen

Dei . 4. Mali l séeernant Sé a bim'

is .

l 5 . Utinam pater

véniat. 6 . Amémus . 7 . Véniamus in urbem . 8 . Sint

beat'

i .2 9. Utinam magister discipfilOs landet. 10. Utinam

magister diseipiilOs laudaret. 11. Utinam in litOre maris

ambfiliirem . 12 . Utinam mi gister discipfilOs laudavisset.


1. Let us love our country . 2 . Let us praise our friends .

3. May you be happy . 4. DO not write the letter . 5 . Would

that he were present. 6 . May the pupil study . 7 . May

the teacher praise the pupils . 8 . Would that the teacher

praised the pupils . 9. Would that the teacher had praised

the pupils . 10. Let him walk with his friends .


1. See 83. 4.

2 . Note that (1) when the wish is for something future, the presentsubj unctive is used, but the perfect may be used ; ( 2 ) when it is for

something p resent, the imperfect subjunctive is used ; (3) When it is forSomething past, the pluperfect subjunctive is used . A s the p resent and

past cannot be changed, the wish expressed by these tenses is unfulfilled .

Mention the chief uses Of the subjunctive . Give the uses of the

subjunctive in independent clauses . What negative is used w ith the

subjunctive ? What w ith the imperative? How many persons has

the imperative How is a future, a p resent, and a past wish expressed?


SYNOPSIS FOR

1. Optative

Hortatory

Sub juncti ve m3. Dubitative, or

Ind epend en t Deliberative .

Sentences

4. P otential statements .

5. C oncessive

LESSON LXXXIII .

DEPONENT VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.

ABLATIVE WITH DEPONENTS.

279. Many verbs are used only in the Passive Voice , butwith an A ctive meaning. These are called DEPONENT

( laying aside) , because they lay aside the active form and

the p assive mean ing.

1. They occur in all four conjugations, and the conjugation towhich they belong is determined by the characteristic vowel of the

present infinitive. They are inflected like the passive of other

verbs, and have also the gerund, participles, and supines of the

active voice .

2 . Deponents of the First Conjugation are inflected as follows

P R I N C I P A L P A RTS.

REVIEW.

I’Vishes .

Exhortations.

Commands .

Prohibitions.

Questions ofDoubt.

Deliberation .

Indignation.

Impossibility.

DEPONENT VERBS. 253

The Perfect Participle of a few deponent verbs may have a

passive meaning ; as,

EXAM P LE .

1. fideptns , having obtained, or having been obtained.

280. A blative with fi tor, fruor, etc.

EXA M PLES.

p liir im ls mi rItImIs rébus frulmur et fi timur , we enj oy and

use very many maritimep roductions .

C aesar opp id é pOtitur , Caesar obtains possession of the town .

lacte v escun tur , they live on milk.

fungi tur officid , he performs his duty .

OBS . Note the translation of the deponent verbs in each of the

foregoing sentences ; note that each is construed w ith the ablative,as if it were an accusative . The idiom is expressed in the follow

ing rule :

A BLATIVE WITH DEPONENTS.

281. RULE XLI . Utor , fr uo r , fun gor , p btior ,

vescor , an d th eir com p oun ds , ar e fo l low ed by the

ablat ive .

LESSON LXXX IV.

DEPONENT VERBS.

282 . A Synopsis of Deponent Verbs of the Four Con

jugations is as follows

P R IN C I P A L P A R TS.

P re sen t . P res . I nf . P e r f . I nd .

mi'

ratus sum,admire .

vér itus sum, fea r .

pOti'

tus sum, possess .


8 . Hostés urbem aggrédiuntur . 9. Puer , né mentitus sis .

10. Magnos hominés virtute mét’

imur , non fortiinz‘

i . 11. Prae

ceptor gaudébat. 12 . Cives maxnme gams i sunt. 13. Rémus

Numitoris greges infestare Solitus est.


1. We admire , we fear , we approach ,1we measure . 2 . You

admire , you fear , you approach , you measure . 3. We ad

mire , we were admiring, we have admired , we had admired .

4. We rejoice , they rejoice. 5 . We have rejoiced , theyhave rejoiced . 6 . We dare , we dared , we have dared .

7 . We trust, we trusted , we have trusted , we will trust.

8 . The garden of the king is adorned .


1. Use the proper tense of aggrédior.

Define deponent verbs . Why are these verbs so called ? Of what

conjugation are they? How many participles may a deponent verb

have ? What deponents have four participles How many stems has

a deponent verb What active forms have deponent verbs

LESSON LXXXV.

PBBIPHBASTIO CONJUGATIONS. DATIVE OP AGENT.

284. The Periphrastic1C onjugations are formed by

combin ing the tenses of eas e with the future active

participle and w ith the gerundive .

1. A ctive P er ip h r as tic C onj uga tion .

28 5 . The A ctive Periphrastic Conjugation , formed bv

combining the tenses of eas e with the future active parti

ciple , denotes an intended or future action .

OBS . The subjunctive has no future tense ; its place may besupplied, whenever it is necessary to distinguish accurately futurefrom p resent time i n subordinate clauses, by the periphrastic subjunctive, which may be called the future subj unctive.

PERIPHRA STIC CONJUGA TIONS. 257

P A R T I A L P A R A D IGM .

l l . P a s s ive 4 P er ip h r a stic C onj uga tion .

286 . The Passive Periphrastic Conjugation , formed bycombining the tenses of ease with the gerundive, denotes

necessity or duty .

P A R TIA L P A R A D I GM .


28 7 . Dative of the A gent.

EXA M PLES.

l . dfl igentia oblenda est uéb is , we must cultivate a habit ofcarefulness ( lit ( a habit of ) carefulness is to us to be

cultivated) .2 C aesari omni a fino tempbre ét at agend a, C aesar had tb

do everything at one time ( lit . , everything was to C aesar to be

done at one time) .

3. omn ibus mdriendum eat , all must die ( lit. , ( the necess ity of )dying is to all) .

4. C aesari in Galliam matfi ram dum , C aesar had to hasten into

Gaul ( lit., ( the necessity of ) hastening into Gaul was to

Caesar ) .

OBS . In Exs . 1and 2 note that with the gerundive the person

upon whom the obligation rests of doing the action is expressed bythe dative ; this dative expresses not merely the doer of the action ,

but the person interested in doing it, and is, therefore, to be classi

fied under the Dative of Interest ( see 193. Note that the verbs

in Exs. 1and 2 are transitive,6and the periphrastic forms have a

subject w ith which they agree in gender , number , and case in Exs .

3and 4 the verbs are intransitive, the periphrastic forms have no

subject, but are of the third person singular, neuter gender . The

verb is here used impersonally, but the agent is in the dative .

The idiom may be stated as follows :

DATIVE OF AGENT .

288 . RULE XLII .— Th e d ative o f th e agen t is u sed

w ith th e gerun dive to d en ote th e p er son in ter ested

in d o in g th e action .

1. The dative of agent is often used after perfect participles .

2. The agent with passive verbs is usually denoted by the abla

tive with a or ab .

EXERC ISES.


1. Patria amanda est. 2 . Amandus est ille puer . 3. H ic

liber tibi légendus est. 4 Caesar castra motfirus est.

5 . Caesar. cum Soladécima leglone profectfirus erat. 6 . Mill i

scribendum est. 7 . Obsidés tibf datfirus sum . 8 . Frfimen

tum A edu'

is 6 dandum est. 9. Epistfila tibi scribenda est .

TA BLE OF THE FOUR CONJUGA TIONS. 261

2 . The PERFEC T STEM ( found by adding to the present stem

-vi for the l st and 4th conjugations ; -vi, or generally -ui , for the 2d ;and -si to the verb-stem of the 3d) , on which are formed the

tenses in the active voice that express completed action ; viz .,

a . The PERFECT,

IND IC A TIVE.

b. The PERFEC T and PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

c. The PERFEC T INF IN ITIVE.

an d P er so n .

Fut.

Perf.

INF IN ITIVE

BUBJUNCTWE.

INDICATIvE

INDICATIVE.

Sing .1

P lur .1

P lur . I

Sing . l

P lur .1

re 51

s

H

H

Sing.1

P lur .1

PLUPERFEC T, and FUTURE PERFECT

PER FEC T STEM .

l st C on j . 2d C on j . 3d C onj .

amavi monui réxi

amavi-Sfi monui-sti rexi-sti

amavI-t mbunl-t réxI-t

amavI-mus mount-mus réxI—musamavi-Sus monui-s tis rexi-stisamave-runt , re monué-runt , re réxé-runt.re

amave-ri-m monué-ri-m réxé ri-mamave-ri-S monuG-ri-S réxe-ri-Samave-ri-t menue-ri-t réxé-ri-tamave-ri-mus monué-rI-mus réxé—r’l—musamave-rI-tis monue-rl-tis réxé-ri-tisamavth ri-nt monue-ri-nt rexé-ri-nt

amavis se m6nui-sse rexi-sse

amave-ra-m monué ra-m réxe-rwmamave-ri -s monue-rafi s réxé rfi-s

amave-ra-t monué ra-t réxé—ra-tamave-ra-mus mbnué-ra-mus réxé—ra-musm ove-tans monué-ra-tis réxé—ra-tisamave-rwnt monue-rwnt réxes rap nt

amavi-sse-m monui-sse-m réxi-sse-mamavi-sse-s monui-sse-s réxi-sse-samavi-Sse-t monui-sse-t rexi-sse-t

amavi-sse-mus monui-Sse-mus réxi-sse-musamavi-Sse-tis monui-SSGtiS rexi-sse-tisamavi-sse-nt m6nui-sse-nt

amavé ro mbnueh ro réxé-toamave-ri-s monué-ri-s réxe-ri-samave-r i-t monne-r i-t réxé ri-tamave-rI-mus mbnué-rI-mus réxe-rl-musamave-rT-tis monué-rI-tis réxé-ri-tis

amave-ri-nt monué-ri-nt réxé—ri-ut

4th C onj .

audiviaudivi-sti

audivI—taudivI-musaudivi-stis

audivés runt, re

endive-ri-maudive-ri-Saudive-ri—taudivé-ri-musaudive-rI-tis

audivé-ri-nt

audivi-sse

audive-ra-maudive-ra-saudivé-ta-t

audivé—rapmusaudive-ra-tis

audive-ra-nt

audivi-sseomaudivi-sse-saudivi-sse-taudivi-ssé-musaudivi-ssé tisaudivi-sse-nt

audive-roaudivé-r i-saudivé-ri-t

audive-rI-musaudivG-rI-tis

audivé—ri-nt


THE FOUR CONJUGAT IONS.

—AC T IVE VO ICE.

R ecap i tu ta tion .

Give the meaning, stem , formation , principal parts ,

euphonic changes , mode , tense , number , and person of

each of the follow ing

1. audit

2 . érfi d iébat

3. amAmus

4. dbcémus

5. régit

6 . vécémus

7 . vulnérat

8 . m a

9. timent

10. monébunt

11. culpfib ant

12 . crédun t

13. mi ttun t

14. frangl ti s

15. terrétis

laudfib it

17 . claus lmus

18 . nar ran t


1. Lauda, cxercé, scribe, obedi . 2 . Laudémus , exer

ceamus , scribamus , 6bédiamus . 3. Utinam pz'

iter fabulam

névam narret ! 4. Fidem servémus . 5 . Tacete , puéri .

6 . Laudfite , exercéte, scribite , Chedite . 7 . Cépias majoréshabérémus . 8 . Utinam pater véniat ! 9. Né pfignémus .

10. Dicit Caesarem oppidum expfignavisse . 11. Dicit Cae

sarem Oppidum expiignare . 12 . Caesar in Gallia hiémare

constituit. 13. Littéras scribamus .


1. He praises . 2 . We teach . 3. They write . 4. He

hears . 5 . They were teaching. 6 . He will write . 7 . Thev

will hear . 8 . We do not ask . 9. They are reading.

légébat5

pfinivGrun t

pangun t

pétent

persuasérat

dbcébun t

lauda( v§) roériid i (v ) 6ritducébat

exeroébis

érfid i ( vi ) s tidi s cit

h i b i ti vérunt

vbcat

scripséro

dédi t

ténuérat 4

nar rate


I

THE FOUR C ONJUGAT IONS.

—PASSIVE VO IC E.

R ecap i tu la tion .

Give the meaning, stem, formation , principal parts ,

euphonic changes , mode , tense , number , and person of each

of the follow ing

1. narratu r im i ti sfimus v id émini2 dbcen tur 3 docti sunt v incébaris

3. légébantur4

aud i tus es t nil nébun t

4. audi ébar mis s a es t aed ifi c i ti s

5. mbnéris érfi d iti aunt parati St i mus

6. v605b6ris lectus es t érfid i tur

7. p iin iun tur vbcfitus es pfin itae sum:8 . d ii céria 5 mun itum es t Educator

9. v incar pun iti érAmus oppugnata es t

10. narran tur laudatus éx'at Gdficfiti fuéran t

11. m6v 6mur laudi tae sun t culpabari s

12 . dbcére puérbs puéri ex erci ti sun t laudétur

audi tor puella ornata es t v is i Eran t

14. imémur mbn i ti Eran t cingétur


1. D iscipiilus a magistrO laudatur . 2 . Puer , béne édii

cator . 3. LabOra. 4. Dicit puer sé laudatum esse . 5 . D6

bémus laudari . 6 . Milites jussi sunt pfignare . 7 . D iscipiili

a magistrO dOcentur . 8 . C redo eum illOs puérOS laudatfirum

esse . 9. BOni discipfili student exercéri in littérarum stfidiis .


1. He was told . 2 . They are telling . 3. I was (being)taught. 4. We are taught. 5 . He is heard . 6 . They w ill

be taught . 7 . We shall be sent. 8 . He was conquered .

9. They were seen . 10. I was being called . 11. Thou w ilt

have been blamed . 12 . He is being praised . 13. Thou wilt

have been praised . 14. They have been sent. 15 . They

have been called . 16 . They w ill have been heard . 17 . She

has been taught. 18 . He has been heard . 19. Yo have been

268 FI RST STEPS I N LA TIN .

3. See above, note 4.

4. Notice that rég tus rec-tus .

5. Verb—stem dno tum ductum.

How do you distinguish the conjugations Give the present stem

of the first conjugation . What is mean t by the pr incipal parts of a

verb What are the principal parts in the passive voice How is the

perfect of each conjugation formed What verbs take two accusatives

of the same person or thing? Give the tense-Sign of the imperfect

indicative active . How is the participial stem of each conjugationformed ? What is the tense-sign of the present

? (A ns . It has none . )What is the tense-sign of the future perfect

? (A ns . amavE-ri—mus . )Has the indicative any special sign to mark the mode ? (A ns . No . )What are the personal endings of the present

? These endings were

originally personal pronouns , and have, accordingly , the force of pro

nouns in English . Remember that the verbal endings contain

1. The tense-Sign as —ba in fimfi-ba—m .

2 . The mode-vowel ; as -ii in rég-fi-s .

3. The personal ending ; as-s in rég

-a-s .

A re the future participle active and supines formed from this stem ?

(A ns . Strictly they are not ; the future participle active is an adjectiveform to nouns in -tor

,-sor as , lee-tor, fut. part. lec-tfi rus ; the supine

is a noun of the fourth conjugation in -tu or -su, nom .-tum or «mm ;

but as the form is the same as the participial stem,and as the suffixes

begin with t, these forms are usually referred to this stem . )

LESSON LXXXVII .

GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUALITY.

exeacns s FOR SIGHT - READING.

Genitive of Quality .

EXA M P LES.

vir maximi cons i li i , a man of very great sagacity .

fos sa quindécim pédum , a ditch offifl een feet.

v ir es t excellen tis ingén ii , he is a man of excellent disposition .

C aes ar Dumnbrlgem m i gn i an im i et mAgnae in ter G all é s

auctbri tati s cégnbvérat , C aesar knew that Dumnor ix was

( a man) of great courage and infl uence among the Gauls .

GENITIVE AND ABLA TIVE OF QUALITY. 269

291. A blative of Quality .

EXAMP LES.

1. summa v irtiite i d iilésoéns , a youth of the greatest valor .

2 . C i tilin a ingéni b 111516 fui t, C atiline was a man of a bad

disposition .

3. C aesar fuls se trad itur excelsa statura, Caesar is said to

have been of tall stature .

OBS . In the foregoing examples, note that the nouns added for

description (as cons i lil. pédum , ingénii , anlmi , auctbri tAtis ) areall in the genitive case, and that, in every instance, the genitive is

accompanied by an adjective (as maxImI.quin décim, excellentis ,

m i gni , magnate) . This gen itive cannot be used without an accom

panying adjective : as , a man of talent is hbmo ingéniésus ( noth bmo ingénil ) ; but, a man of great talent is hbmo magni ingénii .

Note , further, that in every instance the relation expressed is be

tween two nouns ; thus , a ditch of fifteen feet is fos sa quindécim

pédum , but when latus is added , we must say fos sa quindécim

p éd és lata, a ditchfifl eenfeet deep . (Note that i nlml and auctb

r itati s , in Ex . 4, stand in the predicate after the intransitive verb

esse understood .) A genitive added in this way to a noun for

further description is called a DESC R IPT IVE GENITIVE, or a GEN IT IVE OF QUA LITY, or OF CHA RA C TERISTIC ; if it stands in the

predicate after an intransitive verb, it is called a PRED ICA TE

GEN I TIVE OF QUA LITY, etc . Note that in Exs . 1, 2 , 3, under 291,the nouns vi rtute , ingénib, and s tatfiraareadded to express uality,or for further descrip tion, and that these nouns are in the a lative.

Distinguish the attributive (virti'

ite) and the predicate use ( ingfinib,statura) . The idioms are expressed in the follow ing rule :

GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUA LITY.

292 . RULE XLIII .—A n oun d en oting qua lity , quan

tity , or d escr ip tion , an d h aving an ad jective jo in ed

w i th it , m ay be put in th e gen itive or in th e ablative .

OBS . The use of the ablative is more common ,but the two cases

are often used indifferently, and sometimes both are found in the

same sentence .

EXERC ISES.


1. Germani viri corpOrum ingenti magnitudine fuérunt.

2 . Cati lina fuit magna vi et animi et corpOris . 3. Bibracte

est oppidum apud A eduOs maximas auctOritatis . 4. Caesar ,

vir summi ingénii ( or summo ingéniO) , prfidentiam cum

éq uentia junxit.


Sigh t-R ea d in g .

CE SAR’

S LA NDING IN BRITA IN .

Erat1ob has causas summa difi‘

icultas , quod navés propterfor because

magnitfidinem, nisi in altO, constitui2nOn p6terant ; militi

siz e deep (water ) station could

bus 3autem—ignOtis lbeis ,4 impeditis manibus ,magnO et graviunknown encumber

armOrum Onére oppressis Simul et dé navibus désiliendumweight load both

et in fluetibus consistendum et cum hostibus érat piignanand wave stand-firm

dum ; cum illi 5 aut ex arido , aut paulum In aquam progressi ,while dry ( land ) a little

omnibus membris expéditi , notissimis locis , audacter

m

telalimbs free well-known dart

cénicérent, et équos insuéfactOS incitarent.hurl train push-ou


1. Subject ? Position Eng. there was .

2 . Rule for this infinitive

3. The construction is, mi li tibus désfl iendum ét at, the soldiers

had to leap . Rule for mi li tibus being in the dative ?

4. Explain these ablatives. 5 . To whom does ill! refer

LESSON LXXXVI I I .

IRREGULAR VERBS.

293. I rregularVerbs deviate from the common inflection

in some of the parts formed from the present stem. The

tenses formed from the perfect and participial stems are

inflected alike in all verbs . The forms called irregular are,

for the most part, either syncopated or ancient forms .

1. The most common Irregular Verbs are1. sum , I am. 5 . féro , I bear

2 . vblo , I wish. 6 . s o , I go.

3. malo , I prefer . 7 . fio , I ammade, or become.

4. nfilo , I am unwilling . 8 . édo , I eat.

9. queo , I am able.


3. P TO-sum , I help , I p rofit, is inflected like am , but retains its

original d (préd before a vowel, and loses it before a consonant ;

as

PR IN C I P A L PA R TS.

PRES. INF . PERF . IND . PARTIC IPLE.

p r6 d-es se

4. Like sum are conjugated ah-sum , ad-sum , d é—sum , ih -sum ,

inter-sum , oh -sum , prae-sum , sub-sum ( no perfect) , super-sum.

EXA MP LES.

1. C aesar p6 tes t Iter dare Casar is able to give, or can

give, a passage.

IRREGULA R VERBS. 273

2 . C aesar pbtérat Iter d i re, C aesar was able to give, or could

give, a passage.

3. C aesar pbtérit i ter dare, Casar will be able to give a passage.

4. C aesar pbtui t i ter d i re , Caesar has been able to give, or could

have given, a passage.

SYN . P os sum , I am able, because I have sufiicient power ; queo ,

I am able, because circumstances allow .

EXERC ISES.

Name the mode, tense, number , and person of the fol

lowing forms

1. Pbtest, pOtérat, pétérit. 2 . Possiimus , pétéramus , pOté

rimus . 3. Ego possum légére, tu pOteS scribére . 4. Caesar

oppidum expiignare pOtest. 5 . Amicis 1prOdesse possumus .

6 . Caesar pOtest iter Helvétiis dare . 7 . D ivitiiicus pliiri

mum 2 in réliqua Gallia pOtérat. 8 . Caesar urbi praeérat.

9. Multi 8 Siipersiimus . 10. Caesar équités praemittit.

‘


1. 202 . 2 . plfirimum pos se, to be very powerful seeVocabulary .

3. multi modifies né s (we) , the omitted subject of supers iimus .

Translate, many of us survive ; of us is appositive. See 202 .

If the simple verb is transitive, the compound is transitive, and is

followed by the accusative. What is an irregular verb ? Mention the

most common irregular verbs. Of what is pos sum compounded?

Give its composition ; account for the euphonic changes.

LESSON LXXXIX.

IRREGULAR VERBS (con tinued ) .

294. The Irregular Verbs volo , and its compounds ,and male , are inflected as follows

P R I N C I P A L P A R TS.

P r es. I n f . P er f . I n d . P a r ticip le .

wish.

be unwilling.

p refer .

IRREGULAR VERBS. 277

P A SSIVE VO I CE .

OBS. 1. In the Present and Imperfect Tenses of féro the only irregu

larity is the omission of e and i in some of the terminations : thus,fer-s fer-is , fer-t fer-it, fer-rem fér-érem, fer-t e fér-ere, etc .

The forms of féro are derived from three independent stems, seen in

OBS. 2 . The compounds of fi re are conjugated in the same way

af-fero (ad, fero ) af-ferre s t-tuli al-lfitnm, bring to.

nu-fero (ab, fero ) au-ferre ah-stuli ah-li tum, carry away .

ef-fero (ex, fero ) ef-ferre ex—tuli é-li tum,carry out.

in-fero ( in , fi re ) in-ferre in-tuli il-latum, carry into.

of-fero (ob, fero ) oi-ferre oh-tuli oh-latum, present.

prO-fero (prfi , fero ) prO

-ferre prO-tuli pré-Ii tnm,

carryforward .

ré-féro (re, iéro ) ré-ferre ret-tuli ré-li tum,bring back.


296 . A blative of Specification .

EXAM P LES.

1. réx nbmine fuit, he was king in name.

2 C laud ius altérb péde, lame in onefoot.3. H elv étii réliqué s C al las v irtfi te praecédunt , theHelvetians

surpass the other Gauls in valor .

4. oppida sua omnia, niiméro ad dubdécim incendun t, theyburn all their towns, about twelve in number .

OBS . In the foregoing examples, nam ine , péde , v irtfite , andnumérd , show in what resp ect or particular the statement is true,i.e.

, t e Helvetians surpass the other Gauls in resp ect to valor . The

principle is expressed in the following rule

A BLATIVE OF SPEC IFICATION .

297 . RULE XLIV.

—A n oun , ad j ective , or verb

m ay be fo l low ed by th e ab lative to den ote in w h at

r esp ect its sign ifi cation is tak en .

EXERC ISES.

Name the mode , tense , number , and person of the fol

lowing verbs

1. Périmas, férébamus , féramus , férémus . 2 . Quid fers ,mi 1Smice ? 3. Ferte Viro auxilium . 4. POpiIlus Romanus

diii injurias tiilit. 5 . Helvétiis bellum inferre VOlI‘

imus .

6 . Férimur , férébamur , férémur , féramur . 7 . A uxilium

militibus ii diice fertur . 8 . Hi omnes linguii , institfitis ,

légibus inter Sé difiérunt. 9. Fer mihi auxilium . 10. Oppi

dum RémOrum nOmine Bibrax 2 longé abérat.


1. We hear , we were bearing, we will bear . 2 . They

hear , they will bear . 3. He has borne , he had borne , they

had borne . 4. We are borne, we were borne , we Shall be

borne . 5 . He is borne , he was borne . 6 . He has been

borne , he had been borne . 7 . Bear aid , they will bear aid ,

he has borne aid . 8 . They differ in language and laws .


1. 231. Obs . 1.

2 . Bib rax , gen .-actis , F . (French modern name B ievre) .


OBS. 3. The compounds of eo usually take-n ,

rarely-ivi in the per

fect tenses as, adeo, I approach, makes adii , adiéram, i dissem,etc .

OBS. 4. The compounds of eo which have a transitive meaning are

conjugated throughout in the pass ive as, i deo, I approach ; PA SS .

adsor , adir is , aditur , i dimur , adimini , i deuntur , etc .

OBS. 5 . Ambio, I go about, retains the i throughout, and is conju

gated regularly like a verb of the fourth conjugation . Hence we find

ambiébam,but occasionally ambibam,

the gerund ambiendi , etc. The

perfect participle is ambitus , though the verbal substantive is ambitus .

299. Edo , I eat.

P R I N C I P A L P A R TS.

PRES . INF . PERF . IND . PARTIC IPLE .

édére or es se ed i esum

OBS. 1. Edo is of the third conjugation, with variations ; e’

or t

before 3 or t is dropped, and the d of the stem changed to 3; also the

original 3 takes the place of the r ; as, édé-re es-se, not ca re.

OBS. 2 . The passive voice is regular ; only éstur is generally used

instead of édi tur , and essétur instead of édérétur . The perfect par

ticiple is ésus .

IRREGULA R VERBS. 281

300. The A blative of Difference .

EXA M P LES.

1. 8 61multis p artibus major es t quam terra , the sun is very

much ( lit., by many parts) larger than the earth.

2 . altérum i ter mult6 expéd i tius Erat , the other route was much

more passable (more passable by much) .3. hie lbcus aequé spatid ab cas tris A riov is ti et C aesaris

fibérat, this p lace was ( distant by an equal space) the same

distancefrom the camp of A r iovistus and (from that) of C aesar .

OBS. In the foregoing examples, note that the ablatives parti

bus , multc'

i, sp i tid , express the measure of difference . These

words follow the comparatives, major and expéditius ; the abla

tive spétib denotes extent of space, which is usually put in the

accusative ( see but may be in the ablative, as it is in thi s

case, denoting the degree of difl'

erence ( lit., was absent by an equal

distance) . Hence the follow ing rule

ABLATIVE OF DIFFERENCE.

301. RULE XLV. Th e ab la tive is u sed , w ith

com par atives an d w o r d s im p ly ing com par ison , to

d en o te th e m easur e o f d iffer ence .

OBS. The ablative of dif erence includes the ablative of distance.

( See 215 .

EXERC ISES.

Name the mode . tense , number , and person of the fol

lowing verbs

1. Imus , ibamus , ibimus , eamus . 2 . Ego abeo , tfi ex

itinére rédis . 3. It, cunt , ibit. 4. Ivit, ivérat, ite, itis ,

ivéramus . 5 . I , quO té fata VOcant . 6 . I , lictor, déligii

puérum ad palum . 7 . Caesar multOgravius quéritur . 8 . UnO

die longiOrem meh sem faciunt. 9. Hibernia dimidiO minor

( est) quam Britannia . 10. MultO major alacritas exercitai

in jecta est. 11. Ite , milités . 12 . Edimus , édamus , édunt.


1. They go , they were going, they will go . 2 . He was

going, he will go , he goes . 3. We go , we were going, we

will go . 4. Go thou, I go , I have gone , I had gone . 5 . The

sun is much larger than the earth . 6 . The tower was ten

feet higher than the wall . 7 . My country is much dearer

to me than life . 8 . They make the year one day longer .


LESSON XC II .

IRREGULAR VERBS ( con tinued ) .

ABLAT IVE AND GENIT IVE OF PRICE —EXERC ISE FOR

SIGHT - READING .

302 . The I rregular Verb no ,I became or am made, is

inflected as follows :

PR IN C I P A L P A R TS

PRES. INF .

fiéri

OBS. 1. Fio (which stands for fa—i—o ) is used as the passive of fdcio,which has no passive forms (except fi ciendus and factus ) ; on the

other hand, factus sum,I have become, has the meaning of the perfect

of fi o ; fiéri is not really a passive form,but an old infinitive active,

fiérei .

OBS. 2 . The i in fi o is always long , except in fit and when not fol

lowed by r ( in present infinitive and imperfect subjunctive ) .OBS. 3. Most compounds of facio with prepositions change a to i

(present stem ) , and are inflected regularly ; the passive ends in -fi cior ;other compounds retain a and have fio in the passive.

OBS. 4. Queo, I am able, is conjugated like eo, but as it is an nu

usual verb , it is here omitted ; it has a compound, néqueo, I am unable.


he can become good . 4. The soldier sells his country for

gold . 5 . The soldier values money highly . 6 . He sold his

corn at a less price . 7 . Caesar became consul .


1. Predicate adjective ? 2 . Rule for cons iilés 3. Rule

4. Why subjunctiveHow may price be expressed

? When is the ablative used Whenthe genitive

?

Sigh t-R ea d in g .

CE SAR’

S LAND ING IN BRITA IN ( continued) .

Quod fibi Caesar Rnimadvertit , nii.vés1 longas (quarum

and this when ( acc . )

et spéciés érat barbaris2 infisitatior , et mOtuS ad I

'

Isum ex

appearance unusual motion service

péditior ) paulum removeri ab onerzi riis navibus,et rémis3

remove of burden oar

incitari , et ad liitus apertum hostium ec’

mstitui ,latque inde

push-ou side Open thence

fundis , Sagittis , tormentis hostés submbvéri l jussit . A tque ,s ling engine (acc . ) driven order

nOstriS militibus cunctantibus , maxime propter altitI'

Idinemdelay chiefly depth

maris , ( is ) qui décimae legiOn iS aquilam férébat, contestatustenth appeal to

deos ut ea rés légioni feliciter événiret Desilite ,”

inquit,happily turn-out

milites , nisi vultis‘aquilam hostibus prOdére . Ego certéabandon at-Ieast

meum reipiibhcae atque Imperfité ri ofi’ieium prae stitéro .

”

duty fulfil

HOe cum magna véce dixisset, sé ex navi prOjécit, atque in

hostés aquilam ferre coepit . Tum nostri , c5hortati inter sé ,exhort

né tantum dédécus admittérétur , finiversi ex niivi désiluéshame permit all-at-once

runt. HOS item ex prOximis niivibus cum cOnspéxissent,also nearest caught-sight-oi

subsecfiti hostibus 2 apprOpinqudrunt .

follow-close approach


1. The construction is juss it nfivés rémbvéri , etc .

2 . Why dative ? 3. Why ablative 4. See V610.

The subjunctives can be omitted until the review.

DEFECTIVE VERBS. 285

LESSON XC III .

DEFECTIVEVERBS.—INSTRUMENTAL ABLATIVE.

305 . DefectiveVerbs want some of their parts . The fol

low ing are the most common Defective Verbs that do not

use the tenses formed from the present stem

1. coepi, I begin . 2 . mémin i , I remember . 3. 6 dI, I hate.

OBS. There is a large number of verbs that are more or less

defective ; those enumerated here are the most defective of those

that are commonly used.

1. Od i , coepi ( for the present of which incipio is used) , andmém lni are only used in the Perfect Tenses, and hence are some

times called p reteritive ( or past) verbs.

P A R T I A L P A R A D IGM .

I ndi cative .

Sub junct ive .

méminérim bdérim nbvérim

Im pe r ative .

I nfi n it ive .

mémin isse nOvisse

P ar t ic ip les .

b sus

OBS. 1. Instead of coepi and its tenses, the passive coeptus

sum, etc.,is used before an infinitive passive ; as, urbs aed ificar i

coepta es t , the city began to be built.

286 F IR ST STEPS IN LATIN .

OBS. 2. N OV! is properly the perfect of nos co , I learn to know.

OBS. 3. M émini . Odi . and ndvi have in the perfect, pluperfect,and future perfect the meaning of the present, imperfect, and

future respectively .

2 . The follow ing have only the tenses formed from the present

stem, and these are in many cases incomplete

1. 510, I say . 3. fi ri , to speak. 5 . salve , ha il.

2 . inquam , I say . 4. quaes o , I ask, beg. 6 . queo , I can .

a. A io , I say ( for fig-io , cf. ad-fig-ium ) , has only the following

forms

OBS. i between two vowels j ) is pronounced like y ; ai is not

a diphthong.

b. Inquam , say I , has only the following forms

OBS . Inquam , inquit , like the Eu lish say I , says he, are always

used parenthetically, themselves an subjects following betweencommas after a word or words of the quotation . It is used,except in poetry, only in direct quotations . (See


OBS. 1. The ablative of measure is used w ith the comparativeinstead of quam w ith the nominative or accusative . (See

OBS. 2 . The measure of difference is denoted by the ablative .

( See This ablative is common w ith the ablative of pronouns

( 6 25 qu6 ) and of adjectives of quantity quanta, multo,

pau16 , etc.) and w ith verbs implying comparison (as, antécello ,

excello , supero ,

OBS . 3. Distance may be denoted by the ablative . (See

OBS . 4. Price, when a definite sum, is denoted by the ablative .

(See Here belongs the ablative w ith dignus , ind ignus .

For ablative of specification , see 297 .

OBS. 5 . Here belongs the ablative, with the adverbs an te and

pos t, to denote how long before or after a thing happens ; as, paucisante d iébus , or paucIs d iébus ante , a few days before ; paucispos t diébus , or paucis diébus pos t , a few days after . The accu

sative can be used ; as, an te paucos annés , a few years before.

A BLA TIVE OF MATERIAL .

308 . The material of which anything is made is regularly

expressed by the ablative with ex or as, but constare , to con

sist, sometimes omits the preposition .

EXA M PLE .

En lmo cons ti mus et co rpora, we consist of soul and body.

OBS. 1. The ablative of material is used w ith words of plentyand want, especially w ith verbs signifyingfi lling, abounding, supp lying, furnishing, and the like .

OBS. 2 . Opus and fisus , signifying need, are followed by the

ablative of the thing needed .

EXA MP LE .

duos nob is opus es t , there is need to us of a leader .

OBS. 3. Sometimes the thing needed is the subject and opus

the predicate ; hence we may say either dfice n6b‘

is opus es t, there

is need to us of a leader, or dux néb is est, a leader is a need to us e

OBS . 4. The adjective praed l tus is followed by the ablative .

EXA MP LE .

v irtute p raedltus , endowed with virtue.

DEFECTIVE VERBS. 289

ABLATIVE OF MANNER .

309. The A blative of Manner generally takes the prepo si

tion cum , unless it has a modifying adjective or genitive

(when cum may be omitted ) .

OBS. But cum is never used with the following ablatives

m6d 6 , ratibne, more , généra, rité , etc. ; also, has mente. hbc

061181116 , 32 lége , meo pérlofilé , jut e, in juria, etc .

EXAM P LES.

cum our! sorIb it, he writes with care.

cum (or without cum ) magna our! sortbit, he writes with

great care.

3. magno flétfl auxi lium a C asei n pétant, with a fl ood oftears they seek aid from Caesar .

intellégbbat magné cum péricifl o prévinoias futurum

( esse ) , he perceived that it would be attended with the great

danger to thep rovince.

5. C aesar omn ibus 06pm prbfi cis ol tur , Caesar departs with all

his forces.

ABLATIVE OF A CCOMPANIMENT .

310. The A blative of A ccompaniment takes the prepo

s itiou cum, except in a few military and other phases .

EXAMP LES.

l . cum déolm i légiéne v éni t, he came with the tenth legion .

2 . subséquébatur omni bus 06pm , hefollowed close with all

his forces .

1. If WITH signifies in company with, in confl ict with, cum mustbe used ; but relations cross, and whenever manner or accompaniment can be regarded as means, the preposition is omitted.

311. A blative of Quality or Characteristic. (See

OBS. Note the close connection between these three uses of the

ablative of manner : the first, he writes with care, care being an

attendant circumstance ; the second, he comes with the tenth te ion,the ablative designating that w ith which he is attended ; the t ird,an attendant quality . (See


312 . The Uses of the A blative may be tabulated as fol

lows :

1. A BLA T IVE PROPER

2 . INSTRUMENTA L

A BLA TIVE

3. LOCA TIVE

SYN . c o , say or speakformally lbquor ( lbqui ) , speak or talk( opposed to taceo , keep silent) ; for ( fart) , talk, use articulate

speech ; aio , assent, say yes, expresses the assertion of the speaker

(opposed to négogs

; in quam , inquit , say I , says he, used to intro

uce the very wor of the speaker, and always comes after one or

more words of the quotation (305 . 2 .

EXERC ISES.


1. A it, aisn’

? 510 . 2 . Inquit, tatur . 3. Ociilis vidé'

mus ,

auribus audimus 4. Vir lapide interfectas est. 5 . Solus

potitus est império Romfilus . 6 . Vir dimicat ferre. 7 . Virculpa dignus est. 8 .

“ Omnia périérunt,”

inquit Caesar ,

consii lite , milites , vestrae salut'

i 9. Eadem condiciéne

deditiénis usus est. 10. German‘

i viri corporum ingenti

magnitudine fuérunt.


Learn the synopsis of coepi'

, mémInI , Gd i . What is a defective

verb? Which defective verbs have in the perfect and pluperfect the

meaning of the present and imperfect How are the uses of the abla

tive classified ? Give the chief uses of the ablative proper ; of the instru

mental ablative ; of the locative ablative.

The Place from which .

Separation .

Cause ( including Source, Origin, fi'étus, con

tentas , fido , cbnfido, difl'

ido, and A gencywith a or ab after passive verbs ) .

Means, Instrument, Deponents, iitor , etc.

Measure, Measure of Difference, Price, dignus, indigna s .

Comparison .

Specification .

Material,Plenty , and Want, 6pus, iisus,

praeditns .

Manner, A ccompaniment (with cum) ,Quality .

Place where.

Time and C ircumstance.

A blative A bsolute.


314. The Impersonal uses of verbs may be classified as

follows

1. Verbs relating to the weather as , fulgurat, it lightens ;

gran d Inat, it hails ; lfi ces cit, it grows light tonat, it thunders

illiicescit, it becomes light.

OBS. Sometimes these verbs are used personally, the name of

the deity or some other agent, generally expressing a cognate idea,being expressed as the subject ; as, Jupp l ter p lui t, Jup iter rains ;diés illfi cescit , day dawns .

2 . Verbs relating to thefeelings. The person who feels is put in

the accusative ; as, m6 ml séret , it grieves me ( i .s . I grieve) . The

following verbs of the second conjugation belong to this class

P R IN C I PA L P A R TS.

PRES. INF . PERF . IND . PARTIC IPLE.

décére décuit it becomes .

dédécére dédécuit, it is unseemly.

libére libuit and libitum est, it pleases .

licere licuit and licitum est, it is lawful.

liquére it is clear .

misérére

Latin idiom

Becomes a youngman to bemodest, or

To be modest becomes a young man ,véréoundum 8 8 36

English idiomadulescentem .

I t becomes a youngman to bemodest,

OBS. 1. A s the English idiom requires a subject, the pronoun itis placed before the impersonal verb in translating.

OBS. 2 . These verbs are not used in the imperative ; the sub

junctive is used in its place ; as, pud eat te, shame thyself. Some of

these verbs have a passive voice, as ml séreor, I p ity ( am moved

miséritum est, it excites pity.

6portuit, it behaves.

piguit and pigitum est , it verses .

placui t and placitum est, it pleases .

paenituit, it causes sorrow .

piiduit and piidi tum est, it shames .

(per )taesum,it wear ies .

EXA MP LE .

A C T IVE.

IMPERSONAL VERBS. 293

by p ity) , and occasionally other parts (1) Participles : déobns ,

becoming ; llhéus , willing ; 1106115 , free ; llcltus , allowed . ( 2 ) Gerundives : poenl tendus , to be repented of ; pudendus , shameful.(3) Gerunds : p l gendum , poenl tendl , -6 ,

-um ; pudendi , 6 ,-um .

OBS. 3. A ll of these verbs (except m lséret, 6portet, taedet)can have a neuter pronoun as subject, and are then personal : as ,

n6 o pudot n é, this shames me ; haeo llbent , these things p lease.

LIb et and Hos t can have an adjective used as noun as subject, asn 6n omn ia li cent, not every thing pleases ; and déoet and dbdéoet

can have any word as subject, as virtue v 6 : déoet, virtue becomes

you. See 315 . 3

3. Some personal verbs seem, in certain senses, to be used im

personally ; but they are not truly so, because the real subject isgenerally an infinitive or a clause. Such verbs are

PERSONAL. I I P I BGONAL.

he, she ( it)falls upon. it happens ( ill) .

it belongs to .

it is useful.it befalls (well ) .it is agreed upon.

it is expedient.

it escapes .

EXAMPLES.

1. ut l éris inter 363 et pons intbreu et, so that the Tiber

and bridge might be between them (personal use) .

2 . in téres t omn ium reoté fi oére, it concerns all to do right

( impersonal use) .

4. Intrans itive verbs, when used in the passive ( the participle isneuter ) as, curr ltur , there is running, or they run mlh i crédltur ,it is credited to me, I am believed n 6u hos tibus paroltur , there is

no quarter given to the enemy, or the enemy is not spared t i'

inv i

d étur , there is envy to me, i .e. I am envied ; hos tibus rBSis tunt, they


once is ofi’

ered to these op inions . When the Agent is mentioned, it

is put in the ablative with the preposition a or ab . or may remain

in the dative : as , (Act.) H elvetii’

fortlter pfignavérun t, the Hel

vetians fought bravely ; ( Impers .) 5b H elvéfi h fortl ter pfign i tum

eat, it was fought bravely by the Helvetians, i .e. the Helvetians fought

5. The passive of the periphrastic conjugation is often used im

personally ; the participle is then always neuter ( see 28 7 . Obs.)as, mlhi

'

s cri bendum est, I must wr ite ( lit., the necessity of wr itingis to me) 111i scribendum est, he must wr ite.

OBS. 1. The persons are expressed in the follow ing way in the

present indicative, and similarly in the other tenses :

pfidet m6, it shames me, or I am ashamed .

pfidet té, it shames thee, or thou art ashamed .

pfidet sum,it shames him, or he is ashamed .

piidet 1168 , it shames us , or we are ashamed.

piidet vbs, it shames you, or you are ashamed.

piidet 068 , it shames them, or they are ashamed.

OBS. 2 . The impersonal verbs llbet, itpleases, ll oet, it is lawful,and expédi t, it is expedient, are used Wl tll the dative ; as, llcet

mlhi ire, it is lawfulfor me to go, or I may go.

315 . Genitive with Verbs .

VERBS OF MEMORY.

1. Verbs of reminding, remember ing, and forgetting,— réoordor

( rarely) , mémlnl , rémlniscor , and oblIvis cor , are followed by

the genitive ( sometimes by the accusative) .

EXAMP LES.

1. m ini vIv6 rum, I ammindful of the living.

2 . rlmlnisol v irtfi tis , to remember virtue.

GENITIVE OF CRIME.

2 . Verbs of accusing, convicting, condemning, and acquitting take

the accusative of the person and the genitive of the crime.

1. praetor reum crimln is absolv lt, thepraztor acquitted the

prisoner of the cr ime.2. arguit m6 tut ti , he accuses me of theft.


EXERC ISES.


1. Mihi ire licuit. 2 . Pfignandum est pt6 patria.

3. Réminiscére pristinas virtii tis Helvetiorum . 4. A nimus

méminit praetéritérum 5 Fratris me'

I'

mé miséret. 6 . Con

tr6versiarum et dissensmnum obliviscimin‘

i . 7 . Vir reus estcriminis . 8 . T6 fortfinae tuae paenitet. 9. R6mani eum

capitis damnavérunt. 10. Illud mea magni interest.

11. A bsolvant té judices injfiriiirum. 12 . Plitcuit Caesar‘

i ,’

ut ad A riovistum légiités mittéret. 13. Bum ad mortem- V

ducI oportuit. 14. I s ad mortem dficendus fuit.


1. I may go . 2 . I must fight. 3. The soldiers must fight.

4. We may go . 5 . We must depart. 6 . I am ashamed of

my fault. 7 . They accuse him of treachery . 8 . A true

friend never forgets a friend . 9. Caesar acquitted the soldier

of the crime .

NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.1. Learn the definition and translation of impersonal verbs ; how

classified ; and the synopsis under 313. 3.

2 . I tpleased Caesar, i.s . Caesar determined the clause beginning with

ut is the subject of plhcui t.What is an impersonal verb Translate pfignatur , pfignandum

est, m6 p lgs t. What case is used with Heat ? With 6portet ? How

is may, can, expressed in Latin ? How “

is must, might ? In what two

ways can must be expressed? (SeeExs . 13and What verbs govern

the genitive or accusative ? What the genitive alone

LESSON XCV.

CLASSIFICATION OF DEFENDERT CLAUSBS.

316. OBS. 1. The pupil has now learned the construction of

simple sentences . The rules and principles that have been applied tothese sentences are applicable to all independent clauses ; It is onlyin dependent, or subordinate, clauses that difiiculty is like] to occur.

The pupil should, therefore, obtain an accurate knowl go of the

CLA SSIF ICA TION OF DEPENDENT CLA USES. 297

various kinds of dependent clauses, for this will aid him ve muchin determining the tense and mode to be used . We have earned

that a complex sentence must contain one or more subordinate

clauses The subordination is expressed by some connectin word,which 18 always some form of the relative or some word t at has

acquired the use of the relative. This word may be a pronoun, aconjunction , or a conjunctive adverb.

The sea, WHEN it had spent its fury, became calm.

The boy, WHO reads, learns .

He came, THAT he might see the city.

He demanded THA T Caesar should not make war upon the

fEduans .

He says THAT the mountain is held by the enemy.

IF he conquers, he will rej oice.

H is friends will abandon him, BECA USE his father has done so.

So great is thepower of honesty, THA T we love iteven in an enemy.

I inquired WHA T he was doing.

Life is short, THOUGH it extend beyond a thousand years .c

ea

se

-a

cn

e!

P

a

a

r-t

H

OBS. 2 . In Ex. 1of the foregoing sentences, note that'

the clause

when it had spent its fury, expresses time, and is combined with theleading clause, the sea became calm, by means of the subordinate

temporal conjunction when the clause is, therefore, called a TEM

POR AL CLA USE ( see 206 . If we combine the two clauses bymeans of a coo

‘

rdinate conjunction the sentence becomes

compound ; as , the sea spent its fury, A ND then it became calm. In

Ex. 2, the subordinate clause 13 introduced by the relative who

( 241. and is called a RELA TIVE CLA USE. In Ex . 3, the subordinate clause is introduced b the subordinate final con

'

unctionthat ( 206 . the clause is , t erefore, called a FINAL LAUSE.

The clause in Ex. 5, introduced by that, is an INFINITIVE CLA USE341. Ex . 6, if he conquers is a COND IT IONA L CLA USE ; and in.x. 7 , because hisfather had done so is a CAUSAL CLAUSE. A clause

introduced by a consecutive conjunction is called a CONSEC UTIVECLA USE, as Ex. 8 ; one introduced by a concessive conjunction, asin Ex. 10, is called a CONCESSIVE CLA USE.

The relative clause performs the office of an adjective, becausewho reads modifies boy the reading boy ; it is called an A DJECTIVECLA USE. The temporal clause in Ex. 1performs the office of an

adverb, and is, therefore, called an ADVERB CLAUSE ; in Exs . 4, 5,and 9, the clauses that Caesar should notmake war upon the zEduans,that the mountain is held by the enemy, and what he was doing, are

Objects of the transitive verb demanded, of inquired, and of says,i.e. each performs the office of a noun or substantive, and is , there

fore, called a NOUN , or SUBSTANTIVE, CLAUSE. Hence, clausesmay be classified as


I . COORDINA TE, see 205 .

1. Final .

3’

532223323? Named from their mean

4. Comparative. Ing, as Shown by some

5 Concessive1ntroductory word ; the

6

.

Causalsame word may 1ntro

j duce clauses ofdifferentII . SUBORDINA TE 7. Temporals kinds, according to cir

8 . Interrogative.

umstan9. Infinitive.

033°

10. Relative.

1. Substantive. Named from the part of

2. A dj ective. speech whose Office they3. A dverb. perform .

OBS. 3. Noun Clauses include : (1) Infinitive clauses, 342 . 1;( 2 ) some final and (3) consecutive clauses, and 3; (4) clausesintroduced by quod , which give prominence to the fact stated, or

present it as a ground or reason, 342 . 4 ; ( 5) and dependent interrogative clauses, 342 . 5. Adjective Clauses are connected to the

clauses on which they depend by means of relative pronouns. A d

verbial Clauses are connected to the clauses on which they depend

by means of conditional, comparative, concessive, final, consecutive,causal, or temporal conj unctions. The pupil should note that sometimes a clause connected by a final or consecutive conjunctionbecomes Virtually the Object of the verb on which it depends, and

is then classed as a Noun Clause. ( See 342 . 2 and

EXERC ISES.

C lassify the following sentences

1. The bridge , which spans the river , was built by a ski]

ful engineer . 2 . When the war closed , I’Vashington retired

to MountVernon . 3. I f you would be happy , you must be

active . 4. When the battle was concluded , the commander

began to count his loss . 5 . He takes exercise , that he mayrecover his health . 6 . The ground is dry , although it has

rained . 7 . The sun causes ( that all things should bloom,

i .s . ) all things to bloom.


What is a clause ? Mention the various classes of subordinate

clauses . What is an adjective clause ? Substantive clause ? Expand

the complex sentences in the foregoing lesson into compound sentences.

How many kinds of adverbial clauses? Write an adjective clause.


clauses. In dependent clauses, the tense of the subjunctive isalways dated at the same time as the tense of the leading verb .

In order to determine what tense of the subjunctive Should follow( in the dependent clause) the leading verb

, special rules are

necessary, called the rules for the SEQUENCE OF TENSES . Forthis purpose the tenses of the indicative mode are divided intotwo classes, according as they represent actions as p resent or future,or as past. The former are called PR IMA RY, and the latterSECONDA RY, or HI STORICA L, TENSES . The tenses of each classcan be seen from the following table

1. PR IMA RY.

FUTURES. PERFECT .

ami bit, he will love. ami vit, he has loved.

imi vbrit, hewill have loved.

2 . SECONDA RY.

IMPERFECT . A ORIST. PLUPERFEC T .

imi bat, he was loving. imi vit, he loved . imi vérat, he had loved .

318 . Sequence of Tenses .

EXA MP LES.

P r ima r y . P r esen t and F utu re Tim e in D epend en t C lauses .

1. PRESENT

scio quid agi s , I know what you are doing.

scio quid égéris, I know wha t you have done.

scio quid actfirus Sis, I know what you are going to do.

2 . PERFECT

cbgnbvi quid i gi s , I have learned what you are doing.

cOgnOVI quid égér is , I have lea rned what you have done

cbgnbvi quid acti'

irus sis, I have learned what you are going to do.

3. FUTURE

audiam quid i gi s , I shall hear wha t you are doing.

audiam quid égéris , I shall hear what you have done.

audiam quid actiirus sis, I sha ll hear what you are going to do.

4. FUTURE PERFECT

cOgnOvéro quid i gi s , I shall have learned what you are doing.

cOgnOvéro quid égéris , I shall have learned what you have done.

cbgnbvéro quid actfirus sis, I shall have learned what you will do.

TENSES IN DEPENDENT CLAUSEs 301

Second ar y , o r H isto r ica l . P as t T im e in Depend en t C lauses.

5 . IMPERFEC T

Sciébam quid i gérés , I knew what you were doing.

sciébam quid égissés. I knew what you had done.

sciébam quid actfirus casés, I knew what you were going to do.

6 . A ORIST

CbgnOvi quid i gérés , I learned what you were doing.

cOgnOvi quid égissés, I learned what you had done.

cbgnbvi'

quid actiirus essés, I learned what you were going to do.

7 . PLUPERFECT

cbgnbvéram quid i gérés, I had learned what you were doing.

cOgnOvéram quid égisses, I had learned what you had done.

cbgnbvéram quid actiirus essés, I had learned what you were goingto do.

OBS . In the foregoing examples, note (1) that each verb in the

leading, or principa clauses, of Exs . 1, 2 , 3, 4, is in a primatense— present, perfect, future, future perfect ; (2) that each ver

in the dependent, or subordinate, clauses of the same examples, islikewise In a primary tense, but in the present subjunctive whenthe action is continued or incomfl ete ( i .e. relatively present or

future) with reference to the action denoted by the leading verb,and in the p erfect subj

unctive when the action is com leted ( i .e.

. relativel past) with re erence to the action denoted by e leadin

verb. ote, further, that each verb in the leading, or principal,clauses, of Exs . 5, 6, 7, is in a secondary, or an historical, tense,imperfect, aorist, pluperfect, and also that each verb in the de

endent, or subordinate, clauses is likewise in a secondary,or an

istorical, tense : in the imperfect subjunctive when the action is

continued or incomplete with reference to the action denoted by the

leading verb, and in the p luperfect sub'

unctive when the action is

completed with reference to the action denoted by the leading verb.

The pupil should note that, after a future or future perfect tense,the Sim ls future is represented in the dependent, or subordinate

clause, y the present subjunctive, and the future perfect by theperfect subjunctive ; and also that, in such cases, the de ndentsubjunctive may be present or past, w ith reference either to t e timeof speakin or to the time of the main action : as, in audiam quid

Agas , the oin

gmay be going on either at the time of speaking or

at the time 0 hearing, i .e. I shall hear THEN what you are doingNow , or what you a re doing THEN ( i .s . when I hear ) . Finally, the

pupil should note that, whenever the future in the dependentclause is subsequent to the future of the leading verb, the present

or imperfect of the active periphrastic subjunctive is used. Hence,the pupil w ill observe that the subjunctives in the dependent clausesadapt their verbs to the tenses of the verbs in the leading clauses ;


i .e. a primary tense in the leading clause is followed by a primarytense in the subordinate clause, and that a secondary, or an his

torical, tense in the leading clause is followed by a secondary, or

an historical, tense in the subordinate clause. The rule is calledthe rule for the SEQUENCE OF TENSES, and is, in general, the samein Latin as in En lish . For those dependent sentences that requirethe subjunctive, t e rule may be stated as follows

SEQUENCE OF TENSES.

319. RULE XLVII. A p r imar y ten se in th e lead

in g clause i s fo l low ed by a p r im ar y ten se in th e

d ep en d en t clause an d a secon d ar y ten se is fo llow ed

by a secon dary .

OBS. The rules for the Sequence of Tenses are not applicable toindicative clauses ( i .e . to clauses that have their verbs in the in

dicative) , nor to conditional sentences ( regardless of mode) . For

these, special rules are necessary ( see

320. The Sequence of Tenses mav be represented as

follows

P rimary Tenses The P resentSubj unctive, forPresent, incomplete acti on .

gifif:(Defin ite) are followed by The P erfect Subj unctive, for

Future

,

Perfectcompleted action .

Secondary Tenses The Imperfect Subj unctive,Imperfect, for incomplete action .

A orist (Perfect) ,are followed by The P luperfect Subj unctive,

Pluperfect, for completed action .

OBS. In the following examples, note that the tense of the subjunctive is always dated at the same time as the tense of the leadingverb ; i .e. the tense of the Latin subjunctive is the same as the

tense of the indicative or potential in the English sentence . The

commonest tenses of the subjunctive in dependent clauses are thepresent and imperfect, the latter being used in such dependent

clauses for the English aorist as well as for the real imperfect.

EXA M PLES.

1. vénio ut v ideam , I come to ( in order that I may) see.

2 . v éni ut v ld érem, I came to ( in order tha t I might) see.

3. Ita mendaz St at, ut ném6 s I crédéret, he was such a liar,

that no one believed him.


2 . l6qu6bantur, étiam cum v ellet C aesar , sese n6u es s e

pugnatur6 s , they were saying that they would notfight, evenwhen Caesar should wish. it.

3. inten'Ogo té, qui d acturus s is , I am asking you what you will

do, or are going to do.

OBS. 1. Instead of the periphrastic form,futurum si t (or es set )

ut may be used ; and these words must be used when the verb hasno participial stem, and therefore no periphras tic form (and alsofor the future perfect active, which is wanting in the periphrastic

conjugation) ; as, n6u dub ito quln scripturus s is n6u dub i to

quln futurum s it, ut scrIbas , I do not doubt that you will wr ite.

OBS. 2 . The future perfect represents both the perfect definite

and the aorist, transferred to the future ; as, fécéro , I shall have

done it, or I shall do it. The future perfect is used w ith a much

greater exactness in Latin than in English ; as, ut sémentem

c éris , Ita métés , as you shall have sown, so will you reap . The

English idiom often uses the present, or the simple future, for thefuture perfect : as you sow , or as you shall sow, Instead of as you

shall have sown.

OBS. 3. In applying the rules for the sequence of tenses, consider

(1) whether the leading verb is primary or secondary ; ( 2) remember that the tense of the Latin subjunctive is the same as the tense

of the indicative or potential in the English sentence (may, can,will, and shall being present ; might, could, would, and should, past) .

EXERC ISES.

A pply the rules for sequence of tenses to the following

examples

1. scrips it ut n6 s m6n6ret, he wrote to warn us, or that he might

warn us.

2 . scripsit ut n6 s m6neat, he has written to warn us, or that he

may warn us .

3. causa quae es set quaes iit. he asked what the cause was .

4. v 6ni t tit v ldeat, he has come to see, in order to see, or that he

may see.

5. vani t ut vId éret, he came to see, or that he might see.

6. du impérat ut mfl l tés s ti ti 6nes suas servant , the leader

commands the soldiers to keep their stations, or that the soldiers

should keep their stations .

7. curat ut puérI corpus exerceat, he takes care that he mayexercise the boy

’

s body ( i .s . to exercise the boy’

s body) .

SUBJUNCTIVE I N DEPENDENT CLA USES. 305

8 . H ann ib al magnum exerci tum in I taliam dfix i t ut cum

R dm i nis pfignfiret , Hannibal led a large army into I taly to

( that he might) fight with the Romans .

9. n 6u dub i to quin C aesar hos tes supéravérit , I do not doubt

that Caesar has overcome the enemy.

10. n 6u diib i tAbam quin C aesar hostés supérav is set , I did

not doubt that C assar had overcome the enemy .

11. cons idér i bimus quid fi c iat, we sha ll consider what he is

doing.

12 . cons idfir i b imus quid féoérit, we sha ll consider what he has

done.

13. considdrdb imus quid factfi rus s it, we sha ll consider what he

is going to do ( or will do) .


1. NOn dfib‘

itabam qu'

in Caesar hostés supérz‘

ivisset .

2 . NemO dfibitabat quin milites fortissime pugnavissent.

3. NémO diibitat quin puérum semper béne édficavérim .

4. Pater ciirat ut ego béne édficer , strénué exercear , prObé

ec lar , diligenter érfidiar . 5 . Magister curabat ut discipli

lus béne édficarétur , strenué exercérétur , prObé ec Iérétur ,

diligenter érfidirétur . 6 . NOR est dubium quin discipulus a

me béne m6nitus sit. 7 . NOR est diibium quin urbs amili

tibne expl‘

ignata sit. 8 . InterrOgo té quid actiirus sis .

9. InterrOgaVéro té quid actiirus sis . 10. Interrégiibam té

quid actiirus essés . 11. NOn dubitavi'

qu‘

in scriptiirus essés ,

or n6n diibitavi quin futurum esset ut scribérés .


How many tenses has the indicative mode ? How many has the

subjunctive ? What are primary tenses ? Secondary tenses ? How

do the forms of the perfect subjunctive differ from those of the future

perfect indicative ? Has the subjunctive future tenses ? How is this

lack of future tenses supplied in dependent clauses What is the rule

for the tense in a dependent clause containing a subjunctive ? Is the

rule for sequence of tenses applicable to indicative clauses?


LESSON XCVII .

SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES.

I. FINAL C LAUSES.

OBS. Final Clauses are those that tell the purpose of an action .

They are introduced by the Final Conjunctions ut , that, in order that ;né ( or ut us) , that . not, in order that . not, lest ; qu6 ut e6 ,that thereby) , whereby, in order that, when there is a comparative in

the final clause ; the Relative Pronoun qui ut is , that he) , inorder that he ; and the Relative Adverbs, ub i , unde, etc. ut ib i , etc.

SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE.

RULEXLVIII .—F in al C lau ses tak e th eir verbs

in th e p r esen t or imp er fect subjun ctive , accord in g as

th e leading verb is in a p r imar y or secon dar y ten se .

OBS. 1. The leading verb ma be in any tense, but the presentor imperfect subjunctive is usually used in the final clause . The

relative pronoun is used in final clauses chiefi after verbs of

sending, coming, giving, choosing, etc ., when t e antecedent is

indefinite.

EXA MP LES.

vanérunt ut pacem pétérent, they came to seekpeace.

pugnamus né serv i simus , wefight that we may not be slaves .

C aesar castell a communit , qu6 ffioil ius H elveti6s pr6

h ib ére pos sit, Caesar erects forts that he may the more easilykeep of the Helvetians .

4. mul tes mi ss ! sunt qui ut ii ) uth am expugnar ent

soldiers were sent ( that they might assault) , or to assault the

city .

l6oum ub i c6ns ideret d élégit, he selected a p lace where he

might encamp ( that he might there,

OBS. 2 . The ablative qu6 ut 35 ) is used in clauses denotingpurpose, especially with comparatives .

OBS . 3. These final clauses may be translated by to sometimesby that may, that might, etc .

SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 309

they might meet death more bravely . 7 . Caesar has

encouraged his soldiers in order that they may meet death

more bravely . 8 . Caesar demanded that the enemy should

not make war upon the JEduans . 9. I fear that my friend

will not come . 10. I fear lest my friend is not coming.

11. I wish you to answer me.


1. The English infinitive expressing a purpose (equivalent to that,

in order that) is to be translated by a t with the subjunctive.

2 . See 321. Obs . 2 .

What is a final clause ? When do final clauses become objectclauses after verbs of doubting ? Give the rule for the sequence of

tenses in final and complementary final clauses . What is an objectclause ?

2 . C ONSEC UTIVE C LA USES.

OBS. Consecutive Clauses are those that tell the consequence, or

result, of an action . They are introduced by the consecutive con

junctions ut , so that ; ut n6n , so that not ; (after negatives)quin qui and n é, how and not) , whereby not, but that ; qudmlnus

ut a6 minus ) , that thereby the less ; and the relative pronoun

qui ut is ) , that, so that.

SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT.

322 . RULE XLIX . C on secutive C lauses tak e th eir

verbs in th e subjun ctive mod e , th e ten se being d e

term in ed by th e regu lar ru le fo r Sequen ce Of Ten ses .

OBs . In Consecutive C lauses there is an EXCEPTION IN THE

SEQUENCE OF TENSES, the same tense being used that would benecessary if the clause were inde ndent ; i.e., the present is usedafter past tenses to denote the continuance of an action or state intothe present, the perfect to imply final result, and the imperfect todenote that the action is contemporaneous with that of the pr mcipalverb : as, Verrés Si c i liam p er trienn ium Ita v exav it, ut ea

rdstl tui in an ti quum s tatum nfi lld m6d 6 pos ait , Verres so

harried Sicilyfor three years as tomake it utter ly impossiblefor it to berestored to its original condition .

EXA MP LES.

1. tan tus timor exerci tum occupavi t , ut omn ium mentés

perturbaret , so great fear seized the army that it disturbed

the minds of all.


2 . tempes tas ( tanta) cobrta est, quae nave: relcéret, so greata storm arose, that it drove the vessels back.

3. ades t némd quIn v ideat, there is no onepresent that ( or who)does not see.

4. n6n dub l to qui‘

n s i pientiss lmus sin, I do not doubt that you

are very wise.

323. Consecutive C lauses are used after

1. Demonstratives like tans , tantus , such ; e tc, Ita, so ;tam , i dea , to such a degree, etc . and expressions implyingcharacteristic and degree.

2 . Verbs and expressions of hinder ing and resisting, delaying and omitting, and the like also of doubt and uncertainty .

These verbs are followed by qui‘

n with the subjunctive , butonly after a negative , or a question implying a negative .

1) For né and qudminus , with the subjunctive after verbs of

hindering, etc., see 321. 3.

EXAMP LES.

1. German i rétlnéri n6n pbtérant quIn in bontés téla cani

cérent , the Germans could not be restrained from hurlingdarts against the enemy.

2 . facet s n 6n pos sum quIn cbtttdis littéras ad té mittam , I

cannot do without ( I cannot help ) sending you a letter every day.

OBS. 1. The sequence of tenses after verbs of hindering, and thelike, is the same as in final clauses ; after verbs of doubt and un

certainty, the same as in interrogative clauses

OBS . 2 . A fter Negative Indefinite expressions (as némd, nfi llus ,n ih il , quia) , quin is equivalent to qui n6n , quae n6n , etc. quln

is often used in the sense of a t n6n , and after negative expressions

of doubt and uncertainty, in the sense of ut. A fter negative verbs of

hinder ing and refusing, quIn may be used in the sense of quomlnus

( see below )EXAMP LES.

l . i des t némé quln v i deat , there is no onepresent who does not

see.

2 . némé est tam fortis quln perturb étur, no one is so brave as

not to be disturbed.

3. n6n dubltart deb et quin fuérin t poétae, it ought not to be

doubted that there werepoets.

4. néque récusare quIn armls con tendant, and that they do

not refuse to contend in arms.


R ela tive C lauses of R esul t.

324. Relative C lauses of Result are used to define or

to characteriz e an indefinite or general antecedent.

EXA MP LES.

1. sdcfi tae sunt temp es tates quae nos tras in cas trie con

tlnérent, storms ( of such sever ity) followed, which ( that they)kep t our men in camp .

némd es t qui n6n cfipiat, there is no one but (who does not)desires .

3. aun t qui pfi tent, there are some who think.

OBS. Relative clauses of result are used to characterize the ante

cedent, especially when it is otherwise undefined, as in the foregoingexamples, and are, therefore, called relative clauses of characteristic .

The relative clause, quae con tinérent (Ex. describes the

severity of the storms by saying that they kept the men in the

camp, i .s . by mentioning a character istic of It ; in Ex. 2 the relative

clause follows a general negative némé , and in Ex. 3 it follows anindefinite antecedent.

1. Relative C lauses of Result occur also after

a . finus and sdlus .

b. d ignus , ind ignas , Iddneus , and aptus .

c . Comparatives with quam , to express disp roportion .

EXA M PLES.

1. 361i centum ét an t qui creari possent, there were only one

hundred who could be app ointed.

2 . fabfi lae dignae aunt, quae légantm'

, the fables are worthy tobe read .

3. majus gaudium fuit , quam quod un iv ersum hbmines

capéren t, the j oy was greater than (what) men could take in

all at once.

OBS. The Indicative may be used after affirmative sentences inthe statement of definite facts w ith a definite antecedent ; but if a

general characteristic is denoted, the subjunctive must be used .

EXAM PLES.

1. multl sunt qui érIp iun t , many are they who snatch away.

2 . multi sunt qui érip iant , there are many to snatch away.

3. sunt qu'

i'

the indefinite pronoun quld am ) quod sen tiunt

n6n aud ent d icére, some dare not say what they think.


The following table shows the indefinite pronoun or adverb

to be used in Negative Final or Consecutive C lauses . In

English we may say either that no one, or lest any one, etc .

but in Latin always lest any one, etc.

For Consecutive C lauses in Indirect Discourse, see 351.

EXERC ISES.


1. Tantus sfibitc‘

) timor omnem exercitum occiipavit, ut

n6n mediocriter omnium ment6s animosque perturbaret.

2 . Quid obstat qubminus mocoia statim Oppfignémus .

3. NOn dfibito quin verum dixéris . 4. NémO érat qui

ciipéret me 6 civitate expellére. 5 . Nemo fuit omnium

militum qui vulnérérétur . 6 . Vir prObus dignus est qui ab

omnibus di igi tur . 7 . Rfifum Caesar idOneum judicavérat

quem mittéret. 8 . Tanta vis prbbitatis est ut eam vel in

hoste diligamus . 9. Milites rétinére n6n possum quin lon

gins prOcurrant. 10. Quid té impédi’

vit quOminus vénirés .


1. So great a storm arose that it drove the vessels back .

2 . I hindered him from going home . 3. There was no one

who did not rejoice. 4. There were some who thought

Owsar was in the city . 5 . I do not doubt that you speak

the truth . 6 . What prevents us from seeing the games?

7 . The fear of the soldiers was so great that he did not lead

them from the camp. 8 . He deserves to be heard . 9. He

was a suitable person to send to be sent) .



Mention a clause of result in English . How does it differ from one

of purpose? After what conjunctions are consecutive clauses used

When is qudmlnus used ? What is a relative clause of character

istic Give an example of one . What is the antecedent After what

verbs and expressions are consecutive clauses used ? When do con

secutive clauses become substantive clauses ?

3. CONDIT IONAL SENTENCES.

EXAM PLE .

Condition (Protasis ) . Conclusion (A podosis) .

If he has money, he gives it.

C BS. The foregoing sentence contains a condition, if he hasmoney, and is, therefore, called a COND ITIONA L SENTENCE . The

sentence is Complex, because it consists of two clauses, a

principal, or leading clause, he gives it, called the conclusion, and

a subordinate, or dependent clause, if he has money, containingthe condition . The clause containing the condition is called thePROTA SIS, and that containing the conclusion , the A PODOSIS .

The apodosis is regularly introduced by the conditional conjunction if ,— in Latin SI, or a compound of st : as, n i s i , unless (usedinstead of si n6n after negatives) ; etiams I. ets i , although ; sin ,

but if ( see Conditional and Concessive Conjunctions, An

indefinite relative may introduce a conditional clause ( seeHence the following definition

PROTA SIS AND A PODOSIS.

325 . In Conditional Sentences , the clause containing the

condition is called the protas is , and that containing the con

elusion the apodbsis .

C la ss ifi ca tion of C on d i tiona l Senten ces .

SIMPLE PRESENT AND PA ST COND ITIONS.

Present or Past 1. If he has money, he gives it.Indicative 2 . If he had money, he gave it.

FUTURE CONB ITIONS.

Fut. Ind . or Pres. 1. If he has ( or shall have) money, he will give it.or Perf. Subj 2 . If hehad ( or should have) money, hewould give it.


to p resent time, and the pluperfect to p ast time. Hence the follow

ing classification of conditional sentences

SIMPLE PRESEN T A N D PA ST CONDITIONS.

1. Simple Present and Past Conditions, nothing implied as to

their fulfilment. A ssume as a fact the supposition , and the conclu

sion must follow : A ny present or pas t tense of the indi cative

in both clauses .

EXA M PLES.

a. PRESENT : s i pécfiniam b i h et, d at , ifhe has money, he gives it.

b. PA ST : s i pécfiniam hab ébat, d hb at, ifhehadmoney, hegave it.

FUTURE C ONDITIONS.

2 . Future Conditions may be stated in two ways : (1) More

distinct and vivid, the future indicative being us ed in both

claus es ; ( 2) less distinct and vivid ( i .s . less probable) , the sub

junctive being us ed in both c lauses . The presen t subjun ctive

is us ed for continued action , th e perfect subjunctive for

comp leted action .

EXA M PLES.

a. s i pécfiniam h i béb it , d i b it, if he has ( i .e. shall have) money,he will give it.

b. s f pécfiniam h i beat , act, if he should have money, he would

give it.

c . 817pécfiniam habuérit, d éd érit, if he should have had money,he would have given it.

UNREA L PRESENT A ND PA ST COND ITIONS.

3. Unreal Present and Past Conditions, unfulfilled in present

or past time : Imperfect or p luperfect subjunctive in b oth

claus es .

EXAM PLES.

a. PRESENT : s! pécfin iam habéret , d i ret , if he had money (hehas not) , he would give it ( now, present time) .

b. PA ST : sf pécfiniam h i buis s et, dédisset, if he had hadmoney(he had not) , he would have given it ( then, at some past time) .

OBS. The pupil should note that the rules for Sequence of

Tenses are not applicable to Conditional Sentences ( see 319.

For conditional sentences in Indirect Discourse, see 355 .

SUBJUNCTIvE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 317

MODE IN COND ITIONA L SENTENCES.

326 . RULE L. C on d ition a l Sen ten ces w ith s i , n is i ,

n'

i , s in , tak e

SD IPLE PRESENT AND PA ST COND ITIONS.

1. A n y p r esen t or pas t ten se Of th e ind icative in

both clauses w hen n oth in g is im p l ied as to th e fu lfi l

m en t of th e con di tion .

s f i deal; béne eat. if he is here, it is well.s f hdérat , béne Brat, if he was here, it was well.sI v i let. laetor , if he is well, I rej oice.

sf vfilébat. laetAbar , if he was well, I was rej oicing.

OBS . A s stated in the rule, the mode of the conclusion ( apodosis) is, as a rule, in the indicative ; but it may be also in theimperative or subjunctive, according as a command, wish, or modestassertion ( 2 7 8 . 2) is to be expressed.

fi-P

CO

IO

H

Exam p le .

s! d ermis . expergis cére, if you are sleep ing, awake .

FUTURE COND ITIONS.

2 . Th e futur e in d icative in both clauses, to r ep re

sen t th e sup posed futur e case in a d is tin ct and vivid

man n er ; th e p resen t or per fect subj un ctive in bo th

clauses, to r epr esen t th e supposed futur e case in a

less d is tin ct and vivid m an n er .

EXA MP LES.

s f id créd és , err l b is , if you shall believe that you will go wrong.

at ads it , béne s it, if he should (hereafl er) be here, itwould bewell.3. SI adfuérit. béne s it. if you should have been here, it would be

well.

4. 31 id créd id éris ( rare) , erravéris , if you believe should

have believed) that, you would go have gone) wrong.

O

H

OBS . 1. If the action of the condition is regarded as completedbefore that of the conclus ion begins, the future perfect indicativeis used instead of the future, or the perfect subjunctive instead ofthe present subjunctive.

Exam p l es .

1. st mul tae hort i tus Grit, fort i ter pfignabunt.if he shall haveencouraged the soldiers, they willfight bravely .

318 F IRST STEP S IN LA TIN .

2 . st mfl ltés horti tus s it, fortl ter pfignent, if he should haveencouraged the soldiers, they wouldfight bravely.

UNREAL PRESENT AND PA ST CONDITIONS.

3. Th e imp er fect o r p luperfect subjun ct ive in both

clauses, to rep r esen t th e sup posed ca se as un r ea l , or

con tr a r y to fact. Th e imperfect den otes p r esen t time,

and th e p luperfect p a st.

EXA MP LES.

I . s i hd es set, béne es s et, if he were ( now) here (he is not) , itwould be well .

2 . st adfuis s et. béne fuis set, if he had ( then ) been here (he wasnot) , it would have been well.

3. sf v i l éret. laeti rer, if he were (now) well, I would rej oice.

4. st vhluis set , laetfltus essem , if he had ( then) been well, I

would have rej oiced .

C ond ition a l C lauses after D am , Motto , and

D umm iido .

327 . Conditional C lauses introduced by dum, mbdo.

and dummbdo ( negative dum né , mbd o né, dummbdo ne) ,

if on ly, provided that, take the present or imperfect

subjunctive.

EXA BI P LES.

1. dummbdo inter me atque te m ilrus inters it, provided that

the city wall is between us .

2 . dum ras m i neant, verbs fingant, if only the facts rema in,

they may make up words .

OBS. l . The Apodosis except in a few involved forms of condi

tional sentences regularly corresponds in mode w ith the Apodosis

( see foregoing examples) . But see 326 . Obs.

OBS. 2 . Frequently the present subjunctive of a future condi

tion becomes imperfect by sequence of tenses. For conditional

sentences in Indirect Discourse, see 355 .

1. Verbs in the conclusion of unreal conditions are some

times in the imperfect or pluperfect indicative ( the indicative is regularly used after verbs denoting duty , necessity ,

prop riety , ability, and the like) also , the historical perfect



1. If I do this , it is well. 2 . I f I should do this , it

would be well . 3. If I had done this , it would have been

well . 4. If he says this , he is mistaken . 5 . I f he speaks

the truth, he will be praised . 6 . If he had had money , he

would have given it. 7 . I f he had spoken the truth , he

would have been praised . 8 . If you were here, you would

think differently . 9. I f this were so , I should be glad .


What is a conditional sentence ? Of how many parts does it con

sist ? What name is given to each part? How may conditional

sentences be classified ? Is a conditional sentence complex or com

pound? What tenses does the subjunctive lack ? How is this lack

sometimes supplied? Is the conclusion a principal or a dependent

clause ? What time does each tense denote ?

4. C OMPARAT IVE C LAUSES.

OBS. Comparative C lauses are those that illustrate or explainthe leading statement, by furnishing a standard of measure. The

leading clause often has some correlative word like i ta. s ic , so, etc.

Comparative clauses are introduced by comparative conjunctions ;38 ,

quam , than , as.

ut, uti.

s icut or siciiti , as, so as.

quemadmbdum,

vélut , j ust as.

MODE IN COMPARATIVE CLAUSES.

329. RULE LI . C ompar ative C lauses in troduced

by a t, an, s icut, quémadmddum , etc ., fo llow ed by the

d em on strative p ar ticles i ta , etc ( so ) , etc ., r egular ly

tak e th e ind icative or th e subjun ct ive as in indepen

den t sen ten ces.

A ‘t sémentem fécéris , Ita métés , as you sha ll have sown, so shall

you reap .


330. RULE LII . C omparat ive C lauses in troduced

by do si , u t s i , gnamei , quas i , tanquam , tanquam s i ,

velut , velut s i , are, in fact, cond itional clauses , Of

wh ich th e conclusion is om itted or imp lied , an d

th erefor e tak e th e subjunctive l ik e oth er cond ition al

sen tences.

EXAMPLES.

1. m6 adspicitis , qul s i mons trum sim, you gaze atme as (youwould gaze) if I were a monster.

2 . 8 6qu§ni absentia A riovis ti crfid éli tdtem v61ut s i obram

Edess et, horrébant, the Sequani kep t shuddering at the

cruelty of the absent A riovistus as ( they would have shuddered)if he were (had been) present.

OBS. Ordinary com arative clauses which merely illustrate a

precedin statement ta 9 the indicative, unless the sub'

unctive is

used as In independent sentences . But comparative c auses that

express a condition, with the apodosis omitted, take the subjunctive, the tense being determined by the rule for sequence of tenses

rather than the ordinary use of conditional sentences . The English translation would lead us to expect only the imperfect and

luperfect, as it makes the comparison an unreal one (32 6 .

But the tense of the subjunctive is generally controlled by the tensein the lead ing clause although occas ionally the sequence is

not observed, but the rule for conditional sentences prevails . In

the first example the present sub'

unctive is used in the com arative

clause, though the unreality of t e comparison is implied, ecause

the leading verb is in the present tense ; hence,

I . The tenses follow the rules for the sequence of tenses ,rather than the ordinary use of conditional sentences . In

English , the translation implies the unreality of the com

parison .

OBS. For Comparative C lauses in Indirect Discourse, see 351.

5 . CONCESSIVE C LAUSES.

OBS. Concessive Clauses are those which concede or admit something opposed to the main statement, and are generally introduced

in English by though or although. The concessive conjunctionstake the subjunctive or indicative according to the followmg


a . quamquam , although, generally takes the indicative.

b. quamvis ( quam and vis , as mus h as you p lease) ,quamtumv is , ut , DB, and cum , although, and the relative

qui cum , is , 630 , all take the subjunctive whenused concessively .

c. li cet , although, is properly a verb, and takes a sub

stantive clause with the subjunctive.

d . etsi , tamer-I, suam-i , or s i , take the indicative or

subjunctive, like conditional clauses w ith s i .

MODE IN CONCESSIVE CLAUSES.

331. RULE LIII . C on cess ive C lauses are in tro

d uced by con cessive con jun ct ion s ,— a lth ough , gr an t

in g tha t, an d tak e th e in d icative to r ep resen t th e

con cession as a fa ct th e subjun ctive to r ep r esen t it

as m er ely p oss ible , o r a s con tr a r y to the fa ct.

1. quamquam intellégun t. tamen nunquam d icunt, although

they understand, yet they never speak.

2 . quamv is fortés s int , although they are brave.

ut d és int v irés , although the strengthfails .

4. h e s it summum malum dblor , although pain may not be the

greatest evil .

CO

1. The relative qui is often concessive, equivalent to

although with a personal or demonstrative pronoun , and

takes the subjunctive .

EXAMP LE .

culpatur , qui innbcéns s it , he is blamed, although he is innocent.

OBS. For Concessive C lauses in Indirect Discourse, see 351.

EXERC ISES.


1. Quamvis mblestus dblor sit, malum n6n est. 2 . Ut

desint virés , tsmen est laudanda vbluntas . 3. Li'

cetl me

hortétur , nOn piignabo . 4. Patres métus cepit, vélut Si jam

ad portas hostis esset.

3 5 . Multi omnia recta negligunt,

324 F IRST STEPS I N LA TIN .

OBS. The statement of the reason which is not the real one is

introduced by n6n qu6 , n6n quod , n6n quia, with the verb most

commonly in the subjunctive.

Exam p le .

n6n quod ddleant, not because they grieve.

1. Causal Clauses ' introduced by cum or the relative qui

regularly take the subjunctive .

EXA M I LES.

1. cum v ita métfis p léna s it, since life is full of fear .

2 . quae cum i ta s int , and since these things are so .

3. O fortanate ad iiles céns , qui tuae virtfi tis H dmérum prae

cdnem invénéris , 0 for tunate youth, since you ( lit. who)have obtained Homer as the herald of your valor .

2 . Causal Clauses introduced by quod , quia, quoniam ,

take the subjunctive ( in Indirect D iscourse , 348 ) to state

the reason as the assertion or op in ion of some one else.

EXAMP LE .

Sdcri tés accusatus es t quod corru péret jiiv sntutem ,

Socrates was arra igned because (as was alleged) he corrupted

the youth.

coon WITH VERBS or EMOTION .

3. Quod is used after verbs of j oy and sorrow , p raise and

blame, thanks and comp laint, satisfaction and anger , to give

the ground of the emotion , and is followed by the subjunc

tive or indicative , according to 332 or 332 . 2 but see 342 . 4.

EXAMP LES.

1. jiivat m6 quod v isen t s tudia, I am delighted because studies

arefl ourishing ( indicative) .‘7gaud et miles quod vi cérit hostem , the soldier rej oices be

cause he has conquered the enemy ( subjunctive) .

OBS. 1. For Causal C lauses as the subj ect, obj ect, or appositive,see 342 . 4 ; for the Infinitive afterVerbs of Emotion , see 342 .

OBS. 2. For Causal C lauses in Indirect Discourse , see 351.

EXERC ISES.


1. Laudabat me, quod filium meum culparem . 2 . QuOniam jam nox est , in vestra tecta discédite . 3. Caesar ab

SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLA USES. 325

A edui'

s friimentum fiiigitabat, quod milites magna inépiii

urgérentur . 4. Omnes cives gaudent, quod dficés militum

cupiditate'

s coercuérunt. 5 . Succenseo tibi, quia lficrum

iim‘

icitiae antépésuisti . 6 . A edui legatbs misérunt questum

quod Harfidés agree ebrum popularentur . 7 . QuOniam rés

its 8 6 hi bet, in urbem rededmus .l


1. You have praised me because I have praised you.

2 . The citiz ens rejoiced because Caesar restrained the sol

diers . 3. I am angry with you, because you have preferred

gain to friendship. 4. He complained because he was not

assisted by them.

NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.1. See 27 8 .

What is a causal clause ? Mention the causal conjunctions . Whendo clauses introduced by these conjunctions take the indicative ?

When the subjunctive ? How is cum translated when it denotes

cause What is the construction after verbs of emotion ?

7 . TEMPORAL C LAUSES.

OBS. Temporal C lauses are such as denote the time of an action

by mentioning something else which was ( I)antecedent to, ( 2 ) con

temporaneous with, or (3) subsequent to it. he temporal conjunctions are

1. ANTECEDENT : postquam (pos teaquam ) , afl er that, afl er ;

ut , as ; lib i, when ( lit. where) ; s imul i o , or s imul ac , s lmul .

as soon as ; ut primum , cum primum , thefirst moment that;cum (quum ) , historical, when, after .

2 . CONTEMPOBANEOUS : dam, dbnec , while, as long as, until ;

quoad , quamdifi. as long as ; am ( quam) , when .

3. SUBSEQUENT : aut uam , priusquam, before.

C BS. The subjunctive is used in temporal clauses only in in

direct discourse, or to express cause, doubt, purpose, desire, etc., as

will be explained hereafter.


I . A n teced en t A ction .

333. Temporal C lauses , introduced by postquam , postea

quam, ub i, lit. tit primum , ub i p rimum , slmul 20. etc . take

the indicative ( commonly the aorist indicative or historical

present) .

1. pos tquam id hn lmadvertit. cdp ids suds C aesar in p roz i

mum collem subducit, after C aesar had observed this, he

withdrew hisforces to the nearest hill.

2 ubi se paratbs esse arb i trati sunt. Oppida incendun t,

when they thought they were ready, they burnt their towns .

no stri. simul in aridb cons ti terun t, in hostes impétum

fecerunt, our men, as soon as they gotfooting on dry (ground) ,made an attack on the enemy.

mi li tes , pos tquam v ictbriam hd epti sun t, nihi l réliqul

victis the soldiers, after they had gained a victory,

lefl nothing to the vanquished .

5. pos tquam v idi t, etc., cas tra pbsuit, he pitched his camp ,after he saw it, etc.

6. ubi oertlbrés facti sunt, when they were informed .

OBS. A fter the antecedent conjunctions, the aorist (Latis frequently rendered in English by the pluperfect ( see

334. RULE LV.—D um , d

'

o‘

nec, quoad , while, as longas, tak e th e ind icative (an y ten se) .

EXA M P LES.

1. hbc féci, dum licuit , I did this as long as I was allowed.

2 . intermis i , quoad n6n ll cuit, I stopped it as long as I was not

allowed .

335. RULE LVI .—D am , dbnec, quoad , until, tak e

th e indicative in th e statem en t of a fact , the sub

jun ctive w hen p urp ose is exp ressed i .e. if the aecom

p l ishmen t of th e pu rpose is the l im it of th e action ) .

1. M i ld in sbnatu fui t ed d ie, quoad ei natus d imis sus est.

M ilo was in the senate on that day, until it adj ourned .

328 FI RST STEPS IN LA TIN .

EXAMP LES.

l . n6n prius duces d imittun t (320. quam sit ooncessum,

they did not dismiss the leaders till it was granted.

priusquam quicquam cdnaratur , D ivi tiacum ad sé vooari

ihhet (320. before he took ( should take) action , he ordered

Divitiacus to be summoned to him.

nee prius sunt v is ! quam cas tris appropinqul rent, and

they were not seen until they were nearing the camp .

A nt i quam and prius quam often have, in historical narra

the same construction as cum Historical ( see

EXAM P LES.

priusquam visus est C aesar , quam fama perferrétur ,

C aesar appeared before any tidings were brought.ducentis ann is ante quam urb em capercut, in I ti liam

Gall! d ésoend érunt, the Gauls came down into I taly two

hundred years before they took the city.

2 . The subjunctive is used after antEquam and priusquam

(generally a present or future stands in the leading clause) when

the action is represented as possible (Potential Subjunctive, 2 7 8 .

l . or when the statement of a general truth is made.

EXAM P LES.

1. an té v idémus fulgiiratidnem quam sbnum audiamus , we

see the flash of lightning before hearing ( i .e. before we can

hear) the sound (potential) .

2. co llem , priusquam sentiatur , communi t, he fortifies the hill

before it was ( could be) perceived.

3. tempest“ minatur , m téqum surgat, the tempest threatens

before it rises (general truth) .

3. The subjunctive w ith an indefinite second person as the sub

ject (you one, any one) is especially common .

EXAMPLE .

priusquam incipil s , consultb bpus es t, before you ( i.e. any one)begin , there is need of deliberation . (See 308 . Obs.

038 . A ntdquam and priusquam are often written as separatewords ; the translation is often before with the present participle.

SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLA USES. 329

IV. C onstruction s of Cum.

CUM TEMPORAL.

338 . RULE LIX. Cum Temporal when) , in troducing a clause th at d efi nes th e mer e time of an

action , may be used wi th all the tenses of th e

ind icative.

EXAMP LES.

1. cum C aesar in Galliam vénit , altérius factidnis prin

olpés Grant A edul, when Caesar came into Gaul, the zEdui

were at the head of oneparty .

2 . cum verbs faciunt, majorés subs extollunt. when they

speak, they extol their ancestors .

CUM INVERSUM.

1. When the clauses are inverted, so that the temporal clause

expresses the main statement and becomes substantially the lead

ing clause, the indicative must be used.

EXAMP LES.

1. hbc faoére neetu app l rl bant, cum matru fiunmae rd

pente pr6curr6runt, they werepreparing to do this by night,

when the women suddenly ranforth.

2 vix agmen nbviss lmum prboeu l rat. cum Gall! human

translre n6n d iibltant, scarcely had the rear advanced, when

the Gauls without hesitation crossed the river .

OBS. The verb in the leading clause is usually the imperfect or

pluperfect indicative, often preceded by the adverbs vix, jam, etc.

Sub ltb and ri pente are often used in the temporal clause.

ITERATIVE USE OF CUM.

2 . When cum ( or ub i, slmul do, or the general relatives qui

oumque, qubtiéns ) means whenever, as often as, and designates

repeated or customary action , it is followed in some writers by the

subjunctive, in other writers by the indicative.

EXAMPLES.

1. cum quaepiam obhors impétum fécérat, hosti sw eb“ ,

whenever any cohort had made an attack, the enemy retreated.


2 . cum in jus duel dbb itdrem vIdis sent, und ique convola

bant , whenever they saw a debtor taken to court, they hurr ied

together (made it a rule to hurry together) from a ll quarters.

CUM HISTORICAL.

339» RULE LX. 0am , mean ing when, is used in

H istor ical N arration w ith th e imp er fect subjunctive

for con tempo ran eous action , w i th th e p lup er fect sub

junctive for an teceden t action .

EXAMPLES.

l . cum clv i tl s armis jus suum exséqui conarétur, Orgé

tbrix mortuus es t, when the state was attemp ting to assert its

authority by force of arms, Orgetor ia: died .

2 . C aesar , cum P ompéjum vIcis set. in I talian trajécit, when

Caesar had conquered P ompey, he crossed over to I taly.

3. Caesar! cum id nuntiatum esset, maturat (320.b.) ab urb e

prbfi cisol , when this ( had been) was announced to Cwsar ,

he hastened to set outfrom the city.

OBS. Cum, followed by the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive,is enerally historical , i .e. it is used In historical narration, s

torIcal tense standing in the leading clause . The subjunctive Is

translated like the indicative. A notion of cause often intrudes,as in Ex. 3. Cum nunti l tum es set points out both the time and

giause of Caesar

’

8 setting out. Usually the temporal clause comesrst

CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CUM.

340. RULE LXI . Cum C ausal since) and cum

C on cessive although) may be used w ith an y tense

of th e subjunctive .

EXAMPLES.

quae cum ita s int , and since these things are so.

A canl , cum sé defendére n6n pos sent, légfitds ad

C aesarem mi ttunt (320. the zEduans, since they were not

able to defend themselves, sent envoys to Cwsar .

n ihi l m6 ad jiivat (320. b.) cum posset. he gave me no assist

ance, although he had it in his power .


noluit i bire puer .

‘ 5 Donec té vidérat, noluit i bire puer.

6 . N6n exspectandum"sibi 7 sti tuit dam in Santbnés Helvétii

'

pervénirent. 7 . Tum, cum rés magns'

is permulti amisérant,Romae fides cécidit. 8 . Caesar priusquam codem est pré

feotas , lfina visa est. 9. E6 postquam Caesar pervénit

obsidés , arma , servbs8p6poscit.

°


1. When I was at A thens , I heard Z eno . 2 . When ambas

sadors came to Caesar , he demanded corn . 3. When they

had advanced three days , the enemy appeared . 4. Caesar

determined not to wait until the enemy should arrive.

5 . A fter Caesar perceived that, he led his forces to the

nearest hill . 6 . The boy was unwilling to depart until he

had seen you ( i .e. he waited for the purpose of seeing you) .

7 . While the senate was preparing war against Owsar , he

made himself dictator . 8 . Before Caesar attempted any

thing, he calls Divitiacus to himself. 9. I waited until he

came.

NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS

1. When the battle had been going onfor a long time.

2 . Why ablative ?

3. A ccount for themode ; the subjunctive is common with expecto .

4. See 337 . 2 . Obs .

5. The subjunctive in this sentence shows that the boy waited for

the purpose of seeing you, i.e. he intended to see you ; the next sentence

implies only that he did see you, without implying an intention .

6 . Supply esse.

7. Why dative8 . Note that when several nouns follow each other in the same con

struction , the Latin differs from the English either in omitting the

conjunction altogether or in repeating it after each word, e.g. either

ob s idés , arma, servds , or ob s idés et arma et servbs ; not

ob s idés , arma, et servds , as in English .

9. See178 . 2 .


Mention the three chief uses of cum. When does cum temporal

take the subjunctive ? Give the meanings and uses of dum. Give

the meanings of cum. What mode is used with most of the particlesof time When do anti quam and priusquam take the subjunctive ?When the temporal clause refers to future time, what mode is used

after cum after anthquam When the temporal clause intro

duced by cum contains the main statement, what mode is used‘i

Which are correct : cum es t, cum fuit, cum Gu t, cum iul rit, cum

mdnébat ?

8 . SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES.

OBS. A clause may perform many of the Offices of a noun, and

is, therefore, called a noun, or substantive, clause.

THA T GLA SS Is MA LLEA BLE was known to the ancients. The de

pendent clause, that glass is malleable, is equivalent to a

noun , and is the subj ect of was.

We perceive THA T F IRE 18 HOT . The dependent clause in this

sentence is the obj ect Of the verb perceive.

A peculiarity of the English is, THA T IT HA S so MA NY BORROWED

WORDS. The clause introduced by that is equivalent to a

noun standing in the predicate after is ; the clause is, there

fore, an attributive complement explanatory of peculiarity.

I t is known THA T CE SA R CONQUERED GA UL. I t has no meaninguntil explained by the clause introduced by that, which is

equivalent to a noun , and is, therefore, in apposition with it,

i.s. exp lanatory of it.

I know nothing about WHA T YOU A RE A SKING . The clause what

you are asking is the object of about. In English, what is at

once interrogative (as in the sentence above) and introducessubstantive clauses or it is a compound relative ( corresponding to qui , quae. quod ) , and introduces adjective clauses.

Hence

341. A Substantive C lause is one which, like a noun,

is the subject or object or complement of a verb, or

is used as an explanatory modifier of the subject or

object.


342 . Substantive C lauses may be classified as follows

INFINITIVE CLAUSES

1. The accusative with the infinitive is used as the subject of

u se or of impersonal verbs, and as the Object of the following :(1) Verbs of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving, and ( for In

direct Discourse, see 348 ) equivalent expressions .

( 2) Verbs of wishing and willing, permitting, commanding, and

forbidding (most Of commanding and forbidding, except jiibeo and

véto , are followed by ut or 116 with the subjunctive) .(3) Verbs of emotion ( joy, sorrow , and also verbs of hoping,

p romising, threatening, swearing ( these verbs are sometimes followedby the complementary infinitive, see

EXA MP LES.

l . dicit montem ab hos tib us tenérl , he says that the mountain

is held by the enemy.

2. dulce pt 6 patri i mdri est, to die for one’

s country is sweet.

3. C aes ar prbfl ciscl m i ttu nt. Casar hastens to depart.

4. dioltur montem ti ndri , it is said that the mountain is held.

OBS. 1. In the foregoing)examples the pupil will notice that

the infinitive is used as su jcet (Ex . 2) or as object (Ex. or

that the infinitive with a subject accusatIve is the subject or objectof the verb. Substantive clauses have their verbs in the infinitive orsubjunctive mode, with a subject of infinitive in the accusative case.

OBS. 2 . A ll substantive clauses are regarded as of the neuter

ender. The tense of the verb in the infinitive clause is determined

y the rule in 319.

FINAL CLAUSES

2 . Final Clauses are object clauses after verbs of fearing, andafter verbs Of asking, allowing, etc. See 321. 2 .

l . ni tl tur ut Vincat , he str ives to conquer ( lit. thathemay conquer ) .2 . timeo ut lhbbrés sus tlneas , I fear ( that) you will not endure

the labors .

3. 11611 vl reor, n ! n6n vanil s , I do not fear ( that) you will notcome.

4. v éreor né eat, I fear ( that) he will go.

OBS. 1. The clause of purpose may be translated by that withmay, might, shall, or should, or by the Infin itive.


OBS. The pupil should note that, when the conjunction that

introduces a clause denoting pu ose or result, it takes the subjunctive, according to 321, or 32 2 ; ut otherw ise it is usually the Sign

of the accusative with the infinitive ( see 342 . l and That is

to be rendered by quod when it introduces a substantive clause

that contains the ground or reason, or that is the object of somever

gof emotion or feeling ( accusative and infinitive may also be

use

INDIRECT QUESTIONS.

5. Indirect Questions are clauses ( introduced by some interrogative word) , which are the subject or object of a verb, or which

depend on verbs expressing doubt or uncertainty.

EXA MPLES.

1. scio quid quaerfis , I know what you are asking (Object) .2 . quid diés iérat incertum es t, what a day will bring forth is

uncertain ( subject) .3. dub i to an pdnam , I doubt whether I should notp lace, i .e. I am

inclined to think, etc .

(1) A fter verbs of trial, an indirect question is introduced bys! in the sense of whether .

EXAMP LE .

circumfunduntur hos tés s i quem adi tum répérlre possint,

the enemy pour round ( to see) if they canfind an entrance.

OBS. 1. Dub i to may also be followed by quin with the subjunctive if the sentence is negative ; but, if there is no negative, it is

followed by indirect question ; and, when it means to hesitate, bythe infinitive .

OBS. 2 . Note the difference in meaning between Ex.1and solo

quod quaeris , I know what the thing which) you ask, i .e. the

answer to the uestion you ask. In EX. 1, quid Is an interrogative

pronoun ; in t e other example, quod is a relative.

SYN . P lacet , itpleases , i.e. it is one’

s will or determination ; llbet

( lubet) , itp leases, I .e. it agrees with one’

s inclination.

EXERC ISES.


1. Milités pontem fdcére jussi sunt . 2 . Ego bOnus esse

dicor . 3. Caesar milités hortdtus est, ut acriter dimica'

irent.

4. Caesar jussit milites castra Infinite . 5 . Caesar vétuit

milites pontem rescindére. 6 . Sdpiéns semper beatus sitl


nécesse est. 7 . SO] efficit ut omnia flOreant. 8 . Omnes

civés métuébant, né urbs ab hostibus expfignarétur . 9. Phi

cuit e‘

i ut ad A riovistum legatds mittéret. 10. Nunquam

pi'

Itavi fOre”ut suppléx ad té vénirem. 11. Sentimus

uivem esse albam. 12 . C audeo quod vil les .


1. The particle ut is often omitted, especially after verbs of wishing

(vblo , ndlo , mi le , and ti oio ) , necessity, etc . also after di e and fac .

2 . That it would happen. When there is no supine, idre ut (or

fiitfirum esse ut ) is used for the future infinitive ; the clause with utis the subject of ibro.

What is a clause How are clauses classified ? What is an inde

pendent clause A dependent clause How are dependent clauses

classified Define each . Express in Latin to die for one’s country is

noble. With what does noble agree? What gender must it be What

is the gender of all substantive clauses

9. INTERROGATIVE C LAUSES.

OBS. Questions are of two kinds : (1) FA CT-QUESTIONS, or

those that ask about the existence of a fact, and expect the answer

yes or no : as, scribitn e pater , is myfather writing ? ANS. yes or no.

Such questions (unless rhetorical) are generally asked by the helpof one of the interrogative particles,

-ne, ndnne, num. ( 2) WORD

QUEST IONS, or those that ask about something connected w ith a

fact, as who, what, where, when, how, why, etc., and they cannot be

answered by yes or no as, quis has littérl s scrips it, who wrote

this letter ? ANS. C icero. our n6n discddis , why do you not depart

R hetor ica l Question s .

OBS. Questions may be real or they may be rhetorical. A real

uestion expects an answer ; as, Who is calling ? ANS. John . A

r etorical question does not expect an answer , but, under the

of a question , contains an assertion , put for oratorical effect

In the form of a question ; as , What is baser than a lie? This is

a rhetorical question , expecting no answer, but conveying the

idea that nothing is baser than to lie. Sometimes no interrogativeword is used in asking a question . In such cases an affirmative

question generally expects a negative answer ; a negative question,an affirmative answer. The omission of the interrogative word is

common in rhetorical questions ( especially with negatives) expressing surp rise, irony, impatience, etc. ; patére tua consili a n6n s entis ,

do you not see (you must surely) that your designs are laid bare


Direct simple questions generally take the indicative ; but direct

simple questions that ask what is to be done, when it is intended toimply that some such an answer as nothing, nowhere, etc.

, is expected,take the subjunctive ( 2 7 8 . 1. as,

1. quid agam , what am I to do2 . quia hbc d iibl tet, who could doubt this ? ( rhetorical question )

n6m6 hbc d iib l tet, no one could doubt it.

Hence the rule

D IRECT QUESTIONS.

343. Direct Simple Questions are generally introducedby interrogative words, and, as a rule, take their verbs

in the indicative .

344. DirectSimpleQuestions may take the subjunctivewhen they express doubt, deliberation , or impossibility,

or imply a negative op inion on the part of the speaker

or w riter ( 2 7 8 . 1.

EXAMP LES.

1. R bmamne v6niéa, will you come to Rome ( ANS. yes or no.)2. quisnam in hortb amb iilat, who is walking in the garden

(A NS. Caesar .)3. quia paupert i tem n6n extimescit, who does not dread

poverty

quid 1160 hbm lne £50158 , what can one (you) do w ith this man ?

( ANS . nothing.)quia hoc créd at, who would believe this ? ( A NS . no o ne.)

th

01

D ouble Question s .

OBS . Fact-Questions may consist of two parts, i .e. they may be

disjunctive ( or double) ; as, is it this or is it that? The first member

of a double question is introduced by the particles utrum or -ne ,

and the second by an ( arms or -no) ; as, utrum ea vestra an

nos tra culpa est , is that your fault or ours Occas ionally the inter

rogative particle is omitted with the first member ; as , albquar

an s l leam, must I speak or be silent? The follow ing exhibits the

various forms of double questions

quaero utrum vaw m an fal sum s it ,

quaero v érum-ne an falsum Bit , I ask whether it is

quaero verum an falsum s it. true or false .

quaero verum falsum-ne s it,

The principle may be stated in the following rule


OBS. 2 . The particle an is used after such phrases as n 6s cio ,

haud scio , dub lto an , in the sense I do not know but, I doubt but,i .e. I am inclined to think ; as, hand solo an Ita s it, I do not know

but it is so. The forms of the interrogative quis , and qui , combinewith n 6scio , and are equivalent to an indefinite pronoun ; as,

n6scio quis , somebody or other ; the verb is in the indicative.

DEPENDENT DOUBLE QUESTION.

EXA M PLES.

1. pu6rt utrum 16gan t an scriban t nescio, I don’

t know

whether the boys are reading or wr iting.

2 . utrum légat necne nescio , I don ’

t know whether he is readingor not.

OBS. 1. Note that the subjunctive in indirect questions is translated by the indicative, because it stands for the indicative. Note,also, that the indirect question is always a dependent

duced by some interrogative word which connects it with the

preceding clause.

OBS. 2 . If the direct question had its verb in the subjunctive,no change is made on becoming indirect (except the tense of the

leading verb must be in a secondary tense if it is required by the

se uence of tenses) ; but the difference must be shown by the Englis rendering : thus, (1) quid agimus , what are we doing ? and

( 2) quid agamus , what are we to do become alike in the indirect

form ,—n 6n satin cons ti bat quid l gérent, they did not rightly

know (1) what they were doing, or ( 2) what they were to do.

Question s and A nsw er s .

OBS. There is no one word in Latin meaning Simply yes and no.

In answering a question the verb is generally repeated ; as, estnotib i penna, have you a pen ? the answer would be est m ini penna,I have a pen ; or simply es t. Sometimes adverbs are used in

answer to a direct question ; as, 6tiam , Ita, sic , v6rum, v 6r6 ,rect6 , oert6 , sané. etc .

,—haeclne tua dbmus es t ? Ita, is this

your house ? yes ; dasne hoc do s i n6 , do you admit this yes I do

indeed . N o may be expressed by repeating the verb w ith a nega

tive, or by nbn, n6n v 6r6 , n6n Ita , mlnlm6 , by no means , immo or

Imo , yes indeed, nay rather, etc. ; as, n6n Irfita as n 6n sum tri te,

you are not angry ? I am not. In answer to a double question , one

member of the alternative must be repeated ; as, thus an fi l ter

6rat. was it you or your brother ego (Gram) , it was I . Hence thefollowing rule

347 . In answering a question in Latin , either the

verb, with or without a negative, is repeated for the


words YES or NO ; or an intensive or negative parti

cle is used, w ith or w ithout the repetition of the verb.

EXERC lSES.


1. Fuist‘

ine Mint in schéla? 2 . Die fuerisne her‘

i in

schéla? 3. Quaerit num Caesar in urbe sit. 4. Num ita

audés dicére ? 5 . Utrum iinus an plfirés sunt mundi ?

6 . Quaeritur utrum finus an plfirés sint mundi'

? 7 . Utrum

C iitt'

) an Caesar tibi praestantior et clarior vir esse videtur ?

8 . Caesar juss it eOs specular‘

i num hostés ex castris exirent.

9. Quaeritur dii utrum s int, neone . 10. Isne est quem

quaero , annOn ? 11. Num dfibium est casfine an consiliO

factus s it mundus ? 12 . Cujus hic liber est? tuusne ? NOn ,

sed fratris . 13. Utrum vestra an nostra culpa est ?

14. Causa igitur n6n bOna est? immo optima . 15 . Quisnam

in hortO ambiilat? 16 . Nescio quis in hortO ambfilat.

SYN . Orbis terrarum , rather than tet ra, when there is decided

reference to other lands .


1. IS Caesar in the city? 2 . He inquires whether Owsar

is in the city . 3. Who is walking in the garden ? 4. He

asks who is walking in the garden . 5 . Is it true or false ?

6 . He asks whether it is true or false . 7 . Did Caesar come

into the senate yesterday ? No . 8 . I s this your book or

mine ? I t is mine . 9. A re you reading or writing? 10. He

asks whether you are reading or writing .


How may simple questions be classified (Ans . Fact questions and

word-questions . ) How many kinds of word-questions What is a

double question? How is a direct simple question asked ? Mention

the most common interrogative words . What is an indirect question ?

How is it asked ? What is the mode of the verb in indirect questions?

What is a rhetorical question ? How is a question in Latin answered

How is a double question answered ?


LESSON XCVIII .

INDIRECT DISOOUBSB.

OBS. 1. Direct Discourse (crane recta) gives the exact words ofthe speaker or writer ; as, A r iovistus said, I H AVE C ROSSED THE

RH [ NE Lat. A riovis tus d ixit, Rhénum trans ii ." The words

I have crossed the Rhine are in direct discourse ; the original speaker

is represented by the narrator as speaking in the fi rst person (because the speaker refers to himself) , and the words are given pre

cisely as they were uttered. Indirect Discourse (Oratio oblique )uses the same words , except that some are changed to conform to

the construction of the sentence in which they are quoted . These

changes affect only the pronouns, pronominal adverbs, modes, and

tenses (but not always all of these) ; as, A r iovistus said THA T HE

HA D C ROSSED THE RH INE Lat. A riov is tus d ixit S6 Rh énumtran sisse . The original words, I have crossed the Rhine, have been

changed to that he had crossed the Rhine, to indicate the change of

relation in the speaker ; the first person in English is changed to

the third, and the perfect tense to pluperfect, and, in Latin , the in

dicative to the accusative w ith the infinitive, which together forman infinitive substantive clause, the object of the leading verb dix it.

EXAM PLES.

1. a. r6x urbem oppfi gnat , the king assaults the city.

a. dux dicit , r6x urbem oppugnat,”

the leader says, The

king is assaulting the city .

”

6. dux dIoit regem ut h om oppugnar e, the leader says that

the king is assaulting the city.

a . sortbit, he writes.

b. dic it S6 scrfbére, he says that he is (now) writing.

a. DOS parfiti stimus , we are ready.

b. s 6 par i tés es se arb itrfiti sunt, they thought that they were

ready.

4. a. sunt n6nn ii llI qu6 rum aucté rl ti s apud p l6b em plfirl

mum valet , there are some whose infl uence prevails mostwith the common people.

b. Liscus dIoit es se n6nnfi llds quérum auctérltas i pud

plébem p liir imum valeat. Liscus says that there are

some whose influencep revails most with the common peop le.

OBS. 2 . In the foregoing examples marked a, note that each givesthe exact words of the original speaker or writer, and is, therefore,in Direct Discourse ; note, also, that each sentence marked a is a

declarative sentence, and that the principal verb is in the indicative.


Divico treated with C aesar asfollowsIftheRomanpeople shall make If the Roman peop le shoul d

peace with the Helvetians, the make peace with the Helvetians,

Helvetians w ill go to that p lace the Helvetians w ould go to that

and w ill remain there where y ou p lace and remain there where

shal l hav e determined and wished C ae sar should have determined

them to be ; but if y ou shall and wished them to be ; but if he

persist in following them with war , should persist in following them

remember the ancient disaster of with war, let him remember the

theRomanpeople and the ancestral ancient disaster of the Roman

valor of the Helvetians . p eop le and the ancestra l valor ofthe Helvetians .

OBS. 1. Note that, in passing from Direct to Indirect Discourse,the first and second persons of pronouns and of verbs are changed,when the sense so requires, to the third person . I n all cases, the

changes of pronouns depend on sense

OBS. 2 . The report in Indirect Discourse may be made either

from the standpoint o the speaker , i .e. as if the speaker reported was

still speaking (Vivi form) , or from the standpoint of the reporter ,the report being made as if the speech was a matter of the past.

INFINIT IVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.

349. The Tenses of the Infinitive in Indirect Dis

course represent the time of the action as present, past,

or future, relatively to that of the principal verb.

EXA M PLES.

1. d icit montem ab hostibus t6n6ri , he says that the mountain

is held by the enemy.

2 . d ix it montem ab hos tibus t6n6ri , he said that the mountain

was held by the enemy.

OBS. Note that, in the foregoing examples, the leading verbs

d ici t and d ixi t have as an object a clause whose verb is in the

infinitive, and whose subj ect is In the accusative. Note, further,that the present infinitive is translated by the p resent tense after

d icit, and by a past tense after d ixit ; i .s. the infinitives denote the

same time as the verbs on which they depend. Hence we observe

that these infinitives represent the time 0 the action not as present

absolutely, but as present relatively to the time denoted by the

principal verb ; i .e. the present infinitive expresses contemporaneous


OBS. 4. The infin itive is said to stand, in Indirect Discourse,and its tenses to correspond to those of the finite modes, when itdepends on a verb implying thought, or the exp ression of thought ;thus, cupit v6nire, he desires to come, v 6nire is not in Indirect

Discourse, but is really a noun , the object of cupit. But in dicit

v énire , he says he is coming, vénire represents vénio ( indicative)of Direct Discourse.

OBS. 5. The subject of the infinitive in Indirect Discourse must( as a rule) be expressed, even though it is wanting in Direct Dis

course as, el6m6us sum ; dicit 8 6 esse c16m6ntem .

TENSES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.

350. Tenses in Indirect Discourse generally conform

to the ordinary rules for the use of tenses in the Subjunctive and Infinitive, as determined by the tense of

the introductory verb but an A orist ( i .s . a Perfect)Infinitive takes the sequence of past tenses, even if the

introductory verb is primary ( see 348 .

OBS. 1. Each tense in Direct Discourse is ordinarily representedby the same tense in Indirect Discour se ; but, when the indicativesof those tenses that have no subjunctive (viz .

, future and futureperfect are to be changed to the subjunctive, or when the indicatives 0 those tenses that have no infinitive (viz . imperfect and p luerfect) are to be changed to the infinitive, on passing to Indirectiscourse, they take the tense nearest them in time . Thus the

Future Indicative becomes Present or Imperfect Subjunctive,according to sequence of tenses.

Future Perfect Indicative becomes Perfect or Pluperfect Sub

junctive, according to sequence of tenses .

Imperfect Indicative z Perfect Infinitive .

Pluperfect Indicative Perfect Infinitive.

Future Indicative becomes Future Infinitive.

Future Perfect Indicative Future Perfect Infinitive .

OBS. 2 . The Historical Present is often treated in Indirect Discourse as a past tense, and is followed by a past tense of the

subjunctive in the dependent clauses ; as, H elv étii legatbs ad

C aesarem mittunt, qui d ic6t ent, the Helvetians sent ambassadorsto Caesar ( who should say, i .e.) to say.

OBS. 3. For the sake of vividness, a past tense may be followedby the present subjunctive ; as , ex i tus fuit 6 r6 ti 6nis , neque

vaoar e agras , qui am pos s in t , the close of the oration was , that

there were ( are) not lands unoccup ied which could (can) be given.


OBS . 1. When the principal clause, or apodosis , is in the subjunctive, as in Unreal Conditions, then special rules are required

( see 355 .

OBS. 2 . Interrogative sentences may sometimes have their verbsin the subjunctive, as in Rhetorical Questions (344 the subjunctive is either retained or changed to infinitive. T e deliberative

subjunctive ( 2 7 8 ) is always retained. But Rhetorical Questionsthat are in the indicative in Direct Discourse are changed to theaccusative with the infinitive in Indirect Discourse if the subject isof the first or third person, into the subjunctive if the subject is ofthe second person ( seeOBS. 3. Imperative clauses may have their verbs in the subjunc

tive the subjunctive is then retained in Indirect Discourse .

352 . The Construction of Indirect Discourse is used

after verbs of saying and thinking ( declarative) , asking

( interrogative) , commanding ( imperative) .

EXA M PLES.

1. C aesar cbgnbv it H elvetibs castra mbv isse, Caesar learned

that the Helvetians had broken up their camp .

2 . C aesar certior factus est exercitum v6aiss e, Cwsar was

informed that the army had come.

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.

353. Reflexive Pronouns, m i and anus , refer primarilyto the subject of the clause in which they stand.

1. In some Subordinate Clauses the Reflexive must beused to refer either to the subject of the principal, or to thesubject Of the subordinate clause ; but this happens onlywhen reference is made to the thought or will of the subjectin the leading clause, as in Infinitive C lauses , Final C lauses ,or in Indirect Discourse ( Indirect Questions ) .

EXAM P LES.

1. animus sentit 8 6 v i sua m6v 6ri , the mind perceives that it is

moved by its own power .

2 . quaesiv 6runt num 8 6 ess et 6tiam m6ri prbhib i tnrus , theyasked whether he was going to (would) p revent them fromdying too.

INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 349

PRONOUNS IN INDIRECT D ISCOURSE.

354. In passing from Direct Discourse to Indirect, pronouns

of the first or second person are regularly changed, if the sense

requires, to pronouns of the third person , as follows

1. PERSONA L : égo (n6 8 ) is changed to forms of the reflexive

8 6 ( sometimes ipse) tu is changed to forms of ille or is .

2 . POSSESSIVE : meus (noster ) and tuns (ves ter ) are changed

to forms of suus ( sometimes genitive of ips e or of is ) .

are changed to forms of ill e or is

nunc is changed to tum and tune .

3. DEMONSTRA TIVE

4. INTENSIVE : ipse may be retained, and then refers to the

principal subject, like an emphatic reflexive .

OBS. Hence we have two refiexives in some clauses, referringto (1) leading subject, ( 2) subject of the infinitive .

EXA M P LES.

1. DIRECT : ann iilum 650 ms ! manu cann ot, I have made the

ring with my own hand .

IND IREC T : glfiriatus est an nii lum 8 6 sul manucbnf6cis se,

he boasted that he had made the r ing with his own hand .

2 . DIREC T : s i ob s i d 68 a vbb is m ih i dabuntur , vbbiscum

pacem faciam , if hostages shall be given to me by you, I willmake peace with you.

IND IRECT : r68 pondit, Si obs id és ab ifs Sib i d entur , 8 68 6

cum iis pacem es se faotfi rum, he rep lied that if hostages

should be given to him by them, he would make peace with them.

3. our (16 sua v irtute aut d é ips ius dnigentia d 6 8 p 6r6rent ,

why (asked he) should they despair of their own courage or his

diligence

OBS . The personal pronoun may, of course, be retained in In

direct Discourse when the sense requires it ; in short, all changes of

pronouns must conform to the sense .

Exam p le .

DIRECT : quidv'

i’

s perpétiar , I will endure anything.

IND IRECT : adfirmfiv i qui dv is m6 perpessfi rum , I asserted

that I would endure anything.


C ONDIT IONAL SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISC OURSE.

355 . C onditional Sen tences, in passing from Direct to

Indi rect Discourse, undergo the follow ing changes

1. In SIMPLE CoND ITIONs (32 6 . 1) the apodosis is changed to

the accusative w ith the infin itive ( the tenses of the infinitive beingpresent, spast, or future, according as the tense of the verb in the

apodosis is present, past, or future) .

2 . The protasis is changed to the subjunctive, the tense beingdetermined by the leading verb of saying, etc. ; but an aorist ( i .e.

perfect) infinitive takes the sequence of past tenses.

EXAMP LES.

0. R . Si p6oiiniam hab et , dat.

O . o . PRESENT : d ici t 8 6 , Si péoi‘

m iam habeat, dare .

O . O. PA ST : dixit 8 6 , st péoiiniam hab éret, dare.

O . R . Si pécfiniam habui t, d6dit.

O . O . d icit 8 6 , Si p6cuniam hab 6ret , déd is se .

3. In FUTURE COND ITIONS (326 . 2 ) the present and perfect

subjunctive ( or future indicative) of the apodosis are changed to

the future infin itive ( or the periphrase { Ore ut,4. The tenses (present and perfect) in the protasis remain

unchanged if the leading verb of saying is in a primary tense ;

otherwise, they (present and perfect) are changed respectively to

the imperfect and pluperfect .

EXA MP LES.

o . R . si péofini am hab eat, dot .

O . O . PRESENT : d icit 8 6 , s i pécfin iam habeat, dat iirum esse.

O . O . PA ST : dix i t S6 , s i pécfin iam h 6b 6ret, d i tfi rum ess e .

5. In UNREA L CONDITIONS the imperfect and pluperfect

subjunctive of the apodosis, when active, are changed respectively to

the future or future perfect infinitive ; when passive, these tenses

are expressed respectively by the periphrases futurum esse a t or

ffitfi rum fuis se ut, with the imperfect subjunctive. This peri

phrase must be used in the active when the verb in the apodosis

has no future participle, and hence no future infinitives .

6 . The tenses in the protasis remain unchanged, no matter what

may be the tense of the leading verb.


3. a . num récentium injuriarum m6m6riam d 6p 6n6re pos

sum , am I able to lay as ide the memory of recent wrongs

b. respondit, num r6centium injuriarum mémbriam d é

p 6n6re pos se, he rep lied, could he lay aside the memoryof recent wrongs

4. a . quid v 6r6mini. aut our d 6 v es tra virtute d 6 8 p 6ratis ,

what do youfear, or why do you despair of your va lor ?

b. quid v6rer6n tur aut cfi r (16 and v ir tute d 68 p 6r6r ent,

what did theyfear, or why did they despair of their valor ?

OBS. In the foregoing examples, those marked a are Direct

Questions, and have their verbs in the indicative ( see In

the corresponding examples of Indirect Discourse, marked b, these

verbs have been changed to the subjunctive or to the infinitive.

Note that rhetorical questions (Exs. 3and 4) in the indicative inDirect Discourse are changed to the accusative with the infinitive

in Indirect Discourse, if the subject isfirst or third person (Ex.

il

l

l

l

to the subjunctive, if the subject is second person (Ex. Hence

t e rule

356 . Interrogative Sentences generally take the subjunctive, but sometimeS

'

( especially when rhetorical) the infinitivewith subject accusative.

OBS. Subjunctive Rhetorical Questions in Direct Discourse ( see344) remain , as a rule, in the subjunctive in Indirect Discourse .

Questions of Deliberation ( 2 7 8 ) always retain the subjunctive.

IMPERAT IVE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.

EXA M PLES.

1. a. r6m ini 8 c6re v6t6ri 8 incommbd i p6p iili R dman i , remem

ber the ancient disaster of the Roman people.

b. r6min isc6r6tur v 6t6ri8 incommbdi pbp ii li Raman i . let

him remember ( said he) the ancient disaster of the Roman

2 . a. cum légiéne v6ni. come with a legion .

b. scribit Lab i6n6 cum légidne v6niat, he writes toLabienus

to come ( lit., that he should come) with a legion .

OBS. In the foregoing examples, note that those marked a have

their verbs in the imperative ; in the corresponding examples of

Indirect Discourse, marked b, these imperatives have been changedto the subjunctive . Hence the rule

357 . A ll Imperatives in Direct Discourse are changed in

Indirect Discourse to the Subjunctive ; the negative is n6 .


PURPOSE

OBS. The subjunctive w ith qui expresses a Purpose chiefly afterverbs of sending, giving, and choosing, w ith reference to the obj ectof the sentence ; a Purpose with reference to the subj ect being ex

pressed by ut, etc. If the construction be passive, then , of course,

qui will refer to the subject.

EXA M P LES.

1. l6g6t6 8 mi s érunt qui pacem p6t6rent, they sent envoys to

(who should, or that they might) suefor peace.

2 . l6g6 ti m is s i sunt qui pacem p6t6ren t , envoys were sent to

(who should) seek peace.

RESULT .

1. Relative Clauses are often used to characteriz e an ia

definite or general antecedent, especially after negatives , where

the idea of result is not obvious .

EXA M P LES.

1. sunt qui d ican t . there are some who say.

2 . n6m6 es t qui n6 n oiip it , there is no one who does not desire.

( I ) A Relative Clause of Characteristic is used even when the

antecedent is definite ; but it is especially common

a. A fter fi rm s and 8 61u8 .

b. A fter d ignus , indignus , i d6neu8 , and aptus .

c. A fter comparatives with quam .

OBS. The Relative of Characteristic is equivalent to the Restric

tive Relative with the subjunctive . The Relative of Characteristic

has a tendenc to take the subjunctive after indefinite and general

expressions or examples, see 324) but even then the indicative

may be used when the statement is a definite fact, and not a

general characteristic ( i .e. w ith a definite antecedent) as, sunt qui

d icunt imp6ria n6qui 8 8 e pati , there are some who assert, etc .

( i.e. I know some who assert, Particularly to be noted is the

Restrictive Relative in such phrases as quod soiam , so far as I

know ; quod m6m in6rim , as fa r as I remember .

EXAM PLE .

n6n is sum qui h is Star , I am not such a one as to use these things.

RELA TIVE SENTENCES. 357

COND ITION

361. RULE LXVI .— A C ond ition is som et im es in

trod uced by th e I nd efi n ite R elative (qu i , qua e , quod

s i qu is , s i qu i , an d th e mod es ar e u sed as in

o rdin a r y cond ition a l clauses .

EXAMPLES.

1. haec qui v ideat, ndnne cbgl tur cbnfi t6 ri deds 8 8 8 8 , ifany one should see these things, would he not be compelled to

admit that there are gods2 et rat long6 , qui or6d at , he greatly errs who supposes ( i .e. if

any one supposes, he greatly errs) .

CAUSE.

OBS. Causal C lauses introduced by qui alone, or strengthened

by ut , utpbte , quippe, generally take their verbs in the subjunctive, although the indicative is occasionally used.

EXAMP LES.

1. habeo 8 6nectiiti gratiam , quae mih r s ermdni s av id itatem

auxit , I cherish gratitude to old age, which has increased mylove of conversation .

2 . mi s6t et tui m6 qui cum tu) hun c tan tum h 6m inem

fi ci i s in imicum am, I p ity you since you ( in thatyou) makeso great a man as this inimical to you .

3. h i b eo S6nectfi ti gratiam , quae mih i sermdni s av id i tatem

auxi t, I cher ish gratitude to old age, which (because it) hasincreased my love of conversation .

OBS. In C icero the mode with quippe qui is the subjunctive ;In Sallust, the indicative .

CONCESSION .

ab solv i te Vert em , qui cum is ) 8 6 fateatur p6ciinias

o6pi 8 8 e, acquitVerres, although he confesses ( should confess )that he has taken br ibes .

362 . RULE LXVII . R e lative C lau ses in I n d irect

D iscourse, l ik e oth er d ep end en t clau ses , tak e th e

subjunctive .

EXAMP LE .

nun tifitum est 6qui t6 8 qui praemis si es sent r6vertis se , it

was announced that the horsemen who had been sent in advance

had returned .


a . A Relative C lause , even in Indirect Discourse , maytake the indicative , if it contains a statement on the authorityof the narrator the present speaker or writer) , or if itis a mere circumlocution .

EXA MP LES.

1. C aes ar per exp loratorés certior factus est , ex ea parte

Viol quam G allia conces sérat , omnes noctfi di sces s'

is se ,

Cwsar was informed through his scouts that all of them had

withdrawn dur ing the n ight from that quarter of the village

which he had assigned to the Gauls .

2 . qui s néget haec omn ia quae v i d émus d e6 rum pbtestate

adminis trar i , who would deny that this whole visible wor ld is

managed by the power of the gods

OBS. The statement on the authority of the present speaker or

writer is equivalent to saying that the statement is a fact ; hence,the indicative is used. The relative clause quam conces sé

rat , although standing in Indirect Discourse, is in the indicative,because it is an exp lanation given by the writer himself (Caesar) .

The relative clause quae v id émus , ma be considered as explanatory ( i .e. it is a circumlocution) , and alt ough introduced into the

Indirect Discourse, the verb (v l d émus ) is in the indicative, becausethe manner of making the assertion is not important enough to rise

into consideration ; hence, the verb remains in the mode in which

it would naturally be, viz . the indicative . The statement is virtually made on the authority of the p resent speaker , because he does

not think it worth while to shift the responsibility ; i .e. it often

depends merely upon the feeling of the w riter whether he will use

the indicative or subjunctive.

INTERMEDIATE C LAUSES.

OBS. In Latin we often find a clause subordinate to another

clause which is itself subordinate. When the first subordinate clause

is a subjunctive ( or an infinitive) clause, then the subjunctive isused in the second subordinate ( or intermediate) clause, because

anything depending on a potential is itself necessarily potential .

The verb in the second subordinate clause is said to be in the sub

junctive by attraction . The verb in the second subordinate clause

may be in the indicative, but, if the clause ( intermediate) is inIndirect Discourse, its verb is naturally in the subjunctive ( as inthe foregoing lesson ) , unless the clause is merely explanatory, i .e. a

circumlocution (36 2 . Obs .) containing a statement which is regarded


of the speaker or narrator himself may take this construction . On

this principle, indirect questions and dependent constructions fo l

lowing verbs of wishing, desir ing, etc., as well as final clauses, maybe explained as Indirect Discourse, the indirect relation often beingconfined to a dependent clause, and not extending to the whole

sentence ; as, n6va nupta fl et quod ire neces s e s it, the br ide is

weep ing because she must go ( says she) . This sentence in Indirect

Discourse is : nova nupta d icit s é fl ére quod ire néces se s i t.

Hence

INFORMAL IND IRECT D ISCOURSE.

364. RULE LXIX . A r elative or oth er subor d in a te

c lause m ay tak e th e subjun ctive w h en it exp r esses ,

th ough n ot in fo rm a l in d ir ect d iscour se , th e th ough t

of som e oth er p er son th an th e Sp eak er or w r iter .

EXA M P LES.

1. omnes lib ros quos frater suus réliquis set t i donav it ,

he gave tome all the books which (as he said) his brother had left.

2 . Socrates accfi satus es t quod corrumpéret jfiven tfi tem ,

Socrates was arraigned because (as was alleged) he corrup ted

the youth

3. A edui questi'

sun t quod H arfi d és fin és e6 rum pbp hla

rentur , the E dui comp lained because ( as they said) the

Harudes were laying waste their territory .

OBS. 1. The constructions following verbs of wishing, desiring,commanding, per mitting, car ing, str iving, hinder in fearing, and the

like, may be explained as Informal Indirect iscourse (usuallycalled pétltié obliqua ) .

EXAMPLES.

1. nihil ind ignlus es t quam cum qui culpa careat suppli cié

n6n carére, nothing is more unbecoming than that he who is

freefromfault should not befreefrompun ishment.2. mfl i tés mis it.ut 6 5 8 qui ffigéran t perséquérentur , he sent

soldiers to (who should) pursue those who had fled ( i .e. the

fugitives) .

OBS. 2 . Note, in the foregoing examples, that the relative clause

qui careat ( see depending on an infinitive, has its verb in

the subjunctive by the ordinary rule ; in Ex. 2, the clause qui

fiigérant has its verb in the indicative, because it is regarded as

parenthetical, i .e. it is a circumlocution ( see 36 2 . a) .

SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES .


1. The waves on the Shores [of the sea] are high . 2 .

Vols inii, a town of the Tuscans , was consumed 1 by light

n ing. 3. Neither you nor I have done this . 4. You and he

praise the streams of the countrv. 5 . The man said one

thing and the boy another .

“z 6 . Homer is called the king of

poets . 7 . The Sequani Shuddered at the cruelty of A riovis

tus . 8 . Hear much ,3speak little . 9. A fter his death the

people repented of their judgment 10. Caesar kept

demanding corn of the jEdui. 11. The elephant is said to

live two hundred years . 12 . A ugustus died at Nola . 13.

He wandered about the banks of the river Po and the Shores

of the A driatic Sea . 14. A good man forgets all injuries .

15 . A t what price does he give lessons?‘ 16 . It is not law

ful for any man5to lead an army against his country . 17 .

Having learned these things , Caesar returns to the fleet. 18 .

What o’

clock is it ? 19. Is that your fault or mine? 20. He

asked whether that was your fault or mine . 21. If they

( Shall) give hostages , Caesar will make peace with them.

22 . Can anybody do this? 23. Can somebody do this ? 24.

Plato lived eighty-one years . 25 . Wherefore it pleased him

to send 6 legates to A riovistus , to demand7 from him that he

Should appoint some place central w ith respect to both of

them for a conference, ( saying) that he wished to treat withhim concerning the republic, and the highest interests of

both. 26 . On the 10th of A pril we set out for the province .

27 . IS this said to have been done by night or by day? 28 .

The Germans have not entered a house for fourteen years .

29. It is of great consequence8to me 9 that I Should see you.


30. On the last day of December he set sail ,10and arrived at

A thens on the 10th of January . 31. In the first of the

spring the consul came to Ephesus , and , having received the

troops from1‘Scipio , he made12 a speech

‘3in-presence-of14 his

soldiers ( in which) , after extolling their bravery , he exhorted

them to undertake 15a new war w ith 16 the Greeks , who had

( as he said ) helped A ntiochus w ith auxiliar ies .

Use concrématum est .

Use aliud aliud .

Use the plural .

Lit. teach.

Use li cet némini .

See 321.

See 321. Obs . acclpére .

See 315 . 3.oo

q

cz

curs

oa

w

p

MISCELLANEOUS EXERC ISES.

I . SUJII AND ITS COMPOUNDS.

[Learn the principal parts and meaning of ab sum ,l adsum , d ésum ,

insum , intersum , ob sum ,

2p raesnm , pré sum , pos sum , subsum ,

8

sfipersum j


1. God is present in all places . 2 . They profit neither

themselves nor others . 3. They were not able to profit me .

4. He has been absent from home six months . 5 . This can

not profit vou , but injures you and your friends . 6 . A

leader was wanting to the army . 7 . The cavalry profited

our army . 8 . He was present in the battle . 9. They were

able to be present. 10. They governed the city for ten

Veal'S.

1. For euphonic changes , see 7 . and if .

2 . Principal parts : ob sum , obes se , offui .

3. Principal parts : subsum , subcase, no perf.

See 315 . 3. a .

Use s olvit.

Use 5.

Use habui t.

Use cont iénem.

Use apud .

Use ad with the ger .

Use cum.


6 . The wise man will teach his son justice . 7 . The

people made Caesar consul . 8 . Every tenth man was

chosen . 9. Every sixth man was chosen . 10. A ll the best

men ( lit. , each best man ) were chosen . 11. They fear

this enemy . 12 . Hannibal crossed the A lps with his

army . 13. The river goes through the midst of the city .

14. This , lastly ( ad extrémum ) , I particularly (magn épére )ask you. 15 . We ought not to conceal our opinions from

our friends . 16 . He leads his army over the river . 17

Caesar leads the cavalry over the bridge. 18 . The people

appoint him general. 19. O wolf , excellent guardian , as the

saying is ( at ajunt ) , for the Sheep 20. The Romans

were eager for glory . 21. One man ( dat. ) must not fight

w ith ( cum ) two . 22 . What pleases you also pleases me .

23. This thing is unlike that. 24. The life which we enjoy isshort. 25 . We pity those who repent of their faults . 26 .

We love those who have repented of their faults . 27 Whenthese things had been done, and the whole of Gaul had been

subdued , the nations which dwelt beyond the Rhine sent

ambassadors to ( ad ) Caesar . 28 . C icero went to A thens . 29.

The ambassadors came from Carthage. 30. The men fled to

Rome . 31. The soldiers departed from Italy . 32 . Settingforth (prefectus ) from Carthage , he made for (pétére ) I taly .

33. He was a brave man at home and in war . 34. He will

return home in the evening. 35 . When my son returns from

the country , I will send him to ( ad ) you . 36 . We perceive

that snow is white . 37 . I t is said that snow is white . 38 . I

believe that the souls of men are immortal . 39. Who wasthe man ? 40. I w ill tell you who the man was . 41. The

wall is two hundred feet long. 42 . I will send you a letter .

V.

I . No brave man shudders at the enemy . 2 . Who was

present ( intéresse ) at your conversation ? 3. A gainst the

Tarentines , who were in the lowest part of ( ultimus ) Italy ,

GENERAL RULES OF SYNTAX.

AGREEMENT OF VERBS, NOUNS, PRONOUNS,

AND ADJECTIVES.

SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE ( P .

1. The subject of a finite Verb is put in the nomina

tive case.

A GREEMENT OF VERBS ( P .

2 . A finite verb agrees w ith its subject-nominativein number and person .

A PPOSITION ( P .

3. A noun used to describe another noun or pro

noun , and denoting the same person or thing, is put in

the same case.

PREDICATE NOUN ( P .

4 . A noun in the predicate, denoting the same person

or thing as the subject, agrees w ith it in case.

A GREEMENT OF RELATIVES ( P .

5 . A relative pronoun agrees w ith its antecedent in

gender, number, and person , but its case depends on

the construction Of the clause in which it stands .

A GREEMENT OF A DJECTIVES ( P .

6 . A djectives agree w ith their nouns in gender,number , and case.

PRED ICATE A DJECTIVE ( P .

7 . A predicate adjective agrees with its subject in

gender, number, and person.

GENERAL RULES OF SYNTA X . 371

GEN ITIVE.

GENITIVE WITH NOUNS ( P .

8 . A noun limiting the meaning of another

and denoting a different person or thing, is put

genitive.

GEN ITIVE WITH A DJECTIVES ( P .

9 . Many adjectives are followed by the genitive to

complete their meaning.

PARTITIVE GENITIVE ( P .

10. Words denoting a part are followed by the

genitive denoting the whole.

PREDICATE GEN ITIVE ( P .

11. A noun in the predicate, denoting a different

person or thing from the subject, is put in the genitive.

1. Certain adjectives Of quantity as magni , parvi. pith-is ,

minbris are used to denote indefinite price.

GENITIVE W ITH VERBS ( P .

12 . Verbs Of reminding, remembering, and forgetting,—récordor , mém in i , rem in iscor , and ob l iviscor ,— are

followed by the genitive ( sometimes the accusative) .

1. The genitive is used (p . 295)(1) With mi sereor , m i sérés co .

( 2) With the impersonals réfert and interes t .

(3) The impersonals mi séret, paeni tet , p i ss t , pfiget, andtaedet, take the genitive of the object with the

accusative of the person.

(4) Verbs of accusing, convicting, condemning, and acquit

ting, take the accusative of the person and the

genitive Of the crime (p.

( 5) Sum , and verbs of valuing, take the genitive to express

the price or value indefinitely (p.


DATIVE.

INDIRECT OBJECT ( P .

13. The indirect object of an action is put in the

dative

1 With intransitive and pas sive verbs.

2 . With transitive verbs, in connection with the direct object.

DATIVE WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS ( P .

14 The dative of the indirect Object is used w ith

most Intransitive verbs signifying to favor , p lease, trust,assist, and their contraries ; also, to believe, persuade,command, obey, serve, resist, threaten, spare, pardon, and

be angry.

DATIVE OF PURPOSE OR END ( P .

15 . The dative is used with sum and a few other

verbs to denote the purpose or end, usually with

another dative of the person or thing affected or

interested.

DATIVE OF POSSESSOR ( P .

16 . The dative of the possessor is used with the verb

sum .

DATIVE OF A GENT ( P .

17 . The dative of the agent is used with the gerun

dive to denote the person interested in doing the action .

DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS ( P .

18 . The dative of the indirect Object is used with

many verbs compounded w ith ad , an te , con , in , in ter ,

ob , post , p rae , p r6 , sub , and super , and sometimescircum .

DATIVE W ITH ADJECTIVES ( P .

19 . The dative is used after adjectives to denote theObject to which the quality is directed.

GENERA L RULES OF SYNTAX. 375

A BLATIVE OF MEASURE ( P .

34 . The ablative w ithout a preposition is used to

denote the standard by which anything is measured.

MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE ( P .

35 . The ablative is used w ith comparatives, and

words implying comparison, to denote the measure Of

difference.

A BLATIVE OF PRICE ( P .

36 . The price is expressed by the ablative when it

is a definite sum.

1. D ignus and ind ignas are followed by the ablative .

A BLATIVE OF SPEC IFICATION ( P .

37 . A noun , adjective, or verb may be followed bythe ablative to denote in what respect its signification is

taken .

A BLATIVE WITII COMPARATIVES ( P .

38 . The comparative degree is followed by the abla

tive when quam , than, is omitted.

A BLATIVE OF MATERI AL ( P .

39 . The material of which anything is made is regu

larly expressed by the ablative w ith ex or d é ; but

con stare , to consist, sometimes omits the preposition .

1. Opus and ii sus , signifying need, are followed by the ablative

Of the thing needed ( p.

2 Most verbs and adjectives Signifying p lenty and want are

followed by the ablative (308 . Obs .

A BLATIVE OF MANNER ( P .

40. The ablative Of manner generally takes the

preposition cum , unless it has a modifying adjective or

genitive ( when cum may be omitted) .


A BLATIVE OF A CCOMPANIMENT ( P .

41. The ablative Of accompaniment takes the preposition cum , except in a few military and other

phrases .

A BLATIVE OF QUALITY ( P .

42 . A noun denoting quality, quantity, or description , and having an adjective joined w ith it, may be

put in the genitive 01 in the ablative.

LOCATIVE.

PLA CE IN WH ICH ( P .

43. The name of the p lace where, or in which, regu

larly requires in with the ablative .

NAMES OF TOWNS ( P .

44 . Names of towns and small islands, and also

dam us , r ii s , and a few other words omit the reposition ,

and the name Of the p lace where, or in whio takes the

locative.

TIME ( P .

45 . The time when, or within which, is put in the

ablative time how long, in the accusative.

A BLATIVE A BSOLUTE ( P . 222 )46 . A noun or pronoun ,

w ith a participle or an

adjective, or two nouns, may be put in the ablative, to

express the time or circumstance of an action .

INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE MODES.

IND ICATIVE MODE.

4 7 . The indicative mode asserts action or being as

a fact, or inquires after a fact.

SUBJECT A CCUSATIVE ( P .

4 8 . The infinitive with subject accusative is used

after verbs Of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving,hear ing, and the like.


SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE (P .

5 5 . Final clauses take their verbs in the present or

imperfect subjunctive, according as the leading verb

is in a primary or a secondary tense.

SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT ( P .

5 6 . Consecutive clauses take their verbs in the sub

junctive mode, the tense being determined by the

regular rules for sequence of tenses . ( See 32 2 . Obs .)

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES ( P .

5 7 . Conditional sentences w ith Si , n isi, m , Sin ,

takeSimp le P resent and P ast Conditions .

1. Any present or past tense of the indicative in

both clauses when nothing is implied as to the fulfil

ment of the condition .

Future Conditions.

2 . The future indicative in both clauses, to represent

the supposed future case in a distinct and vivid manner ;

the present ( or perfect subjunctive) in both clauses, to

represent the supposed future case in a less distinct and

vivid manner .

Unreal P resent and P ast Conditions.

3. The imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive in bothclauses, to represent the supposed case as unreal, or

contrary to fact. The imperfect denotes present time,and the pluperfect past.

C OMPARATIVE CLAUSES ( P .

5 8 . Comparative clauses, introduced by ut, hti , Sicut,quémadmddum , etc., and followed by the demonstrative

particles i’

ta , sic etc., regularly take the indicative

or the subjunctive as in independent sentences .

1. Comparative clauses, introduced by ac Si , ut Si ,

quam Si , quasi , tan quam , tan quam Si , vélut, velut Si ,

are, in fact, conditional clauses , Of which the conclusion

GENERA L RULES OF SYNTA X. 379

is Omitted or implied, and therefore take the subjunctive like conditional sentences ; but the tense is deter

mined by the regular rules for sequence Of tenses .

CONCESSIVE CLAUSES ( P .

5 9 . Concessive clauses are introduced by concessive

conjunctions, although, granting that,— and take the

indicative or the subjunctive ( according to the principlesstated on p. 321

CAUSAL CLAUSES ( P .

6 0. Causal clauses, introduced by quod , quia , qu5

n iam , take the indicative when the reason

assigned is stated as a fact, and indorsed by the Speaker

or writer .

I . Causal clauses introduced by cum or the relative qui regu

larly take the subjunctive.

2 . Causal clauses introduced by quod , quia, qubniam , take the

subjunctive ( in Indirect Discouse, to state the reason as the

assertion or op in ion of some one else than the speaker or wr iter .

TEMPORAL CLAUSES.

A NTECEDENT A CTION ( P .

6 1. Temporal clauses, introduced by po stquam , po st

ea quam , ub i , tit, I'

I t p r imum , I'

Ib i p r imum , simul ac,

etc. , take the indicative ( commonly the aorist indicative

or historical present) .

CONTEMPORANEOUS A CTION ( P .

6 2 . D um , dOn ec, quoad , while, as long as, take the

indicative ( any tense) .

l . D um , dbn ec , quoad , until, take the indicative in

the statement of afact, the subjunctive when purpose

is expressed ( i .e. if the accomplishment Of the purpose

is the limit Of the action ) .


SUBSEQUENT A CTION ( P .

63. A n téquam and p r iusquam , before, are used w ith

any tense of the indicative, except the imperfect and

pluperfect, to express the mere priority of one event to

another .

1. A n téquam and p r iusquam are used w ith the

subjunctive to express (1) the intentional priority of

one action to another ( i .e. when the action is purposed

or desired by the subject of the leading verb) , ( 2) orwhen its non-occurrence is expressed or implied.

CONSTRUCTIONS OF CUM .

C UM TEMPORAL ( P .

6 4 . C um temporal when ) , introducing a clause

that defines the mere time Of an action , may be used

w ith all the tenses Of the indicative.

CUM H ISTORICAL ( P .

6 5 . C um , meaning when , is used in historical narra

tion w ith the imperfect subjunctive for contemporaneousaction , with the pluperfect subjunctive for antecedent

action .

CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CUM ( P .

6 6 . C um causal since) and cum concessive

although) may be used with any tense Of the sub

junctive.

INTERROGATIVE CLAUSES.

DIRECT QUESTIONS ( P .

6 7 . Direct Simple questions are generally introduced

by interrogative words, and, as a rule, take their verbs

in the indicative.

1. Direct Simple questions may take the subjunctivewhen they express doubt or deliberation , or imply a

negative opinion on the part of the speaker or writer

( 2 73. 1,

READ ING LESSONS .

I . FA BLES.

NOTE.—The figures in the follow ing sections refer to the rules on p . 370 ff.

1. THE KID AND THE WOLF .

Capella ,1stans

6 in tectO dOmI'

IS,

8 liipum20vidit 2 praetéreun

tem , et Indif‘

icavit. Sed lllpus , NOn tI‘

I , inquit, sed lécus

tuns , mé liidificat.

Saepe lécus et tempus hOminéS timidOS audaces reddit.

2 . THE BOY BATH ING .

Puer , balneum péténs in fli’

IviO, aqua paene exstinctus est .

Et vidéns viatOrem quendam , clamavit, Subvéni mih’

i” 14

Sed hic exprOhravit puért'

)13 téméritatem . Puelh

'

IluS autem

dixit, Primum subvéni , deinde répréhendére‘9 licet.

”

3. THE Fox A ND THE LION .

Vulpés Vidit leOnem rétibus 3’ Captam, et stans prOpe, lI'

Idi

ficavit eum insOlenter . LeO autem, NOD tn,”

inquit, me

ludificas ,2sed malum quod inme incidit.

”

4. THE A SS IN THE LION’

S SKIN .

A sians , pellem27 leOn is indfitus , circum currébat, cetera

{inimalia z0 ter reus . Et cum vulpem vidéret, eam qq ue

terrére49

cOnatus est. Sed haec, asini virgin-

14“

and'

I'

tO,

Scito , inquit, mé qq ue territam fntiiram fuisse nis i

té vagientem audissem.

” 57

5 . THE HOUND AND THE LION .

Canis véniiticus6 leOneIn vid it, et insécfitus est. Cum

autem leO Sé vertéret, ac riigiret, canis métuéns rétrorsum

REA DING LESSONS. 383

ffigit. Tum vulpes , cOnspicata, O malum caput inquit ;

Téne 21 leOnem sectari ? cujus “ né vécem quidem tOlérare

pOtu‘

ist'

i .

6 . THE WOLF AND THE LAMB .

Liipus lnSéCfitus est agnum. A t hie in templum cOa'

igit.

LiipO autem agnum invOcante , et minitante pontificem cum

sacrificatfirum, réspondit agnus , Mallem quidem de5 Sacer

esse quam a té trfic‘

idar’

i .

F

t . THE FARMER AND THE SNAKE.

AgricOla Senex , hiémis tempOre, serpentem invénit gelu

rigentem , et miséréscéns sub veste condidit. MOX serpens ,

incaléscéns , et indOlem suam récfipérans , benefactOrem m5

mordit interfécitque qui InOriénS dixit, Justa patior , qui5

animali ‘3 imprObO vitam servavérim.

” 7‘

8 . THE WI DOW’

S HEN .

Vidua quaedam gallinam habuit, quae Singhla Ova cottidié

pépérit. A t rata , Si plI‘

iS horde'

i 10

gallinae13 dédisset,

“ hanc

bina cottidié Ova paritiiram ,ita fecit . Sed gall

'

I'

na , pinguis

facta , né SingI'

Ila quidem postea parere valébat.

II . LIFE OF CJESAR .

CE SAR IS PROSCRIBED , BUT PARDONED BY SULLA .

1. G . Jfilius Caesar , x n5bilissima génitus familia,31annum

agens sextum et décimum, patrem amisit . l ’aulO post Cor

neliam di’

Ixit uxOrem , cujus cum pater Sullae19esset inimicus ,

véluit Sulla Caesarem compellére49ut eam dimittéret ; néque

id pOtuit efficérc . Ob eam causam Caesar bOniS 3‘spdliatus ,

cumetiam ad mortem quaerérétur , mutataveste , noctuelapsus

est ex urbe , et, quamquam tunc quartanae morbO labOrabat,

prOpe per Singhlas noctés latbbras commfitare cOgébatur ; et

compréhensus a Sullae libertfi , vix data péciiniz‘

i.33 évaSit.


PostremO per prOpinquOS et afl’

inés suOS veniam impétravit,

din répugnante Sulla, qui cum déprécantibus ornatissimis

viris dénégasset, atque illi pertinaciter contendérent victus

tandem dixit, cum, quem salvam tantOpére cfipérent, ali

quandO Optimatium partibus ,15quas Simul defendissent, exi

tiO15 fiitiirum, multOsque in eO puerO inesse‘8 MariOS.

CE SAR’

S CA PTURE BY THE PIRATES.

2 . Caesar , mortuO Sulla et compOs‘

ita SeditiOne civili , RhO

dum sécédére 4” statuit, ut per Otium A pollOniO, tunc Claris

SimO dicend’

i magistrO, Operam claret ; sed in itinere a pirfitis

captus est, mans itque apud eOS quadragintadiés?4 Per omne

autem illud spatium ita Sé gessit, ut piratis9"terrOr

‘

I' ‘5pariter

ac vénératiOni ”5 esset Interim cOmitéS servOsque dimisérat

ad expédiendas pécfimas , quibus rédimérétur . V'

iginti talenta

piratae postulavérant ; ille vérO quinquaginta datiirum‘8

Sé

spOpondit. Quibus nhmératis , expOsituS est in litOre . Caesar

libératus cOnfestim Miletum ,

25

quae urbs proximé abérat, prO

péravit ibique contracta classe , stantés adhuc in eOdem lOcO

praedOnéS noctii adortus , aliquot navés , mers‘

is ali'

is ,46cépit,

piratasque ad déditiOnem rédactOS eO affécit suppliciO, quod5

illis saepe per jOcum minatus erat, cum ab iiS détinérétur ;

criIcibus 28 illOS sufi'

igi jussit.

CE SAR’

S QUE STORSH IP IN SPA IN .

3. Caesar quaestor3 factus in H ispaniam prOfectuS est ;

cumque A lpés transiret, et ad cOnspectum paupéris ciijusdam

vic’

i cOmités éjus per jOcum inter Se dispfitarent, an lllic étiam

esset ambitiOni 16 lOcus ; SériO dixit Caesar , malle Sé ibi

primum esse quam ROmae “4 Secundum . I ta animus dOmi

natiOnis 9 avidns a prima aetate regnum conchpiscébat,

semperque in Ore habébat hOS Euripidis , Graec’

i poetae , ver

sus : Nam si viblandum est jus , régnandi gratia viélandum

est ; dliis rébus p ietatem Cum vOrO Gui des ,25

quod est

H ispaniae oppidum , venisset , visa A lexandr‘

i 8 magni imagine


aquiliférum terga vertentem fancibus “3 compréhendit, in

contrariam partem retraxit, dextéramque ad bostem prOten

dens Quorsum ti'

I ,”

inquit, abis ? I llic sunt, quibus cum

dimicamus .

”

QuO factOmilitibus i nimOS addi'

dit.

13

CE SAR BEGINS THE C IVIL WAR .

6 . Caesar cum adhi'

Ic in Gallia détinérétur , né imperfectO

bellO discédéret, postfilavit ut Sib’

I‘licéret, quamv

'

is absenti'

,

iterum cOnSnl’atum pétére quod ei a Senatfi est negatum.

Ea ré commOtuS in Italiam rédiit, armis injiiriam acceptam

vindicaturus ; plfirimisqne urbibns 46 occiipatis Brundisium

contendit, quO Pompéius cOnSi'

Ilésque cOnfi'

Igérant . Tunc

summae audaciae facinas Caesar édidit : aBrundiSiO Byrri

chium inter OppOSitaS classes gravissima biéme 45 transiit ;

cessantibusque cOpiiS, quas subséqu'

i jussérat, cum ad eas

arcessendas 5" frustra misisset, mOrae1” impatiens castris

noeth Ogréditnr , clam sOluS naviciilam cOnscendit ov lfitO

capite, né agnoseérétur . Mare, adversO ventO vehementer

flante, intfiméscébat ; in altum tameh prOtinuS dirig‘

i navi

gium jiibet ; cumque gi'

Ibernator paene obrI'

Itus fluctihus 33

adversae tempestati cédéret :“ Quid times ?” ait ; Caesa

rem véhis .

CE SAR DEFEATS POMPEY AND SUBDUES THE EA ST.

7 . Deinde Caesar in Thessaliam prOfectuS est, I'

Ibi Pompei

ium PharsalicO proeliO fudit, fiigientem pérsecfitus est,

eumque21 in itinere cOgnOvit occisum fuisse. Tum bellum

PtOléma ,

18 Pompéii interfectOr'

I'

,

3 intiilit a quO Sibi qq ue

insidias parari vidébat ; quO vietO,Caesar in Pontum transiit

,

Pharnacemque, Mithridatis filiam rébellantem aggressns in

tra quintum ab adventii diem, quattuor vérO, quibus in

cOnspectum vénérat , hOr'

I'

S, I'

inO proeliO prOfl‘

igavit. QuamvictOriae céléritatem inter triumphandum nOtavit , inscriptO

inter pompae ornamenta trium verbOrum titi'

IlO, Vent, vidi ,vici . Sua deinceps Caesarem I

'

ibique cOmitata est fortuna .

REA DING LESSONS.

ScipiOnem et Jiibam, Nfimidiae régem, reliquias Pompeiana

rum partium in A frica rev entes , dévicit. Pompeii libérOs

in H ispania Siipéravit. C lementer usus est victOria,33

et

omnibus ,14qui contra Sé arma tfilérant, pépercit. Régressus

in urbem, quinquiés triumphavit.

CE SAR IS DECLARED PERPETUAL DICTATOR , BUT'

IS SOON

A FTER A SSA SSINATED .

8 . Bellis civilibus cOnfect'

I'

s , Caesar , dictator3in perpétuum

creatus , agere inSOlentiuS coepit. Sénatum ad Sé vénientem

Sédéns excépit, et quemdam , ut assnrgéret mOnentem, iratO

vultii 4° respéxit. Cum A ntOniuS , Caesaris in omnibus expe

ditiOnibuS cOmes , et tune in cOnSI'

I latu collega , e'

i 18 in sella

aurea sedent’

i prO rostri'

s diadema , insigne régium , impOnéret,

nOn visus est eO factO Offend'

i .49 Quare cOn‘

Iratum est in

cum 5 sexaginta amplius viriS,32 CassiO et BrfitO dI

'

IcihuS cOn

sp’

iratiOniS. Cum igitur Caesar Idibus“ Martiis in sénatum

vénisset, assidentem spécié Officii circumstétérunt, illic ue

firms 5 conjuratis , quasi aliquid rOgatI‘

I ruS , prOpiuS accessit,

rénuent‘

ique tOgam ab utq ue iimérO appréhendit. Deinde

clamantem ,“ I sta quidem vis est,

”

Cassius vfilnérat paullO

infra j iigfilum . Caesar Cascae brachium arreptum graphiO

trajécit, cOnatusque prOSili'

re aliud vulnus accépit. Cum

Marcum Brfitum , quem lOcO fi lii habébat, in SC irruentem

vidisset, dixit° Tu qq ue , fi li mi !

”

Dein I‘

ihf animad

vertit undique SO str icti'

s phgiOnibus pét‘

i, tOga caput Obvol

vit, atque ita tribus et viginti plagis3”cOnfossuS est.

CHARA CTER OF CE SAR .

9. Erat Caesar excelsa statI'

Ira42nigris végétisque Ochl

’

is ,42

capite‘2calvO quam calviti

’

i déformitatem aegré férébat, quod

saepe obtrectantifim jOciS esset Obn5xia . Itaque ex omnibus

hOnOribus Sibi a Senatfi pOpI'

iq ue décrétis nOn aliud récépit

ant I'

isurpavit libentins , quam jus laureae perpét uO gestandae .

Eum v'

in'

i 9 parcissimum fuisse né inimic‘

i quidem négarunt ;


montem Juram et flumen RhOdanum ; altérum per prOvinciam

nOstram multO facilius atque cxpéditius , proptéreé. quod

RhOdanus nOnnI'

I lli'

S lOc'

I'

S43viidO33 transitur . Extrémum op

pidum A llObrOgum est Genava . Ex eO oppidO pOnS ad Hel

vétiOS pertinet. Omnibus rébus 46 ad prOfectiOnem compara

tis , d iem dicunt, quadié ad ripam RhOdani omnés convéniant .

Caesari cum id nuntiatum esset, maturat ab urbe prOficisci ,

et in Galliam ultériOrem contendit. Pontem jiibet réscind‘

i .

”

CE SA R RECEIVES A N EMBA SSY FROM THE HELVETI I .

6 . Ubi dé éjus adventfi Helvétu certiOréS 7 facti sunt, léga

tOS ad eum mittunt, qui7‘dicérent Sibi 16 esse in animO sine

i'

IllOmaléficiO iter per prOvinciam facere .

’

Caesar a lacii Lé

mannO ad montem Jti ram murum fossamque perdiicit. Négat

SO posse‘8 iter i

'

Ill‘

i per prOvinciam dare .

49 Rélinquébatur I'

ina

per SequanOS via , qua, Séquanis invitis , propter angustiéis ire

nOn pOtérant. His 1‘cum persuadere nOn possent, legatOS ad

DumnOrigemmittunt, ut, eOdepréci'

ttOre,48 impétrarent. Dum

nOrix apud SéquanOS plurimum pOtérat, et Helvétiis 1” érat

amicus , quod OrgétOrigiS fil iam in matrimOnium dfixérat. I ta

que rem suscipit, et a Sequanis impétrat, ut per fines suOS

HelvétiOS ire patiantur .

THE JEDU I AND OTHER TRIBES COMPLA IN To CE SAR OF

THE ENCROACHMENTS OF THE HELVETI I .

7 . Caesar in Italiam magais itinéribus contendit, duasque

ibi légiOnéS cOnscribit, et tréS ex hibernis édficit, et in 131e

Orem Galliam, per A lpés , ire contendit. In finesVOcontiOrumdié septimO pervénit ; inde in A llObrOgum finés , ab A llObrO

gibus in SégusianOS exercitum di'

Icit. Hi sunt extra prOvin

ciam trans RhOdanum Helvetii jam per angustias et

finés SequanOrum suds cOpIaS transduxérant, et A eduOrum

agrOs pOpfilabantur . A edu'

I'

, cum SO20défendére nOn possent ,

legatOS ad Caesarem mittunt rOgatum5‘auxilium. ROdem

tempOre A edu’

i Ambarri , cOnsanguine‘

i 3A eduOrum, Caesarem

REA DING LESSONS. 391

certiOrem faciunt, sese, dépOpi’

l latis agris , n6n facile ab

oppidis vim hostium prOhibére. I tem A llObrOgés , qui trans

RhOdanum vicOs possessic’

mésque hébébant, fugz‘

i 33 sé ad

Caesarem récipiunt. Caesar n6n exspectandum sibi17 stamit,dum in SantOnOs Helvetii pervenirent.

CE SAR SURPR ISES AND ROUTES ONE CANTON OF THE HELVETI I

AT THE RIVER A RAR .

8 . Flumen est A rar , quod per fines A eduOrum et Séquano

rum in RhOdanum influit, incredibili lénitz‘

ite ,40 ita ut Oculis ,

in fitram partem fluat, j iidiciiri n6n pos sit. Id Helvetii , rati

bus et lintribus junctis , transibant. Ubi Caesar certior fac

tus est tres cOpiarum partes Helvetiés ”1transdfixisse , quartam

fere partem citrfi. flfimen esse , dé tertia vigilia é castris prO

fectus ad eam partem pervénit, quae nfindum transiérat. EOS

impéditOs aggressns , maguam eOrum partem concidit. Réliqui

Sésé in proximas silvz‘

is abdidérunt. I s piigus appellabatur

Tigiirinus3nam omnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor pagOS

divisa est. H ic pagus Lficinm Cassium cOnsfilem interfécé

rat, et éjus exercitum sub jugum misérat. I ta , quae pars

calamitatem pOpiilO18 ROmfinO intiilérat, ea princeps poenas

persolvit.

CE SAR CROSSES THE RIVER A RAR AND RECEIVES A

SECOND EMBA SSY FROM THE HELVETI I .

9. HOC proeliO factO, réliquas cOpias HelvétiOrum ut cOnsé

qui posset, pontem in A rzi re faciendum Carat, atque ita exer

citum tri nsdficit. Helvétii , repentino éjus adventii commOti ,legatOs ad eum mittunt, cujus légs

‘

itiOnis DivicOprinceps fuit,

qui bellO45 Cass ifinO dux HelvétiOrum fuérat. I s ita cum

Caesare égit : Si palcem pOpiilus ROmanus cum Helvétiis face

ret, in eam partem itfirOs , ubi Caesar eOs”1esse VOIuisset ; sin

bellO perséqui persévérfiret, réminiscérétur et vétéris incom

mc‘

im12pépuli ROmani , et pristinae Virtutis HelvétiOrum ; sé

ita a patribus majOribusque suis didicisse, ut magis virtl’

ite


quam d616 contendérent. Quare , né committéret , ut is l6cus ,Iibi cOnstitissent, ex Calamitate p6pi

’

11i ROmani nOmen capé

ret.’

THE HELVETI I , ENCOURA GED BY THE SUCCESS OF THEIR

CAVA LRY, PREPA RE TO A TTA CK CE SA R’

S A RMY.

10. His Caesar ita respondit6 Sibi16 minus dfibitatiODis

dari , quod eas rés , quas commém6rassent, mém6r iii.33 ténéret .

Si Vétéris contiiméliae ‘2 Oblivisci vellet, num récentium injl‘

iri

arum mem6riam dépOnére posse ? Tamen , si Obsidés ab iis

sibi dentar , uti ea13quae polliceantur factfirOs intelligat, et Si

A eduis dé injfiriis quas ipsis s6ciisque e6 rum int1‘

ilérint, item

Si A llobrOgibus satisfaciant, sese cum iis pacem factfirum .

DivicO respondit : Ita HelvetiOS amajéribus suis institutOs

esse , fiti Obsidés accipére , n6n dare cOnsuévérint ; ejue rei

p6pulum ROmanum esse testem .

’

HOC responsOdatO,discessit.

Poster6 die castra ex e6 1606 m6vent. Idem facit Caesar .

Equitatum omnem praemittit, qui5 Videant

, quas in partés

hostés iter faciant. Qui alién6 1606 cum equitatfi HelvétiOrum

proelium committunt, et pauci dé nOstris cadunt. Helvetii

audacius subsistére , nOnnunquam nOstrOS lacessere coepé

runt. Caesar suOS a proeliO continébat, ac satis habébat in

praesentia bostem rapinis31pr6hibére . I ta dies 2‘circiter

quindecim iter fécérunt, uti , inter n6vissimum hostium agmen

et nOstrum primum , n6n amplias quinis ant Senis milibus 38

passuum intéresset.

THE JEDUI NEGLECT TO FURNISH THE CORN THEY HAD

PROMISED AND CE SAR CALLS THE GALLIC CH IEFS TO

A COUNC IL .

11. Intérim cottidié Caesar A eduovs22 frumentum, qu

‘

od 5

essent publice polliciti , flagitare . Nam , propter frig6ra , n6n

m6do friimenta in agris matura n6n érant, sed né pabfili qui

dem satis magna COpia suppétébat. E6 autem

quod flfimine A rare navibus subvéxérat, minus iiti49p6térat,


DIVITIA CUS BESEECHES CE SAR NOT To TAKE SEVERE MEA S

URES AGA INST H IS BROTHER .

13. Cum ad has suspiciOnés certissimae rés accédérent, satis

esse causae arbitrabatur , quare in eum aut ipse animadver

téret, aut civitatem animadvertére jubéret. His omnibus

finum répfignabat, quod D ivitiaci fratris summum in p6pI'

IluIn

ROmanum studium, summam in SC V6luntatem, égrégiam

fidem, justitiam,tempérantiam cOgnOvérat : nam né éjus

suppliciO D ivitiaci animum Offendéret vérébatur . I taque ,

priusquam quicquam Cfmarétur ,63D ivitiacum 48

ad sé v6eari

jubet Simul comm6néfacit quae , ipSO4“

praesente , in conciliO

GallOrum s int dicta ; et ostendit quae separatim quisque dé

e6 apud Se dixérit. Divitiacus multis cum laerimis Obsécrare

coepit, né quid gravins in fratrem statuéret : scire‘9Sé

2‘illa

esse Vera , sese tamen et amOI'e fraterné et existimatiéne vulgi

comm6véri . Quod Si quid ei13aCaesare gravins accidisset, cum

ipse cum 16cum amicitiae apud cum téuéret, néminem existi

matiirum n6n suaV6luntate factum , qua ex ré futurum , uti

tOtius Galliae 8 animi a 8 6 avertérentur .

’Caesar éjus dextram

prendit ; Dumn6rigem ad sé V6eat ; fratrem adhibet ; quae

in c6 répréhendat ostendit m6uet ut in réliquum tempus

omnés suspiciOnéS vitet.

CE SAR PREPARES TO ATTA CK THE HELVETH .

14. EOdem die ab explOratOribus certior 6 factus hostés sub

monte cOnsédissemilia 2‘passuum ab ipsius castris octo , qualis

esset68natfira montis et qualis in circuitfi adscensus , qui 06g

noscérent misit. Rénuntiatum est facilem esse. De tertia

Vigilia Titum Labienum, legatum , cum duObuS légiOnibus

summum jugum montis adscendére j l‘

ibet. Ipse de quarta

vigilia eOdem itinere , qu6 hostés iérant, ad e6s contendit ;

équitatumque omnem ante sé mittit.

READING LESSONS. 395

CE SAR’

s PLAN Is DEFEATED BY THE MISTAKE OF CONSIDIUS.

15 . Prima liice , cum summus m6ns aTit6 Labien6 téné

rétur , ipse ab hostium castrie n6u longius mille et quingentis

passibus abesset, neque aut ipsius adventfis , aut Labiéni ,

c6gnitus esset, COnsidius , équ6 admissO, ad eum accurrit ;

dicit montem , quem a Labien6 occfipari v6luérit, ab hosti

bus 32teneri ; id sé ex GalliciS armis atque insignibus c6gn6

visse . Caesar suas coplas In pI'

OXImum collem subdiicit,

aciem instruit. Labienus , ut erat ei praeceptum (ut undiqueiiu6 temp6re in hostés impetus fiéret) , monte occupatO,

n6str6 8 exspectabat, proeli6que abstinébat . Mult6 dénique

die, per exp16rat6rés Caesar c6gn6vit montem a suis ténéri ,

et C6nsidium, perterritum, quod“n6n vidisset pr6 vis6 ré

nuntiasse . E6 die, qu6 c6nsuérat intervallO, hostés sequitur ;

et milia passuum tria ab e6 rum castris castra p6uit.

TO SECURE SUPPLIES CE SAR TURNS A SIDE FROM THE PUR

SUIT OF THE HELVETI I .

16 . Postridié éjus diei quod‘

Omnin6 biduum s iipérérat,

cum exercitui frumentum metiri 6portéret, et quod 6 Bi

bracte , Oppid6 A edu6 rum longé maxim6 et 06pi6 sissim6 , n6u

amplius milibus passuum du6déviginti abérat, rei friimen

tariae‘8 prospiciendum existimavit. acBibracte2"ire contendit.

Helvetii , seu quod perterrit6 s R6man6 s discedere existimarent,

sive quod ré friimentaria31intercludi posse c6nfidérent, itinere

conversO, nOstrOS a n6vissim6 agmine inséqui ac lacessére

coepérunt.

CE SAR PREP ARES FOR A GENERAL ENGAGEMENT .

17 . Postquam id animum advertit, c6pias suas Caesar

in proximum collem subducit, équitatumque, qui sustinéret

hostium impetum , misit. Ipse inte'

rim in colle médi6 tri

plicem aciem instrfixit. Sarcinas in finum l6eum c6nferri , et

NOTES .

I . FA BLES.

1. sti l ls , present participle, see sto ; d6miis, genitive, fourth declen

sion, see 174 ; how does it differ in meaning from d6mi’ —

praet6reun

tem ( see praetéreo ) agrees with li'

Ipum, object of Vidit. A ccount for

the position of inquit. Is n6n tii , etc direct or indirect discourse it

How is 160118 declined in the plural? A NS. 160i, M. , means places in

books ; l60a,N ., places ; gen. 16c6rum, dat. l6cis , acc. l6c6s, M. ; 16ca, N .

,

etc.

2 . Subvéni ( imperative ) , help .—pu6r6 , etc. ,

reproached to the boy his

rashness, or, as we say , he reproached the boy for his rashness .

—répré

hendére ( infinitive ) , to reprove. licet, it is permitted, i.e. you may

reprove.

3. captum is a partie ., from capio, agreeing with lc6asm.-mi lum

(nominative ) , understand n é liidificat.

4. pollem indfitns , having put on the skin ; induor, although passive

in form,is used in a middle or reflexive sense, as, I clothe

, i .e. I put

clothing on myself,and may be followed by the accusative.—Vidéret

why subj . ?—06natns est , a deponent verb ; see 28 2 — haec, i.e .

vulpes . audissem for audivissem ; see 89. 2 .

5. téne secti ri , you hunt a lion ? té is the subject of secti ri ;

ne asks the question.—n§ quidem,

not even whose voice even you

could not endure ; 116 quidem,not even

,always have the emphatic word

between them .

6 . hic, he. lfip6 , abl.—pontificem sacrifici tiirum,se. esse, tha t

the priest would, etc. For the construction in indirect discourse, see

348 fi . I would rather .

7 . temp6re ; why ablative ? — Justa, j ustly, lit. j ust things ; see

83. 4.

8 . pépérit, see pario . rata hanc paritiiram (esse) , thinking that

she would lay see 348 . pliis hordei , more barley see 237 .

NOTES. 399

II . LIFE OF CE SA R .

[F or a sketch of Cazsar’

s lyz» , see p .

1. annum décimum,being in his sixteenth year .

—pau16 post

fix6rem,a little while after he marr ied Cornelia , dficére fix6rem,

to marry,

is said of the husband only .—ciijus inimicus , since her father was

unfi'iendly to Sulla how does inimicus , as a noun, differ from hostis ?

at eam dimittéret, to divorce her, lit. that he should divorce her .—b6nis,

property . cum quaerérétur , when he was even soughtfor in order to

be put to death what kind of a clause is this ? why imperfect subj . ? on

what verb does it depend?—mfiti ti veste : what does this participle

denote ? how is the ablative absolute rendered (2 59 ) quarti nae,

supply fébris , lit. sick with the disease of qua rtan ague li bbr i bat. per

pr6pinqn6s , etc . ,by means of his relations . qui dénégasset, when he

would have refused it to the distinguished men who begged for it dénégas

set, see 338 . aliqnandi'

) ffitfirum ,will ruin ( lit. be for a ruin ) the

party of the ar istocracy, etc. ; give the synonyms of cfipio ; of pner .

2 . Sulla died B .C . 78 .—morta6 , 2 8 2 . sécédére, to retire.

—per

Otium,at (his ) leisure.

—dicendi , of oratory .—6péram di ret, might

give (his ) attention.—SYN . maneo , rema in, whether for a long or short

time ; comm6ror , remain for some time in a place, soj ourn ; hi bito,dwell permanently. 86 gen it, he conducted himself. at esset

does this clause denote purpose or result ? why is esset in the impf.

subj . —Give the syns . of intérim.—ad péciinii s, to get money :

the gerundive sometimes denotes purpose . servus , mancipium,famil

lus , all mean a slave ; servus, as one politically inferior ; mancipium,

a salable commodity ; fi mfilus , a family possession.—SYN . 06mm,

companion, a fellow-traveller sOcius, a companion, member of the same

society ; 86d51is, a companion in amusement or pleasure. quibus

rédimérétur : does this relative clause denote purpose or result?

Miletus , a flourishing city of Ionia. proxime abérat, was at

the nearest distance ofi‘

. SYN . poena, general word for punishment ;

snpplicium ( supplico, kneel ) , a severe punishment ( the criminal kneelingfor the blow ) criiciatus (crux,

cross ) , torture, as of one on the cross ;

tormentum (torqueo, twist) , a racking torture, to extort confession .

3. quaestor factus : fio, in the sense of to be made, appointed,

is used as the passive of facio .—inter sé, together .

—conciipiscébat,

desired earnestly, coveted .—ia Ore habébat, lit . had in his mouth, i .e.

kept repeating—0615s , see 2 78 . 1.

—quod : a relative generally

agrees in gender with a noun in its own clause .—mém6r§,bile a par

titive genitive could not be used after nihil only neuter adjectives of


8 . 0oepit has passive perf. and infinitives, 305 . 1.

-quendam, for

quemdam. assurgéret, why imperfect subj . ei sedenti , on

him sitting in the golden chair .—regiam,

royal. 5. sexi ginti

vir is, by more than sixty men.—06njiir5.tnm est, a consp iracy was formed .

— Idibns Martiis , on the Ides of hl arch, i.e. the 15th . assidentem

circumstétérunt, they stood around him s itting, under pretence ofpaying honor .

—quasi r6g§tiirus , as if to ask something. claiman

tem,sc. sum,

i .e. Caesarem.— arreptum,

which he had seized .—quem

habébat, whom he had regarded as his son .

9. erat statura, Caesar was of , etc. , see 292 . aegré férébat,

grieved (on account) quod obnoxia ,it was often the subj ect j br the

j okes of his slanderers . sibi, to him. laureae gestandae, of wearinga crown of laurel.—eum fuisse, that he was . inimici : give the

synonymes.—n6 and quidem enclose the emphatic word as in the

text —ad rempublicam,to overturn the republic.

—anteibat,see

anteeo .—d6tectum, uncovered : see détégo. sive esset, whether

it was sunshine or rain.—SYN . pluvia,

ra in (general word ) imber , ra in

(heavy , pouring shower ) ; nimbus , ra in (from dark clouds ) . - longis

simi s vias . Ce sar was noted for the rapidity of his movements ; he

is said to have travelled at the rate of one hundred Roman miles per

day , equal to about ninety-two English miles . innixus atribua,

resting upon inflated bags .

I II . THE HELVETIA N WA R .

SKETCH OF CE SAR’

S LIFE .

GA IUS JULI US CE SAR was born, by the common account, in the

year B .C . 100 (or , by a probable reckoning, two years earlier ) , and was

assassinated in the year B .C . 44, at the age of fifty-six. The earlier

date of his birth is consistent with the fact that he was Que stor in

R C . 68 , JEdile in,

65, Pre tor in 62 , and Consul in 59, since one was

not eligible to these Qflices, according to the Lex A nnalie, until he had

entered upon the age offthirty

-seven, forty , and forty-three respectively .

But Ce sar was most likely exempted by a special act,as Pompey and

many other prominent political leaders had been (from the LexA nnalie) .

Ce sar sprang from an old patrician family , but the circumstances of his

early life brought him into close connection with the Marian , or demo

cratic, party ; for his aunt Julia had married Marius, and he himself,

when but a boy of seventeen ,had taken the daughter of C inna, one of

the Marian leaders, for his wife . A t the bidding of Sulla, when dic


and was now a prominent member of the senate, fearing to be defeated

by one so much inferior in rank , station ,and age, offered Ce sar large

sums of money to pay his debts, if he would withdraw from the con

test. On the morning of the election, Ce sar is reported to have said

to his mother, who would gladly have had him withdraw from the

struggle, I shall this day be either chief pontiff or an exile .

The next year Ce sar was Pre tor, and as Propre tor he went, at

the end of his year of office, to govern Spain . Before his departure,

his old friend C rassus, the richest man at Rome, had to pay a part of

his debts, and to stand security for the rest to the amount of nearly a

million of dollars . Ce sar is reported to have said in his reckless way

that he needed a hundred million sesterces to be worth just nothing at

all . In Spain be displayed that civil and military ability which after

wards made h im famous . It must have been a strange sight to see

this dissolute spendthrift, th is profl igate demagogue, with his counte

nance pale and white, withered before its time by the excesses of the

capital, this delicate and epileptic man ,walking at the head of his

legions , and fighting as the foremost soldier with the wild tribes of

Lusitania .

On his return to Rome, Ce sar found Pompey , who had just com

pleted the Mithridatic war in the East,and was arranging for his

triumphal entry into the city , at variance w ith the senate. Ce sar at

once saw his opportunity ; he formed a political coalition with Pompey

and C rassus,one part of the bargain being that Ce sar should have

the consulship for the next year (R C . and after that the govern

ment of Gaul for five years . In accordance with this programme,

Ce sar was entrusted, at the expiration of his consulship, w ith the

command of C isalpine Gaul, I llyricum,and the province of Narbo

,

or simply provincia with three legions, for a term of five years .

Ce sar had now attamed his object. A s Proconsul of C isalpine Gaul,

he could watch the progress of affairs in the capital , while the threat

cuing movements of the tribes in Gaul opened to him the prospect of

subjugating the country and training an army for the impending civil

war,for Ce sar no doubt then clearly saw that a struggle between him

self and Pompey for the chief power at Rome was inevitable.

For a long time the Romans had felt the importance of possessing

Gaul, but as yet no systematic effort had been made to extend their

dominion in that quarter farther than occupying the seaboard between

the A lps and Pyrenees (R C . The climate of Gaul was health

ful, the soil rich and fertile, and the intercourse with Rome easy by

land and sea. Roman merchants and farmers had already emigrated


line of entrenchments had been constructed from Lake Geneva to the

Jura Mountains . Defeated in the attempt to cross the river in this

direction, the Helvetii were compelled to take their way along its

right bank, and thus make their journey westward by a more north

erly route. Ce sar hastily collected his forces, followed up the left

bank of the Saone, cut to pieces in a fierce battle a part of the Helve

tian army , and pursued the remainder to Bibracte, where he defeated

them in a terrible battle, and compelled the survivors to return to their

native country and rebuild their homes.

1. Gallia : Gaul extended from the Pyrenees and the Gulf of Lyons

on the south to the British Channel and German Ocean on the north .

It was bounded on the west by the A tlantic Ocean,and on the east by

the Rhine and Italy . It was called Transalpina ( i.e. beyond the A lp s ) ,to distinguish it from Cisalpina ( i .e. on this side of the A lps ) , in north

ern I taly . I t included France, Belgium, part of Switz erland and Hol

land, and the part of Germany west of the Rhine . In the division

which Ce sar here makes he does not include the southeast part, called

Gallia Narbonensis , or commonly Pr6vincia , whence the modern name

Provence. The Roman dominion in the Pr6vincia was secured by the

establishment of Narbo Marcius,a Roman colony on the A tax, in

B .0. 121.

The most remote Roman towns towards the west and north were Lug

dunum, Convenarum (or Convenne ) , Tolosa ,Vienna, and Geneva . The

country was well provided with roads and bridges . The commerce on

the Rhone, Garonne, Loire, and Seine was considerable and lucrative,

and extended even into Britain . The people were tall, of fair complexion

and of sanguine temperament, fond of fighting, but easily discouraged .

They were skilled in working copper and gold. Copper implements of

excellent workmanship, and even now malleable, have been found in the

tombs in many places in Gaul . The Romans are said to have learned

from them the art of tinning and silvering. The Gauls, or as they

called themselves the Celts , had attained so much skill in mining,

that the miners, especially in the iron-mines on the Loire, acted an im

portant part in sieges . There was no political union among the different

clans, no leading canton for all Gaul, no tie, however loose , uniting the

whole nation under one leadership . Sometimes one canton would ex

tend its power over a weaker one, as the Suessiones in the north, the

maritime cantons in the west, the two leagues in the south , one headed

by the JEdui, the other by the Sequani ; but the Celts as a nation lacked

political unity, and the cantons, for themost part, existed independently

NOTES. 407

side by side. In matters of religion they had long been centraliz ed.

The association of Druids embraced the British islands, all Gaul, and

perhaps other Celtic communities . The Druids had a special head

elected by the priests themselves, special privileges, as exemption from

taxation and military service, and an annual council.

The Province in Ce sar’s time extended from the Pyrenees to the A lps

on the coast, and was bounded on the east by the A lps, on the west by

the Mons Cevenna (Cevennes ) , southward from the latitude of Lugdu

num (Lyons) , and on the north (where it narrowed off) by the Rhone,from the western extremity of Lake Geneva to the junction of the

Rhone and Saone . omnis : Ce sar means all of Gaul, except that part

which had been subdued by the Romans, in opposition to Gallia in the

limited sense of one of the three divisions .—est divisa , lit. has been

divided ; usually translated is divided, as this form in English expresses

a completed action, the participle being used as an adjective.—tr68 is

placed at the end of the sentence as being the significant word, indi

cating the number of divisiona—I'

mam: supply partem as object ofinc61unt. aliam , another (part ) : if Ce sar had been enumerating

them in order, he would have used altéram or sécundam. tertian

appellantur , the third, those who a re called in our language Gauls .

institfiti'

s, in customs ; when three or more nouns stand together, the

conjunctions may be omitted altogether , or used between the first and

second, and second and third, etc. inter 86, among themselves or fromone another . dividunt is to be supplied after Matr6na et Séquana .

proptére'

a'

, quod , because ( lit. because of this) ; distinguished between

proptérei , for this reason , and praetérea, besides . Germanis, to the

Germans .—inc61unt, dwell. Give the synonymes of bellum . qu6que,

also ; the ablative of quisque is qu6que. virtfite, in valor ; virtfis, from

same root as vir , means manhood.— I

‘

ina pars, one part, of the main

divisions of Gaul, i .s . Gallia Celtica . flfimine, etc. notice that the

connectives are omitted —finibus : finis, limit ; plur . , finés, limits,often applied to what is included in those limits, territory —ad, towards .

Belgae hence the modern Belgium. inferi6rem pat tern, i.e.

towards the mouth of the river . ad, near to.—spectat inter occi sum

s61is, it looks between the setting of the sun, i.s . it looks northwest, i .s . from

the Province.

2 . apud, among ; i pud with the name of a person often means at

the house of ; with the name of an author, in the writings of .—n6bilis

simus, see 141. ditisslmus from dis (149.— Is is expressed

because it is emphatic. Note the position of the word Orget6r ix

at the end of the sentence, to give prominence to the name. SYN .


n6bilis, clam s,illustris, denote distinction : clarus is one celebrated

for his deeds ; illustris, for his rank or character ; n6bll is, for his noble

birth ; céléber and incliitus ( inclitus ) denote celebrity, are generally

used of things, not of persons . civi tati, the state,i .e. the people, all the

inhabitants of a state under one government ; it is here the indirect

object of persuasit, while the clause introduced by ut is the direct

object (321. l ) . exirent is plural on account of the plural implied in

civitas ; why in the imperf. subj . ? continentur , are hemmed in.

6116 ex parte, on one side. Helvétium, see Helvétius . altissim6 ;altus, high, when reckoned from belOW ’ deep ,

when from above down

ward —tertia, sc. ex parte Lemann6 : now Lake Geneva .

The pupil should be required to describe the rivers and give the situa

tion of the places mentioned in/the text.

3. adducti , induced . pertinérent is in the subjunctive, because it isimplied that these things belonged to their departure in the opinion of

the Helvetians ; which (as the Helvetians thought) , perta ined to their

departure—jfiment6rum (from same root as jungo, jt ) is

both pack and draught animals. sementes facere, to make as

large sowings as possible for the force of quam with the verb possum

in connection w ith the superlative, see 151. Obs. 3.—proximas has no

positive ; its place is supplied by pr6pinquus . in c6nfirmant,theyfix by law upon their depa rturefor the third year .

4. A d cOnf iciendas, to accomplish con is here intensive ; it usually

means , in composition,together . In how many ways may a purpose

be expressed in Latin (321.3, Obs . 1) deligitur : deligo, to choose in

general (not to be undecided in one’

s choice) Eligo, choose, in the sense

of selecting from several. Séquan6, the Sequanian . ut régnum

occfiparet : this clause is the direct object of persuid et, preva ils uponpersuadet is in the historical present, and may therefore be followed

by the imperfect subjunctive (320. Give the synonymes of régnum .

—p16bi, to the plebeians ( see L.

’s Rom . Hist ) . ut idem c6nar6tur , tha t

he should strive for the same thing.-7 t6tius , all. SYN . omni s, all

(without exception ) , in opposition to n6m6 ; finiver si (finns-verto, lit.

turned into one, i .e . the parts brought into unity ) , all collectively , in oppo

sitiou to sing'llli ; cunctI all united together in opposition to di spersi

t6tus , the whole, in opposItion to separate parts ; whereas intéger ( in

tango, lit. untouched ) , uninj ured, still whole.—ea rés, this design, lit. this

consp iracy. ut, when. ex dicére,to plead his cause in chains ; lit.

out of chains , i.e. (being ) in chains . damnatum, se. sum,translate, it wa s

necessary that the punishment should follow him condemned,namely, tha t he

should be burned ; the clause at igni cremarétur explains poenam (342 .

410 F IRST STEPS I N LA TIN .

dor,a lieutenant ; Ori tor , one who pleads a cause

,an envoy, an orator ;

rhétor , one who gives lessons in rhetoric, a rhetorician. qui dicérent, to

say, lit. who should say, a relative clause denoting purpose—sibi esse

in animb, that it was their intention, lit. that it wa s to them in mind : what

is the subject of the verb esse ? What is the object of dicérent ?

sine 11116 mfl éficib, without (doing ) any harm. The Helvetii had two

ways by which they could go from home, one through the narrow pass

between Mount Jura and the banks of the Rhone ; the other by the

fords of the Rhone, which led directly into the Province. In order to

prevent the Helvetii from taking the latter route, Ce sar drew a line of

fortifications on the southern side of the river, from Lake Geneva to

the Jura mountains, a distance of about

eighteen miles . To accomplish this work ,

C e sar had the loth legion 5000, and

about 5000 or 6000 new levies or

infantry . négat 86 posse, he says

he cannot ; négo is generally used in pref

erence to dico n6n . fine. is emphatic, one

only. ut lmpétri rent, that, he being the

intercessor,they might obta in ( their request ) .

plfirimum pbtérat, was able to accomplish

a great deal (Rule amicus , f riendly.

in mi trimbninm dfixérat, had marr ied ;

when speaking of a man tak ing a wife,

dficere (ux6rem) was used, i .e. he leads

her to his house ; of a woman taking a

husband, niibere was used, lit nfibére 96

vir6 , to veil herself for a husband,—an allusion to the veil worn during

the marriage ceremony . itaque , therefore ; itaque means and so.

What is the object of impétrat?

7. in Italiam,into I taly , i .e. into C isalpine Gaul . dui s 16gi6nés

c6nscribit : the 11th and 12th, and the three ( the 7th, 8 th, and 9th )legions in winter

-quarters at Aquileia, in Illyria one legion (the loth )

was already on the Rhone six in all z about men. The A110

broges andVocontii were both in the province. jam,at this time, i .e .

while Ce sar was absent collecting troops. A ngustias, the narrow pass

between the Jura and the Rhone. SYN . p6piilor , to ravage (by pillageand fire ) ; vasto

,to lay waste ; dép6piilor , utterly to ravage. A edai

'

Ambarr i'

,the E dui near the A rar (or Sa6ne ) .—r6g§tnm,

to ask, see

2 66 .—d6p6piilatis , the use of the participle of the deponent verb in

a passive sense, see 2 79. a ; the way led through the Pas-de-l’Ecluse.

NOTES. 411

8585 n6n facile pr6hibére, that they with difliculty could ward

of ; etc . se recipiunt, betake themselves . n6n exspectandum

(esse) sibi statuit, he thought he ought not to wait.

8 . fliimen est A rar , there is a river (called ) A rar; now the Sadne.

It unites with the Rhone at the city of Lugdunum (Lyons ) , about seventymiles from Lake Geneva .

—quod agrees with flfimen (Rule — in0r6

dibili possit, with incredible smoothness of current, so that it cannot be

determined by the eyes in what direction itflows ; léni ti te, smoothness, con

trusted not only with the Rhone, but with the rapidity of the rivers in

I taly .—posait, 32 2 .

—ratibus ct lintrlbus junctis, the ablative abso

lute to supply the place of the perfect active participle ; lintribus , small

boa ts ; these were boats made of logs hollowed out—transibant, werenow crossing ; note the force of the imperf. Helvétibs tri nsdi xisse,that the Helvetians had, etc. In Napoleon

’s Ce sar, this place of crossing

the Saone is said to have been at Chalons sur Sa6ne ; according to

G61er , near Lyons, between Trevoux and Villefranche.—0itra flfimen ,

on this s ide of the r iver , i.e. on the east side.—dé tertii vigilii , j ust at

the beginning of the third watch. The Romans divided the night into four

watches ( the first beginning at sunset ) , each of three hours ; the third

watch began at midnight and extended it now being the month of

June ) to 2 o’clock A .M . aggressns has the sense of a perfect active

participle, the verb being deponent—How does concidit difier from

concidit ?—is pi gus, this canton , in the neighborhood of Z iirich .

appelli bi tnr , from appello, name, also to speak to ; v600, call, summon

n6m1no, name, in the sense of appointing or electing ; cit6, quote. L.

Cassium, this defeat was in B C . 107 . c6nslilem,see L .

’s Rom. Hist

,

p . 50.— sub jiigum. I t was considered the lowest degree of military

disgrace for the Roman soldiers to be obliged to pass under the yoke .

The yoke was formed by placing two spears upright in the ground, and

fastening a third across the top of the other two ; under this the con

quered army must pass in token of subjugation. ea persolvit,

was thefi rst to sufl’

er punishment ; princeps is equivalent to prima .

9. consequi , to overtake. in A rare, over and upon, i.e. a fl oatingbridge. fi ciendum, 2 8 6 . Why is éjus used, not su6 —16gat68 , indiplomatic language, an ambassador or envoy ; in military affairs, lieu

tenant, i.e . the commander of one or several legions ; the tribunes still

ranked as formerly , among the higher officers of the legion, but their

duties were in Ce sar’

s time limited more to the management of the inter

nal affairs of the legion . Neither did a tribune take the place of a légi tus

in case the latter was disabled, but a quaestor , who also outranked the

tribunes. ciijus fuit, thechief of which embassy was Divico. bell6


in the war with Cassius, i .e. in 107, when the consul Cas

sius was the commander. égit, argue, discourse. SYN . dux,a leader

,

a general ductor , a guide impéri tor , a commander or emperor .—pi

com and bell?) are placed prominently to mark them as significant

words. This section is an indirect discourse depending on div

céus (saying) implied in égit. Compare the form of direct discourse

under 348 . For the use of the future indicative or present subjunctive,see 32 6 . 2 , and 355 fi .

—rem1niscérétur ineommbdi , he should

remember both the old overthrow (lit. inconven ience) this refers to the

defeat of Cassius . né committeret, he should not bring it to pass com

mittere ut often forms a periphrase like efi‘icEre (see 342 . 3) né com

miséris in direct discourse .

10. his, se . légi tis . sibi di ri'

,that the less doubt is given to

him minus , subj . ace. of dari'

, following respondit.—t6néret mémbrii ,held in memory ; remembered . vétéris contiiméliae, former insult .

facturés , se. Helvétibs . A eduis is gover ned by satisfi ciant. ipsis

( see 354. 4) the dative follows the compound, intiilerint, 203.

satisfaciant, pay damages. The direct discourse (355 ) would be : mihiminus diibiti tiiinis datur , quod eas res , qui s commémbravistis ,

m6m6ria téneo. Si vétéris contfiméliae oblivisci velo, num possum

récentium injfiriarummémbriam d6p6nére Tamen si obsidés ii vebis

mihi dabuntur (dentur ) , uti ea , quae pollicemini , v6s esse factiir'

es

intelligam, et si A eduis dé injfiriis qui s ipsis s6ciisque e6rum iutii

li'

stis, item si'

A llbbrbgibus satisfaciétis , v6bi'

s cum pacem faciam.

hbc responsb di tb cum hoe responsum dedisset. idem, neut the

masculine is idem. qui videant : what does this relative clause denote,

cause, purpose, etc . videant is plur ., because équiti tum im

plies équités as the subject —qui , these, i.e. équités . aliénb 16c6 , in

an unfavorable place, lit. a place better for the other party ; for the omission

of the preposition, 2 70. 2 . c.—audi cius, still more boldly. ac prae

sentiii , and deemed it sufiicient for the present. ita, in such a way.

n6visslmum agmen , the part of the army nearest to those pursuing, i .e .

the rear . nfistrnm pr imum,our f ront, or van ; supply agmen .

—ubu

interesset, not more than five or s ix miles (each day ) intervened ; the

distributives quini'

s and senis imply that this was the constant differ

ence between the armies.

l l . intérim, give the syns.—eotti'dié, every day, is used of things that

are daily repeated ; in singiiliis dies ,da ily, of those things which from day

to day are making advance. quod fli giti re, kept demanding

which they had promised in the name of the state ; flagiti re, the historical

infinitive, equivalent to fli gitiibat ; polliciti essent refers to the prom


ceive by the senses or by the mind. quamdiii p6tuérit, as long as he

had been able. SYN . tacao, utter no word, be silent, pass over in silence ;

sileo, make no noise,be still.

12 . Dumnérigem désignari'

,that Dumnorix was meant. Dumno

rix led the national party among his people, as opposed to Rome,while

his brother Divitiacus favored an alliance w ith the Romans.—pliiribus

praesentibus (abl. lit. more being present, or in the presence of so

many—eds rés jactar i , that these matters should be agitated ; jacti ri ,

a frequentative from jacie .—Give the syns . of concilium .

—repérit

esse véra,hefinds ( that these statements ) things a re true.

— ipsum

audacia, tha t it was Dumnorix himself, a man of the greatest boldness .

cfipidum nbv i rum rérum , desirous of a revolution.—complfir§s

hi bére, that he hasfarmedfor many years all the revenues of the xEdui at

a low p r ice.—SYN . vecti

'

gal, tithes (decuma ) , on agricultural produce ;

tribfitum,an extraordinary p roperty tax

,levied in the tribes, and paid

back when the exigency was passed scripti ra, rent of the pasture

lands ; portbr ium,harbor duties originally , afterwards applied to tolls

paid on trans it of merchandise . The revenues among the Romans

were not collected directly ,but were farmed out (or leased) by the

censors to contractors called publicani , who paid a fixed sum into the

treasury , and collected the taxes for their own use ; they so abused their

privileges, that the name publican became a term of reproach—illa

licente, he bidding, i.s . when he bid . andest, see348 . rem fi milii rem,

private property. Dumnbrix is the subject of fi vere and

SYN . pbtentia, power as an attribute of a person pbtestiis , power as of

a magistrate, power to do anything ; ditio ( see dicio) , power, j urisdiction.

—si'

quid Rfimi nis , if anything then should happen to the Romans ,

i.e. in case of any disaster . obtinendi'

, see 2 64. 1.—impéri6 , under the

government, ablative of time and cause. dé reg’

ué, of royal power .

13. certissimae rés, the most undoubted facts . animadvertéret,

should punish him. finum répfignabat, one cons ideration opposed .

summnm stiidium,the very grea t attachment towards theRomanpeople

the clause quod, etc .,is in apposition w ith imam, and might be intro

duced by namely.—v61unti tem, good will, as a friend ; stiidium,

attach

ment,z eal

,as a partisan—fins refers to Dumnorix. give

the synonymes .—lti que cbni rétur , therefore before he attempted any

thing for the subjunctive, see 337 . commbnéfi cit, reminds , lit. warns .

- ip86 (354. 4) praesente, when he himself was present, i .e. Diviaticus .

de e6 , concerning him, i .e. Dumnorix.

—apud as, before himself; i .e.

Ce sar .—n6 quid sti tuéret, that he should not determine anything

too severe aga inst his brother . scire véra, ( saying) that he knew those

NOTES. 415

things were true. SYN . pbpiilus, the people, originally only the patri

cians,came to include the plebeians ; plebs, common people, opposed to

the patricians ; vulgus , the ignorant multitude. quod accidisset,

because if anything too severe should be done to him by Cwsar ; accidiaset

represents, in indirect discourse, the fut. perf. indie. (accidérit ) bysequence of tenses ( see 32 6 . sum lboun ,

that place so high a

place—i pud sum, i.e. Cwsar . fiitfirum,

it would happen, see 349.

animi , the afl ections . fratrem adhibet, he has his brother present.

14. exploratbribus : SYN . explorator , a scout : spéciilator , a spy

Emissarius, a secret agent—milia passuum 4854 ft.

, a little less than

an English mile 5280 ft. qui lls adscensus, what kind of an

ascent it was by a circuitous rotlte, i.e. at various parts of its circuit. qui

cbgnbseérent, misit, he sent (persons ) to ascerta in ; qui cbgnoseérent

denotes the purpose ( see the antecedent of qui is the Object of

misit : what is the object of eagnoscérent faci lem,se . adseensum

dé quarts. vigilis'

iv about 2 o’

clock A .M . e6dem itinere, along the

same route. by which

15 . prima liice, at daybreak. summus m5n s, the summit of the moun

tain .—ipse, and when he himself, se. cum.

—passibus ( see 215 . l ) ; a

Roman pace was the distance from where the heel is raised to where it

is set down again 5 Rom . ft . nearly Bug. ft. a Rom . mile

4840 ft. , an Eng. mile 5280ft. néque Labiéni , and (when )neither his own approach nor that of Labienus . Equb admiss5, with his

horse at full speed . vbluérit, in indirect discourse —sé is the

subject of eognovisse. ex insignibus, by the Gallic arms and

ornaments ; insignibus , lit. devices on the shields and helmets . subdficit,

draws oj i—ut si'

praeceptum,as he had been instructed . What is the

subject of praeceptum érat ? exspectabat, continued to look out

imperfect, see 317 . 3.—mult5 denique die, at last, when much of the day

had passed. pr5 visb, as seen lit. for seen . What is the object of

rénuntii sse ? qub cbnsuérat intervallb, with the usual distance

intervalli'

) is the antecedent of qub.

16 . diei'

is gen. after the adverb postri'

dié.—métiri , to measure out.

rei existimavit, he thought he must look outfor supplies, se . sibi esse.

Bibracte Mont Beuvray.—seu existlmi rent, because they be

lieved that the Romans,being terrified, were departing ; the subjunctives

existim'

arent and cbnfidérent : sometimes the subjunctive is used after

quod , quia, with verbs of saying, thinking, etc ., although the idea ex

pressed is that of the writer, and the reason assigned is his own . Roby

explains this subjunctive in 1746 , and rems . ; Vanicek ,527, sum. 2 .

Caesar’

s army was composed of four veteran legions, and two legions

418 F I RST STEPS I N LA TIN .

for the subjunctive, see 321.—ancip

'

iti proelib, in a double confl ict ( lit.

two-headed ) . a

19. altéri alteri , the one pa rty the other party, referr ing to the

Helvetians,and to the Ben and Tulingi respectively .

— ah hbra'

. sep

tima, from one O’

clock in the afternoon the day began at sunrise, and

ended at sunset ; the end of the sixth hour was noon . piignti tum sit,

the ba ttle raged, see 313. 1. aversum hostem,an enemy turned about.

ad multam noctem,till late a t night

—pr?) vallb, for a rampart ; the

vallum was composed of the dirt heaped up (agger ) from the ditch

(fossa ) against the stakes (vall i ) .—e5que tbtfi. nocte, dur ing tha t whole

n ight, 196 . nostri , se. mili tes . p5tui ssent, see 338 . littéras , a

letter .—né re jiivarent ( ordering) , that they, etc.

20. qui cum,when they. suppliciter lbcfiti , speaking suppliantly .

qu6 tum essent, where they then were ; the subjunctive is used to ind i

cate that Caesar did not know where they were. pam érunt, theyobeyed

—qui perfi

'

l gissent, which hadfl ed to these,i .e. whatever , etc .,

see

361.—ut facérent, lit. that they should supply them with corn

,i .e. to

supply, etc.—ipsos, them,

emphatic, used to distinguish the Helvetii

from the A llobrogibus (354 .

21. tabfilae, lists .— littéris Graecis cbnfectae, made out in Greek

letters,which had been learned in Greek Massilia. ratib c5nfecta erat,

an account had been kept.—qui niimérus e5rum,

wha t number ofthem.

—possent, see 364. summa

,the sum.

The following brilliant description of the battle near Bibracte is from

Mommsen’s H istory of Rome (vol . iv. p . 253, Eng.

“ The two

arm ies posted themselves on two parallel chains of hills ; the C elts

began the engagement, broke the Roman cavalry which advanced into

the plain, and ran onward against the Roman legions posted on the

slope of the hill, but were there obliged to give way before Caesar’

s

veterans. When the Romans, thereupon following up their advantage,descended in their turn to the plain , the Celts again advanced against

them,and a reserved Celtic corps took them at the same time in the

flank . The reserve of the Roman attack ing column was pushed forward

against the latter ; it forced it away from the main body upon the bag

gage and the barricade of wagons , where it was destroyed. The bulk

of the Helvetic host was at length brought to give way , and compelled

to beat a retreat in an easterly direction, the Opposite of that towards

which their expedition led them . This day had frustrated the scheme of

the Helvetii to establish for themselves new settlements on the A tlan tic

Ocean,and handed them over to the pleasure of the victor ; but it had

been a hot day also for the conquerors .

”

I ND EX.

The references are to pages figures or letters in parentheses to pa ragraphs . The

index is very full, and w ill aid pupils greatly if they are taught to consult it. ]

A, sound of, 28 ; 5. or ab 64,

171; after pé to or p os tulo ,w ith

abl. of agent after pas sives , 130,211; w ith gerund , 229.

ABLA TIVE, 48 ,97 rule of position , 98 ;

ending-t

'

ibas , 56 ; in -e, 92 ; -i , 92 ;

in -i of adjec . ,109, 111; in -e of ad

jectives , 109, 111; in -iibus, 141;after prepositions, 172 . SYNTA X,

97 , 130; of crime, 294; duration of

time, 182 ; uses of, 209; abl . proper ,209; instrumental abl., 209; loca

tive abl . , 209; gen . rule for abl .

proper , 210; compounds with prep . ,

210; abl . of cause, 210; or w ith

prep., 210; instrumental abl . : (1)means or instrument , 131, 287 ; (2 )measure, 287 ; (3) difference, 281,288 ; (4) distance , 182 , 288 ; (5)price, 283, 288 ; ( 6 ) abl. of time

with adverbs , 288 ; (7 ) material ,288 ; ( 8 ) manner , 289, accompani

ment, 289; (10) quality and charac

teristic, 289 ; of agent, 130, 211; oftime, 167 ; abl . absolute, 222 ; meaning of, 222 ; of quality , 269 ; speci

fication , 278 ; of difference, 281.Ablative absolute, 222 .

-iibus , in dative plural of l st deelen

sion , 56 .

Abutor,

no, see atque .

Accent, rules of, 33.

ac cld it, synopsis of, 291.

Accompaniment , abl . of, w ith cum,

152 .

A C CUSAT IVE, 55 ; in -im , 88 , 92 ;

pl ., in-is

,88 ; after prepositions ,

64; as Objects , 55 ; w ith verbs

of remembering, etc. , 294; w ith

impers . , 294; w ith juro , etc.,164.

SYNTA x , 55 ; as direct object , 55 ;w ith verbs of feeling, 294; after

compounds , 173; with impers .

, 294;

cognate , 373; two accusatives ,

158 ; passive use , with verbs of

ask ing, 156 ; adverbial , 373; duration of time and extent of space,

167 , 182 ; with pe r , 183; as subjectof infinitive, 217 ; in indirect dis

course, 343; in substantive clauses ,334 f . ; of gerundive, 226 f.

Accus ing and acquitting, verbs of

ac si,321.

A ctive voice, 8 , 39-119; how to con

vert to passive, 136 .

ad, 63, 173; meaning near , 237 ; in

comps . , 173.

AD JECTIVES. 5 ; defined , 66 ; posi

tion , 67 ; like nouns , 67 infl ection

of, 66 ; of l st and 2d doels . , 6 6, 68 ;

model for parsing, 67 ; of 3d decl . ,105 , 107 ; of two or three terminations , 108 ; of one termination , 108 ;the inflection of comparatives , 111;cases of, used as adverbs , 123;model for parsing, 112 ; gen . with ,114 ; dat. w ith , 114 ; adj . clauses,297 ; adjectives in -

quus , 114.

COMPA R ISON , 110, 111; construetion w ith comparatives, 112 ; com

parison by adverbs,116 ; rule of

agreement, 66 : rule of gender , 66 ,105 ; position , 67 ; demonstratives

as adj . , 199; neut. adjs . as nouns ,

420

67 ; superlatives , 110 ff. ; w ith gen . ,

115 ; with dat. , 114; model for

parsing, 67.

ad j ii ro w ith acc. , 164.

ADvERBs , defined, 12 , 119; classified ,13, 122 , 124 ; illustrated , 12 ; howformed , 122 , 124 ; compared , 12 ,124; position of, 119; numeral , 119,180; der ived from adjectives, 123;classification of, of place, of time,etc., 13, 124; model for parsing,125 .

Adverbial accusative, 373.

Adverbial clauses , 297.

Adverbial phrases , 12 , 13, 119.

Adversative conjunctions, 175 .

ad versu s 173.

Agent, abl . of, w ith a or ab, 130,

211; dat. of, we; agreement , 53; ofsubject, 53; of predicate, 54.

infl . of, 286 .

-al,-ar , as neut. endings , 87 ff.

aliquis , infl . of, 207.

511113,infl . of, 177.

Alphabet, 23; vowels and diph

thongs , 23; consonants , 23, 24, 25 ;classification of, 24; see table, 25 .

alter , infl . of, 177.

Al ternative questions ,

answer to , 338 .

ambo ,infl . of, see duo .

Although , 322 .

amb io , 280.

ammi s , gender of, 95 .

an , anne , annbn , 338 f . ; an used

after né sc lo ,h and

, sc io ,du

bIto an , 340.

Analysis of sentences , 18 , 189; directions for analyz ing, 191; of verbs ,42 , 44, 72 , 120; of pass . voice, 127 .

Answer, form of, 340.

ante w ith quam , 325 , 328 .

A ntecedent , its use with relatives ,

203; omitted , 203.

Antepenult, 30.

antéquam , 327 ; often written sepa

rate, 328 .

Aorist, 37, 299; rendered like plu

perfect, 326 .

338,32 ;


A podosis , 314.

Apposition, 60.

arbo r, gender of, 95 .

Arrangement of words, 90.

Article, 6.

A s , used as a rel . prom, 203.

A sk ing, verbs of, 156 .

Assimilation of consonants ,atq ue , 175 .

A ttraction of mode, 359.

A ttributive adjective, 100.

an d eo, 255 .

an t , 175 .

Auxiliary verb, 7 , 100.

-ax, adjective ending, 108 ; adjectivein , w ith gen.

,115.

B, sound of, 28 .

-bam, tense-ending, 44 ff.

Bargaining, verbs of, 283.

belli , locative, 235 .

-bo,verb-ending, 44 ff.

bbnu s,declined , 66.

bbs , decl., 96 .

C G, sound of, 28 ; guttural , 25 ; for

q u .

canis , gender of, 95 ; gen . pl . of, 89.

Cardinal numbers, 180.

ohm , gender of, 95.

Cases , 4, 47.48 ; general view of, 49;

genitive, 48 dative, 48 ; accusa

tive, 48 ; vocative, 48 ablative,48 ; independent, 4.

Case, defined , 4 ; oblique cases , 48 .

Case-endings , table of, 51, 58 , 78 , 88 ,89.

Case-sufi x, 46 .

causa, used with gen ., 210.

Causal clauses , 323, 324; cum and

qui , causal , 324.

Causal conjunctions, 176 , 323.

cé lo , with two accus . , 156 .

Characteristic, clause of, 40, 130, 133,135 , 138 , 144, 151, 152 ; charac

teristic vowel , 40it ; sometimesdropped , 135, 139.

C ities , construction of, 234ff.

civis , abl . sing. of, 92.


324, 330; concessive, 322 , 330; not

used with certain ablS. , 289 itera

tive use, 329; historical , 330; translation of, 331.

DA TIVE endings , 51, 58 , 78 ; in «ibus ,56 ; in

-i, 77 ; dat. of4th decl in -u’

bus ,

41. SYNTAX , 164 ; indirect Object ,62 , 164 ; used for the locative, 235 ;w ith intransitive verbs , 164 ; w ith

transitive verbs , 62 ; uses of, w ith

verbs meaning favor , etc. , 164 ;with compounds of ad ,

an te, etc . ,

173 w ith compounds of satis,

b éne , etc.,164; of possession , 242 ;

agency w ith gerundive, 258 ; of in

terest , 169 ; of purpose or end , 170;of advantage and disadvantage,170; of apparent agent , 170; dat.reference, 170; dat . instead of gen . ,

170; w ith adjectives ,114 of fi tness ,

114 ; w ith impers . verbs , 294.

d ea , inflection of, 56 .

Declarative sentence, 74.

Declension , 46 ; of nouns , 49; how

distinguished , 49; general rules

for , 50; termination , 49; l st decl . ,

51, 52 ; 2d decl . , 57—63; stem , 57 ;

case-endings , 58 ; nom. and voe.

endings wanting in nouns in -er ,

59; neut . nouns , 62 ; 3d decl . , 77-93'

4th decl ., 140; 5th decl . , 142 .

Defective nouns , 83, 96 , 142 .

Defective verbs , 7 , 285 .

d é lecto, with acc . , 164.

Deliberative subjunctive,m , 348 .

Definite, see Perfect .

Definite price, 283.

Demonstrative pronouns , use of, 199,

used as personal pron ., 198 ; as

adjec. pron . , 199 ; position of, 199;voc . wanting, 199; in ind . disc. ,

d éns , gender of, 95 .

Dental stems , 80.

Deponent verbs , 250; conjugation of,251, 253; participles of, 252 ; abl .

w ith , 253; synopsis of, 253f.

d eus, inflection of

, 59; stem of, 59.

d ic , imper . of, 179.

d ié s,infl ection of,142 ; gender of, 142 .

d iffic ll is , comparison of, 116 .

diffid o, w ith abl., 210.

d ignus , w ith abl . , 288 ; with relative

clause, 312 .

Diphthongs , 23; sound of, 28 ; quan

tity of, 31.

Direct discourse, 342 .

Direct object, 55 .

Direct question , 338 .

Disjunctive conjunctions , 175.

d is sim il is , infi . Of.,106 ; w ith gen . or

dat . , 114, 115 ; compar . of, 116 .

Distance, ace. or abl . , 182 f.

Distributive numerals , 180; how used

w ith pl . nouns with a sing. mean

i ng, 182 .

d o, infln . of, 56 ; irregular , 74.

-do , feminine endings , 95 .

d bmi , locative, 234 f.d bmbs , d 6mum

, 118 .

d 6mus , inflection of, 140; gender

of, 141.dbnec

, 326 .

Dubitative subjunctive, 248 .

dubito an, 340.

dub lto , w ith quin ,336 .

due , imperative of , 179.

dum , 326 ; in the sense of whi le, etc . ,

327 denoting purpose, 326 , 327 .

dummbd o, 318 .

duo, infl ection of, 181.

Duration , ace. of , 182 .

-dus, participle in, 256 f.

E, prep . , see Ex.

édo , infl . of, 280; irregularity o f,

280; pass . of, 280.

Effecting, verbs of, 311.egeo , w ith gen .

Emphasis , as affected by or affectingarrangement, 90.

Enclitic, 176 . [42 f .

Endings , of case, 51, 58 , 88 ; of verbs ,English method of pronunciation ,

34-36 .

English verb, forms of, 14—17.

En im , 176 .

INDEX .

90 , irreg. verb , inflection of, 279;stem of, 279; intrans . compounds

of, 279; trans. compounds , 279;

pass . Of, 280; perfect of, 280.

-s r , nom. ending, 59.

e rgo , 175 .

-es, as nom . ending , 88 .

es se and its compounds , 272 ; inflec

tion of, 102 inflection of com

pounds , 272 .

et at, both and , 175 .

etiam , in answers, 334.

étiam s i, 322 .

ets i , 322 .

EUPHON IC CHA NGES, 25 ; vowel weak

cuing, 26 ; of 3d conj . , 149, 154.

évén it , synapsis of , 291.

Exclamatory sentences, 74.

Expletive, 192.

F, sound of,

Fac, imper . of, 179.

rac i lis , comparison of, 116 .

ffic io , 282 ; compounds of, 282.

fi ri , def. verb, 287 .

ti e , w ith supine , 232 .

Fearing , verbs of (né or ut ) , 307.Feminine, rule of gender , 95 .

fer , imper . of, 179.

féro,infl . of , 276 ; compounds of

,

277 ; irregularity of, 277.

fid o , semi-deponent, 255 ; w ith abl

210.

fi l iu s , infl . of, 58 ; voc . of, 48 .

Fifth declension , 142.

Filling , verbs of, w ith ablative, 288 .

Final clauses , 298 , 306 ; how trans

lated , 306 , 307 ; in indirect dis

course , 347 f.

Final conjunctions , 176 , 306 .

F inal vowels , quantity of, 86 .

finis, gender of, 95 ; abl . Sing., 92 .

F inite verb, 9.

no, infl . of, 282 ; used as pass . of

fac io , 282 ; compounds of, 282 .

First conjugation , formation , 41if . ;inflection of, 41if .

First declension, 51.

fiag ito , constr . of, 156 .

423

fbns, gender of, 95 .

fbre ut , 345.Forgetting, verbs of, 294.

fbrem , 241.Fourth conjugation , formation of,

157 ii ; inflection ,157 if .

fré tus , with abl ., 210.

fruor , fun g or , with abl ., 287

FUTURE TENSE, 10, 44, 109, 120, 130,144; vowel changes, 145 , 158 .

FUTURE PERFECT, 9, 10; syntax,304;for Simple future, 315 ; represented

in subj , 304; in ind . disc., 304.

futurum s it ut , used instead of

periphrastic form, 304.

G c ( in early use) , sound of, 28 .

gand oo ,255 .

GENDER , 13; natural and grammati

cal , 47 ; common , 94; oi l st decl .,51; of 2d decl ., 57 , 62 ; of 3d decl .,94, 95 ; of 4th decl ., 140; 5th

decl . , 142 ; gen . of indeclinable

words , clauses , etc . , 47 , 334.

General truth , 328 .

General relatives , 331, 357.

GENITIVE. 48 , 60; pl . in -um, 92 ; of

l st decl . , 51; of 2d decl ., 57 , 59; ofnouns in -ius , and

-ium, 58 ; gen

der , 58 ; of 3d decl . in -ium, 92 ; in

-ius, 177 ; of adjec . , 66 , 109. SYN

TAx, 61; subjective , 162 ; objective ,

162 ; possessive, 60, 162 ; in predicate, 103; partitive, 198 ; predicate

gen ., 103,104; with adjectives , 115 ;with verbs , 294 f. ; of memory , 295 ;of charge and penalty , 294; of

feeling, 295 ; impers . , 295 ; interest ,295 ; of plenty and want, 115 ; ofvalue, 295 ; of gerundive, 228 ; of

quality , 269.

GERUND,38 , 225 ; not one of the

principal parts of a verb, 38 ; nom .

how supplied , 225 ; how formed ,

226 ; endings of, 226 ; acc., how

used, 226 ; its government, 227 ;

equivalent gerundive forms , 227

of 3d and 4th conjugations , 255.

SYNTAX, 228 .


GERUND IVE, 227 ; uses of gen . , 227 , IMPERATIVE SENTENCES, 74; imply228 ; dat. 228 ; acc., 228 ; abl., 229; ing condition , 319; in ind . disc .

,

after what verbs used , 228 ; of 3d

and 4th conjugations , 255 ; whennot admissible, 228 .

g rat ii ,with gen., 210.

Greek nouns , 52 .

Guttural stems, of nouns , 17 ; of

verbs, 148 , 161.

H , Spirant, 23; guttural , 24 ; sound

of, 28 .

1110, infl . of, 197 ; use of, 197 , 198 f.

Hindering, verbs of, w ith né or

q ubmlnu s , 308 ; negative w ith

quin ,310; sequence of tenses , 310;

after neg . indef. expressions , 310.

H istorical infin . , 412 .

Historical present, 303, 346 .

H istorical tenses , 302 .

Hoping, verbs of, 345 ; w ith infin .,

HORTA TORY SURJ ., 248 .

hum i, locative, 235 .

I , sound of, 27 ; i and j interchangeable, 24 ; l suppressed in cbn ic io

,

etc . ,169; how pronounced betweentwo vowels , 286 ; of perfect, 71.

-i , abl. in, 87 , ff., 92.

-i, stems of nouns, 91; of adjectives ,105 , 106.

-ibam -iébam (4th 221.

idem , infl ., 200; derivation of, 201'

use, 201.Idbneus , compared , 114; id bneu s

qui , 312 .

-iés in 5th decl., 142 f.Ig itur , meaning of, 175 .

ign is , gender of, 95 ; abl . sing , 92 .

ii in gen . of 2d decl ., 58 ; contracted

into -i , 58 .

ILLAT IvE C ONJUNCTIONS, 175.

ille , inflection of 197 ; use, 199.

-im, ace. ending in 3d decl ., 88 , 92 .

Imperative mode, 9, 75, 177 , 178 ;

personal endings , 74, 178 ; negative

with , 178 ; tenses of, 178 ; fi rst per

son of, 179, 241; passive, 186 .

IMPERFECT TENSE, formation , 44,130

, 145 , 152 , 158 ; uses , 96 , 37 , 299,121.

IMPERSONAL VERBS, 291; syn0ps is ,7 , 291; class ification , 292 ; pass ive

of intrans . , 293. SYNTAX , 294f. ;

consec. clauses after impers . , 311;ace. w ith infin . or quod w ith in

dic. , 335 ; subst. clauses after im

pers . , 335 .

in , constr. of, 172 ; w ith express ions

of time, 167 .

Incomplete action, tenses Of, 121.

Increment of nouns , 77

Indeclinable nouns , 47 ; rule o f gen

der, 47.

Indefinite pronouns , 207 ; indefin ite

second person, 328 .

Indicative mode, meaning and use

of, 8 .

ind ignu s , 288 ; relative clause w ith ,

312 .

IND IRECT D ISCOURSE, 342 ; appl ie d

to what, 359; used after what

verbs , 348 ; informal , 360; infin . in,

344 ; tenses in, 346 ; reflex. pronouns

in , 348 ; conditional sentences in ,

350; imperative sentences , 352 ; in

terrogative sentences , id .

Indirect object, 62.

IND IRECT QUESTIONS, 336 , 337 f.

Indo-European, 21.Infinitive clause, 334.

Infinitive verb, 347.

INF INITIVE MODE, 9, 213; meaning ,

9 ; use, 213; formation , 40, 123, 129,144, 157, 214; present infin ., 40,

129, 144, 157 ; infins . of active

voice, 213; of pass . voice, 214 ;

personal endings , 214. SYNTAX,

213; classification of uses of, 213;when in ind . disc. , 346 ; subj . mustas a rule be expressed , 346 ; as

subject, 217 ; object, 217 ; complement, 217 ; with subj . acc., 216 ; asmeaning purpose, 308 ; perfect,

426

mISéreor,w ith gen . , 295.

mls é ret, 292 ; w ith ace. and gen . ,

Modern languages derived from

Latin, 22 .

Modes , 8 , 239.

Mode-signs , 243, 268 ; modes in de

pendent clauses , 297 , 306 if . ; infin .,

213ii , 344.

Modification, of words , 3; of subjector predicate, 190.

mod o , d um mbd o, w ith subj . in

conditions , 318 .

m6 ns, gender of, 95.

Mood , see Mode.

Motion, expressed w ith prep. , 172 .

Mountains , names of , gender , 47 .

Mutes , 23if . mute stems (3d78 if .

N, sound of, 28 ; stems in n , 80.

Nasals , 23.

nav is, abl . sing. of, 92.

DE, w ith hortat. subj ., 248 ; prohibitions , 248 ; final clauses, 306 f. ; con

secutive clauses, 308 ; w ith verbs of

fearing , 307 .

-ne, enclitic , in questions , 75 , 76244.

Necessity , verbs of 2 57 .

necne, 339.

néfi s, w ith supine, 232 .

Negative particle , 76 ; as expressingno in answer to questions 340.

nego , better than d ico n6 n, 410.

use of, 165 .

né n6 n, 335 .

neque , 175 .

néqu is , 207 .

116 qu id em , 412 .

nesc io an, 340.

ne sc io quis , 340.

NEUTER NOUNS , 62 ff. , 94 f.

-nf lengthens preceding vowel , 32 .

111, 11181, 314 ff.11610

,273f.

NOM INAT IVE, 4, 53; Sign o f, 77 form

ation from stem, l st decl . , 46 , 51;2d decl . , 57 , 59—63; 3d decl., 77 , 78 ,81, 82, 83, 85, 87 ; summary of rules


0, sound of, 27 ; quantity of 0 final , 86 .

O in amo a and o and m .

0 Si , w ith subj . of w ish , 248 .

Object defined , 4, 55 ; direct , 55 ; in

direct , 62 ; model for parsing the

objective , 56 .

Object clauses , 307 .

Oblique cases , 48 ; oblique disc ., 342 ,

6 d i, 285 .

offend o, w ith acc., 164.

oportet , 292 .

Optative subjunctive, 248 .

Opus , work , infi . of, 81.

Opus and 118118 , need , wi th abl . , 288 .

0rdtz‘

6 obliqua, see Indirect Dis

course.

for forming the nom. of 3d decl . ,87 ; 4th decl. , 140; 5th decl. , 142 f .

SYNTAX : as subject. 53; pred . after

es se , 100.

n6 n , in answer , 340.

n6 n dub ito quin , 323.

116 11116 , 75 , 176 .

n6 n“

quia ,n6 n quod , n6 n quin ,

324.

nOster , 194; in ind . disc. , 349.

nostri , as obj . gen. , 193.

nostrum, as partitive gen ., 193.

NOUNS, defined ,1, 2 ; class ified , 3;

Latin nouns , 46 ; infi . , 46 ; modifica

tion of, 47 ; paradigms , 51fi . rule

of agreement , 60ff. ; model for pars

ing, 54 ; abstract and collective ,

397 ; of l st decl 49 if . ; 2d decl . ,57 ff. ; 3d decl . , 77 ff. ; class ification

of, 77 , 93; 4th decl . ,140 5th decl . ,142.

-naas adjective ending,10! f. ; gen . pl .

of,92 ; lengthens preceding vowel ,

c)

nullus,infiec . of, 177 ; used for gen .

and abl . of némb , 165 .

num, force of, 74, 206 ; in indirect

questions , 339.

Number , 2 , 3, 10, 47 ; of nouns , id . ; of

adjectives , 66 ; of verbs , 10, 41ff.NUMERA LS, 180; classification of, 180.

INDEX.

Order of words, 90.

Ordinal numbers , 180.

o rd o , gender of, 95 .

-03for -as , in nom. sing. of 2d decl . , 57 .

Origin of Latin language, 21; howrelated , 21; where spoken , 21.

P, sound of, 28 .

p aen itet , constr . of, 295 .

Palatal consonants , 25 .

pan is , gen . pl . of, 89; gender of, 95 .

Participial clauses , 219 implyingcondition , 319.

Part icipal stem, 38 , 137 .

PA RTIC I PLES, defined ,11 illustrated ,

11, 38 , 219; classified , 11, 219; infl .

of, 38 , 108 , 109, 128 ; abl . in -i , 109,nom. and gen . pl ., 109; how trans

lated , 219, 223; in abl . abs . , 222 ;

voices of, 220; of trans . verb , 220;

of intrans . verbs , 220; formation

of, 220; infl . of, 221; directions for

parsing, 223. SYNTAX , 219; time of,2 2 1; of deponent verbs , 250; peri .

pass., w ith passive meaning, 253;

perf., 128 ; pert. act . , how supplied ,

224; perf. partic .,denoting paren

tage, etc. , 210; agreement of, 220;

gerundive, 220, 226 it ; neut . of the

perf. in enumerating the principal

parts of a verb , 155 .

PA RTICLES, defined , 74 ; interroga

tive and negative, 74. SYNTAX of,

248 , 306 fi . ; conditional , 315 ; tem

poral , 325 .

Parts of speech defined , 1-14.

Passive voice, 8 , 119 ; analysis of,

120; origin , 121; pass . s ign , 121.Pass ive sign , 120, 121fi

‘.

p é lgaus , neut. , seeVocab.

Penalty , gen . of, 294.

p éneS , 172 .

Penult, 30; quantity of, 33.

per , 64, 172 ; w ith expressions of

time, 167 , 183; for agent , 210; in

composition , 174 (7Perfect stem , 10, 71; analysis, 72 ;synopsis of rules for forming, 161;in composition , 118 .

427

55

po stea, 326 .

po s tquam , 326 .

p ostulo , constr . with E or ab , 156 .

Potential mode, 9; how expressed,

240.

PERFECT TENSE, 71 perfect def

inite , 37 , 303; personal endings,71, 133, 147 , 161; used as present,286 ; origin of, 134; v suppressed in

perfect, 72 ; stem,how formed

, 71,of subj . in sequence

of tenses, 301f.

PERIPHRA ST IC CONJUGATIONS, 2256 ;act. , 257 ; pass . , 257 ; pass . , how

used , 294; meaning and formation

Of, 257 per iphrastic forms in sub

ordinate clauses , 303.

Person , defined , 10; the first personis the first in order , 195 .

PERSONA L ENDINGS,42

, 71, 120, 121,123

, 166 ; meaning of, 42, etc ., 121;

how formed , 166 .

PERSONA L PRONOUNS, 5 , 193f. ; re

tained in ind . disc., 349.

Persons of verbs , 3, 10.

Petitid obliqua, 360.

peto , with a or ab,156 .

Phonetic changes , 25 , 26 , 154.

Phrases, 13, 173; defined , adj .and adverb , 65 ; prepositional , 172 .

p lge t , constr . Of, 295 .

Place,to which , 187 , 234 ; relations of ,

requireprep . , 237 ; locative uses ,235 .

Plenty , verbs of, 288 .

Pleonasm , 4 ( c) .Pluperfect, 10, 72 ; analys is of, 72

Plural , of nouns , 3, 47, 51it ; of

verbs , 10, 36 , 39fi’.

p lfi ris , gen . Of value , 283.

p lus , inflection of, 106 , 111.

posco , constr . of, 156 .

p oenIte t , see paen itet .

pé n s , gender Of, 95 .

p o sse , 270f.

Possessive pronouns , 194; in ind .

disc ., 349.

Position , rules of, 90.

p ossum , infi . Of, 271; how formed ,


Potential subjunctive, M8 , 328 .

p 6 t ior , w ith ablative, 287 ; with geni

tive , 287.

p rae ,172 .

PRED ICATE, 18 , 190; defined , 18 , 190;after e s se , 18 , 100; agreement , 18 ,100.

l'REPOSITIONs , 64, 171, 172 ; use of

,

172 , 173; inseparable, 174.

Present stem, how formed, 40if .

PRESENT TENSE, 9, 10; used for

aorist , 303.

Preter itive tenses, 395.

Price, abl ., 283.

p I‘Id ié , loc. , see 415

Pr imary tenses , 300.

PR INC I PA L PA RTS of verbs, 38 , 126 ;neut. of the perf. partie. , 155 .

p r ior used instead of p r imus , 182 .

p riu squam , 327 : often written separate, 328 .

p rO, preposition, 172 .

Prohibitions , 178 , 248 .

Promising , etc., verbs of, 345.

PRONOUNS, 5 ; defined and classified ,

5 , 172 ; infi . Of, 193—207 ; personaland reflexive, 193, 194; rule for

position of, 196 ; possessive, 194;demonstrative, 197 determinative,200; relative, 202 ; interrog . , 205 ;

indefinite, 207 pronouns strength

ened by -met, -te, etc., 193; redu

plicative forms , 194; exs . illustrat

ing use of, 195 ; rule for position ,

196 . SYNTAX of, 203.

PRONUNC IATION , modes of , m; ROman , 27 , 28 ; phonetic, 27 English ,

p rOsum ,infi . Of, 272.

Protas is , 304.

Proviso , 318.

pudet , 295 .

p fi gnatur , impers ., synops is of, 291.PURPOSE , 306 ; ways of expressing ,

Qu , sound of, 28 .

quaero (OUA SSO ) , irreg. verb, 286 ;constr. of, 156.

quam , with superl . , 118 , 275 ; withcompar..112 , 2 75 ; comparative particles , 320.

quam libet , 207 ; infi . of, seeVocab.

quams i, 320, 321.

q uamvis , 207 ; infi . of, seeVocab.

q uan ti , gen. of value, 283.

QUA NTITY, general rules of, 31, 32 ,86 ; Of final vowels , of oth er

syllables , see Preface.

quas i , 320, 321.

-que, enclitic, 76 ; as conj . , 175 .

queo , irreg. verb, 282 , 286 .

QUEST IONS, 74, 206 ; Single or double ,206 ; fact questions , 337 ; d irect,338 ; indirect, 339; rhetorical , 337 ;dependent and independent , 339 ;alternative, see double, 338 ; in indirect disc.

, 351f.

qui , relative, infl . of, 202 ; agreementof, 203; position of, 203; model fo r

parsing, 203; general relative , 202 ;indefinite, 207 , 209 expressing

purpose, 306 , 356 ; concess ive , 322 ;w ith né sc io , 340; strengthened byu t , ut pOte , etc. , 357 .

qu icumque ( quicunque ) , 212 .

quia , 176 , 323.

q uidam , 205 ; indef. , 207.

quid em , 412 .

quin , in consecutive clauses , 310;with verbs Of hindering , 310; 116 11

quin , 310.

qui s , infi . of, 205 ; distinction from

qui in use, 205, 207 compounds of205 ; indef. 207 with nésc io , 340.

quisnam , 205 .

qu isp iam , 207 .

quisquam , 207.

qu isqu is , 202 .

quivis , 217.

qu6 , in final clauses , 310.

q uoad , 326 .

quod , conj . , 176 ; clauses w ith , 323,324,335 ; as ace.of specification, 373.

quod SI , seeVocab.

qubminus , 308 it ; with verbs of

hindering, 308 .

quOniam , 323f.


sub, 172.

SUBJECT , defined , 17 , 53, 55 ; omitted ,

42 ; plur . subj . , 150; in indir . d isc.,

346 ; with verbs of promising, etc .,

SUBJUNCT IVE MODE, 9; paradigm of,

243, 245 i has no fut., how sup

plied, 256 , 239; uses of, 239; analysis of, 243; personal endings , 243

tenses of, 240, 303; tenses wanting,303 how translated , 240, 241, 244 ;classification of uses, 250; conces

sive, 248 ; hortatory , 248 ; Optative,

248 ; dubitative, M8 ; potential , 248

negative w ith , 244, 248 ; four con

jugations Of , 245 ; pass . of, 246 ; in

independent sentences, 248 ; in de

pendent clauses , 248 ; in re] . clauses ,248 , 355 if . in intermediate clauses ,248 , 358 ; in indirect discourse,248 , in indirect questions ,339; how translated in indirect

questions , 340.

SUBORD INA TE CLAUSES, 190, 248 ,

291ff. ; how classified , 297 f. ; in in

d irect disc. , 342 .

Subordinate conjunctions , 176.

SUBSTA NTIVE C LA USES, defined and

classified ,333; infinitive, 334; of

purpose, 334; Of result, 335 ; w ith

quod , 335 ; ind . question , 336 ; gen

der of, 334.

subter, 172 .

Snfiix, defined , 46 ; of nouns , 4 6 ; of

verbs , 42 ff.

sum , inflection Of, 101, 102 .

summus, compar . of, 117 ; meaning

Of, 118 , 415 .

sunt qui , 356 .

super , 172 .

SuPERLAT IvE, defined , 5 ; of adjec .,

different ways of forming, 5 ; infi .

Of, 111; how trans ,113, 118 ; of

adverbs , 124.

SUP INE, noun Of 4th decl ., 38 , 231;meaning and use of, 231; not com

mon , 232 ; not one of the principal

parts Of verbs , 232 ; government of ,232 dependence of, 232 ; uses of,

231; its government, 232 ; sup . in-um not common . Stem , 231; howformed , 231.

Surds , 25 .

Syllabication , 29.

Syllables , rules for division of, 29,34.

Synopsis of tenses , 73; of impersonalverbs

,91.

SYNTA X 17 , 53if . See each case and

mode In index.

T , sound Of, 28 .

taed et, constr . of, 295 .

tanq uam , 321.

tanquam Si,321f.

tanti , gen . of price, 283.

Teaching , verbs of, 156 .

Temporal conj . ,176 ; classification of,325 clauses : (1) antecedent a ction ,

326 ; (2 ) contemporaneous action ,326 ; (3) subsequent action , 327 .

TENSES, 9; how classified , 9, 37 ;meaning, 9, 41, etc . ; analysis of ,44; classification Of, 299; denotingincomplete, complete , or indefinite

action , 299; primary and second

ary , 300; endings , 260ii . ; formation Of, 2601

’f. SYNTAX , 9 f., 299.

306 ff. ; classification , 299; present,299 ; imperf. , 9 f 299; future, 9 f. ,

299; perfect, 9 f. , 299; pluperfect ,9 f. , 299; future perfect, 9 f., 299;sequence of, 300it ; of infin ., 344 .

Tense-signs , 45 it , 74,121,145 , 243, 268 .

Terminations, 46 ; Of infi . , 46 , 51ff. :Of nouns , 51it ; of verbs , 40, 42 ff.

terramar ique , 235, 236 .

That, uses of, 336 ; 306 1’f.

TII IRD CONJUGATION ,Verb8 of,144 ff.formation of, 144 if infl ., 144-155 ;verbs in -i0, 168 .

TH IRD DECLENSION . nouns of, 77 it ;rules Of gender , 47 , 51, 57 , 94, 95 .

Though , see A lthough.

Threatening, infin. w ith , 345 .

Time and place, construction of, 167 ,182 , 188 , 234 If .

TIME, when, 167 ; how long, 182 .

INDEX .

tbtus,177 .

TOWNS, names of, gender of, 47 ;

construction with or w ithout prep

osition , 234 ff.

trans, prep . , 172 ; comps . of, w ith

acc. , 374.

Transitive verbs , 7 , 119.

Translation of subjunctive, 241.

tres,infl . of, 181.

turr is , abl . sing. of, 92 .

4 53, noun-ending, 95 .

U, sound of

,27 ; a consonant , 24 ;

interchanged w ith v, 24.

ub i , in temporal clauses , 326 : ub i

p r imum , 326 .

-ubus , case-ending in 4th decl . , 141.‘fidO, noun-ending, 95 .

fi l lu s, infl . Of , 177 .

fi r ms , infl . of , 181; in pl . , 181; w ith

pl . nouns of a sing . meaning , 181.unu s qui , w ith subj . , 356 .

fi nu sq u isq ue , 207.

aim s , future participle, 220; in ih

direct discourse, 346 .

fi sus , need , w ith abl ., 288 .

ut , as coh oess . , 322 ; comparative,320; as final , 306 ; of result, 309;u t n é , 306 ; w ith subst. clauses ,333, 334 ; omission after , 337 .

u t , when ,325 , 326 ; ut p rimum , 326 .

ti te r , infl . of, 177 .

uterque , infl . of, 177 .

I‘

i t i,utinam , w ith subj . Of w ish ,

248 ; ut i , comparative particle, 320.

uto r, etc .

,w ith abl.

, 287 ; as transi

tive , 228 .

u trum, 339; utrum an , 338 .

ut Si,320, 321.

V, sound of, 28 ; originally not dis

tinguished from u, 28 ; interchange

able with u, 24 syncopated in

perf., 72 , 161.

Value, gen . of, 283.

ve l, 175 .

vé lut, 320, 321.

vé lut Si,320

, 321.Verb-stem , 40.

431

W , not in Latin alphabet , 23;Want, verbs of , 288 .

Way by which , abl ., 237 .

Wish , expression of, 248 .

Winds , gend . of names Of, 47 .

Wishing, constr . with verbs , 334.

v, 24.

X, sound of, 28 ; lengthens precedingsyllable , 32 .

Y, sound Of, 27 .

Year , how expressed, 182, 222 .

Verb , as complete sentence, 43.

VERBS, defined , 6 ; mod ification , 6 ,

36 , 38 ; formation,3911; regular ,

7 ; deponent , 253f. ; semi-deponent,

255 ; irregular , 7 , 273; defective,285 ; impersonal , 291; rule Of agreement , 54. SYNTA X of

, 54 ff.

Verbs Of perceiving , declaring, etc.,

217 , 334, 348 .

Verbal endings , 42 , 44 ii , 130.

Verbals in -a :r, 115 ; in-bi lis, 115.

vé rO, in answers , 340.

v e sco r, with abl . , 253.

ve sper i , 60, seeVocab .

vé to , w ith ace . and infin . , 334.

vétu s , infl . of, 109 ; compar ., 116 .

-r i , in perf. , 71, 134. The i is part of

the stem. 71.v is , infl . of, 96 .

VOCA TIVE, 48 , 58 ii ., 182 ; case, 15 ;like nom ., 59, 62 , 77 ; except in 2d

decl . , 57 , 77 ; in-i of nouns in -ius,

58 . SYNTAx , 75 .

VOICE, 8 , 119, 137 ; act. and pass .,

8 , 119; formula for converting act.to pass ., 136 .

vblo , infl . Of, 273.

VOWELS, 24 ; quality of, 24 ; open ,

close , medial , 24 ; vowel stems , 78 ,161; characteristic vowel of the

stem dropped , 139; vowel of the

stem lengthened , 161; Characteristic vowel changed , 130, 133, 135 ,138 , 144, 145 , 147 , 151, 154, 158 , 160,163, 179; characteristic vowel of

stem shortened , 72 .


al ti tfi do ,-d inis , F .

, height, depth.

altus , -a,-um , part. high,

deep .

alv eus , -i. M . ( alvus ) , a channel,trough, skiy

'

.

A mbarri , -6 rum , M . pl ., a people

of Gaul.

amb -lb ,-ire ,

-ivi or -ii , -i tum

( s o ) , to go about, canvass .

amb i -tib,-6 ni s , F . ( amb io ) . a

canvassing, ambition .

ambo ,-ae ,

-o , num . adj . , both.

amb iilo . A re. A vi , -atum , to

walk.

amIC -i tia ,-ao, F . (am icus ) ,fr iend

ship .

am-iena, -a,-um , adj . (amo ) ,

loving, fr iendly. kind .

am-ieus , -i , M ., a fr iend.

a-m itto ,-m itt5re ,

-mi s i , -miss um , to let go, lose, destroy .

amnia.-is , M .

, a r iver ( large, deepstream) .

i mo ,-5 re ,

-avi , -atum , to love.

amor ,-6 ris , M . (amo ) , love .

am-p lector ,

-p lecti,

-p lexus sum ,

dep. , to w ind around, embrace .

amp lia s , comp . adv . ( amp le) ,more, longer , further .

amp lus , -a ,-um , adj ., great, ample,

vspacious , grand, large.

A mulius , -ii , M ., a king Of A lba,brother of Numitor, and great

uncle of Romulus .

i n , disjunctive inte r . particle

whether , or .

an-cep s , -C ip i tis , adj . ( an ; caput ) ,two-headed, doubtful, cr itical .

angus t-iac , A rum , F . ( angus tus ) ,

narrowness , a narrowpass, defile.

angus-tus , -a ,

-um , adj . ( ango ) ,narrow, scanty .

da-ima,-ae, F .

,air , breath, life.

anim-adv erto ,-t5re ,

-ti , -sum

(animus ; adv erto ) , to turn themind to, to attend to animad

v ertére in aliquem , to pun ish

one.

anim-al , A lia, N . (anima ) , an

animal ( including man) , livingcreature.

fin-Imus ,-i , M .

,the soul, mind, d is

position, temp er , thought.

an-n 6n , conj . , or not

aunti-lus , -i , M ., r ing.

annus ,-I, M .

, a year .

an ser ,-éris , M .

, goose.

an tea, adv ., before.

an te-ao ,-ire, -ivi or 47, no p .p.,

N .,to go before, precede, excel .

anté-pbno ,-ére ,

-p5sui , -pbs i

tum , to p lace before, prefer .

ante quam , conj ., before that.

an t-i quus , -a ,-um , adj . ( an te ) ,

former , ancient, old .

A nténius ,-ii , M .

, hIarcus A nton i

us, the distinguished triumvir ,conquered by Octavianus, at

A ctium,B .C . 31.

anx ius , -a ,-um , adj. ( ango ) , tor

mented, anxious, troubled .

apério ,-ire, -ui , -tum , to op en ,

unclose, show, reveal .

aper-tus , -a,

-um , part . (apério ) ,vopen .

A p o llOn ia,-ao, F ., a town of

Macedonia .

A po ll énius ,-ii , M .

, Apollon ius ,a celebrated rhetorician Of

Rhodes .

ap-p i reo ,

-ére , -ui , -i tum ( adpareo ) , to appea r , be vis ible .

ap—pello , a re ,

-av i , -atum ( ad ;p ello ) , to address , call, name .

ap-péto ,

-p5tére ,

-p 6tivi or pétfi ,

-p5ti tum , to seekfor .

ap-p réh endo , e re, -d i. -sum

( ad ; p réhen d o ) , to seize, take

hold of:ap—prbp in quo , a re,

-av i , é tum

(ad ; p rbp inquo ) , to ap

x proach.

A p ri lis ,-is , M . (apério ) , Apr il ;

the month in which the earth

OPENS itself to fertility ; as

adj . , op ril.


aud -io ,-ire , -ivi or -ii , -Itum , to

hear , listen .

au-féro ,-ferre , ab s tiil i.ab latum,

irr. ( ab ; féro to carry away,remove ( 295 . bs.

au-fiigio ,-ére ,

-ffigi ,-fi igi tum

( ab ; fiigio ) , toflee away .

augeo ,-ére, -auxi , -auctum, to

increase, enlarge.

aug'lir-ium ,

-ii , N ., predictions

founded ( in part) on the ob

servation of birds ; divination,

p rophecy, soothsaying.

aur-eus ,-a ,

-um , adj . ( aurum ) ,golden .

auspic-ium ,-ii , N . ( auspex ) , an

omen ( taken from the watchingof birds) , an ausp ice ausp icia

habére, to hold or take the aus

p ices.

ut, conj . ( 205 . or ; aut

aut , either or .

autem , conj . ( 205 . but, how

ever , besides .

aux i lium ,-ii , N . ( angee ) , help ,

aid, assistance aux i lia ,-6 rum ,

auxilia ry troops.

5 -v erto ,-ére,

-sum , turn away

from, a vert, withdraw .

av i d-R 58 ,-atis , F .

, eagerness.

i v-idus , -a ,-um , adj .

eager , covetous.

avi s , -is , F ., a bird .

avus , -i , M .,a grandfa ther .

balneum ,-i , N . ( pl. mostly balne

ae ,-arum , a bath.

Bal ticus , -a,—um , Ba ltic .

b arbérua, -a,-um , adj . , foreign ,

strange, barbarian ; barbari ,-6 rum , M .

, foreigners, barbar ians a name applied first by theGreeks and afterwards by the

Romans to people of other na

tions.

be-dtus , -a,-um , adj . ( boo ) . hap

py, p rosperous , fortunate.

Belgae ,-arum , M . , theBelgians , a

warlike people dwelling in the

north of Gaul .

b—ellum ,-i , N . (Old form d u

ellum ) ( duo ) (a contest be

tween two parties) , war .

béne , adv . , well, finely, prosperously ; béne p iigndre, to fightsuccessfully.

béné-factor , -6 ris , M . (béne ; facio ) , a benefactor .

béné-ficium ,-ii , N . (béne ; ta

cio ) . well-doing, favor , benefi t .

b ib O ,b ib ére ,b ibi , nop.p.,todrink .

B ib racte ,-is , N .

, Bibracte, the

chief town Of the iEdui.B ib rax ,

-actis , N . Bibraa' , a tow n

of Gaul, in the terr itory Of the

Remi.B ib lilus , -i , M .

, Marcus C a lpur

n ius, consul B .C . 59, colleague

of Caesar.

b i-duum , 411. N . (b is ; d ies ) , a

space of two days.

bi-ui , -ae, -a.numeral distributiveadj. (b is ) , two each, two by two.

b I-partitb, adv. (b is ; pars ) , intwo parts, two divisions .

b is , num . adv.,twice.

Bo ii , -6 rum, M . , theBon , a people

Of Gaul .bbn-i tas , «i ti s , F . (bbnus ) , good

ness, virtue, worth.

bbnus , -a,-um , adj . , good (149.

as noun ,bbnum .

-i , N .

good ; N .pl . as noun , b5n i ( cf. 3.

good men ; b 5na, -6 rum ,

goods , p roperty.

bOS , bbv is , com. gen . an

or , a cow.

b rachiump ii , N . ( b race arm.

b r5v18 , -e , adj ., short, small, brief .

B ri tann ia, -ae , F ., Britain .

Bri tann i , -d rum , M , the inhabi

tants of Britain, Britons .

Bri tanniam ,-a,

-um, British


céléb er, -b ris , -b re, adj . , fre

quented, celebrated .

céler , 3m ,-ére, adj., swift,fl eet.

célér-i tas ,-atis , F . ( céler ) , swift

ness, quickness, speed.

célér-i ter , adv. ( céler ) , swiftly,quickly, speedily.

0610, A re, -5vi , -atum to

hide, conceal.

C eltae, -5rum , M ., the C elts the

inhabitants Of Central Gaul.

ech aco ,-ere ,

-ui , -um , to reckon,estimate ( of proceedings in

Senate) , vote, to give one’

s op in

ion.

cen tum , adj ., indecl ., a hundred .

centuria, -ae, F . ( cen tum ) . a

divis ion of one hundred ; a cen

tury, company .

centurib,-6 nis , M . ( cen tum ) , the

commander of a century a cen

tur ion .

certs-men,-Inis , N . ( certo ) , a

contest, battle.

certidrem to inform.

cert6 , adv. ( eertus ) , certa inly.

certo ,-are , -av i , { tum , to fight,

contend.

certus ,-a,-um , adj. ( cerno ) ,deter

mined,fixed, certain ; resolved.

cess o , A re , -av i , -atum , intens.

( cédo ) , to delay, cease, linger .

( CGtErus ) , -a,-um , adj . ( nomina

tive singular M . not found) ,the other, the rest.

ceu, conj . , as, as if .

cibaria, -6 rum, N . ( cihua) ,food,p rovis ions,fodder .

Ci cérb. -6 nis , M ., Marcus Tul

lius C icero, the greatest of RO

man orators and writers

106C imb ri , -6rum , M . , a people of

Northern Germany.

b ingo , Oingére, cinz i. cinctum ,

to gird, surround, besiege.

circa, adv . and prep. with the

acc., a round, about.

circi ter , adv. and prep. w ith the

acc., round about, near .

c ircui-tus , -fi s , M . ( circumeo ) ,a going around in a circle ; a

circuit, compass.

circum , adv. and prep . w ith acc.,

around, about, near .

circum-d o , d are ,-d5d i , d atum ,

to p ut around, surround with,encompass ; circumdare m iirum urbi or urbem min-6 , to

put a wall round the city, or to

surround the city with a wa ll.

circum-fun d o ,-fun d5re, Jud i .

-ffi sum, p our around, ( pass )rush in on all sides .

circum-s to ,-s t5re ,

-s téti , no p .pto stand around ; to surround,beset, besiege.

circum-v anio ,-ire , -v én i , -ven

tum , to come around, encompass ,invest.

cis , prep . w ith acc., on this side.

e i tér ior , -us , adj . (150. on

this side, hither ; Gal lia c i téri

o r , hither Gaul, i .e ., this side of

the A lps .

ci td , adv., quickly, speedily, soon

( comp. ci tius , sup . ci tis s i

meci tré, prep . w ith abl . and adv.

,

on this s ide ; before, within .

civ-i lis , -e , adj . ( civis ) , belongingto citizens, civil, courteous.

civis , -is , com . gen . , a citizen.

civ -Itas , i tis , F . ( civ is ) citizen

ship ; a city, state ; freedom ofthe city.

clades , -is , F ., disaster, slaughter .

clam , adv .,secretly ; prep. w ith

abl., without the knowledge of .

clamo , a re,-avi , i tum, to cry

out, call, p roclaim.

C larus , -a, -um , adj., clear , bright,illustr ious.

C las s is , -is , F ., a fl eet.claudo ,

-ere, -s i , -sum , to shut,close, surround,finish.


con-ci lium ,-ii , N . ( con ; Cale , to

call) , ameeting, a ssembly, council.con-c lam o ,

-are ,-av i , -atum

, to

cry out, to shout.

con -ciip i-s co , c up is cére ,-c iip i

v i or -c iip ii ,-C iip i tum , inch .

( eon ; Cup io ) , to be very de

sirons of , strive afl er .

con-curro , c fi rrére ,-curri or

-cfi cur ri , -cursum , to run to

gether , assemble, fight.con cur-sue, 433, M . ( concurro ) ,

a concourse, assembly, attack.

con-d emno ,-are ,

-av i , -atum

( con ; d amn o ) , to condemn .

con -d i C -id ,-6n is , F .

, terms , condi

tion .

cond i t id , see con d icid .

con-d o ,-dére ,

-d id i , -d i tum,to

p lace together ; tofound , hide.

con-d iico ,-d ii cére ,

-dfix i , -duc

tum,to lead together, collect ; to

C dnféro , cOnfer re , con tii li , co l

latum,to br ing together , collect.

cénfertus , -a,-um

, part. ( Cantercio , to cram together ) , close,crowded , crammed .

cdnfes tim , adv . ( cénféro ) , immediately, sp eedily .

cdn-ficio ,-fi cére, -féci , -tectum

( con ; fac io ) , to accomplish,

finish .

cOn -fi d o ,-fi d ére, -fisus sum

( 2 48 . 2 , Obs . to trust confidently, confide .

cOn-fi rm o ,-are ,

-av i,-atum , to

makefi rm, establish, strengthen .

cOn -fi teo r ,-fi t6 ri ,

-fes sus sum ,

dep. ( eon ; fateo r ) , to confess .

cOn-fbd io ,-f5dére , -f6 d i , -fos

sum,to dig ; to p ierce through,

stab.

cOn-fiigio ,-fiig5re , -fiigi , no p.p.

,

to flee for refuge .

cOn-grédior , -gr5d i , -

gres sus

sum , dep . ( con ; grad io r ) , tomeet, encounter, contend,fight.

con-grnc ,-gru5re ,-grui , no p .p.

,

to agree w ith, meet.

COn-le io (pronounced con -iic io ) , J eers ,

-jec i , -jec tum

( con ; ji c io ) , to throw together ,throw , hur l ; in ffigam c on i

cére , to p ut tofl ight.con-jungo ,

-gére , -x i,-c tum

, to

j oin together , connect, unite .

con jii ra-tid , -6 nis,F .

,a swea r

ing together , consp iracy .

con jura-tus,-i, M . ( con jure ) ,

consp irator .

con-jiiro ,-are ,

-av i ,-atum , to

swear together , consp ire.

con jux ( con junx ) , -iigis , com .

gen . ( con jungo ) , a wife, hasband , a betrothed .

con-lega ,-ao , M . ( con ; lego ) ,

associate , colleague.

eon-ligo ,-are ,

-av i ,-5 tum ( con ;

to bind together restra in .

con-16 00 ( co ll -are ,-av i

,

fi tnm, to p lace together ; to

settle in a p lace ; to give a wo

man in marr iage.

con-lbquium ,-ii , N .

, a talking to

gether , conversation, conference .

con-lbquo r , -i ,-cutus , dep . , con

verse, have a conference together .

Cane r , -ari,-atus sum

, dep., to

attemp t, endeavor, try .

Can-s anguin-eus ,

-a,-um

, ad j.

( con ; sanguis ) , related byblood , related .

can-s cen d o ,-d 5re , -d i , -s um

( con ; scan d o ) , to climb; (nav és ) , embark.

cc‘

m-s cri bo ,-bére , -p s i ,

-p tum , to

enlist, enroll, inscr ibe, wr ite.

cén s en-sus , di s , M . ( con sen tib ) ,an agreement.

can-Séquor ,-qui ,

-ciitus sum,

dep . , to follow after , overtake.

c6 n-séro ,s érére , -s érui , -s er

tum , to j oin, unite, bring to

gether ; pfi gn am or proelium

cénsérére , to j oin battle ma

VOCABULA RYO I .

num cénsérére , to engage in a

hand-to-hand conflict.céns ldéro ,

a re ,A v i , -atum , to

examine , consider , observe care

fullyC éns id ifi s -ii , M .

, one of Caesar’

s

officers .

can-s id e ,s id ére , s es sum ,

to s it down together, encamp .

céns i lium ,-ii

, N . , deliberation ,advice, talent ; cbnsfl ib, on

purpose, intentionally.

cén-s is to ,s is tére , -s titt, -s tI

tum , to stand still,make a stand .

c énspec-tus ,-fi s

, M . ( consp ic io ) , a sight.

can-splc io ,s p lcére , -spex1,

a pectum ( con ; spécio ) , tolook at, behold , observe.

cansp lco r ,4 11,4 tus , dep., to see.

cénsptra-tiG,-6 nis

, F . ( consp it o ) , an agreement, consp iracy .

cbnstan-tia ,-as , F . ( cbnstans ) ,

firmness, constancy .

c6n-s t1tuo ,-uére , -uI , -fl tum

( con ; s ti tuo ) , to p lace, make,determine.

can-s to , s tare ,-s tItI, s tatum , to

stand together ; consist ofc6 nsu6—sco ,

e scére ,-6vI, é tum ,

inch. ( consus o ) , to be accus

tomed, be wont.

cbnsué-tfi d o ,-ln is

, F . ( cénsuétus ) , custom,

habit, usage, inter

course.

cbnsul , -iilis , M ., a consul ; one

of the two chief magistrates

of Rome, chosen yearly .

cbnsfil-ata s , -fi s , M . ( cbn sul ) ,the ofi ce of consul, consulship .

cans ifl o ,-ére , -u

‘

i, 4mm , to delib

erate, consider , advise, consult

for ; El len! cénsfi lEre , to con

sultfor one’s interest ; i li quem

cbns ii lére , to consult, take ad

vice oj ; one.

cénsul-tum ,-I, N . ( cbnsfilo ) , a

decree, decis ion, resolve.

11

con-tendo , d ére, -d i'

,-tum, to

strivefor, contend,fight hasten .

conten-tib, -6n.is , F . ( contendo ) ,a straining ; dispute.

con-testor , A r i , -atus sum, dep.,

to call to witness , invoke.

continen-ter , adv. ( continen s ) ,moderately ; continuously, with

out interruption .

con-tlneo ,-tIn ére ,

-tInuI, -ten

tum ( con ; téneo ) , to hold to

gether, to hold in , keep back, re

strain, confine.

con-tingo ,-ting6re, 415i , -tac

tum ( con ; tango ) , to touch,border upon ; impers . , contin

git mihi, it is my lotcon tln-uus , -a ,

-um , adj . ( contin eo ) , unbroken , continuous .

con tra, adv. and prep. w ith acc.,

over against, oppos ite to.

con -trého ,-h6r e ,

-xI, -etum , to

draw together , assemble, contract.

con tra-t in s , -a ,-um , adj . ( con

tra ) , opposite, contrary, opposed ,hostile.

con trévers-ia ,-ae , F . ( contro

v ersus ) , controversy, dispute.

con tfimé-lia ,-as , F . ( contfimeo ) ,

abuse, insult ; in pl., abus ive

ep ithets .

con-venio ,-v énlre, -v ént, -v en

tum , to come together , assemble ;convéntre i ll quem , to accost

one conv én it, impers ., it is

agreed upon

conven-tus , 41s , M . ( convénio ) ,a coming together ; an assembly .

con-verto ,-tére ,

-ti , -sum, to turn

round, change, turn ; conver

téta in fiigam , to put tofl ight.con~v6co , A re ,

-5v i , 4mm , to

call together , assemble, summon .

co—briot , -6 rIr'

i , -ortus ( con ; brior ) , dep.

,3 and 4 conj ., arise,

break out (war ) .

cophlnus , J , M ., a basket.

cépia, «a s , F . ( con ; cp s ) , abun

12

dance pl.,wealth.

cop i-osus , -a, -um , adj. ( copia ) ,

well supp lied, abounding, p lenti

ful, copious .

coquo ,-ére , cox i , ooctum, tocook.

coram , adv. and prep. w ith abl.,openly ; in thep resence of,before.

C orin thus , -I, F ., Cor inth, a city

of Greece .

C o rnelia ,-ae, F . , the first w ife

of Caesar .

co rnu, 418 , N ., a horn ; the wing

of an army .

co rpus ,-oris , N .

, av

body, corpse.

cotti di—an us or cotidi-anus -a ,

-um , adj., daily.

co ttidié or 06 511116 (quot ) , adv.,

daily.

créber , -b ra ,-b rum , adj ., thick,

close, frequent.oréd o ,

-d ére , -d Itum (w ithdat. to trust ; (w ith acc .

and believe.

orémo , a re ,-5v i , -5 tum , to burn .

creo , A re , i v i‘

,-5 tum , to bring

forth, beget, create, elect.oré-soo , orescére , crévi

'

, crétum

( creo ) , to grow, grow up , in

crease.

crini s , -is , M . , the ha ir .

crucia-tus , -1'

is , M. ( criicio ) , torture, tor ment.

crux ,-ucis , F ., a cross, torture.

cub o , A re,-ui

'

,-Itum, to lie down,

recline.

culpa,-ao, F .

, crime,fault,failure.

culpo , «i re , -avi , -atum ( culpa ) ,to censure, blame.

cum , prep. w ith abl., with, together

with, among.

cum ( quum ) , conj ., when, since,although, though ; cum . tum ,

both and .

cunctor , -5ri , A tus sum , dep ., to

linger, hes itate, delay.

cfip i—d é , adv. ( cupldus ) , eagerly,

zealously, ardently.

supp lies, troop s,


cup i d-Has , é tis , F . ( cup l dus ) ,a longing, desire, avarice.

cup-Idus , -a,-um , adj. ( cup io ) ,

eager , desirous, covetous, fond .

cupio ,-ére, -iv i ( or -ii ) , Ji tum,

to long for a thing, covet ; to

favor ( w ithcfi r , adv .

, why ? for what reason ?ot

'

iria,-ao, F .

, a curia , one of the

thirty parts into which Bomulus divided the Roman people ;the senate-house.

cura ,-ae, F . ( quaero ) , trouble,

care, attention, pains.

C fi riatius , -ii , M ., an A lban family name .

cfi ro ,-i re, { v i «i tum ( cum ) ,

to care for ; manage, govern ;cure.

curro .currére ,cucurri, oursum ,

to run, hasten .

currus ,-i

'

ia, M ., a chariot.

cur-sue,-fi s , M . ( curro ) , a run

ning, race, j ourney, voyage.

cus tos , -6 di s , M ., guard, watch

man.

D .

damno , i re , d vi , { tum ( damnum fine, damage) , to con

demn, pass sentence on damna

re capl tis , to condemn to death.

damnum ,-i , N . , loss .

d é, prep. w ith ah] . ( the subjectof thought) , of ; ( of place ) ,down from, from ; ( of time ) ,during, at, concerniu

d ea,-ae , F . (dat. and a

sh]. pl. doabus ) , a goddess .

d é-b eo ,-bére, -bui , -b1tum ( do ;

h i b eo ) , to owe, be bound, be

due ; w ith an infin itive after

it, translate it by ought, must,etc. impers.

, debet, it behooves,ought

decem , num . adj. indecl., ten.

Decem-b er , -b ris , M . ( decem ) ,the tenth month of the Roman

VOCABULA RY. I .

oi tum ( dis ; placco ) (w ithto displease.

d is -puto , «i re, A v l , -atum , to

discuss ; argue.

d is sens -id ,-6n is , F . (dissen tio ) ,

difl‘

erence of op inion, disagree

ment, quarrel .

d is s idium ,-i , N .

, discord.

d is-s imi lis , -e , adj . , unlike, dissimilar .

d i tior , d i tis s imus , comp . and

superlative of d iv es .

d iii , adv. ( dies ) , by day, a

long time, long ago ; comp.,

difi tius ; superlative,aimé.

d i v-os , J tis , adj., r ich ( the nom.

and acc. of the neut. pl. do not

occur ; comp., d iv i tior or d i

ti or ; superlative, divi tis s imus

or d itis s lmus ) .D ivied ,

-6ni s , M .,Divico, a Hel

vetian leader.

d i-v id o ,-v l d ére ,

-v i s i , -v isum , to

separate, divide, distinguish.

D iv i tiacus , -I, M ., D ivitiacus, an

ZEduan chief.

d o , dare, ded l , datum ( 7 5 . N .

to give ; finem d i re, to p ut an

end to.

dooco , e re,-ui, 4mm, to teach.

d oc-tus , -a,-um , part. ( doceo ) ,

learned,versed, exper ienced .

‘dbleo , é re , Al i , -Itum , tofeelpa in ,lament, be sorryfor .

d bl-o r , -6 ris , M . pain,anguish, anger .

dolus , -i , M ., guile, fraud, deceit.dom-I-c i l-ium ,

-iI, N . ( d6mus ) , a

habitation, dwelling, abode.

domina-tib,-6ni s , F . ( d om inor ) ,

rule ; despotism.

d bmlnus , -i , M . ( dbmo ) , a mas

ter , lord, chief ; owner .

d bmo , A re,-ui , ~l tum , to subdue,

vanquish, overcome, conquer .

d bmus ,-i or 418 , F . a house,

home ; ddmi , at home.

15

B .

6 , ex , prep. w ith abl . , outof;from,

of ; ex Itinére, on the march ;ex equd , on horseback .

é-d i'

co ,-d

'

icére , -d ix‘

i , -dictum,

to declare, publish order .

e

d 6neo, conj . , as long as, while ;until

dono , A re ,-avi , -5 tum ( donum ) ,

to give (with ace. of thing and

dat. of person, or ace. of per

son and abl. of thing) .d 6num ,

-i , N . ( d o ) , a gift, present.d o rmi o , i re , -i

'

vi or -ii , -i'

tum , to

sleep, rest.

D i'

ib is ,-is , M ., a river of Gaul.

dub i ta-tid ,-6nis , F . ( dub i to ) , a

doubting, doubt, hesitation .

d iibi to , A re, A v i , -atum , intens .

( duo , through old form, dubo ) ,to doubt, hesitate.

dubius , -a ,-um , adj . ( duo ) , doubt

ful as noun, dub ium ,

-i , N ., doubt.

d ii-cen ti , -ao,-a, num . adj. ( duo ;

centum ) , two hundred.

dfi co , dfi cére , dfixi , ductum , to

lead ; put ofl, consider , think ;m i

'

irum dfi cére, to build a wall

ux drem in mat rimdn ium dfi

cére , to marry ( a woman ) .

du lcis , -e, adj . , sweet, agreeable.

dum , conj . , while, so long as , un

til, provided that

d um-mbdo , conj ., p rovided that,

if onlyDumnbrix ,

-Igis , M ., Dumnorizv,an E duan chief.

duo ,-ae ,

-o , num. adj two

dud-d écim , num . adj. , indecl.,twelve.

duo-d é-v i‘

ginti , num . adj ., ihdecl., two from twenty, eighteen .

D y rrachium,-ii , N .

, a sea-coast

town of I llyria, formerly calledEpidamnus ( now Duraz zo) .

16

edo , édére or esse, Ed i , ésumor essum to eat.

é—d o ,-d ére ,

-d id i , -d Itum , to give

forth, p ublish, exhibit, display.

e-duco ,-dfi cére ,

-d iix i , -ductum ,

to leadforth, march out troops.

Educo ,-are, -avi

'

, A tum, to bringup , rear , educate.

ef-féro , eifert e , extul i , Glatum ,

irreg. ( ex ; féro ) , to carryforth,to br ingforth, publish

ef-fi cio , fl eet s , 4ed i , -tectum

( ex ; facio ) , to make out, bringto pass to efl ect (323.

ef-fun do ,-fun d ére ,

-ffi sum

( ex ; fund o ) , to pour out or

forth ; to overflow ; squander ;effundére 8 6 , to spread out.

ese-nus ,

-a ,-um , adj . (egeo ) , in

want, destitute, needy.

égo , met, pron . , I ; pl . n6 s

e-grédi o r , -grédi , -gressus sum ,

dep. ( ex ; grad ior ) , to go out,

goforth, leave.

é-greg-ius , -a, -um , adj . ( é ; gréx ) ,

(out of the herd) , excellent, remarkable.

é-Icio (pronounced e-jl cio ) , J oet e,

-jeci , -jectum ( e ; jac io ) , tocast, thrust or dr ive out, expel,banish élcére 8 6 , to rush out.

e-lab or , -lab i , -lap sus sum , dep.,

to slip away, escape.

Gl atus , -a ,-um , part. (efféro ) ,

exalted, lofiy, high.

élégan s ,-ntis , adj . , elegant.

Glbquent-ia ,-s e, F . (elbquens ) ,

a being eloquent, eloquence.

é-mlneo ( ex ; mineo ) , -ere, -uI.

no sup ., to stand out, excel.

emo , emere , em i‘

, emp tum , to

buyenim , conj . ( strengthened formof nam , for ; placed after the

first word or words) , for , indeed, in act ( 205 .

e-nuntio cio ) , A re , A v i , -5tum ,

to divulge ; to rep ort.


eo . ire , iv i or ii , Itum , irreg., to

go

ed , adv. ( is ) , thither ; to thatp lace,so far ; therefore. With com

paratives, by so much, so much,the qu6 ed , the the.

edd em , adv. ( id em ) , to the same

p lace, the same way.

Bp l cfiréus ,-a,

-um , adj. Ep icarean .

Ep is tii la, -ao, F . , a letter, ep istle.

éques , equi tis , M . (Equus ) , a

horseman, rider ; pl . , équl tés ,

cavalry ; also the knights, theequi

tes, as an order in the state .

Eques-ter , -tris , -tre , adj . (éques ) ,belonging tohorsemen equestrian .

é-qui dem , adv .,ver ily, truly .

Equi ta-tus , -de, M . ( équl to ) , ar id ing, cava lry.

squIt-o ,«are,A vt,A tum ( éques ) ,to be a horseman to r ide.

equus , J , M ., a horse, steed .

ergd , adv. ( 205 . therefore, ac

cordingly.

e-rip io ,-rlpére, -rlpui ,

-reptum

( e ; rap io to snatch away, r es

cue érlp re 8 6 , to snatch one’s

self away, to escape.

é-rud-io , i re ,-iv

'

1'

or -iI , -Itum

( e ; rud is ) , to free from rude

ness, educate, instruct.

et , conj . and a lso, too, as ;et et, both and, not only

but also.

etiam , conj . , and also, besides,likewise, ( 205 . certa inly,

yes with comparatives, still ;magi s etiam , still more.

et-s i , conj . , even if, although

yet, but.

Eurip id es , -is , M ., a celebrated

A then ian tragic poet .

e-vad o ,-dére, -si , -sum , to go

forth, to escape from.

é-vello ,-v ellére, -vellI or -vuls !,

-vulsum , to tear out, remove.

6-vén io ,-vénIre, N ani , -ventum ,


exsul-to ,-fire,

-5vi , A tum , in

tens. ( ex ; to leap up ; re

j oice exceedingly.

ex-ter ( térus ) , -éra, -érum , adj.

( ex ) , outside, foreign, strangecomp. exterior. outer , exte

r ior superlative, extremus or

( extimus ) , outer most, last.ex -tlmésco ,

-timés cére , -timui ,

no p.p., v. A . and N .

, fear

grea tly, dread.

ex-to llo ,-to llére , no perf., no

p . p. to lift up , raise up , exalt.

extra, adv. , and prep. w ith acc.

on the outside, beyond.

fa-ber, -b ri , M . ( facio ) , a carp en

ter , smith, artisan .

fab ri co , «are , d v i , -atum (fab er ) , toframe, make, construct,

budd.

fi b rlcor , «fu l , -5tu s sum , dep.,

toframe, build, fashion .

fa-bfi la, -ao, F . (for ) , a story,

fable.

facétus , -a, -um , adj., courteous .

ti on-e , adv. ( faci lis ) , easily.

ti c-His , -e , adj. ( facio ) , easy,courteous, afl

'

able (149.

fi e-inns , -6 ris , N . ( facio ) , a deed,crime.

facio , facere, féci , factum , to

make, do ; passive, fio ,fi éri ,

factus sum , to be made, to be

come (302 ) castra facére , to

p itch camp impers . fi t, it hap

p ens, is usual , fiat , so be it.

fac-tio ,-6nis , F . ( facio ) , a mak

ing ; a p arty, faction.

fac-tum ,-i , N . ( facio ) . a deed, act,

exp loit.

fal lo , fal lers , féfelli , falsum , to

deceive.

fal -sus , -a,-um , part. ( fallo )

fam Il-ia, -ae , F . ( famifl us , a

servant) , family-servants , retainers family, household ; pater

fami liAs or fami liae , master ofa family .

famIIi-aris , -is , M . ( fam i lial ) , ofthe household ; subst. , a friend .

fas , indecl., N . ( for ( that wh ichis right in the sig t of heaven) ,divine law ; right

fas cis , -is , M .

, a bundle, p arcel ;fas ces . pl ., a bundle of rods

and an axe carried by the lic

tors before a chief magistrate,with which criminals were

scourged and beheaded ; the

fasces.

fateor , fated , fes sus sum, to

confess .

fa-tum ,-I, N . ( for ) , destiny, fate,

calamity.

fauces , -ium , F . ( found in thesing. only in the abl. ; fauce) ,the throat, gullet a defi le, pass .

F aus tulus , -i'

, M .,Faustulus , the

shepherd who brought upRomulus and Remus.

faveo , favérej avi , fautum , tofa

Vvor, p rotect.

P éb ruArius , -ii , M ., February .

féli c-Iter, adv . ( félix ) , ausp i

ciously, favorably.

fel'

ix,-Ic is , adj. (too , to p roduce) ,

fruitful ; happy,fortunate.

fet a, -s e , F . ( férus ) , a wild ani

mal, wild beast.

féré, adv., near ly, generally.

fero , ferre, tuli , latum , irreg.

to bear, bring, endure ;bring forth ; tell, relate ; raise,exalt ; iernut, they say ; fertur.it is said ; auxi lium ferre , to

bring aid ; in juries ferre , to

infl ict inj ur ies ; ferre légem ,

to propose a law.

fer-dx ,-dcis , adj. ( féro ) , bold,

fierce.

ferrum ,-I, N .

, iron ; sword, arms .


hortor , «h i , -atus sum , dep ., to

incite, cheer , exhort, urge.

hortus , -i , M ., a garden .

hosp It-ium,

-iI, N . (hospes ) , ap lace of hosp itality, inn .

hos tis , -is , com . gen . a

stranger , an enemy.

hum-Anus , -a ,-um , adj . (homo ) ,

p erta in ing toman, human ; court

eous, civilized.

humérus , see umdrus .

Ib i , adv . ,in thatp lace, there.

Ib idem , adv .,in the same p lace.

ico , icére , ici , ictum , to str ike,hit, smite, stab; foedus icére,to make or conclude a treaty.

ic-tus , 41s , M . ( ico ) , a blow,

thrust.

Idem , ead em, i d em, pron .,the

some, very id em qui ,

the same as .

Iddneus , -a,-um , adj ., meet, p rop

er , suitable

idus , -uum , F . pl . , the Ides ; the

fifteenth day of the months

March, May, July, and Octo

ber, the thirteenth day of the

remain ing months .

Igi tur , conj . ( 205 . then, there

upon ; therefore, consequently.

i’

gnis , -is , M . ,fi reI-gnds co ,

-gn6 scére ,-gn 6vl ,g ut

”

)

tum ( in gnds co ndsco ,with

to pardon , forgive, excuse,overlook.

I-gndtus ,-a ,

-um, adj. ( in ; gubtus ndtus ) , unknown .

il l i tus , or inlfitus , see in-féro .

ille, -a ,-na, pron . demonstr .

( 234. that, that yonder ; hic

. ille, this that, the one

the other .

il lic , adv. ( ille ; es ) , in thatplace,there.

il-licd , adv. ( in ; on the

spot, instantly, there.

imago ,-Ini s , F ., an image or like

ness, statue, picture.

imb er , -b rls , M ., a shower of rain .

-a,-um , ad] . ( in ;

m i tfi rus ) , unripe, immature.

immd ( im d ) , adv . , on the con

trary no indeed, yes indeed .

im-mort i lis , -e , adj . ( in ; mor

ti lis ) , undym fi

’ immortal.

im-par ,

-ar1s ( in ; par) , uneven, unequal, not a matchfor .

im—patiens , -en tie, adj. ( in ; patiens ) , notable to bear.impatien t.

impdd i—mentum ,-I, N . ( impe

dio ) , a hindrance, impediment ;imped i

‘

m enta, -6 rum , N . pl . ,baggage.

im-pédio ,

-ire, -ivi'

or -lI, -i tum

( in ; pés ) , to entangle, hinder ,impede.

imped1-tus -a,-um , part. (M pe

d io ) , hindered, imp eded.

im-pello ,

-pollére, p un,-pu1

sum ( in ; pello ) , topushagainsturge on , impel.

impéra-tor , -6 ris , M . (impero ) ,general, commander ( in chief) .

im-perfectus , -a,-m , adj. ( in ;

perfectus ) , unfinished, imp erect.

imper—ium ,-iI, N . ( impéro ) , a

command ; authority ; emp ire,

gover nment.

im-péro , a re,

-atum ( in ;paro ) , to command ; govern, rule

over ; impérare obs i d és an

out, to demand hostages fromany one.

im-petro , A re, a vi , -atum ( in ;patro ) , to accomp lish ; to make

a request and have it granted.

impetus , -tfi s , M ., an attack, as

sault, onset; impetuosity.

im-pldro , fi re, é vi , { tum ( in ;p ldro ) , to invoke with tears, callto one

’

s assistance ; to imp lore.

24

ferre s ign a , to advance the

standards, attack ; in ferre pé

d em or gradum ,to advance,

attack ; se in ferre , to betake

one’

s self,go.

iu-férus , -a ,-um , adj . ( comp. in

fer ior , sup. infimus or imus ) ,low, nether . A S noun ,

in fer'

i,

-6 rum , M . pl . ( the inhabitantsof the lower regions) , the dead .

infes to , «are,-8 v i

,-5 tum ( in fes

tus ) , to attack, molest, infest.in-fes tus

,-a

,-um

, adj . ( old part.

of infero ) , hostile ; unsafe.

infimus,-a ,

-um, adj . ( superlar

tive of intern s ) , the lowest, last,lowestpart of .

in—fl ecto ,-fl ectére

,-fl ex

um,to bend down warp afl eet.

in -flo ,fl are ,

-flav i,

-flatum , to

blow into ; inflate.

in-fluo ,-fluére , -flfix i , -fluxum ,

tofl ow into,flow upon ,glow.

infra, adv. and prep. wit acc., be

low, beneath, under , underneath .

in-gén s ,

-en tie, adj . ( in ; gén s ,beyond its kind, so) , great, vast.

in i c io (pronounced in -jiclo ) ,-i cére, -jeci , -jectum ( in ; iicio ) , to throw or cast into, cast

upon or against ; infuse into,insp ire ; in i cére metum al i cui ,

to insp ire one withfear .

in—imi cus , -a , -um , adj . ( in ; m i

cus ) , unfriendly, hostile. A s

noun , M ., a private enemy or

foe.

in-iquus ,-a

,-um

, adj . ( in ; s equus ) , unequal, unj ust unkind.

ini-tium, N . ( in eo ) , a begin

n ing, commencement ; origin .

injfi ri-a ,-ae F . ( injfi rius ) , inj ury,violence insult, inj ustice .

ih -nasco r ,-natus sum ,

dep .,to be born in ; spring up in .

ln-n i to r , -n‘

1'

sus or -nixue

sum, dep . , to lean or rest upon,

support one’

s self by.

FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .

ln-nocéns , -en tis , adj .

,harmless

blameless, innocent ; d isinter

ested .

inbp-ia

,-ae , F . ( inOp s ) , p over ty ,

need, want.

inquam , def. (305 . 2 b) , I say .

in-s cri b o , a cri bére,-s criptum ,

to wr ite upon, in

scribe ; indicate.

in-séquo r , s écfi tus sum ,

dep .,tofollow af ter , pursue.

ih -s i d eo ,-s i d ére ,

-sessum

( in ; sed co ) , to sit in ; sit up on ,settle upon ; to get possession of ;occupy.

ins i d -iae,A rum

, F . pl . ( in s i dcc ) , an ambush artifice, p lot ;per ins i d ias , by stratagem,

craftily.

in s i d i-or ,-5 ri ,

-5tus sum , dep.

( in s i d iae ) , to lie in wa it for ,watch for , expect.

in s ign—e

,-is

, N . ( in s ign is ) , a distinctivemark ; badge ( of office) ,a signal ; ensign in pl. , in s ign ia,

-ium, badges of honor , dec

orations, ornaments .

i h -e , adj . ( in ; s ignum ) ,remarkable, distinguished, extra

ordinary .

in-s i l io ,-s i l i re ,

-s i lui, no p .p.

( in ; salio ) , to leap or sp r inginto to leap or spr ing upon .

in-s inuo ,-5 re

,-5v i

,-5 tum ( in ;

s inus ) , to penetrate or enter

anywhere by winding in ; insin

uate ; with 8 6,work one

’

s wayinto.

in solen-ter, adv . ( in solens ) , un

usually ; haughtily, insolently .

in-s ti tuo,-s ti tuere, -sti tui

'

,-s t i

tfi tum ( in ; s tatuo ) , to ar range,educate.

in s ti tfi -tum ,-i, N . ( in s ti tuo ) ,

custom, arrangement ; in pl.,institutions .

in-s to ,s t i rs ,

-sti tt, -s tatum , to

stand upon ; approach ; harass.

26

in-v i'

tus , -a, -um , adj. ( in ; V610) ,unwilling, reluctant.

in-vbco , -are , A tum , to call

on or up on ; invoke ; imp lore.

ip s e ,-a,

-um , pron . ( 238 . self;very ; himself; herself,itself .

ira ,-a

,e, F ., anger , wrath, ire.

i ra-cundus , -a ,-um , adj. ( ire ) ,

p rone to anger , irr itable.

i r-asoor , irasci ,'

1'

ratus sum , dep.

( ira) , to be angry, be in a rage.

Ir i -tu s,-a

,-um

, part. act . ( i rascor ) , angry, angered .

ir-rid eo ,-ris i , -risum ( in

rid eo ) , to laugh in ridicule

ridicule.

ir-rumpo ,-rumpére ,

-r i'

1p i ,-rup

tum ( in ; rumpo ) , to break in ,burst in .

ir-ruo ,-ruére ,

-rui , no p. p . ( in ;ruo ) , to rush in or into ; attack

furiously, assault.is , ea, id , pron . ( 238 . this, that;he, she, it ; is qui , the man who,such a one that ; in ed es se, to

be on the point of .

is te , -ta, -tud , pron ., this of yours,

that near you this, that ; that

fellow ( in contempt) ( 234.

i ta , adv. , thus, so ; to such an ex

tent ; i ta ut (w ith in

such a manner that.

tain ,-ac, F .

, I taly.

i ta-que , conj . ( 205 . and so ;therefore, accordingly.

i tem , adv.,in likemanner ; so also.

i ter , i tinéris , N . j ourney,march, route ex i tinere ,

on the march ; magn is i tinéri

bus , byforced marches .

i terum , adv ., again , a second time.

i tfi rus , -a, -um , part. from cc .

J.

jaceo ,-ére,

-ui , no p .p . , to lie, lieL

prostrate, lie dead .

jac io , jacEre, jeci , jactum , to

throw, cast.


jacta-tid ,-6nis , F . ( jacio ) ,

throwing ; boasting.

jaet-i to ,-are , no perf., no p .p .

,

frequentative ( jacto ) , to p ourforthfrequently tomake a great

disp lay .

jac-to ,-are ,

-avi , -atum , frequen

tative ( jacio ) , to throw ; ta lk

about.

jam , adv ., now, already, p resently ,

at length ; w ith a negative, as

jam n 6n , no longer .

jam-did , adv .,long ago, already,

for a long time.

janua, -s e , F . ( janus ) , a door ,

gate.

janu-arius , -a ,-um , adj . ( janus ) ,

of or belonging to January . A snoun , M .

, January.

Jan us , -i , M ., an ancient Latin

divin ity, represented w ith twofaces, one in front, the other

behind.

jocue, -i , M . ( in pl . , also joca,-6 rum ) , a j est, j oke.

J6v is , gen . of Jupi ter .

Juba ,-as , M .

, a king of Numidia .

jiib eo , jub ére, jus s i, jus sum , to

order , command.

jfi d ex ,-i cis , com. gen . ( jfi s ;a j udge, ump ire.

jiid i c-ium ,-ii , N . ( ind i co ) , a

j udgment, trial, court.iii -d i co ,

-are ,-atum ( jus ;

d i co ) , to j udge, determine.

jfig—fi lum ,-i , N .

,-us ,

-i , M . ( jungo )( that which joins) , that whichj oins the shoulders and neck ;the throat.

jug-um ,-i , N . ( jungo ) , a yoke

team; a summit ( of amountain) .

Jul ius , -ii , M ., Julius, the name

of a Roman gens ; especiallyGaius Julius C aesar , and his

adopted son , Gaius Julius C az

sar Octavianus A ugustus .

Jul ius , -ii , M ., the month of July ;

so called after Julius Caesar .

VOCA BULARY. I .

Julius , -a, -um , adj ., of July .

iii-mentum ,-i , N . ( jungo ) , a beast

of burden .

jungo , jungers , junxit. junctum ,

to j oin , harness sdcieti tem

jungére , to 0m a partnership .

juni or , -us , j., comparative ( juvénia, 150. younger .

J’

fi -pi ter , see Jfippiter .

Jfi -ppi ter , Jbiris , M . Jup i

ter, son of Saturn ,rother and

husband of Juno, king of gods .

Jura, f ae, M ., a chain of moun

tains extending from the Rhineto the Rhone .

jut e, abl . of jfis , used adverbiallyby right, j ustly .

juro ,-are, a n .

-atum , to swear ,

take an oath.

jfis , jfl ri s , N . , j ustice, law ; court

of j ustice ( acc. pl. wanting) .jfis jfiran dum , jiiris jurand i , N

an oath.

jus t-6 , adv . ( jus tus ) , rightly ,

j ustly.

jfivénis , -is , adj com . gen . (109.

N . and 150. young, youthful ,as subst., jfivems ,

~is , com.gen .

(gen . pl. jfivénum ) , a youngman or woman ( between 17and 45 or

jiiv en-tus , -fi tis , F . ( juvenis ) ,youth, the season of youth.

jiivo , jiivdre , juv i, jfi tum, to help ,

jux ta, prep . w ith acc., near to,

near ; as adv., near by, in like

manner , alike.

Kalend ae ( C a1 d rum , F Cc

lends, the first day of the

month.

KarthAgd ( C ar -inis , F ., Car

thage ; a celebrated city of

Africa.

27

L, an abbrev . for Lucius .

Lab ienus , -I, M ., Labienus an

officer of Caesar in Gaul,who ai

terwards went over to Pompey .

labdro ,-are , -av i , -8 tum ( lab or ) ,

to toil, labor .

lac , lactis , N ., milk.

lacer , -era,-erum , adj., torn ,man

gled, maimed.

laces so ,-es sere ,

—ess iv i , or—es s ii ,or -ess i , -ess itum, to p rovoke,excite, assail, attack.

lacrima,-as , F .

, a tear ; lacrim5sdare, to weep .

laoue, -fis , M ., a lake.

laedo , laed ére , laes i, laesum , to

strike, inj ure ; annoy, violate.

laetor , 4 ri , -atue sum, dep. ( laetus ) , tofeel j oy, be glad.

lambo ,-ere,

-i , no p .p . , to lick, lap .

lanio ,-are ,

-5v i , A tum, to rend,tear in pieces .

lap is , -i d is , M ., a stone , a stone

( placed at the end of every1000paces) , a mile-stone.

laqueus , -ci , M ., a noose, halter ,

snare.

l i t-e, adv. ( latus ) , widely ; farand wide.

lat-éb ra, -as , F ., ( latoo ) , a hiding

p lace, lurking-p lace.

later , -5rls , M ., a brick or tile.

latro ,-are ,

-2vi , -Atum , to bark,

yelp ; bark at.

latro ,-6nis , M .

, a robber , highwayman.

l i tus , -a, -um , adj . , broad wide.

latus ,am .N ., the side,flank,body,lungs ; latéris or latérum d 6

lor , pain in the side, pleurisy.

la-tus , -a ,-um , part. ( féro ) , borne,

carried .

laud o.-are, -5v i , -atum , ( laus ) ,

to p raise.

laurea ,-ao, F ., a laurel-tree lau~

rel-crown .

28

laus , laud is , F ., p ra ise, glory ;laud és ,fame.

léga-tid ,

-6ni s , F ., on ambassy,

legation .

lega-tus , -i , M . ( lego ) , an ambas

sador, lieutenant, messenger .

leg-id ,-6n is , F . ( légo ) , a legion ;

consisting of between 4200

and 6000men .

légidn-Arius

,-a ,

-um , adj . ( légio ) ,of or belonging to a legion ; le

gionary .

lego , légére, legi , lectum , to

gather, select ; read.

Lémannus ,-i , M . , Lake Geneva .

lén-i tas , -atis , F . ( lén is ) , softness,smoothness .

led ,-6n is , M . , a lion.

lex , légi s , F . ( lego ) , law, pre

cep t.

li bent-er ,adv. ( lib en s ) ,willingly,cheerfully, gladly.

lib ec ,-ére,

-ui , -i tum , to p lease ;libet, impers . (314. itp leas

es, it is agreeable.

li ber , -éra, é rum , adj. , free, un

restricted in pl., li beri’

,-6 rum ,

M . ( the free members of the

household) , children .

lib er , -b ri , the inner bark of a

tree ; a book ( since the bark of

a tree was used as material for

writing upon ) .

li'

bEral-i tas , -atis , F . ( li beral ia) ,generosity, liberality.

li ber-e, adv. ( li ber ) ,frankly.

li b6ri , -6 rum , M . pl . ( see liber ) .li bero ,

-are ,-atum ( li ber ) ,

tofree, liberate, acquitli ber-tas ,

-ati s , F . ( li ber ) , freedom, liberty ; candor .

liber-tus , -i , M . ( li bero ) , a freedman .

lib et , 1ib6re, libuit or lib i tum

es t , impers . (314 . itpleases .

liceor , -6ri , -i tus sum , dep.,to

bid (at an auction) .

freely,


li cet , licere , licuit or lic i tumes t , impers . (314. it is allow

able, permitted ; one may, can ;li cet vénias , you may come.

licet , conj . ( 206 . although,though, even if .

lie-tor , -6 ris , M . ( ligo ) , a lictor ;an attendant granted to a

magistrate as a sign of official

dign ity.

lignum , N ., wood ; pl .fire-wood .

lmea-mentum , 3. N . ( linea, a

line) , a line ; pl., drawings,features, lineaments.

Lingon és , -um , M . ( acc . pl.Lingd

nas ) , a people in Celtic Gaul .lingua,

-ae , F .,the tongue ; lan

guage.

l in ter , -tris , F ., a boat, skif ;wherry.

Liscus , -i , M ., Liscus , an E duanchief .

l ittera ( litéra),-ae, F .

, a letter

( of the alp abet) ; littérae ,

pl., an ep istle, literature .

li tus ( littus ) , -6 ris , N .,the sea

shore, shore, coast, beach.

lbcus , M . pl ., loci or lbca,M . and N . ( 8 7 . N . a p lace .

long-é , adv. ( longus ) , far of ,

much, by far ( comp . longius ;superlative, longi s s ime)

longus , -a ,-um , adj . , long ; ta ll ;

distant,tedious.

loquo r ,16qui ,16 cfi tus sum , dep.,

to speak.

lfi ceo . l i‘

icére, li‘

ixi , no p.p ., to

shine, be evident.

Liicius , -ii , M ., a Roman name .

lfi-crum , N . ( luo ) , gain .

liid -i crum , N .,

sport ; show,

public games .

lfid -i -fi co ,-are ,

-av i , { tum (l ildus ; to make sport of ;mock.

lfi d -i-tioor , -ari , -5tus sum , dep.

( Indus ; to make sport

Qf ; tomock.

M i l d ,-6 nis , ill ilo, a friend of

C icero.

m in or , A r i , -5tus sum, dep., to

j utforth ; threaten, menace.

m ino r , -us , adj . comp . (parvus ) ,less. A s noun, m in6 r6s , -um ,

com . gen . pl . , descendants.

m inno ,-u6re ,

-ui , -fi tum , to les

sen, diminish, lower, reduce ; to

grow less.

m inus , adv .,less ; 8 ! minus , if

not ( parum , minus , minime) .m iro r , -rar i , -ratus sum , dep. , to

admire ; to wonder at ( 2 79.

m ix-us , -a ,-um , adj . (miro r ) ,

wonderful, extraordinary.

m i s er , -era,-6rum , adj wretched ,

unfortunate ; sick, ill .

m i ser-eor , -é ri , -i tus or -ertus

sum , dep . (mi ser ) , to p ity,feel

p ity for , commiserate.

m i s éré-s co ,-s cére, no perf., no

p . p .,inch . (mi s6reo to feel

p ity, have compassion jgr .

m i séret , m i sérére , mi seri tum ,

impers . (314. it distresses,stirs p ity ; m i séret m 6 , Ip ity.

M i th ri d fités , ~is , M ., Mithr ida

tes the Great, king of Pontus,who waged war with the R0

mans, and, being at last con

quered by Pompeius, stabbed

himself .

m 6 d o , adv . , only, merely ; at all ;

j ust nom ; m6do m6 d o ,

now now, at one momentat another ; n6n m6 do

s ed 6tiam , not only but

also ; m 6d o , with the subjunctive mood, if only, p rovided

that.

m 6 dus , M ., a measure or stand

a rd bounds, limits, end ; way,manner , method, mode ; ad m6dum , in m6dum , with the

gen . , after the manner of ; likem6d 6 fl iimini s , like a r iver ;hunc in m6dum, after this

31

fashion nfi ll6 m6d 6 , by no

means.m oenia, -ium , N . pl., defensivewalls, city walls ; fortifications .

m616 s ,—is , F ., a mass,mole ; dam ;

difliculty.

m6 les tus , -a, -um , adj ., troublesome

,irksome, annoying.

m6 lo ,-6re , -ui , -i tum , to gr ind.

m6neo ,-61'e, -ui , -i tum , to admon

ish, warn ; punish ; teach.

m6 n -s , montis , M ., a mountain .

mons tro ,-are ,

-atum (mon

s trum ) , to show, point out.

on-s trum ,-i , N . (m6neo )

divine omen ; a monster .

m6 ra, -ae, F . , a delay ; obstacle.

mo rbus , -i , M ., a sickness, disease ;afl iction .

mordeo , mordere , m 6mo rd i

(m6mord i ) , morsum , to bite ;hurt.

m6 rio r ,m6ri (m6riri ) ,mortuus

sum , dep . ( fut. part. , m6 ri tfirus ) , to die, decay.

m6 t o t , A ri , atus sum , dep . (m6t a) , to tarry, stay, loiter ; hinder .

m or-s,mortis , F . (m6rior ) , death.

m 6 e,m 6 ris

, M ., usage, custom; in

pl., customs, character : ex m6 re ,according to custom.

mo-tus,-fi s , M . (m6vcc ) , a mov

ing.

m6v eo,m6vera,mov i , matum ,

tomove, set inmotion ; take away,remove influence arma m6vere, to take arms b ellum

m6v ére, to undertake war .

mcx, adv.

,p resently, soon,directly;afterwards, then.

m lilier , -i6ris , F . , a woman,female.

mult-i tiid o , -d inis , F . (multus ) ,a great number, multitude a

crowd.

mult-6, adv. (multud) ,much,for ;

byfar, bymuch ; mu1t6 pos t orante

, long after or bcqfore.

multus , -a,-um, a j . (comp.


p lus ; superlative, plurimus ) ,much, many (149.

mundus ,-i , M .

, the universe ; the

world, the earth.

mfin-io ,-i re

,-iv i or -ii

,-i tum

(moenia) , tofortify, build .

mi ni -6 nis, F . a

fortification, rampart.mfi rus , -i , M .

, a wall.

mus , -1'

1ris , com. gen., a mouse.

mus ca,-ao , F ., afly.

mfi -to ,-are ,

-av i ,-atum

,intens.

(m6veo ) , to change ; exchange

nae-tus ,-a,

-um , part. (nanc iscor ) , having obta ined.

nam , conj .,for ( 205 .

nam-que , conj ., for, for indeed

for truly.

nanc-is co r, nan cis ci , nactus or

nan ctus sum,dep., to get, re

ceive find.

nan s,-an tis , part. of no .

narro ,-are ,

-av i ,-5 tum

, to tell,relate, narrate, recount.

nas cor , nas ci , natus sum, dep.

,

to be born ( 248 .

na-to ,-are

,-av i ,

-atum (no ) , toswim.

na-tura,-ae, F . ( h asoor ) , nature ;

disposition, character ; natfi ra,

naturally.

n auta ( nav i ta) , -ae , M ., a sailor,seaman .

nav -i oula , -s e , F ., dim. (navis ) ,

a small vessel boat, skip".

nav ig-ium , N . (nav igo )sailing ; vessel, ship , boat.

nav is ,-is

, F . (acc.,ui v em or

nav im ; abl., nav e or nav i ) , aship ; nav is longa , a ship ofwar .

né , adv. and con j ., l . adv., not, no ;n é qui d em , not even ( theword or phrase emphasized

always between the n é and

qui dem ) ; 2 . conj ., thatnot, lest;in final clauses, that not, lest ;with verbs of fearing, that or

lest (321. 2 8: 2 7 8 . 1-n e, interrog. and encliticparticle,whether ( in direct questions neis not to be translated, exce t

by laying emphasis upon e

word to which it is joined) .nec , see n6que .

neces sari-d , adv. (nécessar ius ) ,necessarily, unavoidably.

né-ces-se , neut. adj. ( found on lyin nom. and acc. Sing.) (116 ;06d o ) , unavoidable, necessary.

neces s -i tas ,-atis , F . (necess e) ,

necessity ; force.

necess -i tiido , -inis , F . (néces s e),closely bound ; intimacy ; close

relationship .

nec-no, conj ., or not.

neco , -5.re ,-5v i ( -ui ) ,é tum , tokill.

n é-dum , conj by nomeans , muchless not to say, much more .

né-fas , N . indecl . , that which isunlawful

nEg-ligo ,-lig6re , -lex i , -lectum

( nec ; to neglect, disre

gard .

nego ,-are,

-av i,-atum

, to sayno ; deny, refuse.

n 6g-6 tium 41, N . (nec ; dtium ) ,a business, occupation diyiculty matter ; nu116 n égdtid ,without trouble.

né-md ( in place of gen . n 6m inis,

n ii llius is used ; in place of ab].nomin e , nu116 , M .

, or 11171115F . ,

is used) , M . and F . (né ,

h6mo ) , no one, nobody ; nem6n6u, every body, all ; n 6n n 6

m6 , some.

nepo s , -6 tis , M . and F . , a grand

son, a grand-daughter, a neph

ne-que or nec , conj . , and not ;n6que (nec ) néque (nec ) ,neither nor .

34

N ovemb ri s , -e , adj of N ovember .

n 6v i , see n6 s co .

n6vus , -a, -um , adj new ; recent,

strange ; u6vae rés , revolution

the comparative of this adj . iswanting, superlative n6v is s i

mus , latest, last; n 6v is s imumagmen , the rear .

nox , noctis , F ., night ; darkness .

n iibé s,-is

, F ., a cloud.

ndh o ,nfibere , m

'

ipei'

,nfi p tum

(nub es ) , to veil one’

s self,marry (used only of a woman

marrying a man , and governs

the dative) , see matr imdn ium .

n1‘

111us , -a, -um , adj . (ne ; fi llus )not any, none, no .

num,interrog . particle (91. 1.

c) , whether ?n iiméro

,-are ,

-5v i,-atum (n ii

m6rus ) , to count, number ; es

teem.

nfimérus , M ., a number ; a

multitude.

N iim i d ia , -ae , F . , a country of

northern A frica ( now A lgeria) .N iim i to r

,-6 ris

,M .

, a km of

A lba, brother of Amulius and

grandfather of Romulus and

Remus .

numquam ( nunquam ) , adv. ( na ;umquam ) , at no time, never ;n6n nunquam , sometimes .

nunquam , see numquam .

nuntio ( nuncio ) , -are ,-5v i ,

atum (nun tius ) , to announce,

declare.

nun tius -c ius ) , -ii , M ., a messen

ger ; news, tidings .

nfi -per , adv . (n6vus ) , recently .

0 , interj . , oh1ob , prep . w ith acc . , on account of;for ; quam ob rem

,wherefore,

accordingly.

F I RST STEPS IN LA TIN .

6b -aer-atus , -a,-um

, adj . ( ob ;aes ) , involved in debt. A s noun ,

6b aeratus , -i , M . , a debtor .

6b -edio ,-i

'

re ,-iv i or -i tum

( ob ; audio ) (with to

give ear to ; obey.

6b -ao ,-'

i re ,-'

iv i or -ii ,-i tum , to

go towards, meet, die.

ob-i cio (pronounced oh -ji c io )-ji cére , -jeci , -jectum ( objacio ) , to cast in the way ; re

p roach.

obli -tus ,-a ,

-um, part . ( obliv i s

co r ) , having forgotten ; forgetul .

chiliv iscor

, ob liv is ci , ob li tus

sum , dep .,toforget.

oh -n6xius , -a ,-um

, adj . ( ob ;n6x a ) , frail ; liable ; obedient.

ob -ruo ,-ru6re, -rui , -tutun , to

overwhelm ; crush.

oh -gécro ,di re ,

-av i,-atum ( ob ;

Sacra) , to beseech, supp licate.

ob ses ,-id is , M . and F .

, a hostage.

oh -s igno ,-are ,

-atum, to

seal, seal up attest.

oh -s is to ,'

-s is tere , -eti ti , -s ti tum ,

to oppose, hinder , obstruct.

oh -s to ,-s tare ,

-eti ti, to stand

against, oppose, hinder .

ob -s tringo ,-s ting6re ,

-s trinx i ,-s trictum , to bind .

oh -t ineo ,-tinére ,

-tinui , -ten

tum ( ob ; tenec ) , to hold, possess, occupy ; last.

oh -trecto ,di re ,

A tum ( ob ;tracto ) , to disparage inj ure,thwart.

oh -v ius ,-a

,-um

, adj . ( ob ; v ia ) ,meeting, in the way, so as tomeet ;obv ium i re 6110111, to meet

one.

oh -vo lvo ,-v olv6re , -vo lv i , -v6

lutum,to wrap around , mufi e

up cover , disguise.

coca-sua,-us

,M . ( coci d o ) , a

fall, setting ; death, overthrow .

cc-cido ,-ci d 6re, -013um


pérégrino r , -5.tus sum ,dep.

,

to travel aboutor inforeign lands .

per-ea ,

-i'

re,-ii no p . p.

,irr .

( to go through) , to per ish, die .

per-fem ,

-ferre, 41111, -latum ,

irr ., to carry through, convey ;

accomp lish ; sufi'

er , endure.

per-fi cio ,

-fi cére, -feci , -fectum

(per ; to make ( com

pletely) ; finish ; ej’

ect.

per-fringo ,

-fringére,-frégi , -frac

tum (per ; frango ) , to break

through ; to shatter .

peri cul-Gsus , -a, -um , adj. ( perioiilum ) ,fullofperil dangerous .

peri-culum -clum ) , N . ( pé

rior , obsolete) , a tr ial ; r isk

danger .

péri-tus

,-a,

-um , adj . (peri or ,obsolete) , exp er ienced, skilful.

per-magnus , -a

,-um

, adj., verygreat, very large.

per-mitto ,

-mittere,-m i si , -mis

sum,to let through permit.

per-movao ,-m6v ére ,

-m6 v i ,-m6 tum , to move deep ly.

pernIc-ies ,

-éi ( also -ii ) , F . (pernéco ) , destruction , ruin , over

throw.

per-pauous ,

-a,-um , adj ., very

little, veryfew .

per-péfi or ,

-peti , -pes sus sum

,

dep . (p er ; patior ) , to endure.

perpétu-G, adv . (perpetuus ) ,

constantly, p erp etua lly .

perpétu-um

, adv. (pemetuus ) ,forever , p erp etually .

perpetuus , -a,-um , adj., continu

ing ; constant, lasting.

per-saepe , adv.

,very oflen .

per-aequo r , -sécfi tus

sum , dep . , to follow after , p ursue.

persevero ,-are ,

-av i , -atum

(persév érus ) , to p ersist, persevere ( in anything) .

per-s alvo ,-so lvére ,

-sol ,-sb

lutum , topay ( fully) , render .

per-s tringo ,-s trin gére , -s tr inx i ,

-strictum , to bindfi r mly,fas tenseiz e ; wound slightly ; censure.

per-anad eo ,

-suad ére ,-suas t

,

-sui sum , to convince,persuade.

per-terreo ,

-terrére ,-tat rut, -ter

rl tum, to frighten or terrify

thoroughly .

pertinfic-ia,

-ae , F . (pert lnax ) ,perseverance, obstinacy .

p ertlnac-i ter , adv . ( pertlnax ) ,firmly, stubborn ly .

per-tin eo ,

-tln ére ,-tinui , no p. p .

(per ; tén eo ) , to stretch, extend ;have reference to .

per-turb o

,«fire

,-&v I

, é tum , to

confuse utter ly ; to disturb.

per-véni o ,-vén ire ,

-v én i ,-ven

tum ( to come through to) , toarr ive at, reach.

pés , pédi s , M ., thefoot; ped lbus ,

on foot.p es s imus

,-a ,

-um, adj. ( superl.

of malus ) , worst.pestis ,

-is , F ., a p lague, p est.

peto , pétére , p6tiv I, peti tum , to

aim at, go to ; hence, to ask

(18 5 .

phalanx ,-angis , F ., a band of sol

diers, phalanx.

P harnacés ,-is ,M . kingofPontus,defeated by Caesar .

Pharsal-l cus ,-a ,

-um, adj .

(P harsalus ) , of P harsalus,P harsalian .

pi-étas ,

-atis, F .

, (p ins ) , p iety ;love, gratitude.

p lget , p lgére, plguit and p ig!

tum es t,impers. (314. it

vexes, annoys, troubles; p igotm6al i cfi jus rei , I dislike, a thing.

pnum ,-I, N .

,a j avelin ( a heavy

javelin of the Roman infantry,which they hurled at the enemyat the beginnin of an action,and then used t eir swords) .

p inguis , -e , adj ., fat, fertile ;stup id .

VOCA BI‘

JLARY'

.

pi rata,-as , M .

, a sea-robber ,pirate.

p laceo , é re,-ui ,

-i tum , top lease

p lacet , impers. (314. it

p leases .

p laga,-as

, F ., a blow, stroke .

p lan-l ti és , 461 -as ) , F . (p lanus ) ,

level ground, p lain .

p leb s , pléb is , F . (pleo ) , the com

mon peop le.

p lé-nus

,-a

,-um

, adj . (p lea , to

fi ll) , full,filled ; comp lete.

plfi-rlmus

,-a

,-um

,adj . ( superl .

of multus ) , verymuch ; most ;as adv.

, p lfi rlmum, mostly .

p lus , plfi ris , adj . ( comp . of mul

tus ) , more. A s noun in pl. ,

plfi res , d l1m , M ., several .

p lus , adv., more, too much .

po ena,-ae , F ., punishment, pen

alty ; poenas dare , to pay the

p enalty, be punished po s nas

sfimére, to inflictpunishment.poen

-Itat , see paen l tet .

poé ta,-as

, M ., a poet.

p o l-liceo r , -lIcérI,-ll cl tus sum

,

dep. (p6 t li ceo r ) , to aj'

er,

promise.

pompa, -as , F ., a procession

suite, retinue parade, pomp .

P ompei-finus , -a,

-um, adj .

(P ompéius ) , of P ompey, P ompeian .

P ompeius , -iI , M ., Gneius P om

peius Ill agnus a Roman gen

eral and rival of Caesar ; de

feated at Pharsalus,B .C . 48 .

p6mum , J , N . , fruit.p6ne , adv . and prep . with acc .

,

after , behind, back.

pbno , pénére , poeni , pbs i tum ,

to put, p lace, set, lay ; cas tra

pbnére , topitch camp .

pon s , pon tis , M ., a br idge.

p on tlfex ,-fi eis , M . (pans ; fa

cio ) , a high-p r iest, pontifi'

.

P on tus,J

, M .,the Black Sea

( P ontus Bux inus ) , also a

region about the Black Sea .

pas tes-quam , conj . , after that,

when

po s térior , -ius , adj . (comp . of

pos tern s ) , after , later ; inferior latter .

po s t-érus , -a , -um , adj . (po s t ) ,

coming after , following, next, ensuing, future. A s noun , po s

térI, -6 rum , M . pl . , descendants,

poster ity.

pos t-h i e

, adv., after this , here

after , henceforth.

pos t-quam , conj . , after that,after , as soon as, when

po s trém-G, adv . (pos trémus ) ,

at last, lastly,finally.

po s tr“

i'

d ié, adv. ( po s térus

d ies ) , on the day after , on the

next day .

po s tulo ,fi re

,-av i ,

-atum, to

ask, demand (18 5 .

pbtén s , -en tis , part . ( p os sum ) ,able, powerful, strong.

pbten t-Atus , -1'

i s,M . ( pbténs ) ,

rule, domin ion, command .

pbten t-ia , -ae , F . ( pbténs ) ,might, power .

pbt-ior , i ri ,-'

1'

tus sum,dep.

pbpulo r , a n,-atus sum

,dep .

( pbpiilus ) , to lay waste, p il

lage.

pbpfi lus , -i , M ., a peop le, nation .

porta, -s e , F . , a gate, door .

po rto ,-5.re ,

-av i,-atum

,to carry .

po s co , po s cére, p6po s ci , no

p. p . , to beg, demand (18 5 .

po s s es-s io, -6n is, F . ( po s s i

d eo ) , a possessing, possession ,

p roper ty .

pos—sum , po s se , p6 tui , irr .

( p6 titi ; sum ) , to have the

power , can , be able

p lfi rlmum pos se, to have very

great infl uence.

po s t , adv., and prep . with acc .,

behind, back, after , beneath.

po s t-ea, adv.

, afterwards, here

VOCA BULA RY. I .

p iin io ,-ire, and -iI,

-'

i tum'

(poena ) , to punish avenge .

p ii to ,-are ,

-av i ,-atum , to think,

consider , reckon, believe.

P i rénaeus ,-a

,-um , adj . , only

w ith mon tés , the Pyrenees

Mountains .

Q .

Q . or Ou ., an abbreviation for

Quintus .

quad ras-és lmt s , 41, «am, adj .

( quadrAgin tA) ,fortieth.

quad r-a-gin ta, num . adj . indecl .

( quatuor ) ,forty.

quadr-in-gen ti , -ae ,

-a , num .

adj . ( quatuor ; cen tum ) ,fourhundred .

quaero ( old form ques so ) , quaeré re, quaes iv i , quaes Itum , to

seek ; search strive for (18 5 .

quaerl tur , the question is .

quaes-tor ,

-6 ris , M . ( quaero ) , a

gua star ( treasurer or quarter

master ) .qu i lis , -e , interrog. and rel .

adj . l . interrog., of what sort ;2 . rel., of which sort ; such as ;talis qui lis , such as .

quam , interrog. and rel . adv . ,

how ( in comparisons) as, than ;(used to strengthen superla

tives ) quam maximus, asgreat

as possible.

quam-d in, as long as .

quam-ob-rem , interrog. and rel.

adv ., for which or what reason ,wherefore, why ?

quam-quam , conj ., though, al

though however, and yet

quam-v i s , adv . and conj (v i s fr .

vblo ) , however , however much,although (322 .

quan tus ,-a ,

-um , interrog. and

rel. adj. l . interrog., howgreat?

2 . rel., as great, as, such in abl.,

quantb (as by how much,

43

by as much as ; quan to magis ,how much more.

qua-p rop ter , adv . ,f or what, why,wherefore

qua-ré , interrog. and rel . adv .

(quae ; res ) , from what cause,wherefore, why?

quart-An a, F . ( quartus ) , the

quartan ague ( recurring every

fourth day) .

quas i , adv . ( quam , as ; s i, if ) ,as if , j ust as , as it were

quater , num . adv. ,four times .

quattuor , num . adj . indecl

four .

quattuor ( quatuo r ) , -décim ,

num. adj. ( quattuo r ; d écem ) ,fourteen .

-que, enclitic conj . , and, also.

queror , queri , ques tua sum ,

dep . , to complain of , lament.qui , quae , quod ,

interrog. , rel . ,and indef . pron . : 1. interrog.

,

which, what ; 2 . rel., who, which,what ( 240 8: 3. ( after stand né ) any ; Id em qui , the

same as.

quia, conj . , becausequi cumque, quae cumque ,quad -cumque , indef. relative

pron . ( 240. whoever , what

ever , whosoever , whatsoever .

quid , see quis .

qui-d am , quae-d am , quod

( subst. , quid d am , indef .

pron ., a certain one, somebody,something quidem h6

min és , some persons .

qui d em , adv . ,indeed, at least ;

n é qui d em , not even ( theword or phrase that n é

quid em modifies always comesbetween né and quid em ) .

qui-llbet

, quae-llbet , quod

( quid llbet , indef . pron . , any

you p lease, any one

quin , conj . ( qui ; né ) , whonot, that not, but that; from( after


verbs of hindering) ; qu'

in

ét iam,moreover , nay even .

Quinctius , M ., Quintius, a

Roman name .

quin-décim

, num . adj . indecl .( quin que ; d écem ) ,fifteen .

quin a s ,-a

, num . adj .

( quinque ; cen tum ) ,five hundred.

quin-gin t

‘

i, see quin

-gen ti ( cen

qui-n I

,-ae

,-a, num . distributive

adj . ( quinque) ,five each, byfive .

quin qu-A-gin td , num . adj . in

decl . ( quinque ) ,fifty.

quinque , num . adj . indecl .,five.

quinqu-ies , adv. ( quinque ) ,five

times.

quin-tus

,-a

,-um

, num . adj .

(quinque) , the fifth.

Qu in tus , -I , M . , see Catulus .

quippe, adv . and conj ., surely,

certainly, indeed for indeed.

quis , quae , quid ( quod ) , interrog. and indef . pron . 1. inter

rog., who, what, which qui d

(used adverbially) , how ? why ?wherefore ? ( 245 and 2 46 )2 . after s i and n é , indef . ,

s i

quis , if any one ; n é quis , lest

any one, that no one .

qui s-n am , quae

-nam , qui d-n am

( quo d interrog. pron .,who,

p ray ? which, p ray ? what,

pray ?

qui s-p iam , quae

-p iam , quod

piam , and ( subst .) quid-p iamor quip-p iam , indef . pron . ,

any one, any

quis -quam , quae-quam , quio

quam ( quid-quam ) , indef .

pron . , any, anything A s noun ,

any one

quis-que , quae-qua, quod

-que

( subst . , quio-que , quid-qua) ,

indef. pron ., each

quis-quis , quae-quae , quod

R

quo d or quio-quid or quid rad ix , 5 018 , F . , a root ; foot (of

quid , indef. pron whatever , a hill) .

whatsoever . A s noun , whoever ,whosoever ; every one, each one.

qui-v is

, quaevIs , qu o d v i s

( subst., quidv i s ) , indef. pron .

,

any one orwhatyouplease

qu6 , adv. and conj ., Interrog. and

rel. , whither , towhatp lace; con j . ,wherefore, why ; in order that

(321, Obs.

quo-ad , adv . , how long ; con j . ,

as long as, until.

quod , conj . , that because ;

quod s'

i'

, but if .

qu6-m inus , conj . ( qub , neut .

abl . of rel . pron ., qui ; m i nu s ,

less) , that thereby the less, that

not, f rom (w ith part .)qu6

-m6d 6 , adv . , in what manner .

quon , d am , adv . , former ly, oncesometimes, some day, ever .

qubn-iam, adv. ( quom quum

cum ; jam ) , seeing that, s ince

qu6que , conj . , also, too (placedafter the word it affects) .

quo rsum , adv . ( qu6 ; v ersus ) ,whither to whatpurp ose.

quot , indecl. in terrog. and rel.

adj . ; l . interrog., how many ;2 . rel., as many ; quot to t ,

as many so many .

quotann is ( quo t ; annus ) every

year .

quot'

i d-ianus,-a

,-um ( see 00t

tidi i n us, or 06 tid i i nus ) , every

day, daily.

quot-i-d ié ( see cott'

i'

d or 06

ted ad v. ( quot ; d iés ) , da ily,every day.

quotus , -a,-um ,

interrog. adj . ,one of how many, what in num

ber ; quota hora, what time ;what o

’

clock.

quum or quom , see oum .

50

s i—quis or s i—qui , si qua, s i quid

( subst.) or s iquo d , indef. pron .,

if any one if anythings is to

,s i s tére , s ti ti , s tatum ,

to

set, place, stand .

s i-v e ( seu ) , conj . , or if,whether , or .

sdb r ius,-a

,-um

, adj . , not drunk,sober sensible, moderate.

sboer , M . , afather-in-law.

s 6 l, s 61is , M .

,the sun .

sbleo ,sblére , sbli tus sum , semi

dep. to be wont.

s 61-i t1'

1d o ,-in is , F . ( s 6 lus ) , lone

liness, solitude a desert.

ablus ,-a

,-um

, adj . alone,only, single, lonely.

s o lv o , so lv ére , so lv i , sblutum ,

to loose, unbind cast of ( fromshore) ; pay, break up .

sbn-i tus , -tfi s , M . ( s 6n o ) , a noise,sound, din .

sbro r , -6 ris , F ., a sister .

s6 r6 r-ius,-a

,-um , adj . ( sbro r ) ,

of or belonging to a sister .

s ors , s o rtis , F ., a lot, luck,fate.

spét ium , N ., room, space ; in

terval, per iod .

spec i-és , F . (gen . and dat.

pl . not found) , ( spécio ) , a show,

app earance,form view .

sp eoto ,-are

,-av i

,-atum

,intens .

( spéc io , to see) , to look at, ob

serve .

spéculo r , -ari , -§tus sum ( spec io ) , dep .

, to spy out, watch, ex

p lore .

spero ,-§re,

-§v i ,-atum ( spés ) ,

to hope, expect, trust.

sp6s , epei , F . ( spéro ) , hope.

sp i r-i tus

,-fi s , M . ( spi ro ) , a

breath ; the breath of life, life ;pl ., sp ir it, airs .

sp lend-o r ,

-6 ris , M . ( sp len d eo ,

to shine) , br ightness, splendor ;honor , dignity .

spbl io ,-5 re ,

-atum ( spdlium ) , to str ip rob, plunder .

spblium,-ii

,N .

,booty, p rey, spoil.


spon-sus

,-i , M . ( spond eo ) , a

betrothed, bridegroom.

spon te , abl . ; gen .,spon tis , the

only cases found, ( spond eo ) ,of free will, of one

’

s own accord .

s td-tim , adv. ( s to ) ,forthwith, immediately, at once .

s tatuo , s tatuere , s tatui , s ta

tutum , to put, p lace ; station.

s td-tura,-ae , F . ( s to ) , a standing

up r ight ; height, size, statue .

s tel-la , -as , F . ( s terno ) , ( thestrewer of light) , a star .

s tercus ,-6 ris , N .

, dung ; fi lth.

s tipen di-arius ,-a

,-um

, adj . ( s tipen dium ) , tr ibutary, liable to

contr ibution.

s tipen dium ,-ii

, N . , a tax, contr i

bution ; pay ; military service.

s to,

s tare, s téti , s tatum , to

stand ; to cost (w ith abl. of

price,s trénu-é

, a v. ( s trénuus ) , br iskly, vigorously.

s trep-i tus , -fi s , M . ( s trépo , to

make a noise) , a noise.

s tr ingo , s tringére , s tr inx i,

s trictum, to bind tight ; grasp .

stud eo ,-ére ,

-ui,no p. p., to be

eager about ; study.

stud-ium , N . ( s tiid eo ) , z eal,devotion .

sudd eo , suad ére, suasi , sua

sum, to advise, exhort, ur e.

sub, prep. w ith acc. and abl.

( 200. under , beneath, dur ing ;sub mon te, at the foot of themountain.

sub -duco ,-d1

'

icére , -dux i , -d u0~

tum,to draw up ( especially on

shore) , withdraw.

sub-s o ,-i re, -i tum , irr .

, to go

under ; enter app roach susta in.

sub -igo ,-isere , -a0tum

( sub ; ago ) , to bring under ;subdue ; impel ; force.

s iib i t-6 , adv. ( s iib i tus ) , sud

denly.


sup-porto , A re, 4 vi , A tum

,

( s iib ; porto ) , tobringup, carryconvey .

supra, adv., and prep . w ith acc.,

l . adv., on the top , above ; ( oftime) , before,formerly , 2 . prep.

,

beyond, besides ; over , above.

sfiprémus,-a,

-um , adj . ( superlative of sfipérus ; the

highest, greatest, last.

sur-go ,surgére , surréxi , sur

rectum ( sub ; rego ) , to raise,

sus-c ip ic , p ipers , -06p i , c eptum ( sub ; capio ) , to take up ,

undertake in imioi tias i nsc i

pére, to incur enmities.suspi0

-16 , -6n is , F . ( suspi oo r ) ,mistrust, distrust, susp icion .

sus-tin s o ,-tin6re ,

-tinui , -ten

tum ( sub , téneo ) , to hold upunder , support, sustain.

sus tuh , pei f. ind. of tollo .

suus ,-a ,

-um , poss . pron . ( sui ) ,his , her , their, their own , own

(353

T ., an abbreviation for Titus .

tah eru-aoulum ,-i , N . ( tab erna )

a tent.

tabula.-ae, F ., a board, plank ,

list ( of proscribed persons) ; awill ; writing tablet.

taceo ,-6re ,

-ui , -i tum, tobe silent.

taed et, tas dere, taedui t , or tae

sum est, impers. (314. it

disgusts, of ends, wearies ( one) ;me, etc. I ( thou, he, etc.) amdisgusted.

talen tum,-i , N ., a talent ; aGreek

weight, equal to about one-half

a hundred weight , a sum of

money, c

anal to about $1080.

tali s,-e , a such, of that kind

( the relat1ve adj . correspond

ing to tans is qui lis ) .

tam , adv ., so, so very tam

quam , as as.

tarnen,conj ., nevertheless, yet, still.

tam-s tat, conj ( tamen : ets i ) ,although, though (332 , d) .

tam-quam ( tam) , adv. ( of com

parison) , as much as, so as, like

as, j ust as ; as if , j ust as though.

tan-d em , adv . ( tam-d em at

length, at last,finally ; in Inter

rogative clauses, p ray, p raynow, now, then .

tango ,tangere, tétigi , tectum ,

to touch, afiect.tan t6

, see tan tus .

tantbpére , see tantus .

tan t-um , adv. ( tan tus ) , so much,so greatly, to such a degree

only, alone, merely ; tan tumn6u , almost, all but tan tum

quod , only, j ust then , but j ust.-a,

-um , adj. ( tam ) . sogreat; tantbpérs ( tant6 bpsre) , as adv., somuch, so greatlytan t6 ( abl. of degree of differ

ence) , by so much, so much the.

taurus , -i , M . , a bull.

tee-tum ,-i , N . ( tégo ) , ( a thing

that covers) , a roof ; a house,dwelling.

té-cum , see tu.

tégo ,tégere, téxi , tectum , to

cover , conceal ; p rotect, guard .

tégi-mentum ,-i , N . ( t6go ) , cover

ing, helmet.télum ,

-i , N ., a dart, spear, j avelin

( offensive weapon ) .témer-Arius , -a,

-um , adj. ( t6~merb ) , rash, indiscreet.

témér-i tds , i tis , F . ( tbméro ) ,rashness, temerity.

temperent-ia, -ae. F . ( temp6rans ) , self-control, moderation,discreetness, temperance.

tempera , a re, -av i , 4 1mm, to con

trol, control one’

s set (w ithquin ) , manage ; restrain.

tempes-tl s , i tis , F . ( st. of tem

54

tran s -s o ,-ire,

-ii , -i tum , irreg., to

cross over ; cross .

tran s-ago , Jigére,-fix i , -f

'

1xum ,

to thrust or p ierce through ; to

transfix.

tri n s-grédio r , -gr§d i , -gres sus

sum , dep. ( tr i n s ; grad ior ) , tostep across .

tr i n-s i lio or tran s-ci lia ,-s i lire ,

-s i liv i , -s i lui , no p .p. ( tran s ;salio ) , to leap or j ump across ;

leap or sp ring over .

tr i ns-mi tto ,-m i tt§re,

-mi s i ,-mis sum , to send across, throw

across ; cross over .

tran s-no ( or tran o ) , -dre,-v ,

é tfim, to swim across or over .

tran s-porto ,-are ,

-av i , -atum , to

carry or convey across (w ithtwo transport.

tre-c en ti , -as ,-a, num . adj . ( trés ;

cen tum ) , three hundred.

tre—d écim , num . adj. indecl.

( trés ; decem ) , thirteen .

trés , tria , num . adj., threeTrév i ri , -6 rum, M . pl ., a people

of Gaul.

tr ib -duus , -I, M . ( trés , three tr i

bus , a tribe) , a tr ibune .

tri-d uum,-ui , N . ( tres ; dies ) ,

the space of three days, three

days .

tr i-gémin i‘

,-6 rum , M . pl. ( trés ;

géno gi gno ) , three born at a

birth, three brothers.

tri-gin ta, num . indecl. adj ., thirty.

tri-ui , -ae,-a, num. distributive

adj. ( trés ) , three each, three.

tri-p lex ,-p li cis , adj . ( tres ; p li

threefold ; 5016 8 , in threelines, or divisions .

tris tis . -e , adj ., sad, sor rouful,mournful.

tr iumpho , A re , A v i , -atum , ( triumphus ) , to tr iumph rej oiceat.

trii-oi d o ,-5re, -av i , { tum ( truz ,

savage ; caed o ) , to slaughter .

tu, pers. pron., thou ( 2 29.


tub a,-as , F .

, a trumpet.

tuli , see fero .

Tul ingi , -6 rum , M . a

German tribe in GaulTul lia, -as , F .

,Tullia , a Roman

name.

Tull ius , 41, M ., Tullius, a Roman

name .

Tul lus H os tfl ius , -i , M ., third

king of Rome, 672—640.

tum, adv.

, then, at that time ; cum

( quum) tum , both

and ; not only but also .

tfimultus , -ti1s , M . ( tiim eo ) , a

swelling ; up rising ; tumult, in

surrection.

tum-mus , -i'

, M . ( tumeo , swell) ,a mound, hillock, hill, tomb.

tuno, adv . , then, at that time ; im

mediately.

turba, -ae, F ., a crowd ; a dis

turbance.

turma,-ae, F . , a troop , s uadron

( of horse, consisting o thirtymen

turp is , -0, adj ., ugly ; foul,fi lthy.

turris , -is , F . , a tower ; castle.

tuus , -a, -um, pos. adj. pron ., your,

yours.

fib er ,-éris , N . , a teat, udder , breast.

fib er , -éris , adj ., rich,fruitful, fertile.

iih f, adv., where, when ; ubi p ri

mum , as soon as.

Ub ii , -6 rum , M . pl., the Ubu ( aGerman ople on the right

bank of t e Rhine) .ubi-que, adv ., wherever ; everywhere.

ulcis cor , ulcis ci , ultus sum,

dep ., to punish ( an injury or

the doer) , avenge ( an in jury ) .ultér—ior , -ius , adj . , gen . 6 ris

( comparative of ultra) (150.

farther, ulterior.

VOCA BULA RY. f.

ultimus , -a ,-um , adj . ( super l . of

ultra) , thefarthest,mostdistant ;last.

u1tra, adv . , and prep . with acc .,

beyond ; on the other side of ;ultrafi dem , beyond belief .

-u1tr6 , adv ., beyond besides, more

over ; voluntarily.

ul-tus , -a ,-um , part. (ulcisoo r ) ,

having avenged, punished.

umb ra, -ae , F ., a shade, shadow ;

on image.

iim érus (humerus ) , -I, M . , the

shoulder .

fin d, adv. (unus ) , together , at the

same time.

un d e , adv ., from which p lace,

whence.

un d -i -que , adv . indef .

que) ,from all sides .

fi n—i -versus , -a ,-um , adj . ( finus

v ersus ) , all together , all ( in a

mass) , universal.un-quam ( um-quam ) , adv., ever .

arm s ,-a ,

-um , num. adj. (gen .

sing.,un ius ; dat . ,

un i ) , one,

alone, sole, single

fi nus-quisque , unequaeque ,unumquod que, indef. adj .

pron ., each, every

u rb s , urb is , F ., a city, esp . Rome.

u squam , adv., anywhere.

u sque ,adv.

,all theway,oll thewhile,until ; usque ah , all the way

from ; usque ad , even to, up to.

usu-rpo ,-ar e , -av i , -atum ( iisus

rapio ) , to use, emp loy.

usus , 41s , M . ( iito r ) , use, advantage ; experience.

fi -s us , -a ,-um ,part. (uto r ) , having

used .

ut or uti , adv . and conj . ; interrog.

, how ; rel . , as, so, when ,since ; tha t, so that, in order that,that not (with words of fearing)(321ff.

u t-cumque -0unque) , adv ., in

what way soever , whenever .

(und e ;

55

uter , fi tris , M . a bag ; skin .

ti ter ,utra ,utrum , adj . pron . ( gen .

sing. u trina ; dat., in

terrog., which of the two ; r .,el

which

uter-que , iitraque , utrumque ,

adj . p1on each ( of two) , both ;ex utr i que parte , on either

side.

4uti

, see ut .

iit-i li s , -e, adj. ( ii to r ) , useful ;advantageous ; suitable.

uti l-i tds , -5 ti s , F . (fi tfl is ) , use,

utility.

ifti-nam , adv., oh that I wish

that, would that! ( 2 7 8utor , uti , ii sus sum , dep.

,to use

( 2 80)utrim-

que (utrinque ) , adv.

( ti ter ; que) , on both sides ,fromboth sides .

iitrum , adv., whether ; see ii ter .

ux or ,-6 ris , F .

, a wife ; d fi céreux6 rem , to marry.

V.

vaoo , a re,-av i , -5tum , to be

emp ty or vacant ; be free from ;( of lands) lie unoccup ied .

vad-um -i , N . ( vado , to g oo) ,shoal,ford ( that through whichone can go) .

vagio ,-ire, -iv i or -ii , no p.p .

,to

cry ; bray.

vagI-tus , -fi s , M . ( v i gio ) , a cry

ing ; braying.

v i go r ,-ari , -5tus sum , dep. (va

gus , to wander about) ( 2 79.

val eo ,-ére ,

-ui , no p .p .,to be

strong ,to be well, healthy ; to be

able ,valé ,farewell, adieu.

valerius , -i1, M ., Valer ius ( esp.

,

GaiusVal . P10c111uS) , a Roman

name.

v 516 -ti'

1d 6,

-in is , F .

health also ill-health.

vallum ,-i , N .

,rampart ( earthen

(val eo )


wall set w ith palisades) , wall,fortification .

v as to ,a re ,-atum ( v as tus ) ,

to lay waste, ravage.

v as tus , -a ,-um , adj ., waste ; huge,

vast.

vati cina-ti6 ,-6 n is , F . (vatici

nor ) , a foretelling, p rophecy,p rediction.

v e0ti ga1, -i l is , N ., a toll, tax ; pl.

revenues ( of state) .vég-étus , -a,

-um , adj . (végeo , to

arouse) , vigorous, active.

véhéméns , -en t is , adj., eager ,violent, vehement.

vehemen-ter , adv. ( v éhéméns ) ,eagerly ; forcibly, very, verymuch.

veho ,véh ére , v éx i , v ectum , to

bear , carry, convey ; in pass .,

v éhi , to be carried, go, r ide, sail.

vel , conj ., or ; vel v el , either

or ; even , indeed, surely ; the

very (w ith superlatives ) .val-6 x ,

-6 018 , adj . ( vblo , to fly) ,swift,fleet, rap id.

vél-ut ( v él-uti ) , adv., j ust as ;

j ust as if ; as if.v énat-i cus ,

-a ,-um

, adj . ( v énatus

, hunting) ,for hunting.

v en-d o ,-dére , -d i tum

( v énum , a sale ; d o ) , to sell

vénéra-ti6 , -6 n is , F . ( venero r , toreverence) , reverence, veneration.

vén ia, -ae, F .,favor ; forgiveness .

vénio , v énire , veni , v entum , to

come, app roach, draw near .

vénor , { tus sum , dep., to

hunt, chase, pursue.

ver , v éris , N ., sp ring.

verbum ,-I, N .

, a word ; verba

fa06re, to speak, discourse

v erb! causa, for example.

véreo r , -6ri ,-i tus sum

, dep., to

fear ; be afraid of v éri

tus , p.p., pres . in sense,fearing.

Vergilius , -ii , M ., P ublius Vergit

iusMaro, the celebrated Roman

poet ; Eng. Vergit (notVirgil ) .v ergo , v ergere , no perf., no p .p.

,

to bend, lie towards, be situated.

v ér-6 , adv. ( v érus ) , in truth, in

fact, ver ily ; truly, yes ; but.Verres , -is , M .

, Verres, a Roman

name .

v er-sus ,-fi s , M . (verto ) , a turn

ing ; verse ; line.

v erto , v er tére, v erti , v ersum , to

turn,change, revolve.

v érus , -a,-um , adj ., true, real,

actual. A s noun ,verum ,

-i , N .,

the truth, reality .

ves cor , ves ci , no perf., dep.,to

feed, eat ; live on ( 28 0Vésontid ,

-6nis , M . , eson tio,a city of Gallia, the chief

town of the Sequani (modern

Besancon) .vesper , é ris and M .

, the

evening.

Ves ta,-50, F ., daughter ofSaturn ,

goddess of flocks and herds, and

of the household in general.

ves-ter , -tra, -trum, possessive

pron . (v 6 s ) , your .

v es tig-ium.

-ii , N . ( v es tigo , to

track) , a footstep , track, trace,step .

v es tis ,-is , F .

, a garment, vestment;clothing.

veto , a re ,-ui , -i tum , toforbid.

vetus , é ris , adj ., old, veteran. A s

noun ,véterés , -um , M . pl., the

ancients ; ancestors .

v ia, -ae , F ., a way, road, street ;

j ourney.

via-to r , -6 ris , M . ( via , to go) , a

wayfarer , traveller .

Vic-to r , -6 r is , M . ( vin co ) , con

queror , victor .

v ictor-ia, -as , F . ( v ic tor ) , victory.

v icus , i , M a village.

v i d é-li cet , adv.,it is manifest, of

course, forsooth.

v id eo , v id ére, vid i , v isum, to

VOCABULA RY. I I .

anoth er , a'

lius, -a , -ud ; gen .-ius

( of two) , alter,-te

'

ra,-té

’

rum

one inter s‘

é.

an sw er , respondeo, fi re,-spondi ,

-sponsum ( withA n tiochus , A ntidchus, 45, M .

A n tonius , A nténius,-i, M

any ( in neg. and condit. sen

tenoes) , altus, -a , -um ( anybody youwish) , quivis , quilibet;( intern ) , numquis ; ( after s i

or né) , qui , quae ( qua) , quad ,

-thing, quicquam, or quid

quam.

ap iece, distributive numeral .appeal prava

'

co, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

appear , appareo, fi re,-ui, Mum.

apple, pémum, J , N

appo int, dico, dicé'

re, dm , dictum;appoint the time of the elec

tions, cfimitiis dies dico, dicére,d im, dictum.

app roach , apprd’

pinquo, fi re, fi vi ,

fi tum (Wl th dat. or ad with

aggré’

dior, -gre'

di , -gres

sus sum adeo, -’ire,

-ii, Jitum

( noun ) , adventus, 423, M.

A riovi stus , A riovistus, -’l , M.

aris e, codn'

or, fi rm,-ortus, dep.

army , exercitas , fi s , M . ; acies,-c"

i

F . ; agmen, dais , N .

around , circa (prep. with

arriv e , advé’

nio,-ve

’

nire,~véni ,

-ventum.

arrow , sdgitta,-ae, F .

art , ars, artis, F .

as , see 199 ; conj ., at; astam quam ; such

talis . qualis ; as

ashamed , b e , piidet, fi re,-uit, or

(314. 5 , Obs .

A sia, A sia, -ae, F .

as k , ré’

go, fi re, fi vi , fi tum (withtwo acc. , for,pé

’

to,pe’

te’

re,

p é’

ti’

vi , pe’

titum (18 5 . inter

rb’

go, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

as sault , oppugno, fi re, fi vi, fi tum.

59

assemb le, convé’

nio, -ve’

nire,4 76m,

-ventam.

as sis t, sublé’

vo, fi re, fi vi,fi tum ;

adjuva, fi re, y'

uvi , j atum.

at , ad (prep. with or loca

tive or (at thehouse of) , dpud (with

A th ens , A thenae, fi rum,F . (p

attack impetus, fi s, M . ;a'

db’

rior ,fi rm,-artus sum

attempt , tento, fi re, fi vi,fi tum;

cb‘

nor , fi ri , fi tus.

attentive, attentus,-a,

-um ( adj) .

A ugust (month of) , A ugustus ,-a ,

-um adj . mensis beingunderstoo

A ugus tus , A ugustus,-i, M .

auxi li aries , auxilia, fi rum, N .

(p1avenge , vindioo, fi re, fi v

’t, fi tum ;ulciscor, ulcisci , ultus sum.

aw ay from , a or abwith abl.

b ad ,ma'

lus, -a ,4am (adj

ty) , imprb’

bus, fi ,-um

b aggage, impe’

d‘

imenta , fi rum, N .

b ank ( of a river) , ripa, fi e, F .

b ark ( verb) , latro , ( at-are, fi vi

, fi tum , ( of a tree) ,cortex,

-icis ( outer) , M . ; ( inner) , liber, -bri, M

b attle , pugna,-d e, F . ; ( engage

ment) , p raelium,-i , N .

b e, sum, esse, fut.b eam , trabs, -is, F .

bear , f é’

ro,ferre, titli , la‘

tum for

w ard , inf é'

ro, inferre, w as,

b eautiful , pulcher, -chra;-chrum.

b ecause, quad, quia (conj .b ecome , (be made) , fio, fier i ,factus sum , (be becoming) ,decet, dece

'

re, dé’

cuit ; (be ap

pointed) , creor, fi ri, fi tus sum.

60

before (prep.

.w ith ante

anté’

quam, p r iusquam

(336begin, ineo, fi re, 47, -itum, inci

’

p io,wipere,

-cep i , wep tum b egin

ning of ( seeBelgian , Belga, fi e, M .

b eliev e , credo, fi é’

re, fi idi , fi ftum

w ith dat. of person ) .bel ng, p ertineo,

-tinére, fi nu’i,

no p.p.

betak e ( one’

s self) , 325 conf é’

ra,

conferre, contiii i , collatum.

b ey ond , trans (prep . w ith acc .

extraor ultra (prep.w ith

b ird , 6vis, -is, C .

b lack , niger ,-gra,

-grum

blame, culpo, fi re, fi vi, fi tum.

boat, linter, -tr is, M .

bo ld , audc'

ix fi cis

b ond , vinciilum,-

'

i, N .

b ook , liber, -bri , M .

b orn , b e, nc'

iscor , na'

sci , na‘

tus

sum ; gigno, gigue’

re, genui ,

bo th ( each of two ) , uterque, iitrd

que, utrumque both

and, et et ; ( num. adj ) ,ambo.

b oun d aries , finés, -ium, M .

b oy , puer , fi ri , M .

b rav e , fortis, -e ( adj ) .b rav ely , fortiterb ridge, pans,

-tis, M .

b righ t , cldrus,-a,

-um

b road , ldtus , -a, -um

b roth er , fré ter, -tris, M .

build , aedifl’

co, fi re, fi vi,fi tum.

build ing, aedijfl’

cium,-i,N .

burd en , anus, i ris, N .

burn , cré’

mo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

bus in es s , né’

gfitium,-

'

i , N .

but, sed, autem ( 205 . ( on ly) ,tantum, mo

’

do ( un less) , nisi

conj ) ; ( except) , p raeter

(prep. w ith

by ( a person after a passive

verb) , a or ab; by day, inter

F IBST STEPS IN LA TIN .

dis by night, m eta

adv . ) dative agent

means, abl.

per (prep . w ith

C e sar , Caesar, fi ris, M .

cal l, vdco, fi re, fi vi , fi tum out,evo

’

co, fi re, fi vi , fi tum to

gether, convé’

co, fi re, fi vi ,

fi tum ( name) , appello, fi re,

fi vi , fi tum.

camp , castra, fi rum, N .

can ,possum,posse,p6tui may) ,licet, impers . (314) w ith dat .

cand id ly , a'

perte

care , cum ,-ae, F .

careful ly , diligenter

carry ,porto,fi re, fi vi , fi tum; carryon , gé

’

ro, gé’

ré’

re, gessi , gestum ;on war against, bellum ia

ferro, ferre, intiili, illatum

( inldtum) .C arth age , Carthdgfi,

Jim'

s , F .

cas t aw ay , abicio, -icé'

re, j eci ,j ectum.

cavalry , e'

qui’

tes,-um,

M .

cav e, antrum,-i, N . specus , fi s , F .

central , mé’

dius, -a, -um central

place (with respect to both of

them) , Ideas mé’

dius .

century , centiiria, -ae, F .

certain one, a, quidam, quaedam,

quoddam; and subst. ( quiddam) ; (fixed) , certas, -a, -um.

chief, princeps, wip is, M . ; ( adjsummus, -a, -um.

child ren , pae’

r‘

i ( in relation to

parents ) , libe’

r’i, fi rum, M . ; ( of

age) , infans , fi ntis , 0.

ch o o se ( for a purpose) , del igo,fi gé

’

re, Jer i , -lectum,

°

( out of

a number) , éligo, 469i ,-lectum.

C icero , C icé'

rfi, fi nis .

citi z en , civis , -is, c .

62

d eep , altus, -a , -um

defend , defendo, -dére, fi i , -sum.

d eliberate , delibé’

ro, fi re, fi vi ,

fi tum.

deliberation , often perf . part.

neut. of cons iil o .

deligh t , ( lélecto, fi re, fi vi , fi tum

gaudeo,-é

‘

re, gdvisus

sum

d eliver , trado, fi é’

re, d idi , fi itum

(what is due) , reddo, -dé’

re,

fi idi , fi itum ( free) , libe’

ro,

fi re, fi vi , fi tum ; (of a speech) ,ka

’

beo, fi re, -ui, -itum.

demand , postu'

lo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum

(18 5 . fldgito, fi re, fi vi ,

fi tum; ( noun) ,postiddtum,-i , N .

dens e , densus, -a, -um

d epar t , decedo (discédo) , -cede’

re,

-cessi ,-ce

"

ssum ( set out) , pro“

ficiscor , -f { cisci , -fectus sum.

d es erv e , me’

rcar , fi r i , fi us sum ;dignus sum (324.

d eserving, dignus ,-a,

-um ( adjdesert, désé

’

ro, fi re, -ui ,-tum.

deserter , perj uga, fi e, M .

d es ire, cup io, fi re,-ivi ,

-itum.

d es irous , appéténs ,-ntis ; cup idus,

-a,-um ( adj ) .

d estroy ( ruin ) ,perdo, fi é’

re, fi idi ,fi itum ; ( annihilate) , de

'

leo,-l

‘

ére, dem,-létum.

detain , de‘

tineo, fi nere, fi nui , no

p .p. ; ré’

tineo, fi ne‘

re,-tinui ,

no p .p.

d etermine , cfinstituo,-ue

’

re,-ui ,

fi tum.

dev our , de‘

vo'

ro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

di ctator , dictator, fi ris, M .

die , m6rior , -mo’

r i ( or -iri ) , -mm

taus obeo, -ire, fi ,-itum.

differ , dif é’

m,difierre, no perf.

nor p .p. ; from each other ,inter se

‘

difié’

ro .

d ifferently , a’

li’

ter

d imcult , dif icilis, -e ( a j . )di ligenc e, diligentia,

-ae, F .

d iligently , diligenter


d is cip line, disciplina , fi e, F .

disord er , confusio, fi nis , F .

d isp leas e, disp liceo, p licére, 1911'

cui,-p licitum.

di spos ition , inge’

nium,-i, N .

di s sens ion , dis sentio, fi n is, F .

d is tan ce , spa'

tium,-i, N .

d i stant , longinquus,-a ,

-um ( adj . )am distant, disto, -stdre ( noperf., no

d is tinguish ed , clc’

irus,-a ,

-um

div ide, divido, -vidé'

re,

-vis‘

i ,-vi

sum.

D iv itiacus , D ivitiacus, -i , M .

d o ( auxiliary in questions or

commands , not translated ) ;fa

’

cio, fdcé’

re, feci, f actum.

d oes , see d o .

d og, ca’

nis, -is, M .

d oor , j a'

nua, fi e, F .

d oub t , diibito, fi re, fi v’l, fi tum

( noun ) , diibium,-i , N . ; there

is no n6n est dubium, w ith

quin and subj . (333.

d oub tful , dubius, -a , -um

d raw up , instruo, -strue’

re,-structum

d rive, pello, pellé’

re, pé’

pu'

li, p ul

sum ; back, re‘

icio, réicé’

re, ré

j e'

ci , réj ectum.

due, de‘

beo, -bére, -bui, fi itum ; par

tic ., debitus, -a ,

-um.

duty , (Wcium,J , N . ; or gen .

(130.

dw ell , kdbito, fi re, fi v‘

i, fi tum

inco’

lo, fi re, -ui, no p.p.

each (one) , quisque, quaeque,

quodque and quidque,or quioque unusquis

que ; ( of two) , iiterque, utra

que, utrumque.

each oth er ( i .e. one another) ,dlius d

'

lius, alter alter.

VOCA BULA RY. II .

eager , dvidus , -a ,-um

eagle , a'

quila, fi e, F .

earth , terra, fi e, F . ; (world) , or

bis terrdrum.

fi icile ( advé)easy , fi icilis, -e ( a

educate , educo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

eith er or, vel vel ; aut

aut.

elect , ft'

icio, fl icé'

re,fect, factum ;creo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

elephant , éle'

phantus ,-i, N .

eloquence , élé’

quentia,-ae, F .

emb roid er , 5012 (306 ) p ingo,

pingé'

re, p inxi , pictum.

en compas s , czngo, cmgé’

re, cinxi ,cinctum.

en courage , hortor , fi ri , fi tus sum.

en d , cfinfl cio,fl ce’

re,féci , fectum ;noun , inis, -is, M . ( or sometimes ln sing.

endure , perj é’

ro, ;ferre, um, la

tum ; tale'

ro, fi re, fi vi, atum ;

pdtior ,-i, passus.

en emy , hostis, -is, c . ; the enemy( collectively) , bostés, -ium

(personal) , inimicus, -i , M .

enjoy , fruor , f rui, f ructus (306 .

1en ro ll , cfinscribo, -be

'

re,-p si ,

-p tum.

en ter , intro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum ; s iib

eo,-ire,

-ii,Jtum.

en trus t , committo, -mitte’

re,4mm

,

-missum.

Eph esus , Ephesus , -i, F .

es cape , efi ugio, fuge’

re, fugi , no

p .p.

estab lish , cénfirmo, fi re, fi v'

i,

fi tum stdtuo, stdtué’

re, stdtui ,stdtutum.

ev en ing, vesper , fi ri , M .

ev ery ( one) , quisque, quaeque,

quodque quidque or quic

que omnis, -e

every tenth (man) , dé’

ci’

mus

uis ue.

excellen t , excellé’

ns,-tis .

ex ercis e, exerceo, fi re,-ui,

-itum.

63

exh ort , hortor ( or co'

hortor) , fi ri,

fi tus sum

expect , exspecto, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

experience , usus, fi s , M .

extreme , extr'

émus, fi ,-um

ey e , o’

cq s,-

'

i , M .

fai thful ,fideas , -e ( adjfai thfuln ess ,f ides, -ci , F .

fals e ,falsus , -a, -umfamily ,fdmtlia, -cc, F .

far , longé p ro’

cul

far and w id e , late

farmer , agrico’

la, -ae, M .

far th er ulte’

r ior ,-us ( adj .,

150. 7

fath er , pa'

ter,-tris, M .

fault , culpa,-ae, F .

fear , timeo, fi re,-ui ( no p .p . )

(321. mé’

tuo, mé’

tué’

re, m5tui , no .p. ; vé

’

reor , fi ri ,-itus

sum ( noun) , timer,-or is, M .

F ebruary (month of) , F coruar ius, -a, -um (mensis being nu

derstood) .

fellow -c iti z en , civis , -is, M .

few , pauci , fi e,-a , pl. a

words, pauca, fi rum, N .

fidelity ,f ides, -ei , F .

field , d'

ger , dgri , M .

fierce, atroz , atroeis

fiercely , acr iter

fifth , quintus, fi ,-um ( adj ) .

figh t , dimico, fi re, fi vi, fi tum

pugno,fi re,fi v‘

i ,fi tum; ( subst.)pugna, fi e, F .

fi l l , comp leo,-p ie

"

re,-p lévi,

-p lé

tum ; rep leo,-p lére,

-p lévi,

-p ic

7tum.

find (by search or inquiry) , re’

pe

rio, re’

pe’

rire, re’

pe’

ri , ré’

per tum ;invé

’

nio, -vé’

nire,-véni ,

-ventum.

fin ish, finio, -ire, -ivi , -itum ; con

fl cio, fi cere, fi at, ;fectum.

64

fire ,“

ignis,-is, M .

firs t ,p rimus , fi ,-um

primum and pr imfi.

fis h, p iscis,

-is , M .

flee, f iigio, f iigé’

re, fugi , f iigitum.

fl eet, classis, -is, F .

flight ,f izga, -ae, F .

fl ow ,fl uo, fi re, fi t, -a:um.

fly , vd’

lo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

foll ow in g ( day) , posté’

rus,-a,

-um

( adj ., 150.

fo lly , stult’ttia, fi e, F .

foot, pés, pe

’

dis , M .

foot-s o ld ier , pe'

des, fi is, M .

for

(see conj ., nam, e

’

nim

ollows the first word or

words) , eté’

nim ( 205 . 5 ) prep.,

de‘

or p raw ith abl . ; ( sign of

forage, pabiilor , fi ri, fi tus sum

forb id , ve'

to, fi re, mi , -itum.

force , cfigo, fi re, fi gi , fi ctum.

forces , cfip iae, fi rum, F .

fores igh t , prudentia ,-ae, F .

fores t , silva ,-ae, F .

forget , obliviscor , oblivisci , oblitus

sum, dep . (315 .

form a p lan , cfinst’

lium ineo, -ire,-ii , -i

’

tum.

fort ify , munio, fi re, fi vi , ~itum.

fortun ate , fortundtus , a -um

fortune, fortuna, fi e, F .

foun d , condo, fi é’

re, d idi , fi itum.

free , liber , fi ra, -e"

rum ( 8 6 .

be free from,11600, fi re, fi vi ,

fi tum set free, libé’

ro, fi re,

fi vi,fi tum ; of a slave, ma

'

nu

mitto, -mitte’

re,-misi , -missum.

fr ien d, a

’

micus, -i , M .

frien d sh ip , dmicitia, fi e, F .

frog, rana,-ae, F .

from ( away from ) , a, ab ( outof) , 6, ex ; ( denoting cause) ,ab] see 248 .

fruit ( of trees) , fructus , fi s, M . ;

( of fields) ,frug'

es,-um

, F .


fugi tiv e , j ugiéns , part. of f’

ugio.

full, pl

'

énus,-a ,

-um

furth er , adj., ulte'

rior , -us ( adj.,( furthermore) , autem,

conj . placed after one or more

words) .

fury ,fi ror , fi ris, M .

gain , lucrum,-‘

i , N .

games , ludi , fi rum, M .

garden , bartus,-t, M .

gate , j a'

nua,-cc, F . ; porta,

-ae, F .

Gaul ( the country) , Gallia, -cc, F .

Gaul ( an inhabitant) , Gallus, -i ,M .

general , dust, du'

cis, M . ; impé’

rdtor ,-t6ris, M .

German ,Germanus, -a , -um ( adjget , acqui re, fi re, -sivi ,

-s itum

assé’

quor ,-sé

'

qui ,-cutus sum

gift , dfinum,-i , N .

girl , puella,-ae, F .

giv e , do, ddre, de’

di , dc‘

itum ; give

up, trado,-dé

’

re, fi fth , fi itum

what is due, tribuo, -ué’

re,

-ui , fi tum.

glad , laetus , -a, -um ( adj ) .glo ry , glfi

’

ria ,-ae, F .

go , eo, ire, ii ( ivi ) , { tum

go on , pass. of gé’

ro , gé’

ré’

re ,

gessi , gestum ; forth, exeo ,

fi re,-ivi or -ii , fi um through

(permeate) , p ermeo, fi re, fi vi ,

fi tum.

god , deus, -i , M .

go in g to ( fut. act . part ) .

go ld , aurum,-

'

i, N .

good , b6nus , fi ,«um

goods , merx, mercis, F .

gov ern , ré’

go , ré’

gé’

re, réxi , rectum ;

guberno, fi re, fi vi , fi tum p rae

sum,-esse, fut

grain ,f rumentum,-i , N .

grandfath er , dvus , -i, M.


inhab itant , inedla , fi e,M . k ing, réx, rfigis, M .

in jure, n6ceo, fi re,-ui

,-itum ( with k ingd om ,

régnum,-i, N .

absam,-esse, ;fui know ( of things) , scio, scire,

in jury , injuria, -ae, F . scivi , scitum n6sco, n63cé’

re,

in quire, quaero, quaeré’

re, qua e n6vi , n6tum (become ac

sivi , quaesitum (18 5 . quainted w ith) , c6gn6sco, -gn6in s is t 011,flagito, fi re, fi vi

, fi tum. scé’

re,-gn6vi ,

-gnitum (not to

in s truct , Erudio,-i re,

-ivi or -ii, know ) , nescio, -scire,

-scivi or

-itum.-scii, -scitum ignor6 , fi re, fi vi,

interes ts , it , interest, -esse fi tum (understand) , intellégo,(315 . 3 Jé

’

gé’

re, 461i ,-lectum.

into , in (prep . with know ledge, scientia , -ae, F .

is lan d,insiZla, -ae, F .

it , see he .

I taly , I ta'

lia, fi e, F .

it is, est ( see 12 7 , sign of pas sive

voice) .

its ( referring to the subject) ,suus ,

-a ,-um ; omitted if im

plied from the context.

J.

January (month of, mensis beingunderstood ) ,Jdnudrius,-a ,

-um.

jav elin , té’

lum,-i , N .

jo in , j ungo, j unge’

re, j unxi , j unctum'

.

journey , iter, itiné’

ris, N .

joy , gaudium,-i, N .

joyful , laetus , -a, -umjudge , j udex, d iois, M .

jud gm ent, j udicium,

-i , N . to

pass upon , sentia,-ire, sensi ,

sensus (w ith (16 andJune (month of) Julius, -ii, M .

jus t, j ustus, -a , -um

jus tice , j ustitia, -ae, F .

k eep off, prb’

hibeo, fi re,-ui ,

-itum.

k il l , interf icio, f ice'

re, ;fe'

ci,

ec

tum ; (by cutting down ) , occido,

-cidé’

re,-oidi , -cisum.

k ind , bé’

nignus,-a,

-um

( noun ) , gé’

nus,fi ris, N .

L.

Lab ienus, La

'

bie'

nus,~i, M .

Laceda mom‘

an , La'

cé’

daemoi

n ius, fi ,-um

lak e , la'

cus , fi s, M . (174.

lame, claudus, -a,-um

land ( a country) , terra, -cc, F . ;

( native land) , pa'

tria, fi e, F . ;

(by and sea) , terrci e .

language, lingua,-ae, F .

large , magnus,-a,

-um

amp las,-a ,

-um

las t , ultimus, fi ,-um (150.

( nearest, as last n ight) , p ro’

xi

mus, fi ,-um (150. (most

remote) , extrémus, fi ,-um

(150. 2 ) ( at last) , dé’

mum

( adv.)Latin , La

'

tinus,-a ,

-um

law ( statute) , le'

z , lé’

gis, F .

law ful, j ustus, fi ,

-um ( itis licet (314. j fis ( in

lay b efore , p r6p6uo,-p6né

’

re,

-pa

’

sui ,-p6situm.

lay d ow n (place) , p6no, p6né’

re,

p6sui, po'

situm arms , ab

armis dis cEdo, fi re, -ce'

ssi ,-ces

sum laywastefvasto, fi re, fi vi,

dtum.

lead , duco, ducé'

re, duxi, ductum

( over) , transduco, fi ucé'

re,

fi uxi , fi uctum ( out or from) ,Educo, fi ucé

'

re,fi rm

,fi tictum,


merchant , merctitor , fi ris, M .

m es senger , nuntius,-i , M .

m idday , m6r idi6s, fi i , M .

m idnight , média nor .

mids t of, in , médius, -a , «um.

mi gh t , see may .

mi gr ate, migro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

mi le , millepassuum.

M iletus , M il6tus,-i , F

m ili tary affairs , res mi litaris .

m ind , dnimus, -i , M .

mi ne , meus, fi ,-um.

mis tak en , b e, erro, fi re, fi vi ,

fi i um fallor , falli , falsum

(pass. of fal lo ) .m on ey , pé

’

cunia, -ae, F .

mons ter , monstrum,-i, N .

mon th , mensis, -is, M .

moon , luna, fi e, F .

more (Sign of comp . degree) ,ma

’

gis ; ( of quantity) , plus

(Wi th expressions of number ) ,amp lius .

morrow ( on the) , poster6 die.

mos t ( sign of superl . degree) ,mdxime

“

.

mother , m6ter , m6 tris , Fmoun tain , m6ns, -tis , M .

mourn , lugeo, lugére, luxi , luctum.

mov e ,moveo,mové’

re,m6vi ,m6tum.

mus ic , musica, fi e, F .

must , 6por tet, or gerundive (2 8 6 )my , meus, -a , -um.

my s elf, ey6met ; ipse,-a ,

-um ; agreeing wit ego, ex

pressed or understood.

N .

name, n6men, -inis, Nnarrow , angustus,

-a,-um (ad j .

naturally , n6tur6 ( ablnature , n6tura, fi e, F .

near , pro’

p e, ad (prep . w ith

neares t, p roximus , fi ,-um ( adj.

need , 6pus (308 . Obs . egeo

( indigeo , fi re,-ui , no p .p.

(308 . O

n eith er ( of two) , neuter ,-tra

,

-trum ; neither nor, né’

que

né’

que ( 205 .

n ev er , nunquamnev ertheles s , nihil6minus ( adv.)

ta'

meanew ( opp . to antiquus) , adous,—a,

-um ; fresh ( opp . to vé’

tus) ,ré

’

cens,-entis news, nuntius,

fi ,-um; nuntiummittfi

'

re, to send

word ; or c‘iliquid n6vi .

next , p rb’

ximus , -a , -um

nigh t , nox, noctis, F . ; by night,noctu.

n o , adj., nullus, -a , -um ; no one,

n6m6 ,-inis ( for gen . nullius is

used) .

nob le , dé’

c6rus,-a,

-um n6bilis ,-e

n on e, mi llus , -a ,-um

n or , né'

que, nee, ( conj ) ; neither

nor , nee nee (né'

que)( 205 .

not , n6n baud , used w ith

adverbs and w ith scio n6nne,

interrog. particle ; that not

( in final, hortatory, imperative, and optative clauses) , né.

nothing, nihil, N .

nouri sh , niitrio, -iri, -ivi , fi tumfilo, fi re, -ui , dlitum and altum.

now , nunc

now here, nusquamnumb er , nu

'

mé’

rus,-i , M .

N umitor , Numitor , fi ris , M .

O .

oak -tree , quercus, fi s, F .

ob ey , p 6reo, fi re,-ui , no p .p. ;

6b6dio, -ire, -ivi or-ii , -itum.

ob ject, obsto, -st6re, -stiti, -st6tum.

ob tain , adip iscor ,-ip isci ,

-ep tus

sum ( possession) , p6tior , an ,

-itas sum, dep.

2

of, g

)en . or abl . case ; see 292 ;

£16 (prep . with

70

pleasure, v6lup t63, fi tis , F . ; with

pleasure, libenter

p lough , dro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum

( noun ) , 6r6trum,-i , N .

P o , Pa'

dus , -i , M .

poet , p66ta , fi e, M .

p o in t out ,monstro, fi re,fi vi , fi tum.

P ompey , P ompeius ,-i , M .

poor , paup6r , fi ris

pos s es s ion , ob tain , p 6tior ,-iri ,

-itas sum (306 .

pos tman , t6bell6rius, -i , M .

p ow er ( in of) , p6nes (prep.

with

p ow erful .p 6t6ns ,-ti3

Sa j )prai s e laus , ud is , F .

( act of praising) , lauda'

ti6,

fi nis , F . (verb) , laudo, fi re,

fi vi , fi tum.

prefer (w ish rather) , m6 lo, malle,m6 lui , no p.p. ant6p6no,-p6n6re,

-p6sui ,

-p 6situm ( with

acc. and dat. , epra 6ro,f erre,4m,

-16 tum2with at .

p repare , pdro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

p res en t , b e, adsum,-esse, fui ;

at or in , intersum,-esse,

preserv e, c6nservo,

fi tum.

pretend , simiilo, fi re, fi vi , fi tumdissimu

'

lo, fi re, fi vi, fi tum.

prev ent, p r6hibeo, fi re,-ui ,

-itum

(323.

p rice, pr6tium,-i , N . ; 304 .

p ris oner of w ar , cap tivas,-i, M .

p roduce, fruges, -um, F . (pl.)fructus, fi s, M .

profit , pr6sum, pr6desse, pr6fui

(with dat.

promis e ,pr6missum,-i N . (verb) ,

p r6mitto,w itt6re,-misi , -missum,

polliceor , Jicfiri ,-licitas sum.

property , b6na, fi rum ( N .

prosper , sficundo, fi re, no perf

no p.p.

protection , praesidium,-u, N .

provided , dum, dumm6do

fi re fi vi ,


p rov id ence, p r6videntia, fi e, F .

provin ce, pr6vincia,-ae, F .

prow es s , virtus, fi tis , F .

pub lic th ank sgiv ing,3upp licdti6,fi nis , F .

punish , panio, fi re,-ivi ,

-itum.

pun ishment (penalty ) , poena,fi e, F . ; supp licium,

-ii , N .

pup il , discip iilus,-i , M

put (place) , , p6n6re, p63ui,p6situm to flight) , in figam c6nicio,-ic6re,

-j 60i ,

-j ectum.

Q .

qua s to r , quaestor , fi ris, M.

queen, r6gina, fi e, F .

quiet , qui6tu3,-a

,-um ( adj.

rapacious , rdpa'

x, fi cis

rap id ly , c6l6riter

rather (had) , m6 lo, malle, md lui,no p.p. p 6tius

compar . (151, Obs . I ) .

reach ( come to ) , v6nio, v6nire,v6ni , ventum (w ith in andperv6nio,

-v6nire, -v6ni , -ventum.

read , i6go, i6g6re, l6gi , lectum.

receiv e, accip io,-cip6re,

-c6p i ,fi ep tum.

recogn iz e, 6gnosco,-n6306re,-a6vi,

-nitum ( or c6grecov er ( to 36 r6cipio,

-cip6re, -c6p i, -cep tum r6cipero

fi re, fi vi , fi tum

from disease, conva'

lésco,fi sc6re, Jui , no p.p.

refresh , r6ficio, -f icere,;fectum.

reign , r6gno, fi re, fi vi, fi tum in

the of, ab. abs.

rejo ice, gaudeo, gaud6re, g6 vi3ussum ( semi-dep.

,

relate, narro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

rely ing, fre‘

tas, fi ,-um ( 248 . 2 ,

Obs.

VOCABULA RY. I I .

remain (wait) , m6neo, m6n6re,mausi ,mansum; ( staybehind) ,r6m6neo, fi re,m ansi ,

-mansum.

remember ( call tomind) , r6miniscor ,

-isci , on perf. m6mi

ui ,-isse (w ithgen . or acc.

,

remind , adm6neo, fi re, -ui ,-itum

with acc. pers and gen . of

t ing, also d6 W1th

remov e, auf 6ro, ;ferre, abstu’

li ,ablatum; to a distance) ,r6m6veo, fi re, -vi , -tum ( or 6

render , reddo, fi re, -idi , -itum.

renew , r6dint6gro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

renow ned , cldrus, -a,-um

repent ,poenitet,poenitére,poenitu

it,no p.p. ( impers .)reply , responsum,

-i, N .

repo rt (noun ) , f6ma ,

( verb) , 6nuntio ( orfi vi , fi tum ; ( divulge) ;ferre, -tiili , la

'

tum ( report) .repub lic , rés, rei , publica ,

-d e, F .

repulse , r6pello r6pell6re, rfipu'

li ,r6pul3um.

res train , temp6ro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum;coerceo, fi re,

-ui,-itum.

retreat , 36 r6cip io,-cip6re, fi ep i ,

fi ep tum p 6dem, r6f6ro, f erre,-tiili , -latum.

return , r6vertor , -verti , -versus sum

dep. ( intr .) r6deo,-ire,

-ii,

-itum ( inst .) reddo ,-d6re,

d idi , fi itumrev olution , n6vae rés, F .

rew ard , praemium,-i, N .

R hin e, Rh6nus , -i , M .

rich , dives, divitis (149.

r is e , 6r ior , 6riri or 6ri , artus sum

surgo, surg6re, surr6xi ,surrfictum.

riv er ,fl ilvius, -i ,M . ;flamen , -ini3,N .

r iv er-bank , r ip a,-cc, F .

road ( traveled road) , via, -ae, F . ;

( journey) , iter , itin6ris, N .

rob , sp 6lio (or ex fi re, fi vi , fi tum

(with sea. and

rock , sacrum, vi, N .

71

ro l l , volvo; volv6re, volvi , v6lutum.

R oman , R6m6nus, -a , -um.

R ome , R6ma, -ae, F .

rugged , asper , fi ra, fi rum

rule , r6go, fi re, r6xi, rectum ( acc.)the republic) , g6ro, g6r6re,

gessi , gestum; imp6ro, fi re, fi vi ,

fi tum(w ith pr6sum,-esse,

;fui , no p.p.

run , curro, curr6re, cficurri , cur

sum (flee) , fvigio , f iigé’

re,

8 .

s ad , tristis, -e

safe , tutus,-a ,

-um salvus , -a,-um

safety , 3616s , fi tis , Fsai lo r , nauta, fi e, M .

sak e , for th e , causd or grdtia

( abl. followed by gen .

same, idem, eadem, idem.

s atis fy , sdtisfdcio, f dc6re, ;féci ,;factum ( with

say , dico, dic6re, dixi , dictum ,

report) ,j firo,ferre, tuli , l6 tumgsays he) , inquit (placed after

one or more words of a direct

quotation ) .s cho lar , discip iilus,

-i , M .

schoo l , ludus, -i , M .

Scip io , Scip i6, fi nis, M .

sea, mdre, -is, N .

s ea-s hore , 6ra m6ritima.

s eated , b e, c6nsido,-d6re, -s6di ,

-se3sum.

s ee , video, vid6re, vidi , visum.

s eek , p 6to, p6t6re, p6tivi p 6titum

quaero, quaer6re, quaesivi , quae

situm.

seem , videor , vid6r i , visus sum

(pass. of video) .

s ei z e ( take possession of) , occupo,fi re, fi vi, fi tum.

select ,d6ligo,fi re, d6l6gi, d6lectum.

s elf, ipse,-a,

-um; ( reflex . 36 or

pers . pron ) .


sell , vendo, -d6re,-didi, d itam; be

sold, v6neo, -ire, -ii—itum.

senate , s6n6tus, fi s , M .

s end , mitto, mitt6re, misi, missum ;forward) , p raemitto, fi re,

sens e, 36nsus , fi s, M .

Septemb er (month of) , Sep tember , -bris -bre ( adj .) (mensisbeing understood)

servant , servus ,-i , M . ; man ser

vant, fdmiilus , -i , M. ; maid

servant, ancilla, fi e, F

serviceab le, utilis , -e

s es terce, sestertius , -i , M . ; one

thousand sestertium,-i, N .

set out , prbf iciscor ,-fectus sum, dep.

sev ere , grc‘ivis , -e ( ads)sev erely , rc

‘

iviter ( a v.)shade, um a ,

-ae, F .

shal l , Sign of fut. tense or subj .sharp , 6cer ,

-cris , -cre

she, see h e.

sheep , 6vis , -is, F .

ship , n6vis, -is, F .

sh ore, 6ra , fi e, F . ; ( of the sea) ,litus, fi ris , N .

short br6vis, -e parvus ,-a ,

-um ; scan -a,-um.

should (1mply1ng duty) , 6portet,fi re, «uit otherwise

by subj . ( 2 7 8 ,sh ould er , iim6ru3, -i , M .

sh ow , monstro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum

ostendo, fi re, -tendi , -tentum ;3p60i6s , fi i , F .

shud d er , horreo, horr6re, no perf.,no p.p. ; at,perhorrésco, etc

S icily , Sicilia, fi e, F .

s ide, ldtus , fi ris , N . ; ( on thiscitr6 (prep. with on all

sides, undique ( adv.)s ignal , signum, 4 , N .

s ilent , be, tdceo, fi re, -ui , -itum.

s ilver , argentum,-i , N .

since, qu6niam, cum, conj.abl . abs.

s inging, cantus , fi s , M .

s is ter , s6ror , fi r is , F .

sit , 36deo, s6d6re, 36di , sessum.

s ix , sex ( six hundred ) , sescenti,-ae,

-a.

sixteen , 36d6cim.

skilled , p6r itus ,-a ,

-umsky , caelum,

-i, N .

s laugh ter , cl6d6s , -is, F .

s lave (male) , servus,-i, M . ; ( fe

male) , serva ,-cc, F .

s leep , dormia, -ire, -ivi or -n,-itum.

small , parvus ,-a ,

-umsnow , nix, nivis , F .

so , ita , sic ( sotantus,

-a ,-um ( so

tot, tam ; multi .soldier , miles, -itis, 0.

s ome one ,quidam, 6liquis some,

dliquantum ( 236 ) n6nnulli

somebody) , quispiam ; ( somet ing) , dliquid see 237 .

some other , dlius dlius .

s on ,f i lius , -i , M .

s oon , mox cit6

soul , dnimus , -i , M .

s overeign ty , r6gnum,-i , N .

Spain , Hi3p 6nia ,-ae , F .

sp are,parco, paro6re, p6perci no

p .p .

speak , l6quor , i6qui , l6cutus sum

( of an orator) , dico,dic6re, dixi , dictum.

spear , sdgitta,-ae, F .

speech , 6r6ti6 , -6nis , F .

spring, v6r , v6ris , N .

stab le, stdbilis , -e

s tand , sto, st6re, st6ti , st6tum.

s tand ard , signum,-i , N .

s tar , stella, fi e, F .

s tate, civitds, fi tis, F . ; r63publica,

gen . ; rei publicae, F .

stone, ldp is ,-idis, M . ; saxum,

-i, N .

s to rk , cie6nia, -ae, F .

s torm ( assault) , expugno, fi re,

fi vi , fi tum storm (noun) , tem

pestds , fi tis , F .

story ,fdbula , -cc, F.

74

th es e, see this ;haec

th ey , see he ; dat . pl. of the.

demon .

thi ck , densus , -a ,

ldtus , -a ,-um.

th ing, r63, rei , F . neut. sing. adj.

( 83.

th ink , p itta , fi re, fi vi , fi tum

( form an idea) , c6gito, fi re,

fi vi ,fi tum ( judge) ,j iidico,fi re,

fi vi , fi tum ( as a view, be sen

sible of) , sentio, fi re,-si ,

-sum ;

( estimate,or an official opinionas a senator ) , c6nseo, fi re, -ui ,-um ; ( an individual opinion ) ,6p inor , fi ri

,fi tus sum, dep.

thi rd ,.

tertius , fi ,-um ( ord. num .

( these things) ,

( wall) ,

thirs t ( noun ) , sitis, -is, F . ; (verb) ,sitio, fi re, -ivi or -ii , no p .p.

thi rteen , tr6d6cim.

this , hie , haec , hoe something to be mentioned, ille,illa , illud .

this s id e of, citr6 ( prep.with ace.)thorough ly , p rob6 ( adv.

th os e, illi , -ae, -a anteced .

of rel., pl. of is ; these

those , hi illi .

th ough , quamvis licet

(331) ; even— ( d efore331) .th ous and , mi lle ( 213.

th ree, tres , tr ia ( num . j .)through , per ( prep. with

( cause) , abl.throw , j dcio, j dcfire, j éci , j actum ;

to , adicio, fi re, 7'

6ci,-j ectum.

Tiber , Tib6ris , -is, M . ; ( acc.-im) .

time, tempus , fi ris , N . ; ( season) ,temp estds, fi tis, F . ; ( times) ,num . adv .

timid , timidus , -a ,-um ( adj .

Titus , T itus , -i , M .

to (of motion) , ad , or in , prep.

w ith ace . ( 200. ( of rela

tion) , dat . or by the infin .

before a ve1b ; denoting pur


uncertain , incertus , fi ,-um ( adj.

und er , sub (with verbs ofmotlon

with acc. ; (w ith verbs of rest)with abl., or see 259.

pose (321, and Obs . 2 andto-d ay , k6die

togeth er ( in companyw ith) , and

( adv. ) ( at once) , simulto-morrow , ords

top ( of ) , summus , -a , mmtow ard s , a d (prep. with

( of time) , sub (prep .with acc .,

or abl.) ( into or against) , in(with

tow er , turris , -is , F .

tow n , opp idum,-i, N .

train, exerceo, fi re, -ui , -itum.

tran sfer , tr6nsj 6ro, ;ferre, 461i ,-16 tum.

treach ery , p r6diti6 , fi nis , F .

treas on , pr6diti6 , fi nis , F .

treat , dgo , 6g6re, 6gi , actum.

tremble , contr6mi3co, -isc6re, Jmui .tribun e, tribunas , -i , M .

tribuneship , tribundtus , 423, M .

tribute, stipend ium,-ii , N .

tr iumph, tr iumpho , fi re, fi vi ,

fi tum ( noun ) , triumphus, -i , M .

tr00p s , e6p ice, fi rum, F .

troub lesome , m6lestus , -a ,-um

true, v6ru3,-a ,

-umtrus t , créde ,

-d6re , fi idi , fi itum

f ido, f id6re, f isus sum ( semidep.

,2 83

truth ( true t ings) , v6ra, N .

v6rit63, fi tis , F .

tumult , tiimultus , fi s , M .

turn ( verb) , verto,verté’

re,verti ,ver

sum ( adv.,by turn ) , invicem.

Tuscan s , Tusci , fi rum, M .

tw o , duo, fi e, -o ( num . adj . )(with nouns pl. in form, but

sing . in meaning) , bini , fi e,

-a ( 213.

VOCA BULA RY. I I . 75

und ers tanding, intellectus, fi s , M .

undertak e, suscip io,-cip6re,

-c6p i

fi eptum.

und ertak ing, incep tum,-i , N .

(work) , 6pus, fi ris, N .

unequal , impar , fi r is

unfriend ly , inimicus , -a ,-um

( adJun les s , nisz ( conj . ; w1th subj .

unlik e, dissimilis , -e ( adj ) .til up to ) , ad, prep. with

w e ; dum, d6nec, quoad, conj .(334) ( before) , ant6quam,

priusquam,

unw illing, b e , n6lo, nolle, n6lui

unw illing, invitus , -a , mm

unw orthy , indignus, fi ,-um (307

Obs .

upon , in , stiper ( 200 or see verb

or other word 0 a phrase, as

waitfor see w ai t.

us , objective of w e , see 2 29. 12 7 8 .

use ( verb) , utor , uti , usus sumdep .

(306 . ( noun ) , usus, fi s, M .

to force, vimfd cé’

re.

valor , virtus , fi tis , F .

v alue, aestimo , fi re, fi vi , fi tum

existimo, fi re, fi vi, fi tum

p rfitium,-i , N .

Verres , err63,-is , M.

v ery ( superlative degree) ; vald6m6gn6p 6re

easily ( after sdtis comm6d6 ( self) , see 238 , 239,Ex. 3.

v ess el , n6vis , -is , F . vds , v6sis , N .

v exed at , b e,p iget, p igére, p iguit

and p igitum est ( impers .,314)

v ictory , victor ia, fi e, F .

v illa, villa , fi e, F .

Vo ls inii , Volsinii , fi rum.

vulture, vultur , fi r is , M .

w age, g6ro, gerere, gessi , gestum ;

(upon or against) , inf 6ra, in

ferre, intiil i , illdtum (with dat.and

ait, for, exspecta, fi re, fi vi ,

fi tum ; ( remain ) , m6neo, mdn6re, mansi , mansum.

w alk , or take a walk, ambiilo,fi re, fi vi

,fi tum.

all ( general term) ,murus, -i , M . ;

( of a city) , moenia, ~ium, N

( of a house) , pdriés ,fi tis , M . ; ( rampart about a

camp) , v6 llum,-i, N .

w an der , erro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum

(about) , vdgor , fi ri , fi tus sum

w ant, ca'

reo, fi re, -ui ,-itum ; ( to

be wanting) , desam,-e33e, ;f ui .

ar , bellum,-i , N . ; (wage

against) , infe’

ro , inferre, intilli ,illa

‘

tum; ( in belli

w arn , m6neo, fi re, -ui ,-itum.

w as te , lay , vasto,fi re, fi vi , fi tum

p 6pu'

lor, fi ri , 6 tus sum, dep.

w atch , vigilia ,-ae, F . ;

—men ,

vigiliae, fi rum, M . ; (verb) ,vigilo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

w ater , dqua, fi e, F .

w av e ,fluctus , fi s , M .

w ay , via ,-ae, F .

w e, n6s, see I .w eak , grow , languésco,

-u6se6re,-ui (no

w eapon , telam,-i, N .

w earied , fessus , —a ,-um (be

weary, pained) , (verb) , taedet,taed6re, taeduzt or taesum est

impers.

w eeping,flens ,fl entis pres.part.)w ell , b6ne ( a j. , in goodhealth) , s6uus , -a , -um ( adj ) .

w ent, see go .

w hat , interrog., qui , quae, quad

( adj . ) and quid ( substa) ;

rel., id quad ; see 240an 245 .

76

hatever, quicumque, quaecum

que, quodcumque ( indef. rel .

pron .) any quivis, quaevis ,

quodvis and quidvis

( subst.) indef. pron .

w hat o ’c lock , qu6ta h6ra.

en , cum (338 and 6b’

i

) apost

herefo re , quam6brem, qu6re,unde.

w hether , num, n6 (91. 1, a, b, c) .w h ich ( of two) , titer see

h ile , dumw hi te , albus , -a, -um ( adj .)ho (which ) , relative, qui,

1quae,

quad (321, w ho (w at) ,1nterrog.

, quis ( qui ) , quae, quad( quid)ho ever , quicumque, ( adj.) quaecumque, quodcumque ( indef.rel. pron .) you please, qui

libet, quaelibet, quodlibet, and

que’

dlibet, indef. pron .

w h o s e, rel. , see w ho .

w hy , our quid (neut. ace.

used ( for what reas on ) ,qud dé causd .

w id e , latus , -tl , -um ( adj.)w il l , v6la

, or ( subj . or S1gn of

future tense) ; (noun ) , v6lunt63

, fi tis, F . ; testa'

mentum,-i , N .

w in d , ventus, -i , M .

w inter, hiems, -is, F . ; (winter

quarters) , biberna, fi rum,N

( pl. ) ( to winter or pass

lu'

6ma, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.

w is e , sdpifins,-ntis ( adj ) .

w ish , v6la, velle, v6lui ( no p.p.,

well to) , ciip ia, fi re,-ivi ,

-itum (withw ith , abl. case ( in com

pany cum (prep.,81. Obs.,

or each other, inter36 or 3636.

FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .

y ear , annus ,-i , M . ; (be in the

year, to be old) , annumdgo, 6g6re, 6gi , actum the

after, ann6 post (307 . Obs .

y ear ly , qu6tannis

y es , repeat the verb wit or without 6tiam, v6rum, etc .

y es terday , h6ri .

y et ( nevertheless) , ta’

men ( notyet) , n6ndum

y ou , Slng. , 16 ; pl . , v63; to ( i.e.

where you are) , ista, c .

y our , sing. ,tuas ,

-a ,-um (of

more than one) , vester ,-tra,

-trum.

y ours elf, tui , tibi , t6, pers . pron .

used ,reflex ( 230 and

y outh (young man ) , ddiiléscénS.~entis , c . ; j iiv6nis , -is , c . ;

(younger) , minor n6tu

( abst. adiiléscentia, fi e, F .

Z eno , Z 6n6 , -6nis , M .

ssawncx 4. SMITH, PRINTERS, sosron.

w ithin , intr6 (prep. w ith

sign of abl. of time

w ithout, sine (prep. w ith

or 2 61. N . 5 (w ith part1e.

noun after neg. expressions)quin (323.

w o lf, liipus ,-i, M .

w oman , mdlier , m6li6ri3, F .

w ood ( forest) , silva ,-cc, F . ;

( fuel lignum,-i,N . ; (build ing

woo m6 t6r ia ,-ae, F .

w orthy , dignus,-a ,

-um ( adj. ,307 . Obs. 4) w ith rel. clause

with subj . (324.

w ould ( subj . , would that, 2 7 8 ,u’

tinam.

ound , vulné’

ro , fi re, fi vi, fi tum,

‘

( noun ) , vulnus, fi ris , N .

w rite, scr ibo, scribfi'

re, scr ipsi ,scr ip tum.

points are illustrated by forty-five outs and diagram , tw elve

elab orate p lan s of the most important battles and s ieges , and a

double-page colored map of Gaul , revised according to the most

recent investigations,—features not in any other English edition.

TheVocabulary attempts to give, first, the etymological mean

ing of each word so far as is possible ; second, the general meanings

of the words, representing the conceptions as they appeared to the

Romans ; third , such renderings as may be necessary to present the

thought in a suitable English form. In the last case care is taken

to indicate by the use of phrases and by notes the difference between

the Roman and the English conceptions .

In giving the etymologies, the actual mode of formation in each

case, so far as it is known , is shown , and all the elements which

have entered into the formation are noted.

This edition follows , with slight change of orthography, the tex t

of Nipperdey, the more important various readings being given in

the notes. R eferen ces are given to the Grammars of A llen

Greenough , Gildersleeve, and Harkness .

Though the Ce sar was not placed in the hands of teachers for

examination until the middle of August, 1885, when in many cases

books had been selected and ordered , it was almost immediately

adopted by about 500 institutions . The indications are that the

fall of 1886 will find it in nearly or quite 1000 schools .

Letters received by the publishers specify among others these

PO I NTS OF EXCELLEN CE .

FIR ST. The judicious no tes ,—their full grammatical refer

ences, crisp idiomatic renderings , scholarly interpretations of dith

cult pas sages, clear treatment of indirect discourse, the helpful maps,

diagrams, and pictures ; in particular, the mili tary notes , throwinglight on the text, and giving life and reality to the narrative.

SBCOND . The v ocabulary ,—convenient, comprehensive, and

scholarly, combining the benefits of the full lexicon with the advan

tages of the special vocabulary.

TH IRD . The mechanical features of the volume, its clear type,

convenient size and shape, superior paper, and attractive binding.

FOURTH . In general , this ed ition supp lies all that a book

can supp ly , leaving the teacher time and s trength for his

p roper w ork of in s truction , the work that a book cannot do .

Leuctra, Plataea)

Imperium Romanum ( et Imp. Rom. Orient. et

Graecia ( et A thenae, Marathon , Thermopylae) .

Peloponnesus, A ttica, Boeotia, Phocis, rEtolia, et A carnania.

Gra cia a BellO Peloponnesiaco, usque ad Philippum 11. ( ct Mantinea

A sia Minor ( et Campus Trojae, Bosporos, Troas ; Ionia,Syria et Palestina ( et H ierosolyma,Armenia, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, A ssyria ( et Iter Xenophontis) .Regnum Alexandri Magni ( et Granicus, Issus, A rbela) .Persia et India ( et India Ptolentaei) .

n yptus, A rabia, et fEthiopia ( et E gyptus Inferior) .

Africa ( et Carthago, Alexandria, Numidia et A frica Propria) .Europe, showing the general direction of the Barbarian Inroads during

the Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire.

Index.

A llen’s Geography of the AncientWorld.

Used at Eton , Harrow , Rugby ,and other Prominent English Pre

paratory Schools and A cademies . A lso used and recommended by such

Colleges and Preparatory Schools as

Harvard , Trinity , Oonn . ,

Yale , Tr in ity , N .O . ,

Lafay ette , N . W . Univers ity ,

Rutg ers ,W es ley an ,

Obe r lin , Lak e F orest ,Marietta , W iscons in ,

W orcester Univ . , Be loit ,Oh io W es ley an ,

H iram , O l ivet ,Ph illip s Exeter A cad emy ,

W il liston Seminary ,

W . W . Goodw in , Pr of:of Greeb,Harvard Un iv . It is a most beautiful

and highly useful work,and I am glad

to see what used to be an expensive

luxury brought within the means of all

students Of the classics . (Dec. 2,

Elish a Jones , A sst.Pro/i of Latin ,

Univ. of M ich . From my curso ry ao

quaintance I have recommended it to

our teachers. The map of the Home

r icGeography is a feature not contained

in either of my other atlases, and will

aid Homeric students greatly.

Law rence , W is

Tracy P eek , Prof: of Latin ,Yale

Coll . I have heretofore known the

A tlas sufficientlywell to feel justified inrecommending it to inquiring students.

(May 9,

S R . W inans , Tutor in Greek,Pr inceton Coll. , N ”? It is superb :

noth ing to criticise,and everything to

commend . Every student of the clas

sics needs something of the sort and

this is by all odds the best of its kind

( Oct.4,

H illsdale ,

Dick in son ,

W es ley an , C onn . ,

Princeton ,

Bates ,Grinnell ,C o lby ,

Kentuck y Univ .,

Vand erb ilt .

Phill ip s A ndover A cademy ,

Boston Latin Sch ools , etc .

ALLEN 8: GREENOUGH :

ALLEN

BLACKBURN

C ROWELL .

Latin Grammar

Latin C ompos it ionC aesar ( four books , with vocabulary) .

Sallust ’e C atiline

C icero , 13orations (or 8 orations with vocabulary) .

Cicero de Senectute

Ovid (with vocabulary)Virg il (Bucolics and 6 Books of theE neid)Preparatory C ourse or Latin ProseLatin Pr imer

New Latin Meth od

Introduction to Latin C ompos itionLatin Read er

Latin Lexicon

Germania and A gr icola of TacitEssentials of Latin Grammar

Latin Exerc isesLatin Grammar and Exercises ( in one volume)Selections from th e Latin Poets

I . I 2

.60

50

-90

-9°.90

140

.90

-75L CD

-7o

.60

C ROWELL RICHARDSON : Brief History of Roman Lit . (BENDER ) 1.00

GREENOUGH . Virg il .

Bucolics and 6 Book s of E neid withBucolics and 6 Book s o fE neid withoutVocab.)Last 6 Book s 01E neid , and Georg ics (with notes )Bucolics E neid

, 81Georg ics ( complete,with notes ) 1.60Text of Virgil ( complete) .75Vocabulary to th e

pw h ole of Virgil .

GINN &HEATH : C lassical A tlas and Geog raph y ( cloth ) .

HALSEY Etymology of Latin and Greek .

C lass ical Wall Map s

h(‘three or more) , each 3.50

KEEP Essential U ses of th e code in Greek and Latin . 25KING Latin Pronunciation .2 5LEIGHTON Latin Lessons

MADVIG Latin Grammar (byThacher)PA RKHURST Latin Verb 35PA RKER 81PREBLE : Hand book ofLatinWriting 50

SHUMWAY . Latin Synonymes . .30STICKNEY . C icero de Nature Deorum’

I ETLOW Inductive Latin Lesson s .

TOMLINSON Manual for th e Study ofLatin Grainfnar .2 0

WH ITE

(J.W Schmid t ’s Rhythmic and Metric 2 .50

WH ITE J. T .) Junior Students’ Lat in-Eng lish Lexicon (mor.) 1.75

Eng lish -Latin Lexicon ( sheep) .50

Latin-Eng lish and Eng lish-LatinLexicon ( she 300WH ITON A uxilia Vergil iana ; or, First Steps

'

in Latc

in Pro .15Six Week s

’Preparation for Read ing C wear .35

Cop ies sent to Teachers for Examination, with a view to Introduction,

on receipt of I ntroduction P rice.

Send for description of our new Illustrated Caesar ( seven books)

G INN C OMP A NY, P ublish ers,

BOSTON , NEW YORK, AND CHICAGO.

First Steps in Latin - Forgotten Books

Documents

Transcript of First Steps in Latin - Forgotten Books